Journey
OWNER’S MANUAL
2017 Journey
Fourth Edition
Printed in U.S.A.
17JC49-126-AD
©2016 FCA US LLC. All Rights Reserved.
Dodge is a registered trademark of FCA US LLC.
2017
STICK WITH THE SPECIALISTS
®
VEHICLES SOLD IN CANADA
With respect to any Vehicles Sold in Canada, the name FCA
US LLC shall be deemed to be deleted and the name FCA
Canada Inc. used in substitution therefore.
DRIVING AND ALCOHOL
Drunken driving is one of the most frequent causes of
accidents.
Your driving ability can be seriously impaired with blood
alcohol levels far below the legal minimum. If you are
drinking, don’t drive. Ride with a designated non-
drinking driver, call a cab, a friend, or use public trans-
portation.
WARNING!
Driving after drinking can lead to an accident.
Your perceptions are less sharp, your reflexes are
slower, and your judgment is impaired when you
have been drinking. Never drink and then drive.
This manual illustrates and describes the operation of
features and equipment that are either standard or op-
tional on this vehicle. This manual may also include a
description of features and equipment that are no longer
available or were not ordered on this vehicle. Please
disregard any features and equipment described in this
manual that are not on this vehicle.
FCA US LLC reserves the right to make changes in design
and specifications, and/or make additions to or improve-
ments to its products without imposing any obligation
upon itself to install them on products previously manu-
factured.
Copyright © 2016 FCA US LLC
TABLE OF CONTENTS
SECTION PAGE
1
INTRODUCTION ...................................................................3
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ......................................7
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE ......................................87
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL ...........................................229
5
STARTINGANDOPERATING.........................................................331
6
WHATTODOINEMERGENCIES ......................................................415
7
MAINTAININGYOURVEHICLE.......................................................439
8
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES .........................................................491
9
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE .................................................497
10
INDEX..........................................................................503
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
INTRODUCTION
Congratulations on selecting your new FCA US LLC ve-
hicle. Be assured that it represents precision workmanship,
distinctive styling, and high quality.
This Owner’s Manual has been prepared with the assis-
tance of service and engineering specialists to acquaint you
with the operation and maintenance of your vehicle. It is
supplemented by Warranty Information, and various
customer-oriented documents. Please take the time to read
these publications carefully. Following the instructions and
recommendations in this manual will help assure safe and
enjoyable operation of your vehicle.
NOTE: After reviewing the owner information, it should
be stored in the vehicle for convenient referencing, and
remain with the vehicle when sold.
When it comes to service, remember that your authorized
dealer knows your vehicle best, has factory-trained techni-
cians and genuine MOPAR® parts, and cares about your
satisfaction.
HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL
Consult the Table of Contents to determine which section
contains the information you desire.
Since the specification of your vehicle depends on the items
of equipment ordered, certain descriptions and illustra-
tions may differ from your vehicle’s equipment.
The detailed index at the back of this Owner’s Manual
contains a complete listing of all subjects.
Consult the following table for a description of the symbols
that may be used on your vehicle or throughout this
Owner’s Manual:
4 INTRODUCTION
WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS
This Owner’s Manual contains WARNINGS against oper-
ating procedures that could result in a collision, bodily
injury and/or death. It also contains CAUTIONS against
procedures that could result in damage to your vehicle. If
you do not read this entire Owner’s Manual, you may miss
important information. Observe all Warnings and Cau-
tions.
1
INTRODUCTION 5
VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER
The Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) is on the left front
corner of the instrument panel and is visible from outside
of the vehicle through the windshield. This number also
appears stamped on the right front door sill under the sill
moulding and printed on the Automobile Information
Disclosure Label affixed to a window on your vehicle, the
vehicle registration and title.
The VIN is also stamped on either right or left hand side of
the engine block.
NOTE: It is illegal to remove or alter the VIN.
VEHICLE MODIFICATIONS/ALTERATIONS
WARNING!
Any modifications or alterations to this vehicle could
seriously affect its roadworthiness and safety and may
lead to a collision resulting in serious injury or death.
VIN Location
Stamped VIN Location
6 INTRODUCTION
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
CONTENTS
䡵 A WORD ABOUT YOUR KEYS ...............9
▫ Keyless Push Button Ignition ................9
▫ KeyFob...............................9
▫ Ignition Or Accessory On Message ...........10
▫ General Information .....................11
䡵 SENTRY KEY ...........................11
▫ Replacement Key Fobs ...................12
▫ Customer Key Fob Programming ............13
▫ General Information .....................13
䡵 VEHICLE SECURITY ALARM — IF EQUIPPED . . .13
▫ Rearming Of The System ..................13
▫ To Arm The System ......................14
▫ To Disarm The System ....................14
▫ Security System Manual Override ............15
䡵 ILLUMINATED ENTRY ....................15
䡵 REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY — PASSIVE ENTRY . .16
▫ To Unlock The Doors And Liftgate ...........16
▫ To Lock The Doors And Liftgate .............17
▫ Using The Panic Alarm ...................17
▫ Programming Additional Key Fobs ...........17
▫ Key Fob Battery Replacement ..............18
▫ General Information .....................19
䡵 REMOTE STARTING SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED . . .19
▫ How To Use Remote Start..................20
▫ Remote Start Abort Message ...............20
▫ To Enter Remote Start Mode ................21
▫ To Exit Remote Start Mode Without Driving The
Vehicle ...............................21
2
▫ To Exit Remote Start Mode And Drive The
Vehicle ...............................21
▫ Remote Start Comfort Systems — If Equipped . . .21
▫ General Information .....................22
䡵 DOOR LOCKS ..........................22
▫ Manual Door Locks ......................22
▫ Power Door Locks ......................23
▫ Child-Protection Door Lock System — Rear
Doors ...............................24
䡵 KEYLESS ENTER-N-GO — PASSIVE ENTRY
(IF EQUIPPED) ..........................27
▫ General Information .....................30
䡵 WINDOWS .............................30
▫ Power Windows ........................30
▫ Wind Buffeting .........................33
䡵 LIFTGATE .............................33
䡵 OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS ...........34
▫ Occupant Restraint Systems Features .........34
▫ Important Safety Precautions ...............34
▫ Seat Belt Systems .......................35
▫ Supplemental Restraint Systems (SRS) .........48
▫ Child Restraints ........................60
▫ Transporting Pets .......................82
䡵 ENGINE BREAK-IN RECOMMENDATIONS .....82
䡵 SAFETY TIPS ...........................83
▫ Transporting Passengers ...................83
▫ Exhaust Gas ...........................83
▫ Safety Checks You Should Make Inside The
Vehicle ...............................84
▫ Periodic Safety Checks You Should Make
Outside The Vehicle .....................86
8 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
A WORD ABOUT YOUR KEYS
Your vehicle uses a keyless ignition system. This system
includes a key fob and a Keyless Push Button Ignition.
Keyless Push Button Ignition
This feature allows the driver to operate the ignition with
the push of a button as long as the key fob is in the
passenger compartment.
The Keyless Push Button Ignition has four operating
positions, three of which are labeled and will illuminate
when in position. The three positions are OFF, ACC, and
ON/RUN. The fourth position is START. During start,
ON/RUN will illuminate.
NOTE: In case the ignition does not change with the push
of a button, the key fob may have a low or dead battery. In
this situation, a back up method can be used to operate the
ignition switch. Put the nose side (side opposite of the
emergency key) of the key fob against the engine START/
STOP button and push to operate the ignition.
Key Fob
The Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) key fob and an emer-
gency key, which stores in the rear of the key fob.
The emergency key allows for entry into the vehicle should
the battery in the vehicle or the key fob go dead. The
Keyless Push Button Ignition
1—OFF
2 — ACC (Accessory)
3 — ON/RUN
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 9
emergency key is also for locking the glove compartment.
You can keep the emergency key with you when valet
parking.
To remove the emergency key, slide the mechanical latch
on the back of the key fob sideways with your thumb and
then pull the key out with your other hand.
NOTE: You can insert the double-sided emergency key
into the lock cylinders with either side up.
Ignition Or Accessory On Message
Opening the driver’s door when the ignition is in ACC or
ON (engine not running), a chime will sound to remind
you to cycle the ignition to OFF. In addition to the chime,
the ignition or accessory on message will display in the
cluster.
NOTE: With the Uconnect system, the power window
switches, radio, power sunroof (if equipped), and power
outlets will remain active for up to 10 minutes after the
ignition is cycled to the OFF position. Opening either front
door will cancel this feature. The time for this feature is
programmable. Refer to “Uconnect Settings” in “Under-
standing Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
WARNING!
• Before exiting a vehicle, always shift the automatic
transmission into PARK and apply the parking
brake. Always make sure the keyless ignition node is
in the “OFF” mode, remove the key fob from the
vehicle and lock the vehicle.
• Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle.
(Continued)
Emergency Key Removal
10 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING! (Continued)
• Allowing children to be in a vehicle unattended is
dangerous for a number of reasons. A child or others
could be seriously or fatally injured. Children
should be warned not to touch the parking brake,
brake pedal or the gear selector.
• Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle, or in
a location accessible to children, and do not leave the
ignition of a vehicle equipped with Keyless Enter-
N-Go in the ACC or ON/RUN mode. A child could
operate power windows, other controls, or move the
vehicle.
• Do not leave children or animals inside parked
vehicles in hot weather. Interior heat build-up may
cause serious injury or death.
CAUTION!
An unlocked vehicle is an invitation. Always remove
the key fobs from vehicle, place the ignition in the OFF
position and lock all doors when leaving the vehicle
unattended.
General Information
The following regulatory statement applies to all Radio
Frequency (RF) devices equipped in this vehicle:
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules and
with Industry Canada license-exempt RSS standard(s).
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful interference, and
2. This device must accept any interference received, in-
cluding interference that may cause undesired opera-
tion.
NOTE: Changes or modifications not expressly approved
by the party responsible for compliance could void the
user’s authority to operate the equipment.
SENTRY KEY
The Sentry Key Immobilizer system prevents unauthorized
vehicle operation by disabling the engine. The system does
not need to be armed or activated. Operation is automatic,
regardless of whether the vehicle is locked or unlocked.
The system uses a factory-mated key fob, a Keyless Push
Button Ignition and a RF receiver to prevent unauthorized
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 11
vehicle operation. Therefore, only key fobs that are pro-
grammed to the vehicle can be used to start and operate the
vehicle. The system will not allow the engine to crank with
an invalid key fob.
After placing the ignition to the ON/RUN position, the
vehicle security light will turn on for three seconds for a
bulb check. If the light remains on after the bulb check, it
indicates that there is a problem with the system. In
addition, if the light begins to flash after the bulb check, it
indicates that someone tried to use an invalid key fob to
start the engine. Either of these conditions will result in the
engine being shut off after two seconds.
If the vehicle security light turns on during normal vehicle
operation (vehicle running for longer than 10 seconds), it
indicates that there is a fault in the system. Should this
occur, have the vehicle serviced as soon as possible by an
authorized dealer.
CAUTION!
• Do not make modifications or alterations to the
immobilizer system. Modifications or alterations to
the immobilizer system may result in a loss of
security protection.
(Continued)
CAUTION! (Continued)
• The Sentry Key Immobilizer System is not compat-
ible with some aftermarket remote starting systems.
Use of these systems may result in vehicle starting
problems and loss of security protection.
All of the key fobs provided with your new vehicle have
been programmed to the vehicle electronics.
Replacement Key Fobs
NOTE: Only key fobs that are programmed to the vehicle
electronics can be used to start and operate the vehicle.
Once a key fob is programmed to a vehicle, it cannot be
programmed to any other vehicle.
CAUTION!
• Always remove the key fobs from the vehicle and
lock all doors when leaving the vehicle unattended.
• For vehicles equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go —
Ignition, always remember to place the ignition in
the OFF position.
12 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: Duplication of key fobs may be performed at an
authorized dealer. This procedure consists of programming
a blank key fob to the vehicle electronics. A blank key fob
is one that has never been programmed.
When having the Sentry Key Immobilizer System serviced,
bring all vehicle keys with you to an authorized dealer.
Customer Key Fob Programming
Programming key fobs may be performed at an authorized
dealer.
General Information
The following regulatory statement applies to all radio
frequency (RF) devices equipped in this vehicle:
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules and
with Industry Canada license-exempt RSS standard(s).
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful interference, and
2. This device must accept any interference received, in-
cluding interference that may cause undesired opera-
tion.
NOTE: Changes or modifications not expressly approved
by the party responsible for compliance could void the
user’s authority to operate the equipment.
VEHICLE SECURITY ALARM — IF EQUIPPED
The vehicle security alarm monitors the vehicle doors and
liftgate for unauthorized entry and the Keyless Enter-N-Go
Start/Stop button for unauthorized operation. While the
vehicle security alarm is armed, interior switches for door
locks are disabled. If something triggers the alarm, the
vehicle security alarm will provide the following audible
and visible signals: the horn will pulse, the headlights will
turn on, the park lamps and/or turn signals will flash, and
the vehicle security light in the instrument cluster will
flash.
Rearming Of The System
If something triggers the alarm, and no action is taken to
disarm it, the vehicle security alarm will turn the horn off
after 3 minutes, turn all of the visual signals off after 15
additional minutes, and then the vehicle security alarm
will rearm itself.
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 13
To Arm The System
Follow these steps to arm the vehicle security alarm:
1. Make sure the vehicle ignition system is OFF (refer to
⬙Starting Procedures⬙ in ⬙Starting And Operating⬙ for
further information).
2. Perform one of the following methods to lock the
vehicle:
• Push lock on the interior power door lock switch with
the driver and/or passenger door open.
• Push the lock button on the exterior Passive Entry
Door Handle with a valid key fob available in the same
exterior zone (refer to ⬙Keyless Enter-N-Go — Passive
Entry⬙ in ⬙Things To Know Before Starting Your Ve-
hicle⬙ for further information).
• Push the lock button on the key fob.
3. If any doors are open, close them.
To Disarm The System
The vehicle security alarm can be disarmed using any of
the following methods:
• Push the unlock button on the key fob.
• Grasp the Passive Entry Unlock Door Handle with a
valid key fob within 5 ft (1.5 m) of the passive entry door
handle (if equipped, refer to ⬙Keyless Enter-N-Go —
Passive Entry⬙ in ⬙Things To Know Before Starting Your
Vehicle⬙ for further information).
• Cycle the vehicle ignition system out of the OFF posi-
tion.
• For vehicles equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go —
Passive Entry, push the Keyless Enter-N-Go — Ignition
Start/Stop button (requires at least one valid key fob in
the vehicle).
• For vehicles not equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go,
insert a valid key into the ignition switch and turn the
key to the ON position.
14 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE:
• The driver’s door key cylinder and the liftgate button on
the key fob cannot arm or disarm the vehicle security
alarm.
• When the vehicle security alarm is armed, the interior
power door lock switches will not unlock the doors.
The vehicle security alarm is designed to protect your vehicle;
however, you can create conditions where the system will give
you a false alarm. If one of the previously described arming
sequences has occurred, the vehicle security alarm will arm
regardless of whether you are in the vehicle or not. If you
remain in the vehicle and open a door, the alarm will sound.
If this occurs, disarm the vehicle security alarm.
If the vehicle security alarm is armed and the battery
becomes disconnected, the vehicle security alarm will
remain armed when the battery is reconnected; the exterior
lights will flash, the horn will sound. If this occurs, disarm
the vehicle security alarm.
Tamper Alert
If something has triggered the vehicle security alarm in
your absence, the horn will sound three times and the
exterior lights will blink three times when you disarm the
vehicle security alarm. Check the vehicle for tampering.
Security System Manual Override
The vehicle security alarm will not arm if you lock the
doors using the manual door lock plunger.
ILLUMINATED ENTRY
The courtesy lights will turn on when you use the key fob
to unlock the doors or open any door or liftgate.
This feature also turns on the approach lighting in the
outside mirrors (if equipped). Refer to “Mirrors” in “Un-
derstanding The Features Of Your Vehicle” for further
information.
The interior lights will fade to off after approximately 30
seconds or they will immediately fade to off once the
ignition is cycled to the ON/RUN position from the OFF
position.
NOTE:
• The front courtesy overhead console and door courtesy
lights will turn on if the dimmer control is in the ⬙Dome
ON⬙ position (extreme top position).
• The Illuminated Entry system will not operate if the
dimmer control is in the “Dome defeat” position (ex-
treme bottom position).
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 15
REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY — PASSIVE ENTRY
The Remote Keyless Entry system allows you to lock or
unlock the doors, open the liftgate, or activate the Panic
Alarm from distances up to approximately 66 ft (20 m)
using a hand-held key fob with key fob. The key fob does
not need to be pointed at the vehicle to activate the system.
NOTE: Driving at speeds 5 MPH (8 km/h) and above
disables the system from responding to all key fob buttons
for all key fobs.
To Unlock The Doors And Liftgate
Push and release the unlock button on the key fob once to
unlock the driver’s door or twice within five seconds to
unlock all doors and liftgate. The turn signal lights will
flash to acknowledge the unlock signal. The illuminated
entry system will also turn on.
If the vehicle is equipped with Passive Entry, refer to
“Keyless Enter-N-Go — Passive Entry” in “Things To
Know Before Starting Your Vehicle” for further informa-
tion.
1st Press Of Key Fob Unlocks
This feature lets you program the system to unlock either
the driver’s door or all doors on the first push of the unlock
button on the key fob. To change the current setting, refer
to “Uconnect Settings” in “Understanding Your Instrument
Panel” for further information.
Flash Lamps With Lock
This feature will cause the turn signal lights to flash when
the doors are locked or unlocked with the key fob. This
feature can be turned on or turned off. To change the
current setting, refer to “Uconnect Settings” in “Under-
standing Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
Key Fob
16 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Headlight Illumination On Approach
This feature activates the headlights for up to 90 seconds
when the doors are unlocked with the key fob. The time for
this feature is programmable on vehicles equipped through
Uconnect. To change the current setting, refer to “Uconnect
Settings” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for
further information.
To Lock The Doors And Liftgate
Push and release the lock button on the key fob to lock all
doors and liftgate. The turn signal lights will flash, and the
horn will chirp to acknowledge the signal.
If the vehicle is equipped with Passive Entry, refer to
“Keyless Enter-N-Go — Passive Entry” in “Things To
Know Before Starting Your Vehicle” for further informa-
tion.
Sound Horn With Lock
This feature will cause the horn to chirp when the doors are
locked with the key fob. This feature can be turned on or
turned off. To change the current setting, refer to
“Uconnect Settings” in “Understanding Your Instrument
Panel” for further information.
Using The Panic Alarm
To turn the Panic Alarm feature on or off, push and hold
the Panic button on the key fob for at least one second and
release. When the Panic Alarm is activated, the turn signals
will flash, the horn will pulse on and off, and the interior
lights will turn on.
The Panic Alarm will stay on for three minutes unless you
turn it off by either pushing the Panic button a second time
or drive the vehicle at a speed of 15 mph (24 km/h) or
greater.
NOTE:
• The interior lights will turn off if you place the ignition
in the ACC or ON/RUN position while the Panic Alarm
is activated. However, the exterior lights and horn will
remain on.
• You may need to be less than 35 ft (11 m) from the
vehicle when using the key fob to turn off the Panic
Alarm due to the radio frequency noises emitted by the
system.
Programming Additional Key Fobs
Programming key fobs may be performed at an authorized
dealer.
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 17
Key Fob Battery Replacement
The recommended replacement battery is one CR2032
battery.
NOTE:
• Perchlorate Material — special handling may apply. See
www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate
• Do not touch the battery terminals that are on the back
housing or the printed circuit board.
1. Remove the emergency key by sliding the mechanical
latch on the back of the key fob sideways with your
thumb and then pull the key out with your other hand.
2. Insert the tip of the emergency key or a #2 flat blade
screwdriver into the slot and gently pry the two halves
of the key fob apart. Make sure not to damage the seal
during removal.
Emergency Key Removal
18 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
3. Remove the battery by turning the back cover over
(battery facing downward) and tapping it lightly on a
solid surface such as a table or similar, then replace the
battery. When replacing the battery, match the + sign on
the battery to the + sign on the inside of the battery clip,
located on the back cover. Avoid touching the new
battery with your fingers. Skin oils may cause battery
deterioration. If you touch a battery, clean it with
rubbing alcohol.
4. To assemble the key fob case, snap the two halves
together.
General Information
The following regulatory statement applies to all Radio
Frequency (RF) devices equipped in this vehicle:
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules and
with Industry Canada license-exempt RSS standard(s).
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful interference, and
2. This device must accept any interference received, in-
cluding interference that may cause undesired opera-
tion.
NOTE: Changes or modifications not expressly approved
by the party responsible for compliance could void the
user’s authority to operate the equipment.
REMOTE STARTING SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED
This system uses the key fob to start the engine
conveniently from outside the vehicle while still
maintaining security. The system has a range of
approximately 300 ft (91 m).
Separating Key Fob Case
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 19
NOTE:
• The vehicle must be equipped with an automatic trans-
mission to be equipped with Remote Start.
• Obstructions between the vehicle and the key fob may
reduce this range.
How To Use Remote Start
All of the following conditions must be met before the
engine will remote start:
• Gear selector in PARK
• Doors closed
• Hood closed
• Liftgate closed
• HAZARD switch off
• BRAKE switch inactive (brake pedal not pushed)
• Battery at an acceptable charge level
• System not disabled from previous remote start event
• Vehicle security alarm not active
• Ignition in OFF position
WARNING!
• Do not start or run an engine in a closed garage or
confined area. Exhaust gas contains Carbon Monox-
ide (CO) which is odorless and colorless. Carbon
Monoxide is poisonous and can cause serious injury
or death when inhaled.
• Keep key fobs away from children. Operation of the
Remote Start System, windows, door locks or other
controls could cause serious injury or death.
Remote Start Abort Message
The following messages will appear in the instrument
cluster display if the vehicle fails to remote start or exits
remote start prematurely if equipped with Remote Start:
• Remote Start Aborted — Door Open
• Remote Start Aborted — Hood Open
• Remote Start Aborted — Fuel Low
• Remote Start Aborted — L/Gate Open
• Remote Start Disabled — Start Vehicle To Reset
The message stays active until the ignition is cycled to the
ON/RUN position.
20 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
To Enter Remote Start Mode
Push and release the remote start button on the key fob
twice within five seconds. The vehicle doors will lock, the
parking lights will flash and the horn will chirp twice (if
programmed). Then, the engine will start and the vehicle
will remain in the Remote Start mode for a 15-minute cycle.
NOTE:
• If an engine fault is present or fuel level is low, the
vehicle will start and then shut down in 10 seconds.
• The park lamps will turn on and remain on during
Remote Start mode.
• For security, power window and power sunroof opera-
tion (if equipped) are disabled when the vehicle is in the
Remote Start mode.
• The engine can be started two consecutive times (two
15-minute cycles) with the key fob. However, the igni-
tion must be cycled to the RUN position before you can
repeat the start sequence for a third cycle.
To Exit Remote Start Mode Without Driving The
Vehicle
Push and release the remote start button one time or allow
the engine to run for the entire 15-minute cycle.
NOTE: To avoid unintentional shutdowns, the system will
disable the one time push of the remote start button for two
seconds after receiving a valid Remote Start request.
To Exit Remote Start Mode And Drive The Vehicle
Before the end of 15-minute cycle, push and release the
unlock button on the key fob to unlock the doors and
disarm the vehicle security alarm (if equipped). Then, prior
to the end of the 15-minute cycle, push and release the
ignition START/STOP button.
NOTE: The message “Push Start Button” will appear in the
instrument cluster display until you push the ignition
START/STOP button.
Remote Start Comfort Systems — If Equipped
When Remote Start is activated, the driver heated seat
feature will automatically turn on in cold weather. This
feature will stay on through the duration of Remote Start or
until the ignition switch is turned to the ON/RUN posi-
tion.
The Remote Start Comfort System can be activated and
deactivated through the Uconnect system. Refer to
“Uconnect Settings — Customer Programmable Features”
in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further
information on Remote Start Comfort System operation.
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 21
General Information
The following regulatory statement applies to all Radio
Frequency (RF) devices equipped in this vehicle:
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules and
with Industry Canada license-exempt RSS standard(s).
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful interference, and
2. This device must accept any interference received, in-
cluding interference that may cause undesired opera-
tion.
NOTE: Changes or modifications not expressly approved
by the party responsible for compliance could void the
user’s authority to operate the equipment.
DOOR LOCKS
Manual Door Locks
To lock each door, push the door lock knob on each door
trim panel downward. To unlock the front doors, pull the
inside door handle to the first detent. To unlock the rear
doors, pull the door lock knob on the door trim panel
upward.
If the door lock knob is down when you shut the door, the
door will lock. Therefore, make sure the key fob is not
inside the vehicle before closing the door.
NOTE: The manual door locks will not lock or unlock the
liftgate.
Manual Door Lock Knob
22 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
• For personal security and safety in the event of a
collision, lock the vehicle doors before you drive as
well as when you park and leave the vehicle.
• When leaving the vehicle, always remove the key fob
from the vehicle and lock your vehicle. Unsuper-
vised use of vehicle equipment may cause severe
personal injuries or death.
• Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing children to
be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a number
of reasons. A child or others could be seriously or
fatally injured. Children should be warned not to
touch the parking brake, brake pedal or the gear
selector.
• Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle or in
a location accessible to children, and do not leave the
ignition of a vehicle equipped with Keyless Enter-
N-Go in the ACC or ON/RUN mode. A child could
operate power windows, other controls, or move the
vehicle.
Power Door Locks
A power door lock switch is on each front door trim panel.
Use this switch to lock or unlock the doors and liftgate.
The doors can also be locked and unlocked with the
Keyless Enter-N-Go (Passive Entry) system. Refer to “Key-
less Enter-N-Go” in “Things To Know Before Starting Your
Vehicle” for further information.
If you push the power door lock switch, with the ignition
in the ON/RUN or ACC position and any front door is
open, the power locks will not operate. This prevents you
from accidentally locking the key fob in the vehicle.
Power Door Lock Switch Location
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 23
Turning off the ignition or closing the door will allow the
locks to operate. If a door is open, and the ignition is in the
ON/RUN or ACC position, a chime will sound as a
reminder to remove the key fob.
Automatic Door Locks — If Equipped
The auto door lock feature default condition is enabled.
When enabled, the door locks will lock automatically when
the vehicle’s speed exceeds 15 mph (24 km/h). The auto
door lock feature can be enabled or disabled by your
authorized dealer per written request of the customer.
Please see your authorized dealer for service.
Auto Unlock On Exit
The doors will unlock automatically on vehicles with
power door locks if:
1. The Automatic Unlock Doors On Exit feature is enabled.
2. The transmission was in gear and the vehicle speed
returned to 0 mph (0 km/h).
3. The transmission is in PARK.
4. Any vehicle door is opened.
5. The doors were not previously unlocked.
6. The vehicle speed is 0 mph (0 km/h).
To change the current setting, refer to “Uconnect Settings”
in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further
information.
NOTE: Use the Automatic Unlock Doors On Exit feature
in accordance with local laws.
Child-Protection Door Lock System — Rear Doors
To provide a safer environment for small children riding in
the rear seats, the rear doors are equipped with a Child-
Protection Door Lock system.
To Engage The Child-Protection Door Lock System
1. Open the rear door.
2. Insert the tip of the emergency key (or alike) into the
child lock control and rotate it to the lock position.
24 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
3. Repeat steps 1 and 2 for the opposite rear door.
NOTE: When the Child-Protection Door lock system is
engaged, the door can be opened only by using the outside
door handle even though the inside door lock is in the
unlocked position.
Child-Protection Door Lock Location Child-Protection Door Lock Function
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 25
WARNING!
Avoid trapping anyone in a vehicle in a collision.
Remember that the rear doors can only be opened from
the outside when the Child-Protection locks are en-
gaged. Failure to follow this warning may result in
serious injury or death.
NOTE:
• After engaging the Child-Protection Door lock system,
always test the door from the inside to make certain it
is in the desired position.
• For emergency exit with the system engaged, move the
lock knob up to the unlock position, roll down the
window, and open the door with the outside door
handle.
To Disengage The Child-Protection Door Lock
System
1. Open the rear door.
2. Insert the tip of the emergency key (or alike) into the
child lock control and rotate it to the unlock position.
3. Repeat steps 1 and 2 for the opposite rear door.
NOTE: After disengaging the Child-Protection Door Lock
system, always test the door from the inside to make
certain it is in the desired position.
Child-Protection Door Lock Function
26 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
KEYLESS ENTER-N-GO — PASSIVE ENTRY
(IF EQUIPPED)
The Passive Entry system is an enhancement to the vehi-
cle’s Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) system and a feature of
Keyless Enter-N-Go. This feature allows you to lock and
unlock the vehicle’s door(s) without having to push the key
fob lock or unlock buttons.
NOTE:
• Passive Entry may be programmed ON/OFF; refer to
“Uconnect Settings” in “Understanding Your Instrument
Panel” for further information.
• If wearing gloves on your hands, or if it has been
raining/snowing on the Passive Entry door handle, the
unlock sensitivity can be affected, resulting in a slower
response time.
• If the vehicle is unlocked by Passive Entry and no door
is opened within 60 seconds, the vehicle will re-lock and
if equipped will arm the security alarm.
• The key fob may not be able to be detected by the vehicle
keyless-go system if it is located next to a mobile phone,
laptop or other electronic device; these devices may
block the key fob’s wireless signal and prevent the
keyless-go system from starting the vehicle.
To Unlock From The Driver’s Side:
With a valid Passive Entry key fob within 5 ft (1.5 m) of the
driver’s door handle, grab the driver’s front door handle to
unlock the driver’s door automatically. The interior door
panel lock knob will raise when the door is unlocked.
NOTE: If “Unlock All Doors 1st Press” is programmed all
doors will unlock when you grab hold of the driver’s front
door handle. To select between “Unlock Driver Door 1st
Press” and “Unlock All Doors 1st Press,” refer to
“Uconnect Settings” in “Understanding Your Instrument
Panel” for further information.
Grabbing The Door Handle
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 27
To Unlock From The Passenger Side:
With a valid Passive Entry key fob within 5 ft (1.5 m) of the
passenger door handle, grab the front passenger door
handle to unlock all four doors and the liftgate automati-
cally.
NOTE: All doors and the liftgate will unlock when the
front passenger door handle is grabbed regardless of the
driver’s door unlock preference setting (“Unlock Driver
Door 1st Press” or “Unlock All Doors 1st Press”).
Preventing Inadvertent Locking Of Passive Entry Key
Fob In Vehicle:
To minimize the possibility of unintentionally locking a
Passive Entry key fob inside your vehicle, the Passive Entry
system is equipped with an automatic door unlock feature
which will function if the ignition is OFF.
If one of the vehicle doors is open and the vehicle is locked
with a door panel switch, key fob button or door handle
button, once all open doors have been closed the vehicle
checks the inside and outside of the vehicle for any valid
Passive Entry key fobs. If one of the vehicle’s Passive Entry
key fobs is detected inside the vehicle, and no other valid
Passive Entry key fobs are detected outside the vehicle, the
Passive Entry System automatically unlocks all vehicle
doors and chirps the horn three times (on the third attempt
ALL doors will lock and the Passive Entry key fob can be
locked in the vehicle).
To Enter The Liftgate:
With a valid Passive Entry key fob within 5 ft (1.5 m) of the
liftgate, push the button underneath the left side of the
accent bar, which is located on the liftgate below the glass,
to lock or unlock the vehicle.
Liftgate Unlock/Lock Button
28 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
To Lock The Vehicle’s Doors:
With one of the vehicle’s Passive Entry key fobs within 5 ft
(1.5 m) of the driver or passenger front door handle, push
the door handle lock button to lock all four doors and
liftgate.
Do NOT grab the door handle, when pushing the door
handle button. This could unlock the door(s).
NOTE:
• After pushing the door handle button, you must wait
two seconds before you can lock or unlock the doors,
using either Passive Entry door handle. This is done to
allow you to check if the vehicle is locked by pulling the
door handle, without the vehicle reacting and unlocking.
• If Passive Entry is disabled using Uconnect System, the
key protection described in ⬙Preventing Inadvertent
Locking of Passive Entry key fob in Vehicle⬙ remains
active/functional.
Push The Door Handle Button To Lock
Do NOT Grab The Door Handle When Locking
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 29
• The Passive Entry system will not operate if the key fob
battery is dead.
The vehicle doors can also be locked by using the key fob
lock button or the lock button located on the vehicle’s
interior door panel.
General Information
The following regulatory statement applies to all radio
frequency (RF) devices equipped in this vehicle:
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules and
with Industry Canada license-exempt RSS standard(s).
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful interference, and
2. This device must accept any interference received, in-
cluding interference that may cause undesired opera-
tion.
NOTE: Changes or modifications not expressly approved
by the party responsible for compliance could void the
user’s authority to operate the equipment.
WINDOWS
Power Windows
The window controls on the driver’s door trim panel
control all of the door windows.
There are single window controls on each passenger door
trim panel, which operate the passenger door windows.
The window controls will operate when the ignition is in
the ON/RUN or ACC position.
Power Window Switches
30 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: For vehicles equipped with Uconnect, the power
window switches will remain active for up to 10 minutes
after the ignition is cycled to the OFF position. Opening
either front door will cancel this feature. The time is
programmable. Refer to “Uconnect Settings” in “Under-
standing Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
WARNING!
Never leave children unattended in a vehicle. Do not
leave the key fob in or near the vehicle or in a location
accessible to children, and do not leave the ignition of
a vehicle equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go in the
ACC or ON/RUN mode. Occupants, particularly unat-
tended children, can become entrapped by the win-
dows while operating the power window switches.
Such entrapment may result in serious injury or death.
Auto-Down Feature
The driver’s power window switch has an Auto-Down
feature. Push the window switch past the first detent,
release, and the window will go down automatically.
To open the window part way, push the window switch to
the first detent and release it when you want the window
to stop.
To stop the window from going all the way down during
the Auto-Down operation, pull up on the switch briefly.
Auto-Up Feature With Anti-Pinch Protection
On some models, the driver and front passenger power
window switches have an Auto-Up feature. Pull the win-
dow switch up to the second detent, release, and the
window will go up automatically.
To stop the window from going all the way up during the
Auto-Up operation, push down on the switch briefly.
To close the window part way, pull the window switch up
to the first detent and release it when you want the
window to stop.
NOTE:
• If the window runs into any obstacle during Auto-
Closure, it will reverse direction and then go back down.
Remove the obstacle and use the window switch again
to close the window.
• Any impact due to rough road conditions may trigger
the auto-reverse function unexpectedly during Auto-
Closure. If this happens, pull the switch lightly to the
first detent and hold to close window manually.
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 31
WARNING!
There is no anti-pinch protection when the window is
almost closed. To avoid personal injury, be sure to clear
your arms, hands, fingers, and objects from the win-
dow path before closing the window. Such entrapment
may result in serious injury.
Reset Auto-Up
Should the Auto-Up feature stop working, the window
probably needs to be reset. To reset Auto-Up:
1. Pull the window switch up to close the window com-
pletely and continue to hold the switch up for an
additional two seconds after the window is closed.
2. Push the window switch down firmly to the second
detent to open the window completely and continue to
hold the switch down for an additional two seconds
after the window is fully open.
Window Lockout Switch
The window lockout switch on the driver’s door trim panel
allows you to disable the window control on the rear
passenger doors. To disable the window controls, push and
release the window lockout button (setting it in the down
position). To enable the window controls, push and release
the window lockout button again (setting it in the up
position).
Window Lockout Switch
32 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Wind Buffeting
Wind buffeting can be described as the perception of
pressure on the ears or a helicopter-type sound in the ears.
Your vehicle may exhibit wind buffeting with the windows
down, or the sunroof (if equipped) in certain open or
partially open positions. This is a normal occurrence and
can be minimized. If the buffeting occurs with the rear
windows open, then open the front and rear windows
together to minimize the buffeting. If the buffeting occurs
with the sunroof open, adjust the sunroof opening to
minimize the buffeting.
LIFTGATE
The liftgate can be unlocked or locked pushing the unlock
or lock button on the Remote Keyless Entry key fob, the
Keyless Enter-N-Go (Passive Entry) lock/unlock button
underneath the left side of the accent bar, which is located
on the liftgate below the glass or by activating the power
door lock switch located on either front door trim panel.
Refer to “Keyless Enter-N-Go” in “Things To Know Before
Starting Your Vehicle” for further information on Keyless
Enter-N-Go (Passive Entry).
NOTE: The liftgate cannot be unlocked or locked with the
manual door lock plungers on the door trim panels or the
door lock cylinder on the driver’s door.
To open the unlocked liftgate, squeeze the handle and pull
the liftgate toward you. Gas props will raise and support
the liftgate in the open position.
NOTE: Because the gas pressure drops with temperature, it
may be necessary to assist the props when opening the
liftgate in cold weather.
Liftgate Release
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 33
WARNING!
• Driving with the liftgate open can allow poisonous
exhaust gases into your vehicle. You and your pas-
sengers could be injured by these fumes. Keep the
liftgate closed when you are operating the vehicle.
• If you are required to drive with the liftgate open,
make sure that all windows are closed, and the
climate control blower switch is set at high speed. Do
not use the recirculation mode.
OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS
Some of the most important safety features in your vehicle
are the restraint systems:
Occupant Restraint Systems Features
• Seat Belt Systems
• Supplemental Restraint Systems (SRS) Air Bags
• Supplemental Active Head Restraints
• Child Restraints
Some of the safety features described in this section may be
standard equipment on some models, or may be optional
equipment on others. If you are not sure, ask your autho-
rized dealer.
Important Safety Precautions
Please pay close attention to the information in this section.
It tells you how to use your restraint system properly, to
keep you and your passengers as safe as possible.
Here are some simple steps you can take to minimize the
risk of harm from a deploying air bag:
1. Children 12 years old and under should always ride
buckled up in a vehicle with a rear seat.
2. If a child from 2 to 12 years old (not in a rear-facing child
restraint) must ride in the front passenger seat, move the
seat as far back as possible and use the proper child
restraint (refer to “Child Restraints” in this section for
further information).
3. Children that are not big enough to wear the vehicle seat
belt properly (refer to “Child Restraints” in this section
for further information) should be secured in a vehicle
with a rear seat in child restraints or belt-positioning
booster seats. Older children who do not use child
restraints or belt-positioning booster seats should ride
properly buckled up in a vehicle with a rear seat.
4. Never allow children to slide the shoulder belt behind
them or under their arm.
34 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
5. You should read the instructions provided with your
child restraint to make sure that you are using it
properly.
6. All occupants should always wear their lap and shoul-
der belts properly.
7. The driver and front passenger seats should be moved
back as far as practical to allow the front air bags room
to inflate.
8. Do not lean against the door or window. If your vehicle
has side air bags, and deployment occurs, the side air
bags will inflate forcefully into the space between occu-
pants and the door and occupants could be injured.
9. If the air bag system in this vehicle needs to be modified
to accommodate a disabled person, refer to the “If You
Need Consumer Assistance” section for customer ser-
vice contact information.
WARNING!
• Never place a rear-facing child restraint in front of an
air bag. A deploying passenger front air bag can
cause death or serious injury to a child 12 years or
younger, including a child in a rear-facing child
restraint.
• Only use a rear-facing child restraint in a vehicle
with a rear seat.
Seat Belt Systems
Buckle up even though you are an excellent driver, even on
short trips. Someone on the road may be a poor driver and
could cause a collision that includes you. This can happen
far away from home or on your own street.
Research has shown that seat belts save lives, and they can
reduce the seriousness of injuries in a collision. Some of the
worst injuries happen when people are thrown from the
vehicle. Seat belts reduce the possibility of ejection and the
risk of injury caused by striking the inside of the vehicle.
Everyone in a motor vehicle should be belted at all times.
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 35
Enhanced Seat Belt Use Reminder System (BeltAlert)
Driver And Passenger BeltAlert — If Equipped
BeltAlert is a feature intended to remind the driver
and outboard front seat passenger (if equipped with
outboard front passenger seat BeltAlert) to buckle their
seat belts. The Belt Alert feature is active whenever the
ignition switch is in the START or ON/RUN position.
Initial Indication
If the driver is unbuckled when the ignition switch is first
in the START or ON/RUN position, a chime will signal for
a few seconds. If the driver or outboard front seat passen-
ger (if equipped with outboard front passenger seat
BeltAlert) is unbuckled when the ignition switch is first in
the START or ON/RUN position the Seat Belt Reminder
Light will turn on and remain on until both outboard front
seat belts are buckled. The outboard front passenger seat
BeltAlert is not active when an outboard front passenger
seat is unoccupied.
BeltAlert Warning Sequence
The BeltAlert warning sequence is activated when the
vehicle is moving above a specified vehicle speed range
and the driver or outboard front seat passenger is unbuck-
led (if equipped with outboard front passenger seat
BeltAlert) (the outboard front passenger seat BeltAlert is
not active when the outboard front passenger seat is
unoccupied). The BeltAlert warning sequence starts by
blinking the Seat Belt Reminder Light and sounding an
intermittent chime. Once the BeltAlert warning sequence
has completed, the Seat Belt Reminder Light will remain on
until the seat belts are buckled. The BeltAlert warning
sequence may repeat based on vehicle speed until the
driver and occupied outboard front seat passenger seat
belts are buckled. The driver should instruct all occupants
to buckle their seat belts.
Change Of Status
If the driver or outboard front seat passenger (if equipped
with outboard front passenger seat BeltAlert) unbuckles
their seat belt while the vehicle is traveling, the BeltAlert
warning sequence will begin until the seat belts are buck-
led again.
36 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
The outboard front passenger seat BeltAlert is not active
when the outboard front passenger seat is unoccupied.
BeltAlert may be triggered when an animal or other items
are placed on the outboard front passenger seat or when
the seat is folded flat (if equipped). It is recommended that
pets be restrained in the rear seat (if equipped) in pet
harnesses or pet carriers that are secured by seat belts, and
cargo is properly stowed.
BeltAlert can be activated or deactivated by your autho-
rized dealer. FCA US LLC does not recommend deactivat-
ing BeltAlert.
NOTE: If BeltAlert has been deactivated and the driver or
outboard front seat passenger (if equipped with outboard
front passenger seat BeltAlert) is unbuckled the Seat Belt
Reminder Light will turn on and remain on until the driver
and outboard front seat passenger seat belts are buckled.
Lap/Shoulder Belts
All seating positions in your vehicle are equipped with
lap/shoulder belts.
The seat belt webbing retractor will lock only during very
sudden stops or collisions. This feature allows the shoulder
part of the seat belt to move freely with you under normal
conditions. However, in a collision the seat belt will lock
and reduce your risk of striking the inside of the vehicle or
being thrown out of the vehicle.
WARNING!
• Relying on the air bags alone could lead to more
severe injuries in a collision. The air bags work with
your seat belt to restrain you properly. In some
collisions, the air bags won’t deploy at all. Always
wear your seat belt even though you have air bags.
• In a collision, you and your passengers can suffer
much greater injuries if you are not properly buckled
up. You can strike the interior of your vehicle or
other passengers, or you can be thrown out of the
vehicle. Always be sure you and others in your
vehicle are buckled up properly.
• It is dangerous to ride in a cargo area, inside or
outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people riding in
these areas are more likely to be seriously injured or
killed.
• Do not allow people to ride in any area of your
vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat belts.
• Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and
using a seat belt properly. Occupants, including the
(Continued)
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 37
WARNING! (Continued)
driver, should always wear their seat belts whether
or not an air bag is also provided at their seating
position to minimize the risk of severe injury or
death in the event of a crash.
• Wearing your seat belt incorrectly could make your
injuries in a collision much worse. You might suffer
internal injuries, or you could even slide out of the
seat belt. Follow these instructions to wear your seat
belt safely and to keep your passengers safe, too.
• Two people should never be belted into a single seat
belt. People belted together can crash into one an-
other in a collision, hurting one another badly. Never
use a lap/shoulder belt or a lap belt for more than one
person, no matter what their size.
WARNING!
• A lap belt worn too high can increase the risk of
injury in a collision. The seat belt forces won’t be at
the strong hip and pelvic bones, but across your
abdomen. Always wear the lap part of your seat belt
as low as possible and keep it snug.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
• A twisted seat belt may not protect you properly. In
a collision, it could even cut into you. Be sure the seat
belt is flat against your body, without twists. If you
can’t straighten a seat belt in your vehicle, take it to
your authorized dealer immediately and have it
fixed.
• A seat belt that is buckled into the wrong buckle will
not protect you properly. The lap portion could ride
too high on your body, possibly causing internal
injuries. Always buckle your seat belt into the
buckle nearest you.
• A seat belt that is too loose will not protect you
properly. In a sudden stop, you could move too far
forward, increasing the possibility of injury. Wear
your seat belt snugly.
• A seat belt that is worn under your arm is dangerous.
Your body could strike the inside surfaces of the
vehicle in a collision, increasing head and neck
injury. A seat belt worn under the arm can cause
internal injuries. Ribs aren’t as strong as shoulder
bones. Wear the seat belt over your shoulder so that
your strongest bones will take the force in a collision.
(Continued)
38 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING! (Continued)
• A shoulder belt placed behind you will not protect
you from injury during a collision. You are more
likely to hit your head in a collision if you do not
wear your shoulder belt. The lap and shoulder belt
are meant to be used together.
• A frayed or torn seat belt could rip apart in a collision
and leave you with no protection. Inspect the seat
belt system periodically, checking for cuts, frays, or
loose parts. Damaged parts must be replaced imme-
diately. Do not disassemble or modify the seat belt
system. Seat belt assemblies must be replaced after a
collision.
Lap/Shoulder Belt Operating Instructions
1. Enter the vehicle and close the door. Sit back and adjust
the seat.
2. The seat belt latch plate is above the back of the front
seat, and next to your arm in the rear seat (for vehicles
equipped with a rear seat). Grasp the latch plate and
pull out the seat belt. Slide the latch plate up the
webbing as far as necessary to allow the seat belt to go
around your lap.
3. When the seat belt is long enough to fit, insert the latch
plate into the buckle until you hear a “click.”
Pulling Out The Latch Plate
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 39
4. Position the lap belt so that it is snug and lies low across
your hips, below your abdomen. To remove slack in the
lap belt portion, pull up on the shoulder belt. To loosen
the lap belt if it is too tight, tilt the latch plate and pull
on the lap belt. A snug seat belt reduces the risk of
sliding under the seat belt in a collision
5. Position the shoulder belt across the shoulder and chest
with minimal, if any slack so that it is comfortable and
not resting on your neck. The retractor will withdraw
any slack in the shoulder belt.
6. To release the seat belt, push the red button on the
buckle. The seat belt will automatically retract to its
stowed position. If necessary, slide the latch plate down
the webbing to allow the seat belt to retract fully.
Inserting Latch Plate Into Buckle Positioning The Lap Belt
40 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Lap/Shoulder Belt Untwisting Procedure
Use the following procedure to untwist a twisted lap/
shoulder belt.
1. Position the latch plate as close as possible to the anchor
point.
2. At about 6 to 12 inches (15 to 30 cm) above the latch
plate, grasp and twist the seat belt webbing 180 degrees
to create a fold that begins immediately above the latch
plate.
3. Slide the latch plate upward over the folded webbing.
The folded webbing must enter the slot at the top of the
latch plate.
4. Continue to slide the latch plate up until it clears the
folded webbing and the seat belt is no longer twisted.
Adjustable Upper Shoulder Belt Anchorage
In the driver and front passenger seats, the top of the
shoulder belt can be adjusted upward or downward to
position the seat belt away from your neck. Push or
squeeze the anchorage button to release the anchorage, and
move it up or down to the position that serves you best.
As a guide, if you are shorter than average, you will prefer
the shoulder belt anchorage in a lower position, and if you
are taller than average, you will prefer the shoulder belt
anchorage in a higher position. After you release the
anchorage button, try to move it up or down to make sure
that it is locked in position.
Adjustable Upper Anchorage
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 41
NOTE: The adjustable upper shoulder belt anchorage is
equipped with an Easy Up feature. This feature allows the
shoulder belt anchorage to be adjusted in the upward
position without pushing or squeezing the release button.
To verify the shoulder belt anchorage is latched, pull
downward on the shoulder belt anchorage until it is locked
into position.
WARNING!
• Wearing your seat belt incorrectly could make your
injuries in a collision much worse. You might suffer
internal injuries, or you could even slide out of the
seat belt. Follow these instructions to wear your seat
belt safely and to keep your passengers safe, too.
• Position the shoulder belt across the shoulder and
chest with minimal, if any slack so that it is comfort-
able and not resting on your neck. The retractor will
withdraw any slack in the shoulder belt.
• Misadjustment of the seat belt could reduce the
effectiveness of the safety belt in a crash.
Seat Belt Extender
If a seat belt is not long enough to fit properly, even when
the webbing is fully extended and the adjustable upper
shoulder belt anchorage (if equipped) is in its lowest
position, your authorized dealer can provide you with a
Seat Belt Extender. The Seat Belt Extender should be used
only if the existing seat belt is not long enough. When the
Seat Belt Extender is not required for a different occupant,
it must be removed.
WARNING!
• ONLY use the Seat Belt Extender if it is physically
required in order to properly fit the original seat belt
system. DO NOT USE the Seat Belt Extender if,
when worn, the distance between the front edge of
the Seat Belt Extender buckle and the center of the
occupant’s body is LESS than 6 inches.
• Using a Seat Belt Extender when not needed can
increase the risk of serious injury or death in a
collision. Only use the Seat Belt Extender when the
lap belt is not long enough and only use in the
recommended seating positions. Remove and store
the Seat Belt Extender when not needed.
42 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Seat Belts And Pregnant Women
Seat belts must be worn by all occupants including preg-
nant women: the risk of injury in the event of an accident
is reduced for the mother and the unborn child if they are
wearing a seat belt.
Position the lap belt snug and low below the abdomen and
across the strong bones of the hips. Place the shoulder belt
across the chest and away from the neck. Never place the
shoulder belt behind the back or under the arm.
Seat Belt Pretensioner
The front seat belt system is equipped with pretensioning
devices that are designed to remove slack from the seat belt
in the event of a collision. These devices may improve the
performance of the seat belt by removing slack from the
seat belt early in a collision. Pretensioners work for all size
occupants, including those in child restraints.
NOTE: These devices are not a substitute for proper seat
belt placement by the occupant. The seat belt still must be
worn snugly and positioned properly.
The pretensioners are triggered by the Occupant Restraint
Controller (ORC). Like the air bags, the pretensioners are
single use items. A deployed pretensioner or a deployed air
bag must be replaced immediately.
Energy Management Feature — If Equipped
This vehicle has a seat belt system with an Energy Man-
agement feature in the outboard front seating positions and
in the outboard rear seating positions (if equipped with
outboard rear seat Energy Management feature) that may
help further reduce the risk of injury in the event of a
collision. The seat belt system has a retractor assembly that
is designed to release webbing in a controlled manner.
Pregnant Women And Seat Belts
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 43
Switchable Automatic Locking Retractors (ALR) –
If Equipped
The seat belts in the passenger seating positions may be
equipped with a Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor
(ALR) which is used to secure a child restraint system. For
additional information, refer to “Installing Child Restraints
Using The Vehicle Seat Belt” under the “Child Restraints”
section of this manual. The figure below illustrates the
locking feature for each seating position.
If the passenger seating position is equipped with an ALR
and is being used for normal usage, only pull the seat belt
webbing out far enough to comfortably wrap around the
occupant’s mid-section so as to not activate the ALR. If the
ALR is activated, you will hear a clicking sound as the seat
belt retracts. Allow the webbing to retract completely in
this case and then carefully pull out only the amount of
webbing necessary to comfortably wrap around the occu-
pant’s mid-section. Slide the latch plate into the buckle
until you hear a ⬙click.⬙
In Automatic Locking Mode, the shoulder belt is automati-
cally pre-locked. The seat belt will still retract to remove
any slack in the shoulder belt. Use the Automatic Locking
Mode anytime a child restraint is installed in a seating
position that has a seat belt with this feature. Children 12
years old and under should always be properly restrained
in a vehicle with a rear seat.
ALR — Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor (Third
Row Shown — If Equipped)
44 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
• Never place a rear-facing child restraint in front of an
air bag. A deploying passenger front air bag can
cause death or serious injury to a child 12 years or
younger, including a child in a rear-facing child
restraint.
• Only use a rear-facing child restraint in a vehicle
with a rear seat.
How To Engage The Automatic Locking Mode
1. Buckle the combination lap and shoulder belt.
2. Grasp the shoulder portion and pull downward until
the entire seat belt is extracted.
3. Allow the seat belt to retract. As the seat belt retracts,
you will hear a clicking sound. This indicates the seat
belt is now in the Automatic Locking Mode.
How To Disengage The Automatic Locking Mode
Unbuckle the combination lap/shoulder belt and allow it
to retract completely to disengage the Automatic Locking
Mode and activate the vehicle sensitive (emergency) lock-
ing mode.
WARNING!
• The seat belt assembly must be replaced if the
switchable Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) fea-
ture or any other seat belt function is not working
properly when checked according to the procedures
in the Service Manual.
• Failure to replace the seat belt assembly could in-
crease the risk of injury in collisions.
• Do not use the Automatic Locking Mode to restrain
occupants who are wearing the seat belt or children
who are using booster seats. The locked mode is only
used to install rear-facing or forward-facing child
restraints that have a harness for restraining the
child.
Supplemental Active Head Restraints (AHR)
These head restraints are passive deployable components,
and vehicles with this equipment cannot be readily iden-
tified by any markings, only through visual inspection of
the head restraint. The head restraint will be split in two
halves, with the front half being soft foam and trim, the
back half being decorative plastic.
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 45
How The Active Head Restraints (AHR) Work
The Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) determines
whether the severity or type of rear impact will require the
Active Head Restraints (AHR) to deploy. If a rear impact
requires deployment, both the driver and front passenger
seat AHRs will be deployed.
When AHRs deploy during a rear impact, the front half of
the head restraint extends forward to minimize the gap
between the back of the occupant’s head and the AHR. This
system is designed to help prevent or reduce the extent of
injuries to the driver and front passenger in certain types of
rear impacts.
NOTE: The Active Head Restraints (AHR) may or may not
deploy in the event of a front or side impact. However, if
during a front impact, a secondary rear impact occurs, the
AHR may deploy based on the severity and type of the
impact.
Active Head Restraint (AHR) Components:
Active Head Restraint (AHR) Components
1 — Head Restraint Front Half (Soft Foam And Trim)
2 — Seatback
3 — Head Restraint Back Half (Decorative Plastic Rear Cover)
4 — Head Restraint Guide Tubes
46 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
• All occupants, including the driver, should not oper-
ate a vehicle or sit in a vehicle’s eat until the head
restraints are placed in their proper positions in
order to minimize the risk of neck injury in the event
of a collision.
• Do not place items over the top of the Active Head
Restraint, such as coats, seat covers or portable DVD
players. These items may interfere with the opera-
tion of the Active Head Restraint in the event of a
collision and could result in serious injury or death.
• Active Head Restraints may be deployed if they are
struck by an object such as a hand, foot or loose
cargo. To avoid accidental deployment of the Active
Head Restraint, ensure that all cargo is secured, as
loose cargo could contact the Active Head Restraint
during sudden stops. Failure to follow this warning
could cause personal injury if the Active Head Re-
straint is deployed.
NOTE: For more information on properly adjusting and
positioning the head restraint, refer to “Supplemental
Active Head Restraints” in “Understanding The Features
Of Your Vehicle.”
Resetting Active Head Restraints (AHR)
If the Active Head Restraints are triggered during a colli-
sion, the front half of the head restraint will be extended
forward and separated from the rear half of the head
restraint (see image). Do not drive your vehicle after the
AHRs have deployed. The head restraint must be reset into
the original position to best protect the occupant for all
types of collisions. An authorized FCA US LLC dealer must
reset the AHRs on the driver’s and front passenger’s seat
before driving. Personally attempting to reset the AHRs
may result in damage to the AHRs that could impair their
function.
Active Head Restraint (AHR) Triggered
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 47
WARNING!
Deployed AHRs are not able to best protect you in all
types of collisions. Have deployed AHRs reset by an
authorized dealer immediately.
Supplemental Restraint Systems (SRS)
Some of the safety features described in this section may be
standard equipment on some models, or may be optional
equipment on others. If you are not sure, ask your autho-
rized dealer.
The air bag system must be ready to protect you in a
collision. The Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) moni-
tors the internal circuits and interconnecting wiring asso-
ciated with the electrical Air Bag System Components.
Your vehicle may be equipped with the following Air Bag
System Components:
Air Bag System Components
• Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)
• Air Bag Warning Light
• Steering Wheel and Column
• Instrument Panel
• Knee Impact Bolsters
• Driver and Front Passenger Air Bags
• Supplemental Side Air Bags
• Supplemental Knee Air Bags
• Front and Side Impact Sensors
• Seat Belt Pretensioners
• Seat Track Position Sensors
• Seat Belt Buckle Switch
Air Bag Warning Light
The ORC monitors the readiness of the electronic
parts of the air bag system whenever the ignition
switch is in the START or ON/RUN position. If
the ignition switch is in the OFF position or in the
ACC position, the air bag system is not on and the air bags
will not inflate.
The ORC contains a backup power supply system that may
deploy the air bag system even if the battery loses power or
it becomes disconnected prior to deployment.
48 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
The ORC turns on the Air Bag Warning Light in the
instrument panel for approximately four to eight seconds
for a self-check when the ignition switch is first in the
ON/RUN position. After the self-check, the Air Bag Warn-
ing Light will turn off. If the ORC detects a malfunction in
any part of the system, it turns on the Air Bag Warning
Light, either momentarily or continuously. A single chime
will sound to alert you if the light comes on again after
initial startup.
The ORC also includes diagnostics that will illuminate the
instrument panel Air Bag Warning Light if a malfunction is
detected that could affect the air bag system. The diagnos-
tics also record the nature of the malfunction. While the air
bag system is designed to be maintenance free, if any of the
following occurs, have an authorized dealer service the air
bag system immediately.
• The Air Bag Warning Light does not come on during the
four to eight seconds when the ignition switch is first in
the ON/RUN position.
• The Air Bag Warning Light remains on after the four to
eight-second interval.
• The Air Bag Warning Light comes on intermittently or
remains on while driving.
NOTE: If the speedometer, tachometer, or any engine
related gauges are not working, the Occupant Restraint
Controller (ORC) may also be disabled. In this condition
the air bags may not be ready to inflate for your protection.
Have an authorized dealer service the air bag system
immediately.
WARNING!
Ignoring the Air Bag Warning Light in your instrument
panel could mean you won’t have the air bag system to
protect you in a collision. If the light does not come on
as a bulb check when the ignition is first turned on,
stays on after you start the vehicle, or if it comes on as
you drive, have an authorized dealer service the air bag
system immediately.
Front Air Bags
This vehicle has front air bags and lap/shoulder belts for
both the driver and front passenger. The front air bags are
a supplement to the seat belt restraint systems. The driver
front air bag is mounted in the center of the steering wheel.
The passenger front air bag is mounted in the instrument
panel, above the glove compartment. The words “SRS
AIRBAG” or “AIRBAG” are embossed on the air bag
covers.
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 49
WARNING!
• Being too close to the steering wheel or instrument
panel during front air bag deployment could cause
serious injury, including death. Air bags need room
to inflate. Sit back, comfortably extending your arms
to reach the steering wheel or instrument panel.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
•
Never place a rear-facing child restraint in front of an air
bag. A deploying passenger front air bag can cause
death or serious injury to a child 12 years or younger,
including a child in a rear-facing child restraint.
• Only use a rear-facing child restraint in a vehicle
with a rear seat.
Driver And Passenger Front Air Bag Features
The Advanced Front Air Bag system has multistage driver
and front passenger air bags. This system provides output
appropriate to the severity and type of collision as deter-
mined by the Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC), which
may receive information from the front impact sensors (if
equipped) or other system components.
The first stage inflator is triggered immediately during an
impact that requires air bag deployment. A low energy
output is used in less severe collisions. A higher energy
output is used for more severe collisions.
This vehicle may be equipped with a driver and/or front
passenger seat belt buckle switch that detects whether the
driver or front passenger seat belt is buckled. The seat belt
buckle switch may adjust the inflation rate of the Ad-
vanced Front Air Bags.
Front Air Bag And Knee Bolster Locations
1 — Driver And Passenger Front Air Bags
2 — Passenger Knee Impact Bolster
3 — Driver Knee Impact Bolster/Supplemental Driver Knee Air Bag
50 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
This vehicle may be equipped with driver and/or front
passenger seat track position sensors that may adjust the
inflation rate of the Advanced Front Air Bags based upon
seat position.
WARNING!
• No objects should be placed over or near the air bag
on the instrument panel or steering wheel because
any such objects could cause harm if the vehicle is in
a collision severe enough to cause the air bag to
inflate.
• Do not put anything on or around the air bag covers
or attempt to open them manually. You may damage
the air bags and you could be injured because the air
bags may no longer be functional. The protective
covers for the air bag cushions are designed to open
only when the air bags are inflating.
• Relying on the air bags alone could lead to more
severe injuries in a collision. The air bags work with
your seat belt to restrain you properly. In some
collisions, air bags won’t deploy at all. Always wear
your seat belts even though you have air bags.
Front Air Bag Operation
Front Air Bags are designed to provide additional protec-
tion by supplementing the seat belts. Front air bags are not
expected to reduce the risk of injury in rear, side, or
rollover collisions. The front air bags will not deploy in all
frontal collisions, including some that may produce sub-
stantial vehicle damage — for example, some pole colli-
sions, truck underrides, and angle offset collisions.
On the other hand, depending on the type and location of
impact, front air bags may deploy in crashes with little
vehicle front-end damage but that produce a severe initial
deceleration.
Because air bag sensors measure vehicle deceleration over
time, vehicle speed and damage by themselves are not
good indicators of whether or not an air bag should have
deployed.
Seat belts are necessary for your protection in all collisions,
and also are needed to help keep you in position, away
from an inflating air bag.
When the ORC detects a collision requiring the front air
bags, it signals the inflator units. A large quantity of
non-toxic gas is generated to inflate the front air bags.
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 51
The steering wheel hub trim cover and the upper right side of
the instrument panel separate and fold out of the way as the
air bags inflate to their full size. The front air bags fully inflate
in less time than it takes to blink your eyes. The front air bags
then quickly deflate while helping to restrain the driver and
front passenger.
Knee Impact Bolsters
The Knee Impact Bolsters help protect the knees of the
driver and front passenger, and position the front occu-
pants for improved interaction with the front air bags.
WARNING!
• Do not drill, cut, or tamper with the knee impact
bolsters in any way.
•
Do not mount any accessories to the knee impact
bolsters such as alarm lights, stereos, citizen band
radios, etc.
Supplemental Driver Knee Air Bag
This vehicle is equipped with a Supplemental Driver Knee
Air Bag mounted in the instrument panel below the
steering column. The Supplemental Driver Knee Air Bag
provides enhanced protection during a frontal impact by
working together with the seat belts, pretensioners, and
front air bags.
Supplemental Side Air Bags
Your vehicle is equipped with two types of side air bags:
1. Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags (SABs):
Located in the outboard side of the front seats. The
SABs are marked with a “SRS AIRBAG” or “AIR-
BAG” label sewn into the outboard side of the seats.
The SABs may help to reduce the risk of occupant injury
during certain side impacts and/or vehicle rollover events,
in addition to the injury reduction potential provided by
the seat belts and body structure.
Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bag Label
52 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
When the SAB deploys, it opens the seam on the outboard
side of the seatback’s trim cover. The inflating SAB deploys
through the seat seam into the space between the occupant
and the door. The SAB moves at a very high speed and
with such a high force that it could injure occupants if they
are not seated properly, or if items are positioned in the
area where the SAB inflates. Children are at an even greater
risk of injury from a deploying air bag.
WARNING!
Do not use accessory seat covers or place objects
between you and the Side Air Bags; the performance
could be adversely affected and/or objects could be
pushed into you, causing serious injury.
2. Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtains
(SABICs): Located above the side windows. The trim
covering the SABICs is labeled “SRS AIRBAG” or
“AIRBAG.”
SABICs may help reduce the risk of head or other injuries
to front and rear seat outboard occupants in certain side
impacts and/or vehicle rollover events, in addition to the
injury reduction potential provided by the seat belts and
body structure.
The SABICs deploy downward, covering the side win-
dows. An inflating SABIC pushes the outside edge of the
trim out of the way and covers the window. The SABICs
inflate with enough force to injure occupants if they are not
belted and seated properly, or if items are positioned in the
Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtain (SABIC)
Label Location
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 53
area where the SABICs inflate. Children are at an even
greater risk of injury from a deploying air bag.
WARNING!
• Do not stack luggage or other cargo up high enough
to block the deployment of the SABICs. The trim
covering above the side windows where the SABIC
and its deployment path are located should remain
free from any obstructions.
• In order for the SABICs to work as intended, do not
install any accessory items in your vehicle which
could alter the roof. Do not add an aftermarket
sunroof to your vehicle. Do not add roof racks that
require permanent attachments (bolts or screws) for
installation on the vehicle roof. Do not drill into the
roof of the vehicle for any reason.
The SABICs and SABs (Side Air Bags) are designed to
activate in certain side impacts and certain rollover events.
The Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) determines
whether the deployment of the Side Air Bags in a particular
side impact or rollover event is appropriate, based on the
severity and type of collision. Vehicle damage by itself is
not a good indicator of whether or not Side Air Bags should
have deployed.
Side Air Bags are a supplement to the seat belt restraint
system. Side Air Bags deploy in less time than it takes to
blink your eyes.
WARNING!
• Occupants, including children, who are up against or
very close to Side Air Bags can be seriously injured
or killed. Occupants, including children, should
never lean on or sleep against the door, side win-
dows, or area where the side air bags inflate, even if
they are in an infant or child restraint.
• Seat belts (and child restraints where appropriate)
are necessary for your protection in all collisions.
They also help keep you in position, away from an
inflating Side Air Bag. To get the best protection
from the Side Air Bags, occupants must wear their
seat belts properly and sit upright with their backs
against the seats. Children must be properly re-
strained in a child restraint or booster seat that is
appropriate for the size of the child.
54 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
• Side Air Bags need room to inflate. Do not lean
against the door or window. Sit upright in the center
of the seat.
• Being too close to the Side Air Bags during deploy-
ment could cause you to be severely injured or
killed.
• Relying on the Side Air Bags alone could lead to
more severe injuries in a collision. The Side Air Bags
work with your seat belt to restrain you properly. In
some collisions, Side Air Bags won’t deploy at all.
Always wear your seat belt even though you have
Side Air Bags.
NOTE: Air bag covers may not be obvious in the interior
trim, but they will open during air bag deployment.
Side Impacts
In side impacts, the side impact sensors aid the ORC in
determining the appropriate response to impact events.
The system is calibrated to deploy the Side Air Bags on the
impact side of the vehicle during impacts that require Side
Air Bag occupant protection. In side impacts, the Side Air
Bags deploy independently; a left side impact deploys the
left Side Air Bags only and a right side impact deploys the
right Side Air Bags only.
The Side Air Bags will not deploy in all side collisions,
including some collisions at certain angles, or some side
collisions that do not impact the area of the passenger
compartment. The Side Air Bags may deploy during
angled or offset frontal collisions where the front air bags
deploy.
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 55
Rollover Events
Side Air Bags are designed to activate in certain rollover
events. The ORC determines whether the deployment of
the Side Air Bags in a particular rollover event is appro-
priate, based on the severity and type of collision. Vehicle
damage by itself is not a good indicator of whether or not
Side Air Bags should have deployed.
The Side Air Bags will not deploy in all rollover events. The
rollover sensing-system determines if a rollover event may
be in progress and whether deployment is appropriate. A
slower-developing event may deploy the seat belt preten-
sioners on both sides of the vehicle. A faster-developing
event may deploy the seat belt pretensioners as well as the
Side Air Bags on both sides of the vehicle. The rollover
sensing-system may also deploy the seat belt pretension-
ers, with or without the Side Air Bags, on both sides of the
vehicle if the vehicle experiences a near rollover event.
The SABICs may help reduce the risk of partial or complete
ejection of vehicle occupants through side windows in
certain rollover or side impact events.
The Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) monitors the
internal circuits and interconnecting wiring associated
with electrical Air Bag System Components listed below:
Air Bag System Components
• Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)
• Air Bag Warning Light
• Steering Wheel and Column
• Instrument Panel
• Knee Impact Bolsters
• Driver and Front Passenger Air Bags
• Supplemental Side Air Bags
• Supplemental Knee Air Bags
• Front and Side Impact Sensors
• Seat Belt Pretensioners
• Seat Track Position Sensors
• Seat Belt Buckle Switch
If A Deployment Occurs
The front air bags are designed to deflate immediately after
deployment.
NOTE: Front and/or side air bags will not deploy in all
collisions. This does not mean something is wrong with the
air bag system.
56 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
If you do have a collision which deploys the air bags, any
or all of the following may occur:
• The air bag material may sometimes cause abrasions
and/or skin reddening to the occupants as the air bags
deploy and unfold. The abrasions are similar to friction
rope burns or those you might get sliding along a carpet
or gymnasium floor. They are not caused by contact with
chemicals. They are not permanent and normally heal
quickly. However, if you haven’t healed significantly
within a few days, or if you have any blistering, see your
doctor immediately.
• As the air bags deflate, you may see some smoke-like
particles. The particles are a normal by-product of the
process that generates the non-toxic gas used for air bag
inflation. These airborne particles may irritate the skin,
eyes, nose, or throat. If you have skin or eye irritation,
rinse the area with cool water. For nose or throat
irritation, move to fresh air. If the irritation continues,
see your doctor. If these particles settle on your clothing,
follow the garment manufacturer’s instructions for
cleaning.
Do not drive your vehicle after the air bags have deployed.
If you are involved in another collision, the air bags will
not be in place to protect you.
WARNING!
Deployed air bags and seat belt pretensioners cannot
protect you in another collision. Have the air bags, seat
belt pretensioners, and the seat belt retractor assem-
blies replaced by an authorized dealer immediately.
Also, have the Occupant Restraint Controller System
serviced as well.
NOTE:
• Air bag covers may not be obvious in the interior trim,
but they will open during air bag deployment.
• After any collision, the vehicle should be taken to an
authorized dealer immediately.
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 57
Enhanced Accident Response System
In the event of an impact, if the communication network
remains intact, and the power remains intact, depending
on the nature of the event, the ORC will determine whether
to have the Enhanced Accident Response System perform
the following functions:
• Cut off fuel to the engine.
• Flash hazard lights as long as the battery has power or
until the hazard light button is pressed. The hazard
lights can be deactivated by pressing the hazard light
button.
• Turn on the interior lights, which remain on as long as
the battery has power.
• Unlock the power door locks.
Enhanced Accident Response System Reset
Procedure
In order to reset the Enhanced Accident Response System
functions after an event, the ignition switch must be
changed from ignition START or ON/RUN to ignition OFF.
Carefully check the vehicle for fuel leaks in the engine
compartment and on the ground near the engine compart-
ment and fuel tank before resetting the system and starting
the engine.
Maintaining Your Air Bag System
WARNING!
• Modifications to any part of the air bag system could
cause it to fail when you need it. You could be
injured if the air bag system is not there to protect
you. Do not modify the components or wiring, in-
cluding adding any kind of badges or stickers to the
steering wheel hub trim cover or the upper right side
of the instrument panel. Do not modify the front
bumper, vehicle body structure, or add aftermarket
side steps or running boards.
• It is dangerous to try to repair any part of the air bag
system yourself. Be sure to tell anyone who works on
your vehicle that it has an air bag system.
• Do not attempt to modify any part of your air bag
system. The air bag may inflate accidentally or may
not function properly if modifications are made.
Take your vehicle to an authorized dealer for any air
bag system service. If your seat, including your trim
cover and cushion, needs to be serviced in any way
(including removal or loosening/tightening of seat
attachment bolts), take the vehicle to your authorized
(Continued)
58 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING! (Continued)
dealer. Only manufacturer approved seat accessories
may be used. If it is necessary to modify the air bag
system for persons with disabilities, contact your
authorized dealer.
Event Data Recorder (EDR)
This vehicle is equipped with an event data recorder
(EDR). The main purpose of an EDR is to record, in certain
crash or near crash-like situations, such as an air bag
deployment or hitting a road obstacle, data that will assist
in understanding how a vehicle’s systems performed. The
EDR is designed to record data related to vehicle dynamics
and safety systems for a short period of time, typically 30
seconds or less. The EDR in this vehicle is designed to
record such data as:
• How various systems in your vehicle were operating;
• Whether or not the driver and passenger safety belts
were buckled/fastened;
• How far (if at all) the driver was depressing the accel-
erator and/or brake pedal; and,
• How fast the vehicle was traveling.
• These data can help provide a better understanding of
the circumstances in which crashes and injuries occur.
NOTE: EDR data are recorded by your vehicle only if a
non-trivial crash situation occurs; no data are recorded by
the EDR under normal driving conditions and no personal
data (e.g., name, gender, age, and crash location) are
recorded. However, other parties, such as law enforcement,
could combine the EDR data with the type of personally
identifying data routinely acquired during a crash investi-
gation.
To read data recorded by an EDR, special equipment is
required, and access to the vehicle or the EDR is needed. In
addition to the vehicle manufacturer, other parties, such as
law enforcement, that have the special equipment, can read
the information if they have access to the vehicle or the
EDR.
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 59
Child Restraints
Everyone in your vehicle needs to be buckled up at all
times, including babies and children. Every state in the
United States, and every Canadian province, requires that
small children ride in proper restraint systems. This is the
law, and you can be prosecuted for ignoring it.
Children 12 years or younger should ride properly buckled
up in a rear seat, if available. According to crash statistics,
children are safer when properly restrained in the rear
seats rather than in the front.
WARNING!
In a collision, an unrestrained child can become a
projectile inside the vehicle. The force required to hold
even an infant on your lap could become so great that
you could not hold the child, no matter how strong you
are. The child and others could be badly injured. Any
child riding in your vehicle should be in a proper
restraint for the child’s size.
There are different sizes and types of restraints for children
from newborn size to the child almost large enough for an
adult safety belt. Always check the child seat Owner’s
Manual to make sure you have the correct seat for your
child. Carefully read and follow all the instructions and
warnings in the child restraint Owner’s Manual and on all
the labels attached to the child restraint.
Before buying any restraint system, make sure that it has a
label certifying that it meets all applicable Safety Stan-
dards. You should also make sure that you can install it in
the vehicle where you will use it.
NOTE:
• For additional information, refer to www.safercar.gov/
parents/index.htm or call: 1–888–327–4236
•
Canadian residents should refer to Transport Canada’s
website for additional information: http://www.tc.gc.ca/
eng/motorvehiclesafety/safedrivers-childsafety-index-53.htm
60 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Summary Of Recommendations For Restraining Children In Vehicles
Child Size, Height, Weight Or Age
Recommended Type Of
Child Restraint
Infants and Toddlers Children who are two years old or
younger and who have not reached
the height or weight limits of their
child restraint
Either an Infant Carrier or a Convert-
ible Child Restraint, facing rearward
in the rear seat of the vehicle
Small Children Children who are at least two years
old or who have out-grown the
height or weight limit of their rear-
facing child restraint
Forward-Facing Child Restraint with
a five-point Harness, facing forward
in the rear seat of the vehicle
Larger Children Children who have out-grown their
forward-facing child restraint, but
are too small to properly fit the vehi-
cle’s seat belt
Belt Positioning Booster Seat and the
vehicle seat belt, seated in the rear
seat of the vehicle
Children Too Large for
Child Restraints
Children 12 years old or younger,
who have out-grown the height or
weight limit of their booster seat
Vehicle Seat Belt, seated in the rear
seat of the vehicle
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 61
Infant And Child Restraints
Safety experts recommend that children ride rear-facing in
the vehicle until they are two years old or until they reach
either the height or weight limit of their rear-facing child
restraint. Two types of child restraints can be used rear-
facing: infant carriers and convertible child seats.
The infant carrier is only used rear-facing in the vehicle. It
is recommended for children from birth until they reach
the weight or height limit of the infant carrier. Convertible
child seats can be used either rear-facing or forward-facing
in the vehicle. Convertible child seats often have a higher
weight limit in the rear-facing direction than infant carriers
do, so they can be used rear-facing by children who have
outgrown their infant carrier but are still less than at least
two years old. Children should remain rear-facing until
they reach the highest weight or height allowed by their
convertible child seat.
WARNING!
• Never place a rear-facing child restraint in front of an
air bag. A deploying passenger front air bag can
cause death or serious injury to a child 12 years or
younger, including a child in a rear-facing child
restraint.
• Only use a rear-facing child restraint in a vehicle
with a rear seat.
62 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
Do not install a rear-facing car seat using a rear support
leg in this vehicle. The floor of this vehicle is not
designed to manage the crash forces of this type of car
seat. In a crash, the support leg may not function as it
was designed by the car seat manufacturer, and your
child may be more severely injured as a result.
Older Children And Child Restraints
Children who are two years old or who have outgrown
their rear-facing convertible child seat can ride forward-
facing in the vehicle. Forward-facing child seats and con-
vertible child seats used in the forward-facing direction are
for children who are over two years old or who have
outgrown the rear-facing weight or height limit of their
rear-facing convertible child seat. Children should remain
in a forward-facing child seat with a harness for as long as
possible, up to the highest weight or height allowed by the
child seat.
All children whose weight or height is above the forward-
facing limit for the child seat should use a belt-positioning
booster seat until the vehicle’s seat belts fit properly. If the
child cannot sit with knees bent over the vehicle’s seat
cushion while the child’s back is against the seatback, they
should use a belt-positioning booster seat. The child and
belt-positioning booster seat are held in the vehicle by the
seat belt.
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 63
WARNING!
• Improper installation can lead to failure of an infant
or child restraint. It could come loose in a collision.
The child could be badly injured or killed. Follow
the child restraint manufacturer’s directions exactly
when installing an infant or child restraint.
• After a child restraint is installed in the vehicle, do
not move the vehicle seat forward or rearward be-
cause it can loosen the child restraint attachments.
Remove the child restraint before adjusting the ve-
hicle seat position. When the vehicle seat has been
adjusted, reinstall the child restraint.
• When your child restraint is not in use, secure it in
the vehicle with a seat belt or LATCH anchorages, or
remove it from the vehicle. Do not leave it loose in
the vehicle. In a sudden stop or accident, it could
strike the occupants or seatbacks and cause serious
personal injury.
Integrated Child Booster Seat — If Equipped
The Integrated Child Booster Seat is located in each out-
board second-row passenger seat.
WARNING!
DEATH or SERIOUS INJURY can occur:
• Follow all instructions on the child restraint and in
the vehicle’s owner’s manual.
• The second row bench with Integrated Child Booster
Seat must remain in the full rear position during use.
• Use only with children who weigh between 48 and
85 pounds (22 and 29 kg) and whose height is
between 47 and 57 in (119 and 145 cm).
To position a child into the Integrated Child Booster Seat
follow these steps:
1. Slide the second row seat to the full rear position to use
the Integrated Child Booster Seat.
NOTE: The second row bench with Integrated Child
Booster Seat must remain in the full rear position during
use.
64 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
2. Pull the release loop forward to release the latch and
seat cushion.
3. Lift the seat cushion up and push back to lock it in the
booster seat position.
4. Place the child upright in the seat with their back firmly
against the seatback.
5. Grasp the latch plate and pull out the seat belt.
6. Slide the latch plate up the webbing as far as necessary
to allow the seat belt to go around the child’s lap.
NOTE: The lap portion of the seat belt should be low on
the hips and as snug as possible.
Release Loop
Booster Seat
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 65
7. Once the seat belt is long enough to fit properly, insert
the latch plate into the buckle until you hear a “click.”
8. To remove the slack from the lap belt, pull upward on
the shoulder portion of the seat belt.
9. To release the seat belt, push the red button on the
buckle.
WARNING!
Securely lock the seat cushion into position before
using the seat. Otherwise, the seat will not provide the
proper stability for child seats and/or passengers. An
improperly latched seat cushion could cause serious
injury or death.
WARNING!
In a severe collision, the booster seat may be damaged
and should be inspected by an authorized dealer and
possibly replaced before it is used again. The inte-
grated booster seat must be replaced following a colli-
sion that meets any of the following criteria:
• The vehicle cannot be driven away from the scene.
• The vehicle door nearest the seat has been damaged.
• At least one occupant was injured in the crash.
• At least one air bag in the vehicle deployed in the
crash.
Proper Belt Use
66 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Children Too Large For Booster Seats
Children who are large enough to wear the shoulder belt
comfortably, and whose legs are long enough to bend over
the front of the seat when their back is against the seatback,
should use the seat belt in a rear seat. Use this simple 5-step
test to decide whether the child can use the vehicle’s seat
belt alone:
1. Can the child sit all the way back against the back of the
vehicle seat?
2. Do the child’s knees bend comfortably over the front of
the vehicle seat – while they are still sitting all the way
back?
3. Does the shoulder belt cross the child’s shoulder be-
tween their neck and arm?
4. Is the lap part of the belt as low as possible, touching the
child’s thighs and not their stomach?
5. Can the child stay seated like this for the whole trip?
If the answer to any of these questions was “no,” then the
child still needs to use a booster seat in this vehicle. If the
child is using the lap/shoulder belt, check seat belt fit
periodically and make sure the seat belt buckle is latched.
A child’s squirming or slouching can move the belt out of
position. If the shoulder belt contacts the face or neck,
move the child closer to the center of the vehicle, or use a
booster seat to position the seat belt on the child correctly.
WARNING!
Never allow a child to put the shoulder belt under an
arm or behind their back. In a crash, the shoulder belt
will not protect a child properly, which may result in
serious injury or death. A child must always wear both
the lap and shoulder portions of the seat belt correctly.
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 67
Recommendations For Attaching Child Restraints
Restraint Type Combined
Weight of the
Child + Child
Restraint
Use Any Attachment Method Shown With An “X” Below
LATCH – Lower
Anchors Only
Seat Belt Only LATCH – Lower
Anchors + Top
Tether Anchor
Seat Belt + Top
Tether Anchor
Rear-Facing
Child Restraint
Up to 65 lbs
(29.5 kg)
XX
Rear-Facing
Child Restraint
More than 65 lbs
(29.5 kg)
X
Forward-Facing
Child Restraint
Up to 65 lbs
(29.5 kg)
XX
Forward-Facing
Child Restraint
More than 65 lbs
(29.5 kg)
X
68 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Lower Anchors And Tethers For CHildren (LATCH)
Restraint System
Your vehicle is equipped with the child restraint anchorage
system called LATCH, which stands for Lower Anchors
and Tethers for CHildren. The LATCH system has three
vehicle anchor points for installing LATCH-equipped child
seats. There are two lower anchorages located at the back
of the seat cushion where it meets the seatback and one top
tether anchorage located behind the seating position. These
anchorages are used to install LATCH-equipped child seats
without using the vehicle’s seat belts. Some seating posi-
tions may have a top tether anchorage but no lower
anchorages. In these seating positions, the seat belt must be
used with the top tether anchorage to install the child
restraint. Please see the following table for more
information.
LATCH Positions For Installing Child Restraints In
This Vehicle
LATCH Label
Lower Anchor / Top Tether Locations (Third Row Shown
– If Equipped)
•
Lower Anchorage Symbol (2 Anchorages Per
Seating Position)
•
Top Tether Anchorage Symbol
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 69
Frequently Asked Questions About Installing Child Restraints With LATCH
What is the weight limit (child’s
weight + weight of the child re-
straint) for using the LATCH an-
chorage system to attach the
child restraint?
65 lbs (29.5 kg) Use the LATCH anchorage system until the combined
weight of the child and the child restraint is 65 lbs
(29.5 kg). Use the seat belt and tether anchor instead of
the LATCH system once the combined weight is more
than 65 lbs (29.5 kg).
Can the LATCH anchorages and
the seat belt be used together to
attach a rear-facing or forward-
facing child restraint?
No Do not use the seat belt when you use the LATCH an-
chorage system to attach a rear-facing or forward-facing
child restraint.
Can two child restraints be at-
tached using a common lower
LATCH anchorage?
No Never “share” a LATCH anchorage with two or more
child restraints. If the center position does not have dedi-
cated LATCH lower anchorages, use the seat belt to in-
stall a child seat in the center position next to a child seat
using the LATCH anchorages in an outboard position.
Can the rear-facing child restraint
touch the back of the front pas-
senger seat?
Yes The child seat may touch the back of the front passenger
seat if the child restraint manufacturer also allows con-
tact. See your child restraint Owner’s Manual for more
information.
Can the head restraints be re-
moved?
Yes 5 Passenger Vehicle: All second row head restraints are
removable.
7 Passenger Vehicle: All second and third row head re-
straints are removable.
70 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Locating The LATCH Anchorages
The lower anchorages are round bars that are
found at the rear of the seat cushion where it
meets the seatback. They are just visible when
you lean into the rear seat to install the child
restraint. You will easily feel them if you run your finger
along the gap between the seatback and seat cushion.
Locating The Upper Tether Anchorages
There are tether strap anchorages behind each
second row seating position, located on the back
of the seat, near the floor.
LATCH-compatible child restraint systems will be
equipped with a rigid bar or a flexible strap on each side.
Each will have a hook or connector to attach to the lower
anchorage and a way to tighten the connection to the
anchorage. Forward-facing child restraints and some rear-
facing child restraints will also be equipped with a tether
Rear Seat Lower Anchorages
Tether Anchorages (Second Row 60/40)
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 71
strap. The tether strap will have a hook at the end to attach
to the top tether anchorage and a way to tighten the strap
after it is attached to the anchorage.
Center Seat LATCH
This vehicle has 5 lower LATCH anchorages in the rear
seat. Anchorages A and B are used for the right outboard
position behind the front passenger (1). Anchorages D and
E are used for the left outboard position behind the driver
(3). Anchorages B and C are used for the center seating
position (2). Do not install a LATCH-compatible child
restraint using anchorages C and D. This is not a LATCH-
compatible position in your vehicle.
You can install up to two child seats using the LATCH
system at the same time. If you are installing three child
restraints, you must use the seat belt to install the center
child restraint. You can use either the LATCH anchors for
positions (1) and (3) or the vehicle’s seat belt for installing
the child seats in the outboard positions.
Options for installing two child seats using the LATCH
anchorages in this vehicle:
1. Right and left outboard seating positions (1 and 3):
Install the child seats in the right and left outboard
seating positions using lower anchorages A and B, and
D and E. Do not use the center seat anchorage, C. If the
child seats do not block the center seat belt webbing and
buckle, the center seat belt can be used to restrain an
occupant or child restraint in the center seating position.
Lower Anchors
72 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
2. Left outboard and center seating positions (3 and 2):
Install the first child seat in the left outboard seating
position using lower anchorages D and E. Install the
second child seat using the center anchorages, B and C.
Do not use the outer anchorage closest to the opposite
door, A. Do not use the remaining right outboard
seating position (1) for any occupant. The center child
restraint will block the seat belt buckle for this position.
WARNING!
• Use anchorages B and C to install a LATCH-
compatible child restraint in the center seating posi-
tion (2). Do not install a LATCH-compatible child
restraint using anchorages C and D. This is not a
LATCH-compatible position in your vehicle.
• A child restraint installed in the center position (2)
will block the seat belt buckle for the empty right
outboard seating position (1). Do not use this seat for
another occupant.
• Never use the same lower anchorage to attach more
than one child restraint.
• If you are installing three child restraints next to each
other, you must use the seat belt and the center tether
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
anchor for the center position. You can then use
either the LATCH anchors or the vehicle’s seat belt
for installing the child seats in the outboard posi-
tions. Please refer to “Installing the LATCH-
Compatible Child Restraint System” for typical in-
stallation instructions.
Always follow the directions of the child restraint manu-
facturer when installing your child restraint. Not all child
restraint systems will be installed as described here.
To Install A LATCH-Compatible Child Restraint
If the selected seating position has a Switchable Automatic
Locking Retractor (ALR) seat belt, stow the seat belt,
following the instructions below. See the section “Installing
Child Restraints Using The Vehicle Seat Belt” to check what
type of seat belt each seating position has.
1. Loosen the adjusters on the lower straps and on the
tether strap of the child seat so that you can more easily
attach the hooks or connectors to the vehicle anchor-
ages.
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 73
2. Place the child seat between the lower anchorages for
that seating position. For some second row seats, you
may need to recline the seat and/or raise the head
restraint to get a better fit. If the rear seat can be moved
forward and rearward in the vehicle, you may wish to
move it to its rear-most position to make room for the
child seat. You may also move the front seat forward to
allow more room for the child seat.
3. Attach the lower hooks or connectors of the child
restraint to the lower anchorages in the selected seating
position.
4. If the child restraint has a tether strap, connect it to the
top tether anchorage. See the section “Installing Child
Restraints Using The Top Tether Anchorage” for direc-
tions to attach a tether anchor.
5. Tighten all of the straps as you push the child restraint
rearward and downward into the seat. Remove slack in
the straps according to the child restraint manufactur-
er’s instructions.
6. Test that the child restraint is installed tightly by pulling
back and forth on the child seat at the belt path. It
should not move more than 1 inch (25.4 mm) in any
direction.
How To Stow An Unused Switchable-ALR (ALR)
Seat Belt
When using the LATCH attaching system to install a child
restraint, stow all ALR seat belts that are not being used by
other occupants or being used to secure child restraints. An
unused belt could injure a child if they play with it and
accidentally lock the seat belt retractor. Before installing a
child restraint using the LATCH system, buckle the seat
belt behind the child restraint and out of the child’s reach.
If the buckled seat belt interferes with the child restraint
installation, instead of buckling it behind the child re-
straint, route the seat belt through the child restraint belt
path and then buckle it. Do not lock the seat belt. Remind
all children in the vehicle that the seat belts are not toys and
that they should not play with them.
WARNING!
• Improper installation of a child restraint to the
LATCH anchorages can lead to failure of the re-
straint. The child could be badly injured or killed.
Follow the child restraint manufacturer’s directions
exactly when installing an infant or child restraint.
(Continued)
74 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING! (Continued)
• Child restraint anchorages are designed to withstand
only those loads imposed by correctly-fitted child
restraints. Under no circumstances are they to be
used for adult seat belts, harnesses, or for attaching
other items or equipment to the vehicle.
Installing Child Restraints Using The Vehicle Seat
Belt
Child restraint systems are designed to be secured in
vehicle seats by lap belts or the lap belt portion of a
lap/shoulder belt.
WARNING!
• Improper installation or failure to properly secure a
child restraint can lead to failure of the restraint. The
child could be badly injured or killed.
• Follow the child restraint manufacturer’s directions
exactly when installing an infant or child restraint.
The seat belts in the passenger seating positions are
equipped with either a Switchable Automatic Locking
Retractor (ALR) or a cinching latch plate or both. Both
types of seat belts are designed to keep the lap portion of
the seat belt tight around the child restraint so that it is not
necessary to use a locking clip. The ALR retractor can be
“switched” into a locked mode by pulling all of the
webbing out of the retractor and then letting the webbing
retract back into the retractor. If it is locked, the ALR will
make a clicking noise while the webbing is pulled back into
the retractor. Refer to the “Automatic Locking Mode”
description in “Switchable Automatic Locking Retractors
(ALR)” under “Occupant Restraint Systems” for additional
information on ALR. The cinching latch plate is designed to
hold the lap portion of the seat belt tight when webbing is
pulled tight and straight through a child restraint’s belt
path.
Please see the table below and the following sections for
more information.
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 75
Lap/Shoulder Belt Systems For Installing Child
Restraints In This Vehicle
Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) Locations (Third
Row Shown)
• ALR = Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor
•
Top Tether Anchorage Symbol
76 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Frequently Asked Questions About Installing Child Restraints With Seat Belts
What is the weight limit (child’s weight +
weight of the child restraint) for using the
Tether Anchor with the seat belt to attach a
forward facing child restraint?
Weight limit of the
Child Restraint
Always use the tether anchor when using the
seat belt to install a forward facing child re-
straint, up to the recommended weight limit
of the child restraint.
Can the rear-facing child restraint touch the
back of the front passenger seat?
Yes Contact between the front passenger seat and
the child restraint is allowed, if the child re-
straint manufacturer also allows contact.
Can the head restraints be removed? Yes All head restraints can be removed.
Can the buckle stalk be twisted to tighten the
seat belt against the belt path of the child
restraint?
Yes In positions with cinching latch plates
(CINCH), the buckle stalk may be twisted up
to 3 full turns. Do not twist the buckle stalk
in a seating position with an ALR retractor.
Installing A Child Restraint With A Switchable
Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR):
Child restraint systems are designed to be secured in
vehicle seats by lap belts or the lap belt portion of a
lap/shoulder belt.
WARNING!
• Improper installation or failure to properly secure a
child restraint can lead to failure of the restraint. The
child could be badly injured or killed.
• Follow the child restraint manufacturer’s directions
exactly when installing an infant or child restraint.
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 77
1. Place the child seat in the center of the seating position.
For some second row seats, you may need to recline the
seat and/or raise the head restraint to get a better fit. If
the rear seat can be moved forward and rearward in the
vehicle, you may wish to move it to its rear-most
position to make room for the child seat. You may also
move the front seat forward to allow more room for the
child seat.
2. Pull enough of the seat belt webbing from the retractor
to pass it through the belt path of the child restraint. Do
not twist the belt webbing in the belt path.
3. Slide the latch plate into the buckle until you hear a
“click.”
4. Pull on the webbing to make the lap portion tight
against the child seat.
5. To lock the seat belt, pull down on the shoulder part of
the belt until you have pulled all the seat belt webbing
out of the retractor. Then, allow the webbing to retract
back into the retractor. As the webbing retracts, you will
hear a clicking sound. This means the seat belt is now in
the Automatic Locking mode.
6. Try to pull the webbing out of the retractor. If it is
locked, you should not be able to pull out any webbing.
If the retractor is not locked, repeat step 5.
7. Finally, pull up on any excess webbing to tighten the lap
portion around the child restraint while you push the
child restraint rearward and downward into the vehicle
seat.
8. If the child restraint has a top tether strap and the
seating position has a top tether anchorage, connect the
tether strap to the anchorage and tighten the tether
strap. See the section “Installing Child Restraints Using
the Top Tether Anchorage” for directions to attach a
tether anchor.
9. Test that the child restraint is installed tightly by pulling
back and forth on the child seat at the belt path. It
should not move more than 1 inch (25.4 mm) in any
direction.
Any seat belt system will loosen with time, so check the
belt occasionally, and pull it tight if necessary.
78 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Installing A Child Restraint With A Cinching Latch
Plate (CINCH) — If Equipped:
Child restraint systems are designed to be secured in
vehicle seats by lap belts or the lap belt portion of a
lap/shoulder belt.
WARNING!
• Improper installation or failure to properly secure a
child restraint can lead to failure of the restraint. The
child could be badly injured or killed.
• Follow the child restraint manufacturer’s directions
exactly when installing an infant or child restraint.
1. Place the child seat in the center of the seating position.
For some second row seats, you may need to recline the
seat and / or raise the head restraint to get a better fit. If
the rear seat can be moved forward and rearward in the
vehicle, you may wish to move it to its rear-most
position to make room for the child seat. You may also
move the front seat forward to allow more room for the
child seat.
2. Next, pull enough of the seat belt webbing from the
retractor to pass it through the belt path of the child
restraint. Do not twist the belt webbing in the belt path.
3. Slide the latch plate into the buckle until you hear a
“click.”
4. Finally, pull up on any excess webbing to tighten the lap
portion around the child restraint while you push the
child restraint rearward and downward into the vehicle
seat.
5. If the child restraint has a top tether strap and the
seating position has a top tether anchorage, connect the
tether strap to the anchorage and tighten the tether
strap. See the section “Installing Child Restraints Using
the Top Tether Anchorage” for directions to attach a
tether anchor.
6. Test that the child restraint is installed tightly by pulling
back and forth on the child seat at the belt path. It
should not move more than 1 inch (25.4 mm) in any
direction.
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 79
Any seat belt system will loosen with time, so check the
belt occasionally, and pull it tight if necessary.
If the buckle or the cinching latch plate is too close to the
belt path opening of the child restraint, you may have
trouble tightening the seat belt. If this happens, disconnect
the latch plate from the buckle and twist the short buckle-
end belt up to three full turns to shorten it. Insert the latch
plate into the buckle with the release button facing out,
away from the child restraint. Repeat steps 4 to 6, above, to
complete the installation of the child restraint.
If the belt still cannot be tightened after you shorten the
buckle, disconnect the latch plate from the buckle, turn the
buckle around one half turn, and insert the latch plate into
the buckle again. If you still cannot make the child restraint
installation tight, try a different seating position.
Installing Child Restraints Using The Top Tether
Anchorage
WARNING!
Do not attach a tether strap for a rear-facing car seat to
any location in front of the car seat, including the seat
frame or a tether anchorage. Only attach the tether
strap of a rear-facing car seat to the tether anchorage
that is approved for that seating position, located
behind the top of the vehicle seat. See the section
“Lower Anchors and Tethers for CHildren (LATCH)
Restraint System” for the location of approved tether
anchorages in your vehicle.
80 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
1. Look behind the seating position where you plan to
install the child restraint to find the tether anchorage.
You may need to move the seat forward to provide
better access to the tether anchorage. If there is no top
tether anchorage for that seating position, move the
child restraint to another position in the vehicle if one is
available.
2.
Route the tether strap to provide the most direct path for
the strap between the anchor and the child seat. If your
vehicle is equipped with adjustable rear head restraints,
raise the head restraint, and where possible, route the tether
strap under the head restraint and between the two posts.
If not possible, lower the head restraint and pass the tether
strap around the outboard side of the head restraint.
3. Attach the tether strap hook of the child restraint to the
top tether anchorage as shown in the diagram.
4. Remove slack in the tether strap according to the child
restraint manufacturer’s instructions.
Seat Track Release Lever
Rear Seat Tether Strap Mounting
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 81
WARNING!
• An incorrectly anchored tether strap could lead to
increased head motion and possible injury to the
child. Use only the anchorage position directly be-
hind the child seat to secure a child restraint top
tether strap.
• If your vehicle is equipped with a split rear seat,
make sure the tether strap does not slip into the
opening between the seatbacks as you remove slack
in the strap.
Transporting Pets
Air Bags deploying in the front seat could harm your pet.
An unrestrained pet will be thrown about and possibly
injured, or injure a passenger during panic braking or in a
collision.
Pets should be restrained in the rear seat in pet harnesses or
pet carriers that are secured by seat belts.
ENGINE BREAK-IN RECOMMENDATIONS
A long break-in period is not required for the engine and
drivetrain (transmission and axle) in your vehicle.
Drive moderately during the first 300 miles (500 km). After
the initial 60 miles (100 km), speeds up to 50 or 55 mph (80
or 90 km/h) are desirable.
While cruising, brief full-throttle acceleration within the
limits of local traffic laws contributes to a good break-in.
Wide-open throttle acceleration in low gear can be detri-
mental and should be avoided.
The engine oil installed in the engine at the factory is a
high-quality energy conserving type lubricant. Oil changes
should be consistent with anticipated climate conditions
under which vehicle operations will occur. For the recom-
mended viscosity and quality grades, refer to “Mainte-
nance Procedures” in “Maintaining Your Vehicle.”
CAUTION!
Never use Non-Detergent Oil or Straight Mineral Oil
in the engine or damage may result.
NOTE: A new engine may consume some oil during its
first few thousand miles (kilometers) of operation. This
should be considered a normal part of the break-in and not
interpreted as a problem. Please check your oil level with
the engine oil indicator often during the break in period.
Add oil as required.
82 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
SAFETY TIPS
Transporting Passengers
NEVER TRANSPORT PASSENGERS IN THE CARGO
AREA.
WARNING!
• Do not leave children or animals inside parked
vehicles in hot weather. Interior heat build-up may
cause serious injury or death.
• It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo area,
inside or outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people
riding in these areas are more likely to be seriously
injured or killed.
• Do not allow people to ride in any area of your
vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat belts.
• Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and
using a seat belt properly.
• On seven passenger models, do not drive the vehicle
with the second row passenger seat in the easy
entry/exit position (seat cushion flipped upward and
seat moved forward), as this position is only in-
tended for entering and exiting the third row seats.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
Failure to follow this warning may result in personal
injury.
• On seven passenger models, do not allow a passen-
ger to sit in a third row seat with the second row
seatback(s) folded flat. In a collision, the passenger
could slide underneath the seat belt and be seriously
or even fatally injured.
Exhaust Gas
WARNING!
Exhaust gases can injure or kill. They contain carbon
monoxide (CO), which is colorless and odorless.
Breathing it can make you unconscious and can even-
tually poison you. To avoid breathing (CO), follow
these safety tips:
• Do not run the engine in a closed garage or in
confined areas any longer than needed to move your
vehicle in or out of the area.
(Continued)
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 83
WARNING! (Continued)
• If you are required to drive with the trunk/liftgate/
rear doors open, make sure that all windows are
closed and the climate control BLOWER switch is set
at high speed. DO NOT use the recirculation mode.
• If it is necessary to sit in a parked vehicle with the
engine running, adjust your heating or cooling con-
trols to force outside air into the vehicle. Set the
blower at high speed.
The best protection against carbon monoxide entry into the
vehicle body is a properly maintained engine exhaust
system.
Whenever a change is noticed in the sound of the exhaust
system, when exhaust fumes can be detected inside the
vehicle, or when the underside or rear of the vehicle is
damaged, have a competent mechanic inspect the complete
exhaust system and adjacent body areas for broken, dam-
aged, deteriorated, or mispositioned parts. Open seams or
loose connections could permit exhaust fumes to seep into
the passenger compartment. In addition, inspect the ex-
haust system each time the vehicle is raised for lubrication
or oil change. Replace as required.
Safety Checks You Should Make Inside The Vehicle
Seat Belts
Inspect the seat belt system periodically, checking for cuts,
frays, and loose parts. Damaged parts must be replaced
immediately. Do not disassemble or modify the system.
Front seat belt assemblies must be replaced after a collision.
Rear seat belt assemblies must be replaced after a collision
if they have been damaged (i.e., bent retractor, torn web-
bing, etc.). If there is any question regarding belt or
retractor condition, replace the seat belt.
Air Bag Warning Light
The light should turn on and remain on for four
to six seconds as a bulb check when the ignition
switch is first turned ON. If the light is not lit
during starting, or if the light stays on, flickers,
or turns on while driving, have the system checked by an
authorized dealer.
84 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Defroster
Check operation by selecting the defrost mode and place
the blower control on high speed. You should be able to
feel the air directed against the windshield. See your
authorized dealer for service if your defroster is inoper-
able.
Floor Mat Safety Information
Always use floor mats designed to fit the footwell of your
vehicle. Use only floor mats that leave the pedal area
unobstructed and that are firmly secured so that they
cannot slip out of position and interfere with the pedals or
impair safe operation of your vehicle in other ways.
WARNING!
An improperly attached, damaged, folded, or stacked
floor mat, or damaged floor mat fasteners may cause
your floor mat to interfere with the accelerator, brake,
or clutch pedals and cause a loss of vehicle control. To
prevent SERIOUS INJURY or DEATH:
• ALWAYS securely attach
your floor mat using the
floor mat fasteners. DO NOT install your floor mat
upside down or turn your floor mat over. Lightly pull
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
to confirm mat is secured using the floor mat fasten-
ers on a regular basis.
• ALWAYS REMOVE THE EXISTING FLOOR MAT
FROM THE VEHICLE
before installing any other
floor mat. NEVER install or stack an additional floor
mat on top of an existing floor mat.
• ONLY install floor mats designed to fit your vehicle.
NEVER install a floor mat that cannot be properly
attached and secured to your vehicle. If a floor mat
needs to be replaced, only use a FCA approved floor
mat for the specific make, model, and year of your
vehicle.
• ONLY use the driver’s side floor mat on the driver’s
side floor area. To check for interference, with the
vehicle properly parked with the engine off, fully
depress the accelerator, the brake, and the clutch
pedal (if present) to check for interference. If your
floor mat interferes with the operation of any pedal,
or is not secure to the floor, remove the floor mat
from the vehicle and place the floor mat in your
trunk.
(Continued)
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 85
WARNING! (Continued)
• ONLY use the passenger’s side floor mat on the
passenger’s side floor area.
• ALWAYS make sure objects cannot fall or slide into
the driver’s side floor area when the vehicle is
moving. Objects can become trapped under accelera-
tor, brake, or clutch pedals and could cause a loss of
vehicle control.
• NEVER place any objects under the floor mat (e.g.,
towels, keys, etc.). These objects could change the
position of the floor mat and may cause interference
with the accelerator, brake, or clutch pedals.
• If the vehicle carpet has been removed and re-
installed, always properly attach carpet to the floor
and check the floor mat fasteners are secure to the
vehicle carpet. Fully depress each pedal to check for
interference with the accelerator, brake, or clutch
pedals then re-install the floor mats.
• It is recommended to only use mild soap and water
to clean your floor mats. After cleaning, always check
your floor mat has been properly installed and is
secured to your vehicle using the floor mat fasteners
by lightly pulling mat.
Periodic Safety Checks You Should Make Outside
The Vehicle
Tires
Examine tires for excessive tread wear and uneven wear
patterns. Check for stones, nails, glass, or other objects
lodged in the tread or sidewall. Inspect the tread for cuts
and cracks. Inspect sidewalls for cuts, cracks, and bulges.
Check the wheel nuts for tightness. Check the tires (includ-
ing spare) for proper cold inflation pressure.
Lights
Have someone observe the operation of brake lights and
exterior lights while you work the controls. Check turn
signal and high beam indicator lights on the instrument
panel.
Door Latches
Check for proper closing, latching, and locking.
Fluid Leaks
Check area under vehicle after overnight parking for fuel,
engine coolant, oil, or other fluid leaks. Also, if gasoline
fumes are detected or if fuel, power steering fluid (if
equipped), or brake fluid leaks are suspected. The cause
should be located and corrected immediately.
86 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
CONTENTS
䡵 MIRRORS ..............................91
▫ Inside Day/Night Mirror — If Equipped ......91
▫ Automatic Dimming Mirror — If Equipped .....91
▫ Outside Mirrors ........................92
▫ Power Mirrors .........................93
▫ Power Folding Mirrors — If Equipped.........94
▫ Manual Folding Mirrors — If Equipped .......94
▫ Heated Mirrors — If Equipped .............95
▫ Illuminated Vanity Mirrors — If Equipped .....95
䡵 UCONNECT PHONE (4.3) ..................96
▫ Radio 4.3 .............................96
▫ Operation ............................98
▫ Phone Call Features .....................103
▫ Uconnect Phone Features .................106
▫ Advanced Phone Connectivity .............109
▫ Things You Should Know About Your Uconnect
Phone ..............................109
▫ General Information ....................113
䡵 UCONNECT PHONE (RADIO 8.4/8.4 NAV) ....113
▫ Operation ............................116
▫ Phone Call Features .....................124
▫ Uconnect Phone Features .................128
▫ Advanced Phone Connectivity .............131
▫ Things You Should Know About Your Uconnect
Phone ..............................132
▫ General Information .....................143
䡵 VOICE COMMAND (RADIO 8.4/8.4 NAV) .....143
▫ Radio 8.4/8.4 NAV ......................143
▫ Uconnect Voice Commands ................145
3
䡵 SEATS................................155
▫ Driver’s Power Seat — If Equipped .........156
▫ Power Lumbar — If Equipped..............157
▫ Front Heated Seats — If Equipped ..........157
▫ Manual Front Seat Adjustments .............159
▫ Recliner Adjustment ....................159
▫ Driver’s Seat Height Adjustment — If
Equipped ............................160
▫ Fold-Flat Front Passenger Seat — If Equipped . .161
▫ Head Restraints .......................161
▫ Third Row Passenger Seats — Seven Passenger
Models ..............................165
▫ 60/40 Split Second-Row Passenger Seats ......165
▫ 50/50 Split Third-Row Passenger Seats With
Fold-Flat Feature — Seven Passenger Models . . .171
䡵 TO OPEN AND CLOSE THE HOOD ..........173
䡵 LIGHTS ..............................174
▫ Headlight Switch ......................174
▫ Automatic Headlights ...................175
▫ Headlights On With Wipers ...............175
▫ Headlight Time Delay ...................176
▫ Daytime Running Lights (DRL) ............176
▫ Lights-On Reminder ....................176
▫ Fog Lights — If Equipped ................177
▫ Multifunction Lever ....................177
▫ Turn Signals ..........................178
▫ Lane Change Assist .....................178
▫ High/Low Beam Switch .................178
▫ Flash-To-Pass .........................178
▫ Interior
Lights .........................178
▫ Map/Reading Lights ....................179
䡵 WINDSHIELD WIPERS AND WASHERS .......180
▫ Intermittent Wiper System ................180
▫ Windshield Wiper Operation ...............181
▫ Windshield Washers ....................182
88 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
▫ Mist Feature ..........................182
▫ Headlights On With Wipers ...............182
䡵 TILT/TELESCOPING STEERING COLUMN .....183
䡵 HEATED STEERING WHEEL — IF EQUIPPED . .183
䡵 SPEED CONTROL — IF EQUIPPED ..........184
▫ To Activate ...........................185
▫ To Set A Desired Speed...................185
▫ To Deactivate..........................186
▫ To Resume Speed ......................186
▫ To Vary The Speed Setting ................186
▫ To Accelerate For Passing .................187
䡵 PARKSENSE REAR PARK ASSIST —
IF EQUIPPED ..........................188
▫ ParkSense Sensors ......................188
▫ ParkSense Warning Display................188
▫ ParkSense Display ......................189
▫ Enabling And Disabling ParkSense ..........192
▫ Service The ParkSense Rear Park Assist System. .192
▫ Cleaning The ParkSense System.............192
▫ ParkSense System Usage Precautions .........193
䡵 PARKVIEW REAR BACK UP CAMERA —
IF EQUIPPED ..........................194
䡵 OVERHEAD CONSOLE ...................196
▫ Courtesy/Reading Lights .................196
▫ Sunglasses Storage .....................197
▫ Interior Observation Mirror ...............197
▫ Power Sunroof Switch — If Equipped ........197
䡵 GARAGE DOOR OPENER — IF EQUIPPED . . . .198
▫ Befor
e You Begin Programming HomeLink .....198
▫ Programming A Rolling Code ..............199
▫ Programming A Non-Rolling Code ..........201
▫ Canadian/Gate Operator Programming .......202
▫ Using HomeLink .......................203
▫ Security..............................204
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 89
▫ Troubleshooting Tips ....................204
▫ General Information .....................205
䡵 POWER SUNROOF — IF EQUIPPED .........205
▫ Opening Sunroof — Express ...............206
▫ Opening Sunroof — Manual Mode ..........206
▫ Closing Sunroof — Express ................206
▫ Closing Sunroof — Manual Mode ...........206
▫ Pinch Protect Feature ....................207
▫ Venting Sunroof — Express ................207
▫ Sunshade Operation .....................207
▫ Wind Buffeting ........................207
▫ Sunroof Maintenance ....................207
▫ Ignition Off Operation ...................207
䡵 POWER OUTLETS .......................208
䡵 POWER INVERTER — IF EQUIPPED .........211
▫ Power Inverter Operation .................212
䡵 CUPHOLDERS .........................213
䡵 STORAGE .............................214
▫ Glove Compartment .....................214
▫ Floor Console Storage ...................215
▫ Center Console Storage...................215
▫ Flip ’n Stow Front Passenger Seat Storage —
If Equipped ...........................217
▫ Second-Row Map Pocket And Grocery Retainers —
If Equipped ...........................218
▫ In-Floor Storage Bin With Removable Liner . . . .218
䡵 CARGO AREA FEATURES .................219
▫ Cargo Management System ...............219
䡵 REAR
WINDOW FEATURES ...............223
▫ Rear Window Wiper/Washer ..............223
▫ Rear Window Defroster ..................224
䡵 ROOF LUGGAGE RACK — IF EQUIPPED ......225
90 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
MIRRORS
Inside Day/Night Mirror — If Equipped
The mirror head can be adjusted up, down, left, and right
for various drivers. The mirror should be adjusted to center
on the view through the rear window.
Headlight glare from vehicles behind you can be reduced
by moving the small control under the mirror to the night
position (toward the rear of the vehicle). The mirror should
be adjusted while set in the day position (toward the
windshield).
NOTE: A single ball joint mirror is provided in the vehicle.
It is a twist on mirror that has a fixed position at the
windshield. The mirror installs on the windshield button
with a counterclockwise rotation and requires no tools for
mounting. The mirror head can be adjusted left and right
and tilted up and down for various drivers. The mirror
should be adjusted to center on the view through the rear
window.
Automatic Dimming Mirror — If Equipped
A single ball joint mirror is provided in the vehicle. It is a
twist on mirror that has a fixed position at the windshield.
The mirror installs on the windshield button with a coun-
terclockwise rotation and requires no tools for mounting.
The mirror head can be adjusted up, down, left, and right
for various drivers. The mirror should be adjusted to center
on the view through the rear window.
This mirror automatically adjusts for headlight glare from
vehicles behind you.
Adjusting Rearview Mirror
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 91
NOTE:
• The Automatic Dimming Mirror feature is disabled
when the vehicle is in REVERSE to improve rear view
viewing.
• The Automatic Dimming Mirror feature can be turned
on or off using the Uconnect System. Refer to “Uconnect
Settings” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for
further information.
CAUTION!
To avoid damage to the mirror during cleaning, never
spray any cleaning solution directly onto the mirror.
Apply the solution onto a clean cloth and wipe the
mirror clean.
Outside Mirrors
To receive maximum benefit, adjust the outside mirror(s) to
center on the adjacent lane of traffic and a slight overlap of
the view obtained from the inside mirror.
NOTE: The passenger side convex outside mirror will give
a much wider view to the rear, and especially of the lane
next to your vehicle.
WARNING!
Vehicles and other objects seen in the passenger side
convex mirror will look smaller and farther away than
they really are. Relying too much on your passenger
side convex mirror could cause you to collide with
another vehicle or other object. Use your inside mirror
when judging the size or distance of a vehicle seen in
the passenger side convex mirror.
Automatic Dimming Mirror
92 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Power Mirrors
The power mirror switch is located on the driver’s door
trim panel.
Models Without Express Window Feature
Push the mirror select button marked L (left) or R (right).
Then, push one of the four arrow buttons to move the
mirror in the direction the arrow is pointing.
Models With Express Window Feature
Push and release the mirror select button marked L (left) or
R (right). Then, push one of the four arrow buttons to move
the mirror in the direction the arrow is pointing. The
selection times out after 30 seconds of inactivity in order to
guard against accidentally changing a mirror position
following an adjustment.
NOTE: A light in the selected button will illuminate
indicating the mirror is activated and can be adjusted.
Power Mirror Switches
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 93
Power Folding Mirrors — If Equipped
The switch for the power folding mirrors is located be-
tween the power mirror switches L (left) and R (right).
Push the switch once and the mirrors will fold in, pushing
the switch a second time will return the mirrors to the
normal driving position.
NOTE: If the vehicle speed is greater than 10 mph
(16 km/h), the folding feature will be disabled.
If the mirrors are in the folded position, and vehicle speed
is equal or greater than 10 mph (16 km/h), they will
automatically unfold.
Resetting The Power Folding Outside Mirrors
You may need to reset the power folding mirrors if the
following occurs:
• The mirrors are accidentally blocked while folding.
• The mirrors are accidentally manually folded/unfolded.
• The mirrors come out of the unfolded position.
• The mirrors shake and vibrate at normal driving speeds.
To reset the power folding mirrors: fold and unfold them
by pushing the button. (this may require multiple button
pushes). This resets them to their normal position.
Manual Folding Mirrors — If Equipped
Some models have exterior mirrors that are hinged. The
hinge allows the mirror to pivot forward and rearward to
resist damage. The hinge has three detent positions: for-
ward, rearward and normal.
Power Folding Mirror Switch
94 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Heated Mirrors — If Equipped
These mirrors are heated to melt frost or ice. This
feature will be activated whenever you turn on the
rear window defroster (if equipped). Refer to “Rear Win-
dow Features” in “Understanding The Features Of Your
Vehicle” for further information.
Illuminated Vanity Mirrors — If Equipped
An illuminated vanity mirror is on each sun visor. To use
the mirror, rotate the sun visor downward and swing the
mirror cover upward. The light will turn on automatically.
Closing the mirror cover will turn off the light.
Sun Visor “Slide-On Rod” Feature — If Equipped
This feature allows for additional flexibility in positioning
the visor to block out the sun.
1. Fold down the sun visor.
2. Unclip the visor from the center clip.
3. Pull the sun visor toward the inside rearview mirror to
extend it.
Illuminated Vanity Mirror
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 95
UCONNECT PHONE (4.3)
Radio 4.3
Uconnect Phone is a voice-activated, hands-free, in-vehicle
communications system. Uconnect Phone allows you to
dial a phone number with your mobile phone.
Uconnect Phone supports the following features:
Voice Activated Features:
• Hands Free dialing via Voice (“Call John Smith Mobile”
or, “Dial 248-555-1212”)
• Redialing last dialed numbers (“Redial”)
• Calling Back the last incoming call number (“Call Back”)
• View Call logs on screen (“Show incoming calls,” “Show
Outgoing calls,” “Show missed Calls,” “Show Recent
Calls”)
• Searching Contacts phone number (“Search for John
Smith Mobile”)
Screen Activated Features:
• Dialing via Keypad using touchscreen
• Viewing and Calling contacts from Phonebooks dis-
played on the touchscreen
• Setting Favorite Contact Phone numbers so they are
easily accessible on the Main Phone screen
• Viewing and Calling contacts from Recent Call logs
• Listen to Music on your Bluetooth Device via the
touchscreen
• Pairing up to ten phones/audio devices for easy access
to connect to them quickly
Your mobile phone’s audio is transmitted through your
vehicle’s audio system; the system will automatically mute
your radio when using the Uconnect Phone.
For Uconnect Customer Support:
• U.S. residents – visit UconnectPhone.com or call 1-877-
855-8400.
• Canadian Residents - visit UconnectPhone.com or call,
1-800-465-2001 (English) or 1-800-387-9983 (French).
If your mobile phone only supports the Headset Profile
you may not be able to use any Uconnect Phone features.
Refer to your mobile service provider or the phone manu-
facturer for details.
Uconnect Phone allows you to transfer calls between the
system and your mobile phone as you enter or exit your
96 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
vehicle and enables you to mute the system’s microphone
for private conversation.
WARNING!
Any voice commanded system should be used only in
safe driving conditions following all applicable laws,
including laws regarding phone use. Your attention
should be focused on safely operating the vehicle.
Failure to do so may result in a collision causing
serious injury or death.
The Uconnect Phone is driven through your Bluetooth
“Hands-Free Profile” mobile phone. Uconnect features
Bluetooth technology - the global standard that enables
different electronic devices to connect to each other with-
out wires or a docking station, so Uconnect Phone works
no matter where you stow your mobile phone (be it your
purse, pocket, or briefcase), as long as your phone is turned
on and has been paired to the vehicle’s Uconnect Phone.
The Uconnect Phone allows up to ten mobile phones or
audio devices to be linked to the system. Only one linked
(or paired) mobile phone and one audio device can be used
with the system at a time. The system is available in
English, Spanish, or French languages.
Uconnect Phone Button
The Uconnect Phone
Button is used to enter
the phone mode and make calls, show recent,
incoming, outgoing calls, view phonebook
etc., When you press the button you will hear
a BEEP. The beep is your signal to give a command.
Uconnect Voice Command Button
The Uconnect Voice Command
Button is
only used for “barge in” and when you are
already in a call and you want to send Tones or
make another call.
The Uconnect Phone is fully integrated with the vehicle’s
audio system. The volume of the Uconnect Phone can be
adjusted either from the radio volume control knob or from
the steering wheel radio control (right switch), if so
equipped.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 97
Operation
Voice commands can be used to operate the Uconnect
Phone and to navigate through the Uconnect Phone menu
structure. Voice commands are required after most
Uconnect Phone prompts. There are two general methods
for how Voice Command works:
1. Say compound commands like “Call John Smith mo-
bile.”
2. Say the individual commands and allow the system to
guide you to complete the task.
You will be prompted for a specific command and then
guided through the available options.
• Prior to giving a voice command, one must wait for the
beep, which follows the “Listen” prompt or another
prompt.
• For certain operations, compound commands can be
used. For example, instead of saying “Call” and then
“John Smith” and then “mobile,” the following com-
pound command can be said: “Call John Smith mobile.”
• For each feature explanation in this section, only the
compound command form of the voice command is
given. You can also break the commands into parts and
say each part of the command when you are asked for it.
For example, you can use the compound command form
voice command “Search for John Smith,” or you can
break the compound command form into two voice
commands: “Search Contact” and when asked “John
Smith.” Please remember, the Uconnect Phone works
best when you talk in a normal conversational tone, as if
speaking to someone sitting a few feet/meters away
from you.
Natural Speech
Your Uconnect Phone Voice system uses a Natural Lan-
guage Voice Recognition (VR) engine.
Natural speech allows the user to speak commands in
phrases or complete sentences. The system filters out
certain non-word utterances and sounds such as “ah” and
“eh.” The system handles fill-in words such as “I would
like to.”
The system handles multiple inputs in the same phrase or
sentence such as “make a phone call” and “to Kelly Smith.”
For multiple inputs in the same phrase or sentence, the
system identifies the topic or context and provides the
associated follow-up prompt such as “Who do you want to
call?” in the case where a phone call was requested but the
specific name was not recognized.
98 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
The system utilizes continuous dialog; when the system
requires more information from the user it will ask a
question to which the user can respond without pushing
the “Voice Command”
button on your steering wheel.
Voice Command Tree
Refer to “Voice Tree” in this section.
Help Command
If you need assistance at any prompt, or if you want to
know your options at any prompt, say “Help” following
the beep.
To activate the Uconnect Phone from idle, simply push the
Phone
button on your steering wheel and say a
command or say “help.” All Uconnect Phone sessions
begin with a push of the Phone
button on the radio
control head.
Cancel Command
At any prompt, after the beep, you can say “Cancel” and
you will be returned to the main menu.
You can also push the Phone
or Voice Command
button on your steering wheel when the system is
listening for a command and be returned to the main or
previous menu.
Pair (Link) Uconnect Phone To A Mobile Phone
To begin using your Uconnect Phone, you must pair your
compatible Bluetooth enabled mobile phone.
To complete the pairing process, you will need to reference
your mobile phone Owner’s Manual. The Uconnect web-
site may also provide detailed instructions for pairing.
NOTE:
• You must have Bluetooth enabled on your phone to
complete this procedure.
• The vehicle must be in PARK.
1. You can do either of the following:
a. Push the SETTINGS button on the faceplate, page
down to the “Phone/Bluetooth” button on the touch-
screen, press it and you will see the Paired Phones
screen. If there are no paired phones you will see
<Empty> as the first device name.
b. Push the MORE button on the faceplate, then press
the “Phone” button on the touchscreen and you will
go to the Uconnect Phone main screen. Press the
“Settings” button on the touchscreen. If there are no
phones currently paired a pop-up will appear. If you
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 99
select Yes you will go the Paired Phones screen, if you
select No you will return to the Uconnect Phone main
menu.
2. At the Paired Phones screen press the “Add Device”
button on the touchscreen and a pop-up with instruc-
tions will appear.
3. Search for available devices on your Bluetooth enabled
mobile phone. When prompted on the phone, select the
“Uconnect” device and enter the PIN.
4. When the pairing process has successfully completed,
the system will prompt you to choose whether or not
this is your favorite phone. Selecting Yes will make this
phone the highest priority. This phone will take prece-
dence over other paired phones within range.
Pair A Bluetooth Streaming Audio Device
1. Push the PLAYER button on the faceplate to begin.
2. Press the “Source” button on the touchscreen.
3. Change the Source to Bluetooth.
4. Press the “Add Device” button on the touchscreen.
5. Search for available devices on your Bluetooth enabled
Audio Device. When prompted on the device, select the
“Uconnect” device and enter the PIN.
6. Uconnect Phone will display an in process screen while
the system is connecting.
7. When the pairing process has successfully completed,
the system will prompt you to choose whether or not
this is your favorite device. Selecting Yes will make this
device the highest priority. This device will take prece-
dence over other paired devices within range.
NOTE: If No is selected, device priority is determined by
the order in which it was paired. The latest device paired
will have the higher priority.
You can also use the following VR command to bring up a
list of paired audio devices.
• “Show Paired Audio Devices.”
100 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Connecting To A Particular Mobile Phone Or Audio
Device
Uconnect Phone will automatically connect to the highest
priority paired phone and/or Audio Device within range.
If you need to choose a particular Phone or Audio Device
follow these steps:
1. Push the SETTINGS button on the faceplate.
2. Press the “Phone/Bluetooth” button on the touchscreen.
3.
Press to select the particular Phone or the “Phone/Audio”
button on the touchscreen and then an Audio Device.
4. At the Options pop-up screen press the “Connect De-
vice” button on the touchscreen.
5. Press the “X” to exit out of the Settings screen.
Disconnecting A Phone Or Audio Device
1. Push the SETTINGS button on the faceplate.
2. Press the “Phone/Bluetooth” button on the touchscreen.
3. Select the Phone or Audio Device.
4. At the Options pop-up screen press the “Disconnect
Device” button on the touchscreen.
5. Press the “X” to exit out of the Settings screen.
Deleting A Phone Or Audio Device
1. Push the SETTINGS button on the faceplate.
2. Press the “Phone/Bluetooth” button on the touchscreen.
3. Select the Phone or Audio Device.
4. At the Options pop-up screen press the “Delete Device”
button on the touchscreen.
5. Press the “X” to exit out of the Settings screen.
Making A Phone Or Audio Device A Favorite
1. Push the SETTINGS button on the faceplate.
2. Press the “Phone/Bluetooth” button on the touchscreen.
3. Select a different Phone or Audio Device then the
currently connected device.
4. At the Options pop-up screen press the “Make Favorite”
button on the touchscreen; you will see the chosen
device move to the top of the list.
5. Press the “X” to exit out of the Settings screen.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 101
Phonebook Download (Automatic Phonebook
Transfer From Mobile Phone) — If Equipped
If equipped and specifically supported by your phone,
Uconnect Phone automatically downloads names (text
names) and number entries from the mobile phone’s
phonebook. Specific Bluetooth Phones with Phone Book
Access Profile may support this feature. See Uconnect
website, UconnectPhone.com, for supported phones.
• To call a name from a downloaded mobile phone book,
follow the procedure in the Voice Recognition Quick
Reference section.
• Automatic download and update of a phone book, if
supported, begins as soon as the Bluetooth wireless
phone connection is made to the Uconnect Phone, for
example, after you start the vehicle.
• A maximum of 2,000 entries per phone will be down-
loaded and updated every time a phone is connected to
the Uconnect Phone.
• Depending on the maximum number of entries down-
loaded, there may be a short delay before the latest
downloaded names can be used. Until then, if available,
the previously downloaded phonebook is available for
use.
• Only the phonebook of the currently connected mobile
phone is accessible.
• This downloaded phonebook cannot be edited or de-
leted on the Uconnect Phone. These can only be edited
on the mobile phone. The changes are transferred and
updated to Uconnect Phone on the next phone connec-
tion.
Emergency And Towing Assistance
The 911/Help numbers can only be altered. These can not
be deleted or the names can not be changed.
To change the 911/Help number, follow these steps:
1. Press the “Phonebook” button on the touchscreen from
the Phone main screen.
2. Press the “911/Help” button on the touchscreen. Press
the appropriate listing to alter, Emergency for example.
3. Once Emergency is pressed, the “Edit” button on the
touchscreen appears. Press the “Edit” button on the
touchscreen and you will be given the choice to Edit
Number or Reset to Default.
4. Follow the on-screen prompts to complete the task.
102 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Phone Call Features
The following features can be accessed through the
Uconnect Phone if the feature(s) are available on your
mobile service plan. For example, if your mobile service
plan provides three-way calling, this feature can be ac-
cessed through the Uconnect Phone. Check with your
mobile service provider for the features that you have.
Ways To Initiate A Phone Call
Listed below are all the ways you can initiate a phone call
with Uconnect Phone.
• Redial
• Dial by pressing in the number
• Voice Commands (Dial by Saying a Number, Call by
Saying a Phonebook Name, Redial, or Call Back)
• Mobile Phonebook
• Recent Call Log
NOTE: All of the above operations except Redial can be
done with one call or less active.
Dial By Saying A Number
1. Push the Phone
button to begin.
2. After the “Listening” prompt and the following beep,
say “Dial 248-555-1212.”
3. The Uconnect Phone will dial 248-555-1212.
Call By Saying A Phonebook Name
1. Push the Phone
button on your steering wheel to
begin.
2. After the “Listening” prompt and the following beep,
say “Call John Doe Mobile.”
3. The Uconnect Phone will dial the number associated
with John Doe, or if there are multiple numbers it will
ask which number you want to call for John Doe.
Call Controls
The touchscreen allows you to control the following call
features:
• Answer
• End
• Ignore
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 103
• Hold/unhold
• Mute/unmute
• Transfer the call to/from the phone
• Swap two active calls
• Join two active calls together
Touch-Tone Number Entry
1. Press the “Phone” button on the touchscreen.
2. Press the “Dial” button on the touchscreen.
3. The Touch-Tone screen will be displayed.
4. Use the numbered buttons on the touchscreen to enter
the number and press “Call.”
To send a touch tone using Voice Recognition (VR), push
the Voice Command
button while in a call and say
“1234#” or you can say “Send Voicemail Password” if
Voicemail password is stored in your mobile phone-
book.
Recent Calls
You may browse up to 34 of the most recent of each of the
following call types:
• Incoming Calls
• Outgoing Calls
• Missed Calls
• All Calls
These can be accessed by touching the recent calls button
on the touchscreen on the Phone main screen.
You can also push the Phone
button and say “Show
my incoming calls” from any screen and the Incoming
calls will be displayed.
NOTE: Incoming can also be replaced with “Outgoing”,
“Recent” or “Missed.”
Answer Or Reject An Incoming Call — No Call
Currently In Progress
When you receive a call on your mobile phone, the
Uconnect Phone will interrupt the vehicle audio system, if
on, and will display a pop-up showing Answer or Ignore.
Press the Answer button on the touchscreen or push the
Phone
button on the steering wheel to accept the call.
104 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Answer Or Reject An Incoming Call — Call
Currently In Progress
If a call is currently in progress and you have another
incoming call, you will hear the same network tones for
call waiting that you normally hear when using your
mobile phone. Uconnect Phone will then interrupt the
vehicle audio system, if on, and will display a pop-up
showing Answer, Ignore or Transfer. Push the Phone
button to place the current call on hold and answer
the incoming call.
NOTE: The Uconnect Phone compatible phones in the
market today do not support rejecting an incoming call
when another call is in progress. Therefore, the user can
only answer an incoming call or ignore it.
Making A Second Call While Current Call Is In
Progress
To make a second call while you are currently on a call,
push the Voice Command
button and say “Dial” or
“Call” followed by the phone number or phonebook
entry you wish to call. The first call will be on hold
while the second call is in progress. Or you can place a
call on hold by pressing the “Hold” button on the
touchscreen, then dial a number from the dialpad,
recent calls or from the phonebooks. To go back to the
first call, refer to “Toggling Between Calls” in this
section. To combine two calls, refer to “Join Calls” in this
section.
Toggling Between Calls
If two calls are in progress (one active and one on hold),
push the Phone
button until you hear a single beep,
indicating that the active and hold status of the two calls
have switched. Only one call can be placed on hold at a
time. Also you can press the “Swap” button on the
touchscreen, on the Phone main screen.
Join Calls
When two calls are in progress (one active and one on
hold), press the “Join Calls” button on the Phone main
screen to combine all calls into a Conference Call.
Call Termination
To end a call in progress, momentarily press the “End”
button on the touchscreen or the Phone
button. Only
the active call(s) will be terminated and if there is a call
on hold, it will become the new active call. If the active
call is terminated by the far end, a call on hold may not
become active automatically. This is cell phone-
dependent.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 105
Redial
1. Press the “Redial” button on the touchscreen, or push
the Phone
button and after the “Listening” prompt
and the following beep, say “Redial.”
2. The Uconnect Phone will call the last number that was
dialed from your mobile phone.
Call Continuation
Call continuation is the progression of a phone call on the
Uconnect Phone after the vehicle ignition key has been
switched to OFF.
• After the ignition is switched to OFF, a call can continue
on the Uconnect Phone either until the call ends, or until
the vehicle battery condition dictates cessation of the call
on the Uconnect Phone and transfer of the call to the
mobile phone.
Uconnect Phone Features
Emergency Assistance
If you are in an emergency and the mobile phone is
reachable:
• Pick up the phone and manually dial the emergency
number for your area.
If the phone is not reachable and the Uconnect Phone is
operational, you may reach the emergency number as follows:
• Push the Phone
button to begin.
•
After the “Listening” prompt and the following beep, say
“Emergency” and the Uconnect Phone will instruct the
paired mobile phone to call the emergency number. This
feature is supported in the U.S., Canada, and Mexico.
NOTE:
•
The emergency number dialed is based on the country
where the vehicle is purchased (911 for the U.S. and Canada
and 060 for Mexico). The number dialed may not be
applicable with the available mobile service and area.
• The Uconnect Phone does slightly lower your chances of
successfully making a phone call as to that for the
mobile phone directly.
WARNING!
Your phone must be turned on and connected to the
Uconnect Phone to allow use of this vehicle feature in
emergency situations, when the mobile phone has
network coverage and stays connected to the Uconnect
Phone.
106 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Roadside Assistance/Towing Assistance
If you need roadside/towing assistance:
• Push the Phone
button to begin.
• After the “Listening” prompt and the following beep,
say “Roadside Assistance” or say “Towing Assistance.”
NOTE: The roadside/towing assistance number dialed is
based on the country where the vehicle is purchased
(1-800-521-2779 for U.S., 1-800-363-4869 for Canada, 55-14-
3454 for Mexico City and 1-800-712-3040 for outside
Mexico City in Mexico). Please refer to the FCA US LLC
24-Hour “Roadside Assistance” coverage details in the
Warranty Information Booklet and on the 24-Hour Road-
side Assistance Card.
Voice Mail Calling
To learn how to access your voice mail, refer to “Working
with Automated Systems.”
Working With Automated Systems
This method is used in instances where one generally has
to push numbers on the mobile phone keypad while
navigating through an automated telephone system.
You can use your Uconnect Phone to access a voice mail
system or an automated service, such as a paging service or
automated customer service line. Some services require
immediate response selection. In some instances, that may
be too quick for use of the Uconnect Phone.
When calling a number with your Uconnect Phone that
normally requires you to enter in a touch-tone sequence on
your mobile phone keypad, you can utilize the touchscreen or
push the Voice Command
button and say the word
“Send” then the sequence you wish to enter. For ex-
ample, if required to enter your PIN followed with a
pound, (3746#),youcanpush the Voice Command
button and say, “Send3746#.”Saying “Send”
followed by a number, or sequence of numbers, is also
to be used for navigating through an automated cus-
tomer service center menu structure, and to leave a
number on a pager.
You can also send stored mobile phonebook entries as
tones for fast and easy access to voice mail and pager
entries. For example, if you previously created a Phone-
book entry and/or Last Name as “Voice Password,” then if
you push the Voice Command
button and say “Send
Voicemail Password,” the Uconnect Phone will then
send the corresponding phone number associated with
the phonebook entry, as tones over the phone.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 107
NOTE:
• The first number encountered for that contact will be
sent. All other numbers entered for that contact will be
ignored.
• You may not hear all of the tones due to mobile phone
network configurations. This is normal.
• Some paging and voice mail systems have system time
out settings that are too short and may not allow the use
of this feature.
• Pauses, wait or other characters that are supported by
some phones are not supported over Bluetooth. These
additional symbols will be ignored when dialing a
numbered sequence.
Barge In — Overriding Prompts
The Voice Command
button can be used when you
wish to skip part of a prompt and issue your voice
command immediately. For example, if a prompt is
asking “There are two numbers with the name John. Say
the full name” you could push the Voice Command
button and say, “John Smith” to select that option
without having to listen to the rest of the voice prompt.
Voice Response Length
It is possible for you to choose between Brief and Detailed
Voice Response Length.
1. Push the MORE button on the faceplate, then press the
“Settings” button on the touchscreen.
2. Press the “Display” button on the touchscreen, then
scroll down to Voice Response Length.
3. Select either “Brief” or “Detailed” by pressing the box
next to the selection. A check-mark will appear to
indicate your selection.
Phone And Network Status Indicators
Uconnect Phone will provide notification to inform you of
your phone and network status when you are attempting
to make a phone call using Uconnect Phone. The status is
given for network signal strength and phone battery
strength.
108 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Dialing Using The Mobile Phone Keypad
You can dial a phone number with your mobile phone
keypad and still use the Uconnect Phone (while dialing via
the mobile phone keypad, the user must exercise caution
and take precautionary safety measures). By dialing a
number with your connected Bluetooth mobile phone, the
audio will be played through your vehicle’s audio system.
The Uconnect Phone will work the same as if you dial the
number using a voice command.
NOTE: Certain brands of mobile phones do not send the
dial ring to the Uconnect Phone to play it on the vehicle
audio system, so you will not hear it. Under this situation,
after successfully dialing a number the user may feel that
the call did not go through even though the call is in
progress. Once your call is answered, you will hear the
audio.
Mute/Un-Mute (Mute OFF)
When you mute the Uconnect Phone, you will still be able
to hear the conversation coming from the other party, but
the other party will not be able to hear you. To mute the
Uconnect Phone simply press the “Mute” button on the
Phone main screen.
Advanced Phone Connectivity
Transfer Call To And From Mobile Phone
The Uconnect Phone allows ongoing calls to be transferred
from your mobile phone to the Uconnect Phone without
terminating the call. To transfer an ongoing call from your
connected mobile phone to the Uconnect Phone or vice
versa, press the “Transfer” button on the Phone main
screen.
Connect Or Disconnect Link Between the Uconnect
Phone And Mobile Phone
If you would like to connect or disconnect the Bluetooth
connection between a Uconnect Phone paired mobile
phone and the Uconnect Phone, follow the instructions
described in your mobile phone User’s Manual.
Things You Should Know About Your Uconnect
Phone
Voice Command
For best performance:
• Adjust the rearview mirror to provide at least ½ inch
(1 cm) gap between the overhead console (if equipped)
and the mirror.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 109
• Always wait for the beep before speaking.
• Speak normally without pausing, just as you would
speak to a person sitting a few feet/meters away from
you.
• Make sure that no one other than you is speaking during
a Voice Command period.
Performance is maximized under:
• Low-to-medium blower setting
• Low-to-medium vehicle speed
• Low road noise
• Smooth road surface
• Fully closed windows
• Dry weather condition
NOTE:
• Even though the system is designed for users speaking
in North American English, French, and Spanish accents,
the system may not always work for some.
• When navigating through an automated system such as
voice mail, or when sending a page, at the end of
speaking the digit string, make sure to say “Send.”
• Storing names in the phonebook when the vehicle is not
in motion is recommended.
• It is not recommended to store similar sounding names
in the Uconnect Phonebook.
• Phonebook (Downloaded and Uconnect Phone Local)
name recognition rate is optimized when the entries are
not similar.
• Numbers must be spoken in single digits. “800” must be
spoken “eight-zero-zero” not “eight hundred.”
• You can say “O” (letter “O”) for “0” (zero).
• Even though international dialing for most number
combinations is supported, some shortcut dialing num-
ber combinations may not be supported.
110 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Far End Audio Performance
Audio quality is maximized under:
• Low-to-medium blower setting
• Low-to-medium vehicle speed
• Low road noise
• Smooth road surface
• Fully closed windows
• Dry weather conditions
• Operation from the driver’s seat
• Performance, such as audio clarity, echo, and loudness
to a large degree rely on the phone and network, and not
the Uconnect Phone
• Echo at the phone far end can sometimes be reduced by
lowering the in-vehicle audio volume
Bluetooth Communication Link
Mobile phones have been found to lose connection to the
Uconnect Phone. When this happens, the connection can
generally be reestablished by switching the phone off/on.
Your mobile phone is recommended to remain in Bluetooth
ON mode.
Power-Up
After switching the ignition key from OFF to either the ON
or ACC position, or after a language change, you must wait
at least 15 seconds prior to using the system.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 111
Voice Tree
112 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE:
•
You can replace “John Smith” with any name in your mobile
or favorite phone book. You can also say “Send a message to
John Smith” and the system will ask you which phone
number you want to send a message to for John Smith.
• You can replace “Mobile” with “Home,” “Work” or
“Other.”
• You can replace “Incoming Calls” with “Outgoing Calls”
or “Missed Calls.”
• Messaging commands only work if the Uconnect system
is equipped with this feature and the mobile phone
supports messaging over Bluetooth.
• You can replace “248 555 1212” with any phone number
supported by your Mobile phone.
• You can replace “4” with any message number shown on
the screen.
• If your phone does not support phonebook download or
call log download over Bluetooth than these commands
will return a response that the contact does not exist in
the phonebook.
• Available Voice Commands are shown in bold face and
underlined in the gray shaded boxes.
General Information
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC rules and RSS
210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the follow-
ing conditions:
• Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the
party responsible for compliance could void the user’s
authority to operate the equipment.
• This device may not cause harmful interference.
• This device must accept any interference received, in-
cluding interference that may cause undesired opera-
tion.
UCONNECT PHONE (RADIO 8.4/8.4 NAV)
Uconnect Phone is a voice-activated, hands-free, in-vehicle
communications system. Uconnect Phone allows you to
dial a phone number with your mobile phone.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 113
Uconnect Phone supports the following features:
Voice Activated Features:
• Hands Free dialing via Voice (“Call John Smith Mobile”
or, “Dial 248 555 1212”).
• Hands Free text to speech listening of your incoming
SMS messages.
• Hands Free text messaging (“Send a message to John
Smith Mobile”).
• Redialing last dialed numbers (“Redial”).
• Calling Back the last incoming call number (“Call
Back”).
• View Call logs on screen (“Show incoming calls,” “Show
Outgoing calls,” “Show missed Calls,” “Show Recent
Calls”).
• Searching Contacts phone number (“Search for John
Smith Mobile”).
Screen Activated Features
• Dialing via Keypad using touchscreen.
• Viewing and Calling contacts from Phonebooks dis-
played on the touchscreen.
• Setting Favorite Contact Phone numbers so they are
easily accessible on the Main Phone screen.
• Viewing and Calling contacts from Recent Call logs.
• Reviewing your recent Incoming SMS.
• Sending a text message via the touchscreen.
• Listen to Music on your Bluetooth Device via the
touchscreen.
• Pairing up to ten phones/audio devices for easy access
to connect to them quickly.
NOTE: Your phone must be capable of SMS messaging via
Bluetooth for messaging features to work properly. Your
mobile phone’s audio is transmitted through your vehicles
audio system; the system will automatically mute your
radio when using the Uconnect Phone. For Uconnect
customer support, visit the following website:
• U.S. residents - visit UconnectPhone.com or call 1-877-
855-8400.
• Canadian residents - visit UconnectPhone.com or call
1-800-465-2001 (English) or 1-800-387-9983 (French).
Uconnect Phone allows you to transfer calls between the
system and your mobile phone as you enter or exit your
114 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
vehicle and enables you to mute the system’s microphone
for private conversation.
WARNING!
Any voice commanded system should be used only in
safe driving conditions following all applicable laws,
including laws regarding phone use. Your attention
should be focused on safely operating the vehicle.
Failure to do so may result in an accident causing
serious injury or death.
The Uconnect Phone is driven through your Bluetooth
“Hands-Free Profile” mobile phone. Uconnect features
Bluetooth technology - the global standard that enables
different electronic devices to connect to each other with-
out wires or a docking station, so Uconnect Phone works
no matter where you stow your mobile phone (be it your
purse, pocket, or briefcase), as long as your phone is turned
on and has been paired to the vehicle’s Uconnect Phone.
The Uconnect Phone allows up to ten mobile phones or
audio devices to be linked to the system. Only one linked
(or paired) mobile phone and one audio device can be used
with the system at a time. The system is available in
English, Spanish, or French languages.
Uconnect Phone Button
The Uconnect Phone
button is used to enter
the phone mode and make calls, show recent
incoming and outgoing calls, view phonebook
along with other features. When you push the
button you will hear a BEEP. The beep is your signal to
give a command.
Uconnect Voice Command Button
The Uconnect Voice Command
button is
only used for “barge in” and when you are
already in a call and you want to send Tones or
make another call.
The Voice Command
button is also used to access the
Voice Commands for the Uconnect Voice Command
features if your vehicle is equipped. Please see the
Uconnect Voice Command section for direction on how
to use the Voice Command
button.
The Uconnect Phone is fully integrated with the vehicles
audio system. The volume of the Uconnect Phone can be
adjusted either from the radio volume control knob or from
the steering wheel radio control (right switch), if so
equipped.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 115
Operation
Voice commands can be used to operate the Uconnect
Phone and to navigate through the Uconnect Phone menu
structure. Voice commands are required after most
Uconnect Phone prompts. There are two general methods
for how Voice Command works:
1. Say compound commands like “Call John Smith mo-
bile.”
2. Say the individual commands and allow the system to
guide you to complete the task.
You will be prompted for a specific command and then
guided through the available options.
• Prior to giving a voice command, one must wait for the
beep, which follows the “Listen” prompt or another
prompt.
• For certain operations, compound commands can be
used. For example, instead of saying “Call” and then
“John Smith” and then “mobile”, the following com-
pound command can be said: “Call John Smith mobile.”
• For each feature explanation in this section, only the
compound command form of the voice command is
given. You can also break the commands into parts and
say each part of the command when you are asked for it.
For example, you can use the compound command form
voice command “Search for John Smith,” or you can
break the compound command form into two voice
commands: “Search Contact” and when asked “John
Smith.” Please remember, the Uconnect Phone works
best when you talk in a normal conversational tone, as if
speaking to someone sitting a few feet/meters away
from you.
Natural Speech
Your Uconnect Phone Voice system uses a Natural Lan-
guage Voice Recognition (VR) engine.
Natural speech allows the user to speak commands in
phrases or complete sentences. The system filters out
certain non-word utterances and sounds such as “ah” and
“eh.” The system handles fill-in words such as “I would
like to.”
The system handles multiple inputs in the same phrase or
sentence such as “make a phone call” and “to Kelly Smith.”
For multiple inputs in the same phrase or sentence, the
system identifies the topic or context and provides the
associated follow-up prompt such as “Who do you want to
call?” in the case where a phone call was requested but the
specific name was not recognized.
116 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
The system utilizes continuous dialog; when the system
requires more information from the user it will ask a
question to which the user can respond without pushing
the “Voice Command”
button on your steering wheel.
Voice Command Tree
Refer to “Voice Tree” in this section.
Help Command
If you need assistance at any prompt, or if you want to
know your options at any prompt, say “Help” following
the beep.
To activate the Uconnect Phone from idle, simply push the
Phone
button on your steering wheel and say a
command or say “help.” All Uconnect Phone sessions
begin with a push of the Phone
button on the radio
control head.
Cancel Command
At any prompt, after the beep, you can say “Cancel” and
you will be returned to the main menu.
You can also push the Phone
or Voice Command
button on your steering wheel when the system is
listening for a command and be returned to the main or
previous menu.
Pair (Link) Uconnect Phone To A Mobile Phone
To begin using your Uconnect Phone, you must pair your
compatible Bluetooth enabled mobile phone.
NOTE:
• You must have Bluetooth enabled on your mobile phone
to complete this procedure.
• The vehicle must be in PARK.
To complete the pairing process, you will need to reference
your mobile phone Owner’s Manual. The Uconnect web-
site may also provide detailed instructions for pairing.
1. Press the “Phone” button on the touchscreen to begin.
2. If there is no phone currently connected with the
system, a pop-up will appear.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 117
3. Select “Yes” to begin the pairing process. Then, search
for available devices on your Bluetooth enabled mobile
phone. When prompted on the phone, enter the name
and PIN shown on the Uconnect screen.
• If “No” is selected, press the “Settings” button from
the Uconnect Phone main screen.
• Press the “Add Device” button on the touchscreen.
• Search for available devices on your Bluetooth enabled
mobile phone. When prompted on the phone, enter the
name and PIN shown on the Uconnect screen.
• See step four to complete the process.
4. Uconnect Phone will display an in progress screen while
the system is connecting.
Mobile Phone Pairing
Mobile Phone Pairing Progress
118 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
5. When the pairing process has successfully completed,
the system will prompt you to choose whether or not
this is your favorite phone. Selecting “Yes” will make
this phone the highest priority. This phone will take
precedence over other paired phones within range.
Pair Additional Mobile Phones
1. Press the “Settings” button from the Phone main screen.
2. Press the “Add Device” button on the touchscreen.
3. Search for available devices on your Bluetooth enabled
mobile phone. When prompted on the phone, enter the
name and PIN shown on the Uconnect screen.
4. Uconnect Phone will display an in process screen while
the system is connecting.
5. When the pairing process has successfully completed,
the system will prompt you to choose whether or not
this is your favorite phone. Selecting “Yes” will make
this phone the highest priority. This phone will take
precedence over other paired phones within range.
NOTE: For phones which are not made a favorite, the
phone priority is determined by the order in which it was
paired. The latest phone paired will have the higher
priority.
You can also use the following VR commands to bring up
the Paired Phone screen from any screen on the radio:
• “Show Paired Phones”
• “Connect My Phone”
Pair A Bluetooth Streaming Audio Device
1. Press the “Player” button on the touchscreen to begin.
2. Change the Source to Bluetooth.
3. Press the “Bluetooth” button on the touchscreen to
display the Paired Audio Devices screen.
4. Press the “Add Device” button on the touchscreen.
NOTE: If there is no device currently connected with the
system, a pop-up will appear.
5. Search for available devices on your Bluetooth enabled
audio device. When prompted on the device, enter the
PIN shown on the Uconnect screen.
6. Uconnect Phone will display an in process screen while
the system is connecting.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 119
7. When the pairing process has successfully completed,
the system will prompt you to choose whether or not
this is your favorite device. Selecting “Yes” will make
this device the highest priority. This device will take
precedence over other paired devices within range.
NOTE: For devices which are not made a favorite, the
device priority is determined by the order in which it was
paired. The latest device paired will have the higher
priority.
You can also use the following VR command to bring up a
list of paired audio devices:
• “Show Paired Phones”
• “Connect My Phone”
Connecting To A Particular Mobile Phone Or Audio
Device After Pairing
Uconnect Phone will automatically connect to the highest
priority paired phone and/or Audio Device within range.
If you need to choose a particular phone or Audio Device
follow these steps:
1. Press the “Settings” button on the touchscreen.
2. Press the “Paired Phones” or “Paired Audio Sources”
button on the touchscreen.
3. Press to select the particular Phone or the particular
Audio Device.
4. Press the “X” to exit out of the Settings screen.
Disconnecting A Phone Or Audio Device
1. Press the “Settings” button on the touchscreen.
2. Press the “Paired Phones” or “Paired Audio Devices”
button on the touchscreen.
3. Press the settings icon button located to the right of the
device name.
4. The options pop-up will be displayed.
5. Press the “Disconnect Device” button on the touch-
screen.
6. Press the “X” to exit out of the Settings screen.
Deleting A Phone Or Audio Device
1. Press the “Settings” button on the touchscreen.
2. Press the “Pair Phones” or “Paired Audio Devices”
button on the touchscreen.
120 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
3. Press the settings icon button located to the right of the
device name for a different Phone or Audio Device than
the currently connected device.
4. The options pop-up will be displayed.
5. Press the “Delete Device” button on the touchscreen.
6. Press the “X” to exit out of the Settings screen.
Making A Phone Or Audio Device A Favorite
1. Press the “Settings” button on the touchscreen.
2. Press the “Paired Phones” or “Paired Audio Devices”
button on the touchscreen.
3. Press the settings icon button located to the right of the
device name.
4. The options pop-up will be displayed.
5. Press the “Make Favorite” button on the touchscreen;
you will see the chosen device move to the top of the list.
6. Press the “X” to exit out of the Settings screen.
Phonebook Download (Automatic Phonebook
Transfer From Mobile Phone) — If Equipped
If equipped and specifically supported by your phone,
Uconnect Phone automatically downloads names (text
names) and number entries from the mobile phone’s
phonebook. Specific Bluetooth Phones with Phone Book
Access Profile may support this feature. See Uconnect
website, UconnectPhone.com, for supported phones.
• To call a name from a downloaded mobile phone book,
follow the procedure in the Voice Recognition Quick
Reference section.
• Automatic download and update of a phone book, if
supported, begins as soon as the Bluetooth wireless
phone connection is made to the Uconnect Phone, for
example, after you start the vehicle.
• A maximum of 2,000 entries per phone will be down-
loaded and updated every time a phone is connected to
the Uconnect Phone.
• Depending on the maximum number of entries down-
loaded, there may be a short delay before the latest
downloaded names can be used. Until then, if available,
the previously downloaded phonebook is available for
use.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 121
• Only the phonebook of the currently connected mobile
phone is accessible.
• This downloaded phonebook cannot be edited or de-
leted on the Uconnect Phone. These can only be edited
on the mobile phone. The changes are transferred and
updated to Uconnect Phone on the next phone connec-
tion.
Managing Your Favorite Phonebook
There are three ways you can add an entry to your Favorite
Phonebook.
1. During an active call of a number to make a favorite,
press and hold a favorite button on the top of the phone
main screen.
2. After loading the mobile phonebook, select Phonebook
from the Phone main screen, then select the appropriate
number. Press the “+” next to the selected number to
display the options pop-up. In the pop-up select “Add
to Favorites.”
NOTE: If the Favorites list is full, you will be asked to
remove an existing favorite.
3. From the Phone main screen, select Phonebook. From
the Phonebook screen, select the “Favorites” button on
the touchscreen and then select the “+” button on the
touchscreen located to the right of the phonebook re-
cord. Select an empty entry and press the “+” on that
selected entry. When the Options pop-up appears, press
“Add from Mobile.” You will then be asked which
contact and number to choose from your mobile phone-
book. When complete the new favorite will be shown.
Phonebook Favorites
122 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
To Remove A Favorite
1. To remove a Favorite, select phonebook from the Phone
main screen.
2. Next select Favorites on the left side of the screen and
then press the “+” Options button on the touchscreen.
3. Press the “+” next to the Favorite you would like to
remove.
4. The Options pop-up will display, press “Remove from
Favs.”
Emergency And Towing Assistance
The Emergency and Towing Assistance Favorite numbers
can only be altered. These cannot be deleted and the names
cannot be changed.
Add From Mobile
Remove From Favorites
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 123
To change the Emergency or Towing Assistance numbers
follow these steps.
1. Press the “Phonebook” button from the Phone main
screen.
2. Press the “Favorites” button on the touchscreen. Scroll
to the bottom of the list to locate the Emergency and
Towing Assistance Favorites.
3. Press the “+” Options button on the touchscreen.
4. Press the “+” next to appropriate Favorite that is to be
altered.
5. The Options pop-up will appear and you can choose
between Editing the number or resetting the number to
default.
Phone Call Features
The following features can be accessed through the
Uconnect Phone if the feature(s) are available and sup-
ported by Bluetooth on your mobile service plan. For
example, if your mobile service plan provides three-way
calling, this feature can be accessed through the Uconnect
Phone. Check with your mobile service provider for the
features that you have.
Ways To Initiate A Phone Call
Listed below are all the ways you can initiate a phone call
with Uconnect Phone.
• Redial
• Dial by pressing in the number
• Voice Commands (Dial by Saying a Name, Call by
Saying a Phonebook Name, Redial or Call Back)
• Favorites
• Mobile Phonebook
• Recent Call Log
• SMS Message Viewer
Emergency And Breakdown Assistance
124 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Dial By Saying A Number
1. Push the Phone
button to begin.
2. After the “Listening” prompt and the following beep,
say “Dial 248-555-1212.”
3. The Uconnect Phone will dial the number 248-555-1212.
Call By Saying A Phonebook Name
1. Push the Phone
button on your steering wheel to
begin.
2. After the “Listening” prompt and the following beep,
say “Call John Doe Mobile.”
3. The Uconnect Phone will dial the number associated
with John Doe, or if there are multiple numbers it will
ask which number you want to call for John Doe.
Call Controls
The touchscreen allows you to control the following call
features:
• Answer
• End
• Ignore
• Hold/unhold
• Mute/unmute
• Transfer the call to/from the phone
• Swap two active calls
• Join two active calls together
Touch-Tone Number Entry
1. Press the “Phone” button on the touchscreen.
2. Press the “Dial” button on the touchscreen.
3. The Touch-Tone screen will be displayed.
4. Use the numbered buttons on the touchscreens to enter
the number and press “Call.”
To send a touch-tone using Voice Recognition (VR), push
the Voice Command
button on your steering wheel
while in a call and say “Send 1234#” or you can say
“Send Voicemail Password” if Voicemail password is
stored in your mobile phonebook.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 125
Recent Calls
You may browse up to 34 of the most recent of each of the
following call types:
• Incoming Calls
• Outgoing Calls
• Missed Calls
• All Calls
These can be accessed by pressing the “recent calls” button
on the touchscreen on the Phone main screen.
You can also push the Phone
button and say “Show
my incoming calls” from any screen and the Incoming
calls will be displayed.
You can also push the Phone
button and say “Show
my recent calls” from any screen and the All calls screen
will be displayed.
NOTE: Incoming can also be replaced with “Outgoing,”
“Recent” or “Missed.”
Answer Or Ignore An Incoming Call — No Call
Currently In Progress
When you receive a call on your mobile phone, the
Uconnect Phone will interrupt the vehicle audio system.
Push the Phone
button on the steering wheel to accept
the call. You can also press the “answer” button on the
touchscreen or press the caller ID box.
Recent Calls
126 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Answer Or Ignore An Incoming Call — Call
Currently In Progress
If a call is currently in progress and you have another
incoming call, you will hear the same network tones for
call waiting that you normally hear when using your
mobile phone. Push the Phone
button on the steering
wheel, or press the “answer” button on the touchscreen,
or caller ID box, to place the current call on hold and
answer the incoming call.
NOTE: The Uconnect Phone compatible phones in the
market today do not support rejecting an incoming call
when another call is in progress. Therefore, the user can
only answer an incoming call or ignore it.
Making A Second Call While Current Call Is In
Progress
You can place a call on hold by pressing the “Hold” button
on the Phone main screen, then dial a number from the
dialpad, recent calls, SMS Inbox or from the phonebooks.
To go back to the first call, refer to “Toggling Between
Calls” in this section. To combine two calls, refer to “Join
Calls” in this section.
Place/Retrieve A Call From Hold
During an active call, press the “Hold” button on the
Phone main screen.
Toggling Between Calls
If two calls are in progress (one active and one on hold),
press the “Swap” button on the Phone main screen. Only
one call can be placed on hold at a time.
You can also push the Phone
button to toggle between
the active and held phone call.
Join Calls
When two calls are in progress (one active and one on
hold), press the “Join Calls” button on the Phone main
screen to combine all calls into a Conference Call.
Call Termination
To end a call in progress, momentarily push the Phone
button or press the “end” button on the touchscreen.
Only the active call(s) will be terminated and if there is
a call on hold, it will become the new active call.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 127
Redial
Press the “Redial” button on the touchscreen, or push the
Phone
button and after the “Listening” prompt and
the following beep, say “Redial.”
The Uconnect Phone will call the last number that was
dialed from your mobile phone.
Call Continuation
Call continuation is the progression of a phone call on the
Uconnect Phone after the vehicle ignition has been
switched to OFF.
NOTE: The call will remain within the vehicle audio
system until the phone becomes out of range for the
Bluetooth connection. It is recommended to press the
“transfer” button on the touchscreen when leaving the
vehicle.
Uconnect Phone Features
Emergency Assistance
If you are in an emergency and the mobile phone is
reachable:
• Pick up the phone and manually dial the emergency
number for your area.
If the phone is not reachable and the Uconnect Phone is
operational, you may reach the emergency number as
follows:
1. Push the Phone
button to begin.
2. After the “Listening” prompt and the following beep,
say “Dial Emergency” and the Uconnect Phone will
instruct the paired mobile phone to call the emergency
number. This feature is supported in the U.S., Canada,
and Mexico.
NOTE:
• The Emergency call may also be initiated by using the
touchscreen.
• The emergency number dialed is based on the country
where the vehicle is purchased (911 for the U.S. and
Canada and 060 for Mexico). The number dialed may
not be applicable with the available mobile service and
area.
• The Uconnect Phone does slightly lower your chances of
successfully making a phone call as to that for the
mobile phone directly.
128 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
Your phone must be turned on and connected to the
Uconnect Phone to allow use of this vehicle feature in
emergency situations, when the mobile phone has
network coverage and stays connected to the Uconnect
Phone.
Roadside Assistance/Towing Assistance
If you need roadside/towing assistance:
1. Push the Phone
button to begin.
2. After the “Listening” prompt and the following beep,
say “Roadside Assistance” or say “Towing Assistance.”
NOTE: The roadside/towing assistance number dialed is
based on the country where the vehicle is purchased
(1-800-521-2779 for the U.S., 1-800-363-4869 for Canada,
55-14-3454 for Mexico City, and 1-800-712-3040 for outside
Mexico City in Mexico). Please refer to the FCA US LLC
24-Hour “Roadside Assistance” coverage details in the
Warranty Information Booklet.
Voice Mail Calling
To learn how to access your voice mail, refer to “Working
with Automated Systems.”
Working With Automated Systems
This method is used in instances where one generally has
to push numbers on the mobile phone keypad while
navigating through an automated telephone system.
You can use your Uconnect Phone to access a voice mail
system or an automated service, such as a paging service or
automated customer service line. Some services require
immediate response selection. In some instances, that may
be too quick for use of the Uconnect Phone.
When calling a number with your Uconnect Phone that
normally requires you to enter in a touch-tone sequence on
your mobile phone keypad, you can utilize the touchscreen
or push the Voice Command
button and say the word
“Send” then the sequence you wish to enter. For ex-
ample, if required to enter your PIN followed with a
pound, (3746#),youcanpush the Voice Command
button and say, “Send3746#.”Saying “Send”
followed by a number, or sequence of numbers, is also
to be used for navigating through an automated cus-
tomer service center menu structure, and to leave a
number on a pager.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 129
You can also send stored mobile phonebook entries as
tones for fast and easy access to voice mail and pager
entries. For example, if you previously created a Phone-
book entry with First and/or Last Name as “Voicemail
Password”, then if you push the Voice Command
but-
ton and say “Send Voicemail Password” the Uconnect
Phone will then send the corresponding phone number
associated with the phonebook entry, as tones over the
phone.
NOTE:
• The first number encountered for that contact will be
sent. All other numbers entered for that contact will be
ignored.
• You may not hear all of the tones due to mobile phone
network configurations. This is normal.
• Some paging and voice mail systems have system time
out settings that are too short and may not allow the use
of this feature.
• Pauses, wait or other characters that are supported by
some phones are not supported over Bluetooth. These
additional symbols will be ignored in the dialing a
numbered sequence.
Barge In — Overriding Prompts
The Voice Command
button can be used when you
wish to skip part of a prompt and issue your voice
command immediately. For example, if a prompt is
asking “There are two numbers with the name John. Say
the full name” you could push the Voice Command
button and say, “John Smith” to select that option
without having to listen to the rest of the voice prompt.
Voice Response Length
It is possible for you to choose between Brief and Detailed
Voice Response Length.
1. Press the “Settings” button on the touchscreen.
2. Press the “Voice” button on the touchscreen, then scroll
down to Voice Response Length.
3. Select either “Brief” or “Detailed” by pressing the box
next to the selection. A check-mark will appear to
indicate your selection.
130 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Phone And Network Status Indicators
Uconnect Phone will provide notification to inform you of
your phone and network status when you are attempting
to make a phone call using Uconnect Phone. The status is
given for network signal strength and phone battery
strength.
Dialing Using The Mobile Phone Keypad
You can dial a phone number with your mobile phone
keypad and still use the Uconnect Phone (while dialing via
the mobile phone keypad, the user must exercise caution
and take precautionary safety measures). By dialing a
number with your connected Bluetooth mobile phone, the
audio will be played through your vehicle’s audio system.
The Uconnect Phone will work the same as if you dial the
number using a voice command.
NOTE: Certain brands of mobile phones do not send the
dial ring to the Uconnect Phone to play it on the vehicle
audio system, so you will not hear it. Under this situation,
after successfully dialing a number the user may feel that
the call did not go through even though the call is in
progress. Once your call is answered, you will hear the
audio.
Mute/Un-Mute (Mute ON/OFF)
When you mute the Uconnect Phone, you will still be able
to hear the conversation coming from the other party, but
the other party will not be able to hear you. To mute the
Uconnect Phone simply press the “Mute” button on the
Phone main screen.
Advanced Phone Connectivity
Transfer Call To And From Mobile Phone
The Uconnect Phone allows ongoing calls to be transferred
from your mobile phone to the Uconnect Phone without
terminating the call. To transfer an ongoing call from your
connected mobile phone to the Uconnect Phone or vice
versa, press the “Transfer” button on the Phone main
screen.
Connect Or Disconnect Link Between The Uconnect
Phone And Mobile Phone
If you would like to connect or disconnect the Bluetooth
connection between a Uconnect Phone paired mobile
phone and the Uconnect Phone, follow the instructions
described in your mobile phone User’s Manual.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 131
Things You Should Know About Your Uconnect
Phone
Voice Command
For the best performance:
• Adjust the rearview mirror to provide at least ½ inch
(1 cm) gap between the overhead console (if equipped)
and the mirror.
• Always wait for the beep before speaking.
•
Speak normally, without pausing, just as you would speak
to a person sitting a few feet/meters away from you.
• Ensure that no one other than you is speaking during a
voice command period.
Performance is maximized under:
• Low-To-Medium Blower Setting
• Low-To-Medium Vehicle Speed
• Low Road Noise
• Smooth Road Surface
• Fully Closed Windows
• Dry Weather Condition
WARNING!
ALWAYS drive safely with your hands on the wheel.
You have full responsibility and assume all risks
related to the use of the Uconnect features and appli-
cations in this vehicle. Only use Uconnect when it is
safe to do so. Failure to do so may result in an accident
involving serious injury or death.
Even though the system is designed for many languages
and accents, the system may not always work for some.
NOTE: It is recommended that you do not store names in
your favorites phonebook while the vehicle is in motion.
Phonebook (Mobile and Favorites) name recognition rate is
optimized when the entries are not similar. You can say
“O” (letter “O”) for “0” (zero).
Even though international dialing for most number com-
binations is supported, some shortcut dialing number
combinations may not be supported.
132 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Far End Audio Performance
Audio quality is maximized under:
• Low-To-Medium Blower Setting
• Low-To-Medium Vehicle Speed
• Low Road Noise
• Smooth Road Surface
• Fully Closed Windows
• Dry Weather Conditions
• Operation From The Driver’s Seat
Performance such as audio clarity, echo, and loudness to a
large degree rely on the phone and network, and not the
Uconnect Phone.
Echo at the far end can sometimes be reduced by lowering
the in-vehicle audio volume.
In a convertible vehicle, system performance may be
compromised with the convertible top down.
Voice Text Reply
Uconnect Phone can read or send new messages on your
phone.
Your phone must support SMS over Bluetooth to use this
feature. If the Uconnect Phone determines your phone is
not compatible with SMS messaging over Bluetooth the
“Messaging” button will be grayed out and the feature will
not be available for use.
NOTE: Uconnect Phone SMS is only available when the
vehicle is not moving.
Voice Text List
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 133
Read Messages:
If you receive a new text message while your phone is
connected to Uconnect Phone, an announcement will be
made to notify you that you have a new text message.
Once a message is received and viewed or listened to, you
will have the following options:
• Send a Reply
• Forward
• Call
Send Messages Using Buttons On The Touchscreen:
You can send messages using Uconnect Phone. To send a
new message:
1. Press the “Phone” button on the touchscreen.
2. Press the “messaging” button on the touchscreen then
“New Message.”
3. Press one of the 18 preset messages and the person you
wish to send the message to.
Voice Text Reply
134 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
4. If multiple numbers are available for the contact select
which number you would like to have the message sent.
5. Press “Send” or “Cancel.”
Send Messages Using Voice Commands:
1. Push the Phone
button.
2. After the “Listening” prompt and the following beep,
say “Send message to John Smith mobile.”
3. After the system prompts you for what message you
want to send, say the message you wish to send or say
“List.” There are 18 preset messages.
While the list of defined messages are being read, you can
interrupt the system by pushing the Voice Command
button and saying the message you want to send.
Preset Message List
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 135
After the system confirms that you want to send your
message to John Smith, your message will be sent.
List of Preset Messages:
1. Yes.
2. No.
3. Okay.
4. I can’t talk right now.
5. Call me.
6. I’ll call you later.
7. I’m on my way.
8. Thanks.
9. I’ll be late.
10. I will be <number> minutes late.
11. See you in <number> minutes.
12. Stuck in traffic.
13. Start without me.
14. Where are you?
15. Are you there yet?
16. I need directions.
17. I’m lost.
18. See you later.
Preset Message List
136 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Bluetooth Communication Link
Mobile phones have been found to lose connection to the
Uconnect Phone. When this happens, the connection can
generally be re-established by switching the mobile phone
OFF/ON. Your mobile phone is recommended to remain in
Bluetooth ON mode.
Power-Up
After switching the ignition key from OFF to either the ON
or ACC position, or after a language change, you must wait
at least 15 seconds prior to using the system.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 137
Voice Tree
138 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE:
1. You can replace “John Smith” with any name in your
mobile or favorite phone book. You can also say “Send
a message to John Smith,” and the system will ask you
which phone number you want to send a message to for
John Smith.
2. You can replace “Mobile” with “Home,” “Work” or
“Other.”
3. You can replace “Incoming Calls” with “Outgoing
Calls” or “Missed Calls.”
4. You can replace “248 555 1212” with any phone number
supported by your Mobile phone.
5. These commands can be used during a phone call after
pushing the Uconnect Voice Command button on the
steering wheel. Please note the call will be muted while
the VR session is active.
6. Send dial tones for automated systems is available while
a call is active. This is an example that uses a Phonebook
Record named “Voicemail Password.”
7. Storing Dial tones in contact names is possible but only
the first number encountered in a contact name will be
sent. For example, if there is a number stored in the
Home and Work numbers for the contact “Voicemail
password,” only the Home number will be sent.
8. If your phone does not support phonebook download or
call log download over Bluetooth, then these commands
will return a response that the contact does not exist in
the phonebook.
9. Emergency and Towing assistance are contacts that have
been pre-loaded in the phonebook. Commands such as
“Call Emergency” and “Call Towing Assistance” will
call the corresponding number stored with those con-
tacts.
NOTE: Available Voice Commands are shown in bold face
and underlined in the gray shaded boxes.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 139
140 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE:
1. You can replace “John Smith” with any name in your
mobile or favorite phone book. You can also say “Send
a message to John Smith” and the system will ask you
which phone number you want to send a message to for
John Smith.
2. You can replace “Mobile” with “Home,” “Work” or
“Other.”
3. You can replace “Incoming Calls” with “Outgoing
Calls” or “Missed Calls.”
4. Messaging commands only work if the Uconnect system
is equipped with this feature and the mobile phone
supports messaging over Bluetooth.
5. You can replace “248 555 1212” with any phone number
supported by your Mobile phone.
6. You can replace “4” with any message number shown
on the screen.
7. If your phone does not support phonebook download or
call log download over Bluetooth then these commands
will return a response that the contact does not exist in
the phonebook.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 141
NOTE: Available Voice Commands are shown in bold face
and underlined in the gray shaded boxes.
142 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
General Information
This device complies with FCC rules Part 15 and Industry
Canada RSS-210. Operation is subject to the following two
conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful interference.
2. This device must accept any interference that may be
received including interference that may cause unde-
sired operation.
NOTE:
• The transmitter has been tested and it complies with
FCC and IC rules. Changes or modifications not ex-
pressly approved by the party responsible for compli-
ance could void the user’s authority to operate the
device.
• The term IC before the certification/registration number
only signifies that Industry Canada technical specifica-
tions were met.
VOICE COMMAND (RADIO 8.4/8.4 NAV)
Radio 8.4/8.4 NAV
The Uconnect Voice Command system allows
you to control your AM, FM radio, satellite radio,
disc player, SD Card, USB/iPod and SiriusXM
Travel Link.
NOTE: Take care to speak into the Voice Command system
as calmly and normally as possible. The ability of the Voice
Command system to recognize user voice commands may
be negatively affected by rapid speaking or a raised voice
level.
WARNING!
Any voice commanded system should be used only in
safe driving conditions following all applicable laws,
including laws regarding phone use. Your attention
should be focused on safely operating the vehicle.
Failure to do so may result in a collision causing
serious injury or death.
When you push the Uconnect Voice Command
button,
you will hear a beep. The beep is your signal to give a
command.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 143
If no command is spoken the system will say one of two
responses:
• I didn’t understand
• I didn’t get that, etc.
If a command is not spoken a second time, the system will
respond with an error and give some direction as what can
be said based on the context you are in. After three
consecutive failures of a spoken command the VR session
will end.
Pushing the Uconnect Voice Command
button while
the system is speaking is known as “barging in.” The
system will be interrupted, and after the beep, you can say
a command. This will become helpful once you start to
learn the options.
NOTE: At any time, you can say the words “Cancel” or
“Help.”
These commands are universal and can be used from any
menu. All other commands can be used depending upon
the active application.
When using this system, you should speak clearly and at a
normal speaking volume.
The system will best recognize your speech if the windows
are closed, and the heater/air conditioning fan is set to low.
At any point, if the system does not recognize one of your
commands, you will be prompted to repeat it.
To hear available commands, push the Uconnect Voice
Command
button and say “Help.” You will hear
available commands for the screen displayed.
Natural Speech
Natural speech allows the user to speak commands in
phrases or complete sentences. The system filters out
certain non-word utterances and sounds such as “ah” and
“eh.” The system handles fill-in words such as “I would
like to.”
The system handles multiple inputs in the same phrase or
sentence such as “make a phone call” and “to Kelly Smith.”
For multiple inputs in the same phrase or sentence, the
system identifies the topic or context and provides the
associated follow-up prompt such as “Who do you want to
call?” in the case where a phone call was requested but the
specific name was not recognized.
144 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
The system utilizes continuous dialog; when the system
requires more information from the user it will ask a
question to which the user can respond without pressing
the Uconnect Voice Command
button.
Uconnect Voice Commands
The Uconnect Voice Command system understands two
types of commands. Universal commands are available at
all times. Local commands are available if the supported
radio mode is active.
Start a dialogue by pushing the Uconnect Voice Command
button.
Changing The Volume
1. Start a dialogue by pushing the Voice Command
but-
ton.
2. Say a command (e.g., “Help”).
3. Use the ON/OFF VOLUME rotary knob to adjust the
volume to a comfortable level while the Voice Com-
mand system is speaking. Please note the volume set-
ting for Voice Command is different than the audio
system.
Starting Voice Recognition (VR) Session In
Radio/Player Modes
In this mode, you can say the following commands:
NOTE: The commands can be said on any screen when a
call is not active after pushing the Uconnect Voice Com-
mand
button.
Source
To switch to the audio source, say “Change source to Disc”
for example. This command can be given in any mode or
screen:
• “Track” (#) (to change the track)
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 145
Voice Tree
146 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE:
• You can replace “950 AM” with any other AM or FM
frequency, such as “98.7 FM.”
• You can replace “80’s on 8” with any other satellite
station name received by the radio.
• You can replace “8” with any other satellite channel
number received by the radio.
• You can replace “rock” with any of the satellite music
types.
• Available Voice Commands are shown in bold face and
shaded grey.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 147
148 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE:
• You can replace the album, artist, song, genre, playlist,
podcast and audio book names with any corresponding
names on the current device that is playing.
• You can replace “8” with any track on the CD that is
currently playing. Command is only available when CD
is playing.
• Playlist, Podcast and audio book commands are only
available when the iPod is connected and playing.
• VR commands, Albums, Artists, and Genre names are
based on the music metadata contained on the loaded/
connected device.
• Available Voice Commands are shown in bold face and
shaded grey.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 149
150 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE:
• You can replace “NFL” with any league shown on the
sports league screen. For example you can say “Show
MLB headlines” or “Show PGA headlines.”
• You can replace “Headlines” with any menu items
shown on a league screen. For example you can say
“Show NFL Schedule and results” or “Show NCAA
Basketball AP top 25” or “Show Major League Baseball
Teams.”
• You can also say “Show Current Weather” or “Show
extended weather” or “Show five day forecast” or
“Show ski info” to get other forecasts.
• Available Voice Commands are shown in bold face and
shaded grey.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 151
152 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE:
• Only available with Navigation equipped vehicles.
• You can replace “Player” with “Radio,” “Navigation,”
“Phone,” “Climate,” “More” or “Settings.”
• Navigation commands only work if equipped with
Navigation.
• Available Voice Commands are shown in bold face and
shaded grey.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 153
154 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE:
• You can also say “Find City,” “Find Favorite,” “Find
Play by Category,” “Find Play by Name,” “Find Re-
cently Found,” “Where to?” or “Go Home.”
• You can say “Find Nearest” then “Restaurant,” “Fuel,”
“Transit,” “Lodging,” “Shopping,” “Bank,” “Entertain-
ment,” “Recreation,” “Attractions,” “Community,”
“Auto Services,” “Hospitals,” “Parking,” “Airport,”
“Police Stations,” “Fire Stations,” or “Auto Dealers.”
• Available Voice Commands are shown in bold face and
shaded grey.
SEATS
Seats are a part of the Occupant Restraint System of the
vehicle.
WARNING!
• It is dangerous to ride in a cargo area, inside or
outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people riding in
these areas are more likely to be seriously injured or
killed.
• Do not allow people to ride in any area of your
vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat belts.
In a collision, people riding in these areas are more
likely to be seriously injured or killed.
• Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and
using a seat belt properly.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 155
Driver’s Power Seat — If Equipped
The power seat switch is on the outboard side of the seat
near the floor. Use this switch to move the seat up, down,
forward, rearward or to tilt the seat.
Adjusting The Seat Forward Or Rearward
The seat can be adjusted both forward and rearward. Push
the seat switch forward or rearward. The seat will move in
the direction of the switch. Release the switch when the
desired position has been reached.
Adjusting The Seat Up Or Down
The height of the seats can be adjusted up or down. Pull
upward or push downward on the seat switch. The seat
will move in the direction of the switch. Release the switch
when the desired position is reached.
Tilting The Seat Up Or Down
The angle of the seat cushion can be adjusted in four
directions. Pull upward or push downward on the front or
rear of the seat switch; the front or rear of the seat cushion
will move in the direction of the switch. Release the switch
when the desired position is reached.
WARNING!
• Adjusting a seat while driving may be dangerous.
Moving a seat while driving could result in loss of
control which could cause a collision and serious
injury or death.
• Seats should be adjusted before fastening the seat
belts and while the vehicle is parked. Serious injury
or death could result from a poorly adjusted seat belt.
(Continued)
Power Seat Switch
156 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING! (Continued)
• Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that the
shoulder belt is no longer resting against your chest.
In a collision you could slide under the seat belt,
which could result in serious injury or death.
CAUTION!
Do not place any article under a power seat or impede
its ability to move as it may cause damage to the seat
controls. Seat travel may become limited if movement
is stopped by an obstruction in the seat’s path.
Power Lumbar — If Equipped
The Power Lumbar switch is located on the outboard side
of the driver’s seat. Push the switch forward to increase the
lumbar support. Push the switch rearward to decrease the
lumbar support. Pushing upward or downward on the
switch will raise or lower the position of the support.
Front Heated Seats — If Equipped
The front heated seats control buttons are located within
the Uconnect system. You can gain access to the control
buttons through the climate screen or the controls screen.
• Press the heated seat button
once to turn the HI
setting on.
• Press the heated seat button
a second time to turn
the LO setting on.
• Press the heated seat button
a third time to turn the
heating elements off.
Power Lumbar Switch
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 157
If the HI-level setting is selected, the system will automati-
cally switch to LO-level after approximately 60 minutes of
continuous operation. At that time, the display will change
from HI to LO, indicating the change. The LO-level setting
will turn off automatically after approximately 45 minutes.
NOTE: The engine must be running for the heated seats to
operate.
Vehicles Equipped With Remote Start
On models that are equipped with remote start, the heated
seats can be programmed to come on during a remote start.
This feature can be programmed through the Uconnect
system. Refer to “Uconnect Settings” in “Understanding
Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
WARNING!
• Persons who are unable to feel pain to the skin
because of advanced age, chronic illness, diabetes,
spinal cord injury, medication, alcohol use, exhaus-
tion or other physical condition must exercise care
when using the seat heater. It may cause burns even
at low temperatures, especially if used for long
periods of time
• Do not place anything on the seat or seatback that
insulates against heat, such as a blanket or cushion.
This may cause the seat heater to overheat. Sitting in
a seat that has been overheated could cause serious
burns due to the increased surface temperature of the
seat.
158 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Manual Front Seat Adjustments
For models equipped with manual seats, the driver and
passenger seats can be adjusted forward or rearward by
using a bar located by the front of the seat cushion, near the
floor.
While sitting in the seat, lift up on the bar and move the
seat forward or rearward. Release the bar once the desired
position has been reached. Then, using body pressure,
move forward and rearward on the seat to be sure that the
seat adjusters have latched.
WARNING!
• Adjusting a seat while driving may be dangerous.
Moving a seat while driving could result in loss of
control which could cause a collision and serious
injury or death.
•
Seats should be adjusted before fastening the seat belts
and while the vehicle is parked. Serious injury or death
could result from a poorly adjusted seat belt.
Recliner Adjustment
The recline lever is located on the outboard side of the seat.
To recline the seat, lean forward slightly, lift the lever, lean
back to the desired position and release the lever. To return
the seatback to its normal upright position, lean forward
and lift the lever. Release the lever once the seatback is in
the upright position.
Manual Seat Adjustment
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 159
WARNING!
• Adjusting a seat while the vehicle is moving is
dangerous. The sudden movement of the seat could
cause you to lose control. The seat belt might not be
adjusted properly and you could be injured. Adjust
the seat only while the vehicle is parked.
• Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that the
shoulder belt is no longer resting against your chest.
In a collision, you could slide under the seat belt and
be seriously or even fatally injured. Use the recliner
only when the vehicle is parked.
Driver’s Seat Height Adjustment — If Equipped
The seat height control lever is located on the outboard side
of the seat. Raise the lever to raise the seat. Lower the lever
to lower the seat. The total seat travel is approximately
2.15 inches (55 mm).
Seatback Release
Seat Height Adjustment Lever
160 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Fold-Flat Front Passenger Seat — If Equipped
This feature allows for extended cargo space. When the
seat is folded flat, it is an extension of the load floor surface
(allowing long cargo to fit from the rear hatch up to the
instrument panel). The fold-flat seatback also has a hard-
back surface that you can use as a work surface when the
seat is folded flat and the vehicle is not in motion.
Pull upward on the recline lever to fold or unfold the seat.
NOTE: You may experience deformation in the seat cush-
ion from the seat belt buckles if the seats are left folded for
an extended period of time. This is normal and by simply
opening the seats to the open position, over time the seat
cushion will return to its normal shape.
WARNING!
Adjusting a seat while the vehicle is moving is dan-
gerous. The sudden movement of the seat could cause
you to lose control. Adjust any seat only while the
vehicle is parked.
Head Restraints
Head restraints are designed to reduce the risk of injury by
restricting head movement in the event of a rear impact.
Head restraints should be adjusted so that the top of the
head restraint is located above the top of your ear.
Fold-Flat Seat
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 161
WARNING!
• All occupants, including the driver, should not oper-
ate a vehicle or sit in a vehicle’s seat until the head
restraints are placed in their proper positions in
order to minimize the risk of neck injury in the event
of a crash.
• Head restraints should never be adjusted while the
vehicle is in motion. Driving a vehicle with the head
restraints improperly adjusted or removed could
cause serious injury or death in the event of a
collision.
Supplemental Active Head Restraints (AHR) —
Front Seats
Supplemental Active Head Restraints are passive, deploy-
able components, and vehicles with this equipment can not
be readily identified by any markings, only through visual
inspection of the head restraint. The head restraint will be
split in two halves, with the front half being soft foam and
trim, the back half being decorative plastic.
When AHRs deploy during a rear impact, the front half of
the head restraint extends forward to minimize the gap
between the back of the occupant’s head and the AHR.
This system is designed to help prevent or reduce the
extent of injuries to the driver and front passenger in
certain types of rear impacts. Refer to “Occupant Re-
straints” in “Things To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle”
for further information.
To raise the head restraint, pull upward on the head
restraint. To lower the head restraint, push the adjustment
button, located at the base of the head restraint, and push
downward on the head restraint.
Adjustment Button
162 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
For comfort, the Active Head Restraints can be tilted
forward and backward. To tilt the head restraint closer to
the back of your head, pull forward on the bottom of the
head restraint. Push rearward on the bottom of the head
restraint to move the head restraint away from your head.
NOTE:
• The head restraints should only be removed by qualified
technicians, for service purposes only. If either of the
head restraints require removal, see your authorized
dealer.
• In the event of deployment of an Active Head Restraint,
refer to “Occupant Restraints/Supplemental Active
Head Restraints (AHR)/Resetting Active Head Re-
straints (AHR)” in “Things To Know Before Starting
Your Vehicle” for further information.
Active Head Restraint (Normal Position)
Active Head Restraint (Tilted)
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 163
WARNING!
• All occupants, including the driver, should not oper-
ate a vehicle or sit in a vehicle’s seat until the head
restraints are placed in their proper positions in
order to minimize the risk of neck injury in the event
of a collision.
• Do not place items over the top of the Active Head
Restraint, such as coats, seat covers or portable DVD
players. These items may interfere with the opera-
tion of the Active Head Restraint in the event of a
collision and could result in serious injury or death.
• Active Head Restraints may be deployed if they are
struck by an object such as a hand, foot or loose
cargo. To avoid accidental deployment of the Active
Head Restraint ensure that all cargo is secured, as
loose cargo could contact the Active Head Restraint
during sudden stops. Failure to follow this warning
could cause personal injury if the Active Head Re-
straint is deployed.
Head Restraints — Second Row Seats
The second row seats are equipped with adjustable and
removable head restraints. To raise the head restraint, pull
upward on the head restraint. To lower the head restraint,
push the adjustment button located on the base of the head
restraint, and push downward on the head restraint.
WARNING!
A loose head restraint thrown forward in a collision or
hard stop could cause serious injury or death to occu-
pants of the vehicle. Always securely stow removed
head restraints in a location outside the occupant
compartment.
1 — Release Button
2 — Adjustment Button
164 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
To remove the head restraint, push the adjustment and the
release buttons while pulling upward on the whole assem-
bly and raise it up as far as it can go. To reinstall the
headrest, put the headrest posts into the holes while
pushing the release buttons. Then adjust it to the appro-
priate height.
WARNING!
ALL the head restraints MUST be reinstalled in the
vehicle to properly protect the occupants. Follow the
re-installation instructions above prior to operating the
vehicle or occupying a seat.
NOTE: For proper routing of a Child Seat Tether, refer to
“Occupant Restraints” in “Things To Know Before Starting
Your Vehicle”.
WARNING!
Driving a vehicle with the head restraints removed or
improperly adjusted could cause serious injury or
death in the event of a collision. The head restraints
should be checked prior to operating the vehicle and
never adjusted while the vehicle is in motion.
Third Row Passenger Seats — Seven Passenger
Models
These head restraints are non-adjustable and non-
removable. However, you can fold them forward when
they are not in use by passengers. Refer to “50/50 Split
Third-Row Passenger Seats With Fold-Flat Feature —
Seven Passenger Models” for further information.
WARNING!
Do not allow a passenger to sit in a third row seat
without having the head restraint unfolded and locked
in place. Failure to follow this warning may result in
personal injury to the passenger in the event of a
collision.
60/40 Split Second-Row Passenger Seats
To provide additional storage area, each second-row pas-
senger seat can be folded flat. This allows for extended
cargo space and still maintains some seating room if
needed.
NOTE: Prior to folding the second-row passenger seat,
make sure the front seatback is not in a reclined position.
This will allow the second-row seat to fold easily.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 165
WARNING!
• It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo area,
inside or outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people
riding in these areas are more likely to be seriously
injured or killed.
• Do not allow people to ride in any area of your
vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat belts.
• Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and
using a seat belt properly.
• On seven passenger models, do not allow a passen-
ger to sit in a third row seat with the second row
seatback(s) folded flat. In a collision, the passenger
could slide underneath the seat belt and be seriously
or even fatally injured.
To Fold The Seat
1. Locate the control lever on the lower outboard side of
the seat.
2. Place one hand on the seatback and apply a gentle
pressure.
3. Lift the control lever with the other hand, allow the
seatback to move forward slightly, and then release the
lever.
WARNING!
To prevent personal injury or damage to objects, keep
your head, arms, and objects out of the folding path of
the seatback.
Seatback Release
166 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
4. Gently guide the seatback into the folded position.
NOTE: You may experience deformation in the seat cush-
ion from the seat belt buckles if the seats are left folded for
an extended period of time. This is normal and by simply
opening the seats to the open position, over time the seat
cushion will return to its normal shape.
To Unfold The Seat
Raise the seatback and lock it in place.
WARNING!
Be certain that the seatback is locked securely into
position. Otherwise, the seat will not provide the
proper stability for child seats and/or passengers. An
improperly latched seat could cause serious injury.
Forward And Rearward Adjustment
The control lever is on the outboard side of the seat. Lift the
lever to move the seat forward or rearward. Release the
lever once the seat is in the desired position. Then, using
body pressure, move forward and rearward on the seat to
be sure that the seat adjusters have latched.
WARNING!
Adjusting a seat while the vehicle is moving is dan-
gerous. The sudden movement of the seat could cause
you to lose control. The seat belt might not be adjusted
properly and you could be injured. Adjust any seat
only while the vehicle is parked.
Manual Seat Adjustment
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 167
Recliner Adjustment
The recline lever is on the outboard side of the seat. To
recline the seatback, lean back, lift the lever, position the
seatback as desired, and then release the lever. To return
the seatback to its normal upright position, lean back, lift
the lever, lean forward, and then release the lever once the
seatback is in the upright position.
WARNING!
• Adjusting a seat while the vehicle is moving is
dangerous. The sudden movement of the seat could
cause you to lose control. The seat belt might not be
adjusted properly and you could be injured. Adjust
the seat only while the vehicle is parked.
• Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that the
shoulder belt is no longer resting against your chest.
In a collision, you could slide under the seat belt and
be seriously or even fatally injured. Use the recliner
only when the vehicle is parked.
Seatback/Armrest — Second Row Passenger Seat
The latch release-loop is located at the top of the seatback/
armrest. Pull the release-loop forward to release the latch
and then downward to lower the seatback/armrest.
Recline Lever
168 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Raise the seatback/armrest and lock it in place when not in
use, or when additional seating area is required.
WARNING!
Keep the latch clean and free of objects and be certain
that the seatback/armrest is locked securely into posi-
tion. Otherwise, the seat will not provide the proper
stability for child seats and/or passengers. An improp-
erly latched seat could cause serious injury.
Stadium Tip ’n Slide (Easy Entry/Exit Seat) — Seven
Passenger Models
This feature allows passengers to easily enter or exit the
third-row passenger seats from either side of the vehicle.
To Move The Second-Row Passenger Seat Forward
NOTE: Raise the seatback/armrest before moving the seat
to allow for full seat travel.
Move the control lever on the upper outboard side of the
seatback forward. Then, in one fluid motion, the seat cushion
flips upward and the seat moves forward on its tracks.
Seatback/Armrest
Tip ’n Slide Control Lever
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 169
NOTE: A hand-grip is molded into the front of each
quarter trim panel near the door opening to assist entry
and exit from the third-row passenger seats.
WARNING!
Do not drive the vehicle with the seat in this position,
as it is only intended for entering and exiting the third
row seats. Failure to follow this warning may result in
personal injury.
To Unfold And Move The Second-Row Passenger Seat
Rearward
Move the seatback rearward until it locks in place and then
continue sliding the seat rearward on its tracks until it
locks in place.
Push the seat cushion downward to lock it in place.
Adjust the seat track position as desired. Using body
pressure, move forward and rearward on the seat to be
sure that the seat adjusters have latched.
WARNING!
Be certain that the seatback and seat are locked se-
curely into position. Otherwise, the seat will not pro-
vide the proper stability for child seats and/or passen-
gers. An improperly latched seat could cause serious
injury.
Tip ’n Slide Seat
170 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
50/50 Split Third-Row Passenger Seats With
Fold-Flat Feature — Seven Passenger Models
To provide additional storage area, each third-row passen-
ger seatback can be folded flat. This allows for extended
cargo space and still maintains some rear seating room if
needed.
NOTE: Prior to folding the third-row passenger seatback,
make sure the second-row passenger seatback is not in a
reclined position. This will allow the seatback to fold easily.
To Fold The Seatback
Pull the latch release-loop located at the top of the seatback
upward, push the seatback forward slightly, and release
the release-loop. Then, continue to push the seatback
forward. The head restraints will fold automatically as the
seatback moves forward.
NOTE: You may experience deformation in the seat cush-
ion from the seat belt buckles if the seats are left folded for
an extended period of time. This is normal and by simply
opening the seats to the open position, over time the seat
cushion will return to its normal shape.
Seatback Release
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 171
To Unfold The Seatback
Grasp the assist strap loop on the seatback and pull it
toward you to raise the seatback. Continue to raise the
seatback until it locks in place. Raise the head restraint to
lock it in place.
The seatback can also be locked in the reclined position. To
do so, pull the latch release-loop located at the top of the
seatback upward, allow the seatback to recline, and release
the release-loop.
WARNING!
• Be certain that the seatback is locked securely into
position. Otherwise, the seat will not provide the
proper stability for passengers. An improperly
latched seat could cause serious injury.
• Do not allow a passenger to sit in a third row seat
without having the head restraint unfolded and
locked in place. Failure to follow this warning may
result in personal injury to the passenger in the event
of a collision.
• Do not allow a passenger to sit in a third row seat
with the second row seatback(s) folded flat. In a
collision, the passenger could slide underneath the
seat belt and be seriously or even fatally injured.
Assist Strap
172 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
TO OPEN AND CLOSE THE HOOD
Two latches must be released to open the hood.
1. Pull the hood release lever located under the left side of
the instrument panel.
2. Outside of the vehicle, locate the safety latch lever near
the center of the grille between the grille and hood
opening. Push the safety latch lever to the left and raise
the hood.
Hood Release
Underhood Safety Latch
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 173
3. Use the hood prop rod to secure the hood in the open
position. Place the upper end of the prop rod in the hole
on the underside of the hood.
WARNING!
Be sure the hood is fully latched before driving your
vehicle. If the hood is not fully latched, it could open
when the vehicle is in motion and block your vision.
Failure to follow this warning could result in serious
injury or death.
CAUTION!
To prevent possible damage:
• Before closing hood, make sure the hood prop rod is
fully seated into its storage retaining clips.
• Do not slam the hood to close it. Use a firm down-
ward push at the center front edge of the hood to
ensure that both latches engage. Never drive your
vehicle unless the hood is fully closed, with both
latches engaged.
LIGHTS
Headlight Switch
The headlight switch is located on the left side of the
instrument panel. This switch controls the operation of the
headlights, parking lights, instrument panel lights, instru-
ment panel light dimming, interior lights and fog lights.
Hood Prop Rod
174 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Rotate the headlight switch clockwise to the first detent for
parking lights and instrument panel light operation. Rotate
the headlight switch to the second detent for headlight,
parking light and instrument panel light operation.
Automatic Headlights
This system automatically turns the headlights on or off
according to ambient light levels. To turn the system on,
rotate the headlight switch counterclockwise to the AUTO
position. When the system is on, the headlight time delay
feature is also on. This means the headlights will stay on
for up to 90 seconds after you place the ignition into the
OFF position. The headlight time delay can be pro-
grammed 0/30/60/90 seconds.
Refer to “Uconnect Settings” in “Understanding Your
Instrument Panel” for further information.
To turn the automatic system off, move the headlight
switch out of the AUTO position.
NOTE: The engine must be running before the headlights
will come on in the automatic mode.
Headlights On With Wipers
When this feature is active, the headlights will turn on after
the wipers are turned on if the headlight switch is placed in
the AUTO position and programmable feature is set to on.
In addition, the headlights will turn off when the wipers
are turned off if they were turned on by this feature.
NOTE: The “Headlights On With Wipers” feature can be
turned on or off using the Uconnect System. Refer to
“Uconnect Settings/Customer Programmable Features” in
“Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further infor-
mation.
Headlight Switch
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 175
Headlight Time Delay
This feature provides the safety of headlight illumination
for up to 90 seconds when leaving your vehicle in an unlit
area.
To activate the delay feature, turn OFF the ignition switch
while the headlights are still on. Then, turn off the head-
lights within 45 seconds. The delay interval begins when
the headlight switch is turned off.
NOTE: The lights must be turned off within 45 seconds of
turning the ignition OFF to activate this feature.
If you turn the headlights, parking lights or ignition switch
ON again, the system will cancel the delay.
If you turn the headlights off before the ignition, they will
turn off in the normal manner.
NOTE: The Headlight Time Delay is programmable using
the Uconnect System, refer to “Uconnect Settings — Cus-
tomer Programmable Features” in “Understanding Your
Instrument Panel” for further information.
Daytime Running Lights (DRL)
The Daytime Running Lights will turn on the first time the
vehicle is shifted out of PARK, and remain on unless the
parking brake is applied. Upon returning to the PARK
position, the DRLs will turn off. DRLs will turn off when
the ignition is switched off.
NOTE: The daytime running lights can be turned on and
off using the Uconnect System, refer to “Uconnect Settings
— Customer Programmable Features” in “Understanding
Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
Lights-On Reminder
If the headlights or parking lights are on after the ignition
is placed in the OFF position, a chime will sound to alert
the driver when the driver’s door is opened.
176 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Fog Lights — If Equipped
The front fog light switch is built into the headlight switch.
To activate the front fog lights, turn on the parking
lights or the low beam headlights and push the
headlight switch. To turn off the front fog lights, either
push the headlight switch a second time or turn off the
headlight switch.
An indicator light in the instrument cluster illuminates
when the fog lights are turned on.
NOTE: The fog lights will operate when the low beam
headlights or parking lights are on. However, selecting the
high beam headlights will turn off the fog lights.
Multifunction Lever
The multifunction lever controls the operation of the turn
signals, headlight beam selection and passing lights. The
multifunction lever is located on the left side of the steering
column.
Fog Light Switch
Multifunction Lever
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 177
Turn Signals
Move the multifunction lever up or down and the arrows
on each side of the instrument cluster flash to show proper
operation of the front and rear turn signal lights.
NOTE:
• If either light remains on and does not flash, or there is
a very fast flash rate, check for a defective outside light
bulb. If an indicator fails to light when the lever is
moved, it would suggest that the indicator bulb is
defective.
• A “Turn Signal On” message will appear in the instru-
ment cluster display and a continuous chime will sound
if the vehicle is driven more than 1 mile (1.6 km) with
either turn signal on.
Lane Change Assist
Tap the lever up or down once, without moving beyond
the detent, and the turn signal (right or left) will flash three
times. Then, the turn signal (right or left) will automatically
turn off.
High/Low Beam Switch
Push the multifunction lever away from you to switch the
headlights to high beam. Pull the multifunction lever
toward you to switch the headlights back to low beam.
Flash-To-Pass
You can signal another vehicle with your headlights by
lightly pulling the multifunction lever toward you. This
will turn on the high beams headlights until the lever is
released.
Interior Lights
The interior lights come on when a door is opened.
To protect the battery, the interior lights will turn off
automatically 10 minutes after the ignition is moved to the
LOCK position. This will occur if the interior lights were
switched on manually or are on because a door is open.
The Battery Protection also includes the glove compart-
ment light. To restore interior light operation after auto-
matic battery protection is enabled (Lights off), either place
the ignition in the ON/RUN position or cycle the light
switch.
178 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Dimmer Controls
The dimmer control is part of the headlight switch and is
located on the left side of the instrument panel. Rotating
the dimmer control upward with the parking lights or
headlights on will increase the brightness of the instrument
panel lights, door map pockets and cupholders (if
equipped).
Dome Light Position
Rotate the instrument panel dimmer control completely
upward to the second detent to turn on the interior lights.
The interior lights will remain on when the dimmer control
is in this position.
Interior Light Defeat (Off)
Rotate the dimmer control downward to the last detent (off
position). The interior lights will remain off when the doors
are open.
Parade Mode (Daytime Brightness Feature)
Rotate the dimmer control upward to the first detent. This
feature brightens all text displays such as the odometer,
instrument cluster display, and radio when the parking
lights or headlights are on.
Map/Reading Lights
These lights are mounted between the sun visors on the
overhead console. Refer to “Overhead Console” in “Under-
standing The Features Of Your Vehicle” for further infor-
mation.
Dimmer Controls
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 179
WINDSHIELD WIPERS AND WASHERS
The windshield wiper/washer control lever is located on
the left side of the steering column.
The front wipers are operated by rotating a switch, located
at the end of the lever. For information on using the rear
window wiper/washer, refer to “Rear Window Features”
in “Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle”.
Intermittent Wiper System
Use the intermittent wiper system when weather condi-
tions make a single wiping cycle, with a variable pause
between cycles, desirable. Rotate the end of the windshield
wiper/washer control lever to one of the first five detents
to select the desired delay interval.
There are five delay settings, which allow you to regulate
the wipe interval from a minimum of one cycle every two
seconds to a maximum of approximately 36 seconds be-
tween cycles at vehicle speeds below 10 mph (16 km/h). At
speeds greater than 10 mph (16 km/h), the delay varies
from a minimum of one cycle every second to a maximum
of approximately 18 seconds between cycles.
Windshield Wiper/Washer Lever
Front Wiper Control
180 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: The wiper delay times depend on vehicle speed. If
the vehicle is moving less than 10 mph (16 km/h), delay
times will be doubled.
Windshield Wiper Operation
Rotate the end of the lever upward, to the first detent past
the intermittent settings for low-speed wiper operation.
Rotate the end of the lever upward to the second detent
past the intermittent settings for high-speed wiper opera-
tion.
NOTE: The wipers will automatically return to the “park”
position if you turn OFF the ignition switch while they are
operating. The wipers will resume operation when you
turn the ignition switch back to the ON position.
CAUTION!
• Turn the windshield wipers off when driving
through an automatic car wash. Damage to the wind-
shield wipers may result if the wiper control is left in
any position other than off.
• In cold weather, always turn off the wiper switch and
allow the wipers to return to the park position before
turning off the engine. If the wiper switch is left on
and the wipers freeze to the windshield, damage to
the wiper motor may occur when the vehicle is
restarted.
• Always remove any buildup of snow that prevents
the windshield wiper blades from returning to the
park position. If the windshield wiper control is
turned off, and the blades cannot return to the park
position, damage to the wiper motor may occur.
Front Wiper Control
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 181
Windshield Washers
To use the windshield washer, push the washer knob,
located on the end of the multifunction lever, inward to the
second detent.
If you activate the washer while the wiper control is in the
delay range, the wipers will operate in low-speed for two
or three wipe cycles after releasing the lever and then
resume the intermittent interval previously selected.
If you activate the washer while the wiper control is in the
off position, the wipers will operate for two or three wipe
cycles and then turn off.
WARNING!
Sudden loss of visibility through the windshield could
lead to a collision. You might not see other vehicles or
other obstacles. To avoid sudden icing of the wind-
shield during freezing weather, warm the windshield
with the defroster before and during windshield
washer use.
Mist Feature
Push the washer knob, located on the end of the multifunc-
tion lever, inward to the first detent to activate a single
wipe cycle to clear the windshield of road mist or spray
from a passing vehicle. The wipers will continue to operate
until you release the lever.
NOTE: The mist feature does not activate the washer
pump; therefore, no washer fluid will be sprayed on the
windshield. The wash function must be used in order to
spray the windshield with washer fluid.
Headlights On With Wipers
When this feature is active, the headlights will turn on after
the wipers are turned on if the headlight switch is placed in
the AUTO position and programmable feature is set to on.
In addition, the headlights will turn off when the wipers
are turned off if they were turned on by this feature.
NOTE: The “Headlights On With Wipers” feature can be
turned on or off using the Uconnect System. Refer to
“Uconnect Settings/Customer Programmable Features” in
“Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further infor-
mation.
182 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
TILT/TELESCOPING STEERING COLUMN
This feature allows you to tilt the steering column upward
or downward. It also allows you to lengthen or shorten the
steering column. The tilt/telescoping control handle is
located below the steering wheel at the end of the steering
column.
To unlock the steering column, push the control handle
downward. To tilt the steering column, move the steering
wheel upward or downward as desired. To lengthen or
shorten the steering column, pull the steering wheel out-
ward or push it inward as desired. To lock the steering
column in position, pull the control handle upward until
fully engaged.
WARNING!
Do not adjust the steering column while driving.
Adjusting the steering column while driving or driv-
ing with the steering column unlocked could cause the
driver to lose control of the vehicle. Be sure the
steering column is locked before driving your vehicle.
Failure to follow this warning may result in serious
injury or death.
HEATED STEERING WHEEL — IF EQUIPPED
The steering wheel contains a heating element that helps
warm your hands in cold weather. The heated steering
wheel has only one temperature setting. Once the heated
steering wheel has been turned on, it will stay on for an
average of 80 minutes or more before automatically shut-
ting off. This time will vary based on environmental
temperatures. The heated steering wheel can shut off early
or may not turn on when the steering wheel is already
warm.
Tilt/Telescoping Steering Control Handle
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 183
The heated steering wheel control button is located within
the Uconnect system. You can gain access to the control
button through the climate screen or the controls screen.
• Press the heated steering wheel button
once to turn
the heating element on.
• Press the heated steering wheel button
a second time
to turn the heating element off.
NOTE: The engine must be running for the heated steering
wheel to operate.
Vehicles Equipped With Remote Start
On models that are equipped with remote start, the heated
steering wheel can be programmed to come on during a
remote start through the Uconnect system. Refer to
“Uconnect Settings” in “Understanding Your Instrument
Panel” for further information.
WARNING!
• Persons who are unable to feel pain to the skin
because of advanced age, chronic illness, diabetes,
spinal cord injury, medication, alcohol use, exhaus-
tion, or other physical conditions must exercise care
when using the steering wheel heater. It may cause
burns even at low temperatures, especially if used
for long periods.
• Do not place anything on the steering wheel that
insulates against heat, such as a blanket or steering
wheel covers of any type and material. This may
cause the steering wheel heater to overheat.
SPEED CONTROL — IF EQUIPPED
When engaged, the Speed Control takes over accelerator
operations at speeds greater than 25 mph (40 km/h).
The Speed Control buttons are located on the right side of
the steering wheel.
184 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: In order to ensure proper operation, the Speed
Control System has been designed to shut down if multiple
Speed Control functions are operated at the same time. If
this occurs, the Speed Control System can be reactivated by
pushing the Speed Control ON/OFF button and resetting
the desired vehicle set speed.
To Activate
Push the ON/OFF button. The cruise control indicator
light in the instrument cluster display will illuminate. To
turn the system off, push the ON/OFF button a second
time. The cruise control indicator light will turn off. The
system should be turned off when not in use.
WARNING!
Leaving the Speed Control system on when not in use
is dangerous. You could accidentally set the system or
cause it to go faster than you want. You could lose
control and have an accident. Always leave the system
off when you are not using it.
To Set A Desired Speed
Turn the Speed Control on. When the vehicle has reached
the desired speed, push the SET (-) button and release.
Release the accelerator and the vehicle will operate at the
selected speed.
NOTE: The vehicle should be traveling at a steady speed
and on level ground before pushing the SET (-) button.
Speed Control Buttons
1 — ON/OFF 3 — SET -
2 — RES + 4 — CANCEL
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 185
To Deactivate
A soft tap on the brake pedal, pushing the CANCEL
button, or normal brake pressure while slowing the vehicle
will deactivate Speed Control without erasing the set speed
memory. Pushing the ON/OFF button or turning the
ignition switch OFF erases the set speed memory.
To Resume Speed
To resume a previously set speed, push the RES (+) button
and release. Resume can be used at any speed above
20 mph (32 km/h).
To Vary The Speed Setting
To Increase Speed
When the Speed Control is set, you can increase speed by
pushing the RES (+) button.
The driver’s preferred units can be selected through the
Uconnect settings if equipped. Refer to ”Uconnect Set-
tings” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for more
information. The speed increment shown is dependent on
the selected speed unit of U.S. (mph) or Metric (km/h):
U.S. Speed (mph)
• Pushing the RES (+) button once will result in a 1 mph
increase in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the button
results in an increase of 1 mph.
• If the button is continually pushed, the set speed will
continue to increase until the button is released, then the
new set speed will be established.
Metric Speed (km/h)
• Pushing the RES (+) button once will result in a 1 km/h
increase in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the button
results in an increase of 1 km/h.
• If the button is continually pushed, the set speed will
continue to increase until the button is released, then the
new set speed will be established.
To Decrease Speed
When the Speed Control is set, you can decrease speed by
pushing the SET (-) button.
186 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
The driver’s preferred units can be selected through the
Uconnect settings if equipped. Refer to ⬙Uconnect Settings”
in Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for more infor-
mation. The speed decrement shown is dependant on the
selected speed unit of U.S. (mph) or Metric (km/h):
U.S. Speed (mph)
• Pushing the SET (-) button once will result in a 1 mph
decrease in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the button
results in a decrease of 1 mph.
• If the button is continually pushed, the set speed will
continue to decrease until the button is released, then the
new set speed will be established.
Metric Speed (km/h)
• Pushing the SET (-) button once will result in a 1 km/h
decrease in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the button
results in a decrease of 1 km/h.
• If the button is continually pushed, the set speed will
continue to decrease until the button is released, then the
new set speed will be established.
To Accelerate For Passing
Press the accelerator as you would normally. When the
pedal is released, the vehicle will return to the set speed.
Using Speed Control On Hills
The transmission may downshift on hills to maintain the
vehicle set speed.
NOTE: The Speed Control system maintains speed up and
down hills. A slight speed change on moderate hills is
normal.
On steep hills, a greater speed loss or gain may occur, it
may be preferable to drive without Speed Control.
WARNING!
Speed Control can be dangerous where the system
cannot maintain a constant speed. Your vehicle could
go too fast for the conditions, and you could lose
control and have an accident. Do not use Speed Control
in heavy traffic or on roads that are winding, icy,
snow-covered or slippery.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 187
PARKSENSE REAR PARK ASSIST — IF EQUIPPED
The ParkSense Rear Park Assist system provides visual and
audible indications of the distance between the rear fascia
and a detected obstacle when backing up, e.g. during a
parking maneuver. Refer to “ParkSense System Usage
Precautions” in this section for limitations of this system
and recommendations.
ParkSense will retain the last system state (enabled or
disabled) from the last ignition cycle when the ignition is
changed to the ON/RUN position.
ParkSense can be active only when the gear selector is in
REVERSE. If ParkSense is enabled at this gear selector
position, the system will remain active until the vehicle
speed is increased to approximately 7 mph (11 km/h) or
above. The system will become active again if the vehicle
speed is decreased to speeds less than approximately
6 mph (9 km/h).
ParkSense Sensors
The four ParkSense sensors, located in the rear fascia/
bumper, monitor the area behind the vehicle that is within
the sensors’ field of view. The sensors can detect obstacles
from approximately 12 inches (30 cm) up to 79 inches
(200 cm) from the rear fascia/bumper in the horizontal
direction, depending on the location, type and orientation
of the obstacle.
ParkSense Warning Display
The ParkSense Warning screen will only be displayed if
“Sound and Display” is selected from the Uconnect Sys-
tem. Refer to “Uconnect Settings” in “Understanding Your
Instrument Panel” for further information.
The ParkSense Warning screen is located within the instru-
ment cluster display. It provides visual warnings to indi-
cate the distance between the rear fascia/bumper and the
detected obstacle. Refer to “Instrument Cluster Display” in
“Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further infor-
mation.
188 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
ParkSense Display
When the vehicle is in REVERSE, the warning display will
turn on indicating the system status.
The system will indicate a detected obstacle by showing
three solid arcs and will produce a one-half second tone. As
the vehicle moves closer to the obstacle, the instrument
cluster display will show fewer arcs and the sound tone
will change from slow, to fast, to continuous.
Park Assist Ready
Park Assist System Off
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 189
Slow Tone Fast Tone
190 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
The vehicle is close to the obstacle when the warning
display shows one flashing arc and sounds a continuous
tone. The following chart shows the warning alert opera-
tion when the system is detecting an obstacle:
WARNING ALERTS
Rear Distance
(inches/cm)
Greater than
79 inches (200
cm)
79-39 inches
(200-100 cm)
39-25 inches
(100-65 cm)
25-12 inches
(65-30 cm)
Less than
12 inches (30 cm)
Audible Alert
Chime
None Single 1/2-
Second Tone
Slow Fast Continuous
Arcs None 3 Solid
(Continuous)
3 Slow
Flashing
2 Slow
Flashing
1 Slow
Flashing
Continuous Tone
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 191
Enabling And Disabling ParkSense
ParkSense can be enabled and disabled using the Uconnect
System. The available choices are: Off, Sound Only, or
Sound and Display. Refer to “Uconnect Settings” in “Un-
derstanding Your Instrument Panel” for further informa-
tion.
When the ParkSense button is pushed to disable the
system, the instrument cluster display will show the
“PARK ASSIST SYSTEM OFF” message for approximately
five seconds. Refer to “Instrument Cluster Display” in
“Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further infor-
mation. When the gear selector is moved to REVERSE and
the system is disabled, the instrument cluster display will
show the “PARK ASSIST SYSTEM OFF” message for as
long as the vehicle is in REVERSE.
Service The ParkSense Rear Park Assist System
During vehicle start up, when the ParkSense Rear Park
Assist system has detected a fault condition, the instru-
ment cluster display will actuate a single chime, once per
ignition cycle, and it will display the “CLEAN PARK
ASSIST”, “SERVICE PARK ASSIST”, or “SERVICE PARK
ASSIST SYSTEM” message. Refer to “Instrument Cluster
Display” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for
further information. When the gear selector is moved to
REVERSE and the system has detected a fault condition,
the instrument cluster display will show the ⬙CLEAN
PARK ASSIST⬙, ⬙SERVICE PARK ASSIST⬙,OR⬙SERVICE
PARK ASSIST SYSTEM⬙ messages for as long as the vehicle
is in REVERSE. Under this condition, ParkSense will not
operate.
If “CLEAN PARK ASSIST” appears in the instrument
cluster display, make sure the outer surface and the under-
side of the rear fascia/bumper are clean and clear of snow,
ice, mud, dirt or other obstruction. Then, cycle the ignition.
If the message continues to appear, see an authorized
dealer.
If “SERVICE PARK ASSIST” or “SERVICE PARK ASSIST
SYSTEM” appears in the instrument cluster display, see an
authorized dealer.
Cleaning The ParkSense System
Clean the ParkSense sensors with water, car wash soap and
a soft cloth. Do not use rough or hard cloths. Do not scratch
or poke the sensors. Otherwise, you could damage the
sensors.
192 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
ParkSense System Usage Precautions
NOTE:
• Ensure that the rear bumper is free of snow, ice, mud,
dirt and debris to keep the ParkSense system operating
properly.
• Jackhammers, large trucks, and other vibrations could
affect the performance of ParkSense.
•
When you turn ParkSense off, the instrument cluster dis-
play will read “PARK ASSIST SYSTEM OFF.” Furthermore,
once you turn ParkSense off, it remains off until you turn it
on again, even if you cycle the ignition key.
• When you move the gear selector to the REVERSE
position and ParkSense is turned off, the instrument
cluster display will show the “PARK ASSIST SYSTEM
OFF” message for as long as the vehicle is in REVERSE.
• Clean the ParkSense sensors regularly, taking care not to
scratch or damage them. The sensors must not be
covered with ice, snow, slush, mud, dirt or debris.
Failure to do so can result in the system not working
properly. The ParkSense system might not detect an
obstacle behind the fascia/bumper, or it could provide a
false indication that an obstacle is behind the fascia/
bumper.
• Ensure the ParkSense system is OFF if objects such as
bicycle carriers, trailer hitches, etc., are placed within
12 inches (30 cm) from the rear fascia/bumper. Failure to
do so can result in the system misinterpreting a close
object as a sensor problem, causing the “SERVICE PARK
ASSIST SYSTEM” message to appear in the instrument
cluster display.
WARNING!
• Drivers must be careful when backing up even when
using ParkSense. Always check carefully behind
your vehicle, look behind you, and be sure to check
for pedestrians, animals, other vehicles, obstructions,
and blind spots before backing up. You are respon-
sible for safety and must continue to pay attention to
your surroundings. Failure to do so can result in
serious injury or death.
• Before using ParkSense, it is strongly recommended
that the ball mount and hitch ball assembly is
disconnected from the vehicle when the vehicle is
not used for towing. Failure to do so can result in
injury or damage to vehicles or obstacles because the
hitch ball will be much closer to the obstacle than the
(Continued)
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 193
WARNING! (Continued)
rear fascia when the loudspeaker sounds the con-
tinuous tone. Also, the sensors could detect the ball
mount and hitch ball assembly, depending on its size
and shape, giving a false indication that an obstacle
is behind the vehicle.
CAUTION!
• ParkSense is only a parking aid and it is unable to
recognize every obstacle, including small obstacles.
Parking curbs might be temporarily detected or not
detected at all. Obstacles located above or below the
sensors will not be detected when they are in close
proximity.
• The vehicle must be driven slowly when using
ParkSense in order to be able to stop in time when an
obstacle is detected. It is recommended that the
driver looks over his/her shoulder when using
ParkSense.
PARKVIEW REAR BACK UP CAMERA —
IF EQUIPPED
Your vehicle may be equipped with the ParkView Rear
Back Up Camera that allows you to see an on-screen image
of the rear surroundings of your vehicle whenever the gear
selector is put into REVERSE. The image will be displayed
in the touchscreen display along with a caution note to
“CHECK ENTIRE SURROUNDINGS” across the top of the
screen. After five seconds this note will disappear. The
ParkView camera is located on the rear of the vehicle above
the rear license plate.
When the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE, the rear
camera mode is exited and the last selected touchscreen
appears again.
If your vehicle is equipped with the Camera Delay feature
and it is turned on, the rear camera image will be displayed
for up to 10 seconds when the vehicle is shifted out of
REVERSE unless the forward vehicle speed exceeds 8 mph
(13 km/h), the transmission is shifted into PARK or the
vehicle’s ignition is cycled to the OFF position.
Static grid lines will illustrate the width of the vehicle
while a dashed center-line will indicate the center of the
vehicle to assist with parking or aligning to a hitch/
receiver. The static grid lines will show separate zones that
will help indicate the distance to the rear of the vehicle.
194 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: The ParkView Rear Back Up Camera has program-
mable modes of operation that may be selected through the
Uconnect System. Refer to “Uconnect Settings” in “Under-
standing Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
Different colored zones indicate the distance to the rear of
the vehicle.
The following table shows the approximate distances for
each zone:
Zone Distance to the rear of the vehicle
Red 0 - 1 ft (0 - 30 cm)
Yellow 1 ft - 3 ft (30 cm - 1 m)
Green 3 ft or greater (1 m or greater)
WARNING!
Drivers must be careful when backing up even when
using the ParkView Rear Back Up Camera. Always
check carefully behind your vehicle, and be sure to
check for pedestrians, animals, other vehicles, obstruc-
tions, or blind spots before backing up. You are re-
sponsible for the safety of your surroundings and must
continue to pay attention while backing up. Failure to
do so can result in serious injury or death.
CAUTION!
• To avoid vehicle damage, ParkView should only be
used as a parking aid. The ParkView camera is
unable to view every obstacle or object in your drive
path.
• To avoid vehicle damage, the vehicle must be driven
slowly when using ParkView to be able to stop in
time when an obstacle is seen. It is recommended
that the driver look frequently over his/her shoulder
when using ParkView.
NOTE: If snow, ice, mud, or any foreign substance builds
up on the camera lens, clean the lens, rinse with water, and
dry with a soft cloth. Do not cover the lens.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 195
OVERHEAD CONSOLE
The overhead console contains courtesy/reading lights,
storage for sunglasses, an interior observation mirror and
an optional power sunroof switch.
Courtesy/Reading Lights
The overhead console has two courtesy lights. The lights
turn on when a front door, a rear door or the liftgate is
opened. If your vehicle is equipped with Remote Keyless
Entry the lights will also turn on when the unlock button
on the key fob is pushed. The courtesy lights also function
as reading lights. Push in on each lens to turn these lights
on while inside the vehicle. Push the lens a second time to
turn each light off. You may adjust the direction of these
lights by pushing the outside ring, which is identified with
four directional arrows.
Overhead Console
Courtesy/Reading Light
196 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Sunglasses Storage
To access the storage compartment, push on the raised bars
on the compartment door in the center of the console and
release and the door will swing downward.
Interior Observation Mirror
The convex interior observation mirror provides the driver
and front seat passenger a wide field of view to conve-
niently view passengers sitting in the rear passenger seats.
To use the interior observation mirror, push on the raised
bars on the compartment door and release (the door will
swing downward), then raise the door until it is almost
closed and release. The door will latch in position to use the
interior observation mirror.
NOTE: From the “observation mirror” position, the door
can only be closed.
To return to the full open position, the door must first be
closed and then opened by pushing the latch again to
release.
Power Sunroof Switch — If Equipped
Refer to “Power Sunroof” in “Understanding the Features
Of Your Vehicle” for further information.
Sunglasses Storage Compartment
Observation Mirror
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 197
GARAGE DOOR OPENER — IF EQUIPPED
HomeLink replaces up to three remote controls (hand-held
transmitters) that operate devices such as garage door
openers, motorized gates, lighting or home security sys-
tems. The HomeLink unit operates off your vehicle’s
battery.
The HomeLink buttons, located on either the overhead
console, headliner or sunvisor, designate the three different
HomeLink channels. The HomeLink indicator is located
above the center button.
NOTE: HomeLink is disabled when the Vehicle Security
Alarm is active.
Before You Begin Programming HomeLink
Be sure that your vehicle is parked outside of the garage
before you begin programming.
For more efficient programming and accurate transmission
of the radio-frequency signal, it is recommended that a new
battery be placed in the hand-held transmitter of the device
that is being programmed to the HomeLink system.
HomeLink Buttons/Overhead Consoles
HomeLink Buttons/Sunvisor/Headliner
198 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
To erase the channels, place the ignition in the ON/RUN
position and push and hold the two outside HomeLink
buttons (I and III) for up 20 seconds or until the red
indicator flashes.
NOTE:
• Erasing all channels should only be performed when
programming HomeLink for the first time. Do not erase
channels when programming additional buttons.
• If you have any problems, or require assistance, please
call toll-free 1-800-355-3515 or, on the Internet at
HomeLink.com for information or assistance.
Programming A Rolling Code
For programming garage door openers that were manufac-
tured after 1995:
These garage door openers can be identified by the
“LEARN” or “TRAIN” button located where the hanging
antenna is attached to the garage door opener. It is NOT the
button that is normally used to open and close the door.
The name and color of the button may vary by manufac-
turer.
1. Place the ignition in the ON/RUN position.
NOTE: For vehicles equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go,
place the ignition in the RUN position with the engine ON.
Make sure while programming HomeLink with the engine
ON that your vehicle is outside of your garage, or that the
garage door remains open at all times.
Training The Garage Door Opener
1 — Door Opener
2 — Training Button
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 199
2. Place the hand-held transmitter 1 to 3 inches (3 to 8 cm)
away from the HomeLink button you wish to program
while keeping the HomeLink indicator light in view.
3. Push and hold the HomeLink button you want to
program while you push and hold the hand-held trans-
mitter button.
4. Continue to hold both buttons and observe the indicator
light. The HomeLink indicator will flash slowly and
then rapidly after HomeLink has received the frequency
signal from the hand-held transmitter. Release both
buttons after the indicator light changes from slow to
rapid.
5. At the garage door opener motor (in the garage), locate
the “LEARN” or “TRAINING” button. This can usually
be found where the hanging antenna wire is attached to
the garage door opener/device motor. Firmly push and
release the “LEARN” or “TRAINING” button. On some
garage door openers/devices there may be a light that
blinks when the garage door opener/device is in the
LEARN/TRAIN mode.
NOTE: You have 30 seconds in which to initiate the next
step after the LEARN button has been pushed.
6. Return to the vehicle and push the programmed
HomeLink button twice (holding the button for two
seconds each time). If the garage door opener/device
activates, programming is complete.
NOTE: If the garage door opener/device does not activate,
push the button a third time (for two seconds) to complete
the training.
To program the remaining two HomeLink buttons, repeat
each step for each remaining button. DO NOT erase the
channels.
Reprogramming A Single HomeLink Button (Rolling
Code)
To reprogram a channel that has been previously trained,
follow these steps:
1. Cycle the ignition to the ON/RUN position.
NOTE: For vehicles equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go,
place the ignition in the RUN position with the engine ON.
Make sure while programming HomeLink with the engine
ON that your vehicle is outside of your garage, or that the
garage door remains open at all times.
200 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
2. Push and hold the desired HomeLink button until the
indicator light begins to flash after 20 seconds. Do not
release the button.
3. Without releasing the button, proceed with “Program-
ming A Rolling Code” step two and follow all remaining
steps.
Programming A Non-Rolling Code
For programming Garage Door Openers manufactured
before 1995:
1. Place the ignition in the ON/RUN position.
NOTE: For vehicles equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go,
place the ignition in the RUN position with the engine ON.
Make sure while programming HomeLink with the engine
ON that your vehicle is outside of your garage, or that the
garage door remains open at all times.
2. Place the hand-held transmitter 1 to 3 inches (3 to 8 cm)
away from the HomeLink button you wish to program
while keeping the HomeLink indicator light in view.
3. Push and hold the HomeLink button you want to
program while you push and hold the hand-held trans-
mitter button.
4. Continue to hold both buttons and observe the indicator
light. The HomeLink indicator will flash slowly and
then rapidly after HomeLink has received the frequency
signal from the hand-held transmitter. Release both
buttons after the indicator light changes from slow to
rapid.
5. Push and hold the programmed HomeLink button and
observe the indicator light.
• If the indicator light stays on constantly, programming
is complete and the garage door/device should acti-
vate when the HomeLink button is pushed.
• To program the two remaining HomeLink buttons,
repeat each step for each remaining button. DO NOT
erase the channels.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 201
Reprogramming A Single HomeLink Button
(Non-Rolling Code)
To reprogram a channel that has been previously trained,
follow these steps:
1. Cycle the ignition to the ON/RUN position.
NOTE: For vehicles equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go,
place the ignition in the RUN position with the engine ON.
Make sure while programming HomeLink with the engine
ON that your vehicle is outside of your garage, or that the
garage door remains open at all times.
2. Push and hold the desired HomeLink button until the
indicator light begins to flash after 20 seconds. Do not
release the button.
3. Without releasing the button, proceed with “Program-
ming A Non-Rolling Code” step two and follow all
remaining steps.
Canadian/Gate Operator Programming
For programming transmitters in Canada/United States
that require the transmitter signals to “time-out” after
several seconds of transmission:
Canadian radio frequency laws require transmitter signals
to time-out (or quit) after several seconds of transmission,
which may not be long enough for HomeLink to pick up
the signal during programming. Similar to this Canadian
law, some U.S. gate operators are designed to time-out in
the same manner.
It may be helpful to unplug the device during the cycling
process to prevent possible overheating of the garage door
or gate motor.
1. Cycle the ignition to the ON/RUN position.
NOTE: For vehicles equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go,
place the ignition in the RUN position with the engine ON.
Make sure while programming HomeLink with the engine
ON that your vehicle is outside of your garage, or that the
garage door remains open at all times.
2. Place the hand-held transmitter 1 to 3 inches (3 to 8 cm)
away from the HomeLink button you wish to program
while keeping the HomeLink indicator light in view.
3. Continue to push and hold the HomeLink button while
you push and release (“cycle”) your hand-held trans-
mitter every two seconds until HomeLink has success-
fully accepted the frequency signal. The indicator light
will flash slowly and then rapidly when fully trained.
202 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
4. Watch for the HomeLink indicator to change flash rates.
When it changes, it is programmed. It may take up to 30
seconds or longer in rare cases. The garage door may
open and close while you are programming.
5. Push and hold the programmed HomeLink button and
observe the indicator light.
NOTE:
• If the indicator light stays on constantly, programming
is complete and the garage door/device should acti-
vate when the HomeLink button is pushed.
• To program the two remaining HomeLink buttons,
repeat each step for each remaining button. DO NOT
erase the channels.
If you unplugged the garage door opener/device for
programming, plug it back in at this time.
Reprogramming A Single HomeLink Button
(Canadian/Gate Operator)
To reprogram a channel that has been previously trained,
follow these steps:
1. Cycle the ignition to the ON/RUN position.
NOTE: For vehicles equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go,
place the ignition in the RUN position with the engine ON.
Make sure while programming HomeLink with the engine
ON that your vehicle is outside of your garage, or that the
garage door remains open at all times.
2. Push and hold the desired HomeLink button until the
indicator light begins to flash after 20 seconds. Do not
release the button.
3. Without releasing the button, proceed with
“Canadian/Gate Operator Programming” step 2 and
follow all remaining steps.
Using HomeLink
To operate, push and release the programmed HomeLink
button. Activation will now occur for the programmed
device (i.e. garage door opener, gate operator, security
system, entry door lock, home/office lighting, etc.) The
hand-held transmitter of the device may also be used at
any time.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 203
Security
It is advised to erase all channels before you sell or turn in
your vehicle.
To do this, push and hold the two outside buttons for 20
seconds until the red indicator flashes.
NOTE: All channels will be erased. Individual channels
cannot be erased.
The HomeLink Universal Transceiver is disabled when the
Vehicle Security Alarm is active.
Troubleshooting Tips
If you are having trouble programming HomeLink, here
are some of the most common solutions:
• Replace the battery in the Garage Door Opener hand-
held transmitter.
• Push the LEARN button on the Garage Door Opener to
complete the training for a Rolling Code.
• Did you unplug the device for programming and re-
member to plug it back in?
If you have any problems, or require assistance, please
call toll-free 1-800-355-3515 or, on the Internet at
HomeLink.com for information or assistance.
WARNING!
• Vehicle exhaust contains carbon monoxide, a danger-
ous gas. Do not run your vehicle in the garage while
programming the transceiver. Exhaust gas can cause
serious injury or death.
• Your motorized door or gate will open and close
while you are programming the universal trans-
ceiver. Do not program the transceiver if people, pets
or other objects are in the path of the door or gate.
Only use this transceiver with a garage door opener
that has a “stop and reverse” feature as required by
Federal safety standards. This includes most garage
door opener models manufactured after 1982. Do not
use a garage door opener without these safety fea-
tures. Call toll-free 1-800-355-3515 or, on the Internet
at HomeLink.com for safety information or assis-
tance.
204 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
General Information
This device complies with FCC rules Part 15 and Industry
Canada RSS-210. Operation is subject to the following two
conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful interference, and
2. This device must accept any interference received, in-
cluding interference that may cause undesired opera-
tion.
NOTE:
• The transmitter has been tested and it complies with
FCC and IC rules. Changes or modifications not ex-
pressly approved by the party responsible for compli-
ance could void the user’s authority to operate the
device.
• The term IC before the certification/registration number
only signifies that Industry Canada technical specifica-
tions were met.
POWER SUNROOF — IF EQUIPPED
The power sunroof switch is located between the sun
visors on the overhead console.
WARNING!
• Never leave children unattended in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle. Never leave the key
fob in or near the vehicle, or in a location accessible
to children. Do not leave the ignition of a vehicle
(Continued)
Power Sunroof Switch
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 205
WARNING! (Continued)
equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go in the ACC or
ON/RUN mode. Occupants, particularly unattended
children, can become entrapped by the power sun-
roof while operating the power sunroof switch. Such
entrapment may result in serious injury or death.
• In a collision, there is a greater risk of being thrown
from a vehicle with an open sunroof. You could also
be seriously injured or killed. Always fasten your
seat belt properly and make sure all passengers are
also properly secured.
• Do not allow small children to operate the sunroof.
Never allow your fingers, other body parts, or any
object, to project through the sunroof opening. In-
jury may result.
Opening Sunroof — Express
Push the switch rearward and release it within one-half
second. The sunroof and sunshade will open automatically
and stop when the full open position is reached. This is
called “Express Open.” During Express Open operation,
any other actuation of the sunroof switch will stop the
sunroof.
Opening Sunroof — Manual Mode
To open the sunroof, push and hold the switch rearward.
The sunroof will move rearward and automatically stop at
full open position. Any release of the switch will stop the
movement. The sunroof and sunshade will remain in a
partially opened condition until the sunroof switch is
pushed again.
Closing Sunroof — Express
Push the switch forward and release it within one-half
second and the sunroof will close automatically from any
position. The sunroof will close fully and stop automati-
cally. This is called “Express Close.” During Express Close
operation, any other actuation of the switch will stop the
sunroof.
Closing Sunroof — Manual Mode
To close the sunroof, push and hold the switch forward.
The sunroof will move forward and automatically stop at
full closed position. Any release of the switch will stop the
movement and the sunroof will remain in a partially closed
condition until the sunroof switch is pushed again.
206 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Pinch Protect Feature
This feature will detect an obstruction in the opening of the
sunroof during Express Close operation. If an obstruction
in the path of the sunroof is detected, the sunroof will
automatically retract. Remove the obstruction if this oc-
curs. Next, push the switch forward and release to Express
Close.
Venting Sunroof — Express
Push and release the Vent button within one half second
and the sunroof will open to the vent position. This is
called “Express Vent” and it will occur regardless of
sunroof position. During Express Vent operation, any
movement of the switch will stop the sunroof.
Sunshade Operation
The sunshade can be opened manually. However, the
sunshade will open automatically as the sunroof opens.
NOTE: The sunshade cannot be closed if the sunroof is
open.
Wind Buffeting
Wind buffeting can be described as the perception of
pressure on the ears or a helicopter-type sound in the ears.
Your vehicle may exhibit wind buffeting with the windows
down, or the sunroof (if equipped) in certain open or
partially open positions. This is a normal occurrence and
can be minimized. If the buffeting occurs with the rear
windows open, open the front and rear windows together
to minimize the buffeting. If the buffeting occurs with the
sunroof open, adjust the sunroof opening to minimize the
buffeting or open any window.
Sunroof Maintenance
Use only a nonabrasive cleaner and a soft cloth to clean the
glass panel.
Ignition Off Operation
The power sunroof switch will remain active for up to
approximately ten minutes after the ignition switch is
turned to the LOCK position. Opening either front door
will cancel this feature.
NOTE: Ignition Off time is programmable through the
Uconnect System. Refer to “Uconnect Settings/Customer
Programmable Features” in “Understanding Your Instru-
ment Panel” for further information.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 207
POWER OUTLETS
A 12 Volt (13 Amp) power outlet is located in the center
console below the radio. The power outlet has power
available when the ignition is in the ON/RUN or ACC
position.
This power outlet will also operate a conventional cigar
lighter unit. To preserve the heating element, do not hold
the lighter in the heating position.
A second 12 Volt (13 Amp) power outlet is located inside
the center console storage area. Power is available with the
ignition is in the ON/RUN, ACC or LOCK position.
Front 12 Volt Power Outlet
Center Console 12 Volt Power Outlet
208 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
A third fused 12 Volt power outlet is located on the back of
the center console. This power outlet has power available
when the ignition is in the LOCK, ON or ACC position.
A fourth fused 12 Volt power outlet is located on the left
quarter trim panel in the cargo area. This power outlet has
power available when the ignition is in the ON or ACC
position.
NOTE: To ensure proper operation a Mopar knob and
element must be used.
Rear Seat 12 Volt Power Outlet
Rear Cargo Area Power Outlet
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 209
CAUTION!
• Do not exceed the maximum power of 160 Watts
(13 Amps) at 12 Volts. If the 160 Watt (13 Amp) power
rating is exceeded the fuse protecting the system will
need to be replaced.
• The power outlet on the bottom of the center console
shares the fuse with the power outlet on the back of
the console. The combined usage must not exceed
160 Watts (13 Amps) at 12 Volts.
•
Power outlets are designed for accessory plugs only. Do
not insert any other object in the power outlets as this
will damage the outlet and blow the fuse. Improper use
of the power outlet can cause damage not covered by
your New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Power Outlet Fuses
1 — F103 20 A Yellow Power Outlet Console Bin & Power Outlet
Console Rear
2 — F102 20 A Yellow Cigar Lighter Instrument Panel & Power
Outlet Left Rear Cargo Area
210 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
To avoid serious injury or death:
• Only devices designed for use in this type of outlet
should be inserted into any 12 Volt outlet.
• Do not touch with wet hands.
• Close the lid when not in use and while driving the
vehicle.
• If this outlet is mishandled, it may cause an electric
shock and failure.
CAUTION!
• Many accessories that can be plugged in draw power
from the vehicle’s battery, even when not in use (i.e.,
cellular phones, etc.). Eventually, if plugged in long
enough, the vehicle’s battery will discharge suffi-
ciently to degrade battery life and/or prevent the
engine from starting.
• Accessories that draw higher power (i.e., coolers,
vacuum cleaners, lights, etc.) will degrade the battery
even more quickly. Only use these intermittently and
with greater caution.
(Continued)
CAUTION! (Continued)
• After the use of high power draw accessories, or long
periods of the vehicle not being started (with acces-
sories still plugged in), the vehicle must be driven a
sufficient length of time to allow the alternator to
recharge the vehicle’s battery.
• Power outlets are designed for accessory plugs only.
Do not hang any type of accessory or accessory
bracket from the plug.
POWER INVERTER — IF EQUIPPED
Your vehicle may be equipped with a 115 Volt AC (150 Watt
maximum) power outlet located on the back of the center
console. This outlet can power mobile phones, electronics
and other low power devices requiring power up to 150
Watts. Certain high-end video game consoles will exceed
this power limit, as will most power tools.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 211
The power inverter is designed with built-in overload
protection. If the power rating of 150 Watts is exceeded, the
power inverter will automatically shut down. Once the
electrical device has been removed from the outlet the
inverter should automatically reset. If the power rating
exceeds approximately 170 Watts, the power inverter may
have to be reset manually. To reset the inverter manually
press the power inverter button OFF and ON. To avoid
overloading the circuit, check the power ratings on electri-
cal devices prior to using the inverter.
NOTE: Due to built-in overload protection, the power
outlet will shut down if the 115 Volt AC (150 Watt maxi-
mum) power rating is exceeded.
WARNING!
To avoid serious injury or death:
• Do not use a three-prong adaptor.
• Do not insert any objects into the receptacles.
• Do not touch with wet hands.
• Close the lid when not in use.
• If this outlet is mishandled, it may cause an electric
shock and failure.
Power Inverter Operation
The power inverter is turned On and Off using the
Uconnect System.
Vehicles Equipped With Radio 4.3
To turn the power inverter on or off perform the following:
1. Press the “More” button on the faceplate (located next to
the Uconnect display).
2.
Press the “Outlet” button on the touchscreen (located on
the Uconnect display) to turn the power inverter On or Off.
Power Inverter
212 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Vehicles Equipped With Radio 8.4/8.4 NAV
To turn the power inverter on or off perform the following:
1. Press the “Controls” button on the touchscreen.
2. Press the “Outlet” button on the touchscreen to turn the
power inverter On or Off.
CUPHOLDERS
There are two cupholders, located in the center floor
console, for the front passengers.
For passengers in the second row there are two cupholders,
located in the center armrest between the two seats.
When the armrest is folded flat the cupholders are in the
back of the Head Restraint. The Head Restraint can be
adjusted to better position the cupholders.
For vehicles equipped with third row seating, there are
additional cupholders located in the trim panels.
Floor Console Cupholders
Armrest Cupholders
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 213
In addition to cupholders, vehicles may also be equipped
with bottle holders. The bottle holders are located on the
door trim panels.
WARNING!
If containers of hot liquid are placed in the bottle
holder, they can spill when the door is closed, burning
the occupants. Be careful when closing the doors to
avoid injury.
STORAGE
Glove Compartment
The glove compartment is located on the passenger side of
the instrument panel.
To open the glove compartment, pull the release handle.
Door Bottle Holder
Glove Compartment
214 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Floor Console Storage
An open storage area, or cubby bin, is located in the floor
console.
Center Console Storage
There is a storage tray and storage compartment located
under the center console armrest.
Floor Console Cubby Bin Center Console
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 215
Pull upward on the release handle, located on the front of
the lid, to gain access to the storage tray and storage
compartment.
The storage tray can be slid forward and rearward or
removed to access the center console storage compartment.
WARNING!
Do not operate this vehicle with a console compart-
ment lid in the open position. Driving with the console
compartment lid open may result in injury in a colli-
sion.
Center Console Storage Tray
Center Console Storage Compartment
216 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Sliding Armrest
The center console armrest can also slide rearward for easy
access to the storage area.
WARNING!
Do not operate this vehicle with a console compart-
ment lid in the open position. Driving with the console
compartment lid open may result in injury in a colli-
sion.
Flip ’n Stow Front Passenger Seat Storage — If
Equipped
The seat latch release-loop is located in the center of the
seat cushion between the seat cushion and the seatback.
Pull the loop upward to release the latch and then forward
to open the seat to the detent position.
NOTE: Make sure that objects inside the bin do not
interfere with the latch before closing the seat. Push the
seat cushion downward after closing it to make sure it
latches to the base.
Sliding Armrest
Front Passenger Seat Storage Compartment
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 217
WARNING!
Be certain that the seat cushion is locked securely into
position before using the seat. Otherwise, the seat will
not provide the proper stability for passengers. An
improperly latched seat cushion could cause serious
injury.
Second-Row Map Pocket And Grocery Retainers —
If Equipped
A map storage pocket and grocery retainers are located on
the back of the driver’s seatback.
In-Floor Storage Bin With Removable Liner
NOTE: Position the front seat to at least a mid-track
position to provide easier access to the storage bin.
An in-floor storage bin is located behind each front seat.
Each 1.6 gal (5.9L) bin can hold up to 12, 12 oz (0.35L) cans,
plus ice, or other items. The removable bin liner allows for
easy filling, emptying, and cleaning.
To access the bin, position the floor mat aside (if equipped).
Pull the door latch release-loop upward to release the latch
and then forward to open the bin door.
Seat Storage And Grocery Retainers
In-Floor Storage
218 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
The liner can be removed for easy cleaning.
CARGO AREA FEATURES
Cargo Management System
Five Passenger System Features
• A raised load floor that sits on top of a large built-in
storage bin.
• A tri-fold door built into the load floor that allows easy
access to items in the built-in storage bin.
• 60/40 split second-row passenger seats with fold flat
feature, which allows for extended cargo space. Refer to
“Seats” in “Understanding The Features Of Your Ve-
hicle” for further information.
• An optional front passenger seat with fold flat feature,
which extends cargo space even further. Refer to “Seats”
in “Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle” for
further information.
• Cargo tie-downs.
• A retractable cargo area cover (if equipped).
Seven Passenger System Features
• A large built-in storage bin with a hinged hardcover
located in the floor behind the third-row passenger
seats.
• 60/40 split second-row passenger seats with fold flat
feature, which allows for extended cargo space. Refer to
“Seats” in “Understanding The Features Of Your Ve-
hicle” for further information.
Removable Liner
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 219
• 50/50 split third-row passenger seats with fold flat
feature, which allows for extended cargo space. Refer to
“Seats” in “Understanding The Features Of Your Ve-
hicle” for further information.
• An optional front passenger seat with fold flat feature,
which extends cargo space even further. Refer to “Seats”
in “Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle” for
further information.
• Cargo tie-downs.
Cargo Tie-Downs
WARNING!
Cargo tie-downs are not safe anchors for a child seat
tether strap. In a sudden stop or collision, a tie-down
could pull loose and allow the child seat to come loose.
A child could be badly injured. Use only the anchors
provided for child seat tethers.
Cargo tie-downs are located on both rear trim panels.
These tie-downs should be used to secure loads safely
when the vehicle is moving.
WARNING!
The weight and position of cargo and passengers can
change the vehicle center of gravity and vehicle han-
dling. To avoid loss of control resulting in personal
injury, follow these guidelines for loading your ve-
hicle:
• Do not carry loads that exceed the load limits described
on the label attached to the left door or left door center
pillar.
Cargo Tie-Downs
220 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
• Always place cargo evenly on the cargo floor. Put
heavier objects as low and as far forward as possible.
• Place as much cargo as possible in front of the rear axle.
Too much weight or improperly placed weight over or
behind the rear axle can cause the vehicle to sway.
• Do not pile luggage or cargo higher than the top of the
seatback. This could impair visibility or become a dan-
gerous projectile in a sudden stop or collision.
•
To help protect against personal injury, passengers should
not be seated in the rear cargo area. The rear cargo space is
intended for load carrying purposes only, not for passen-
gers, who should sit in seats and use seat belts.
Retractable Cargo Area Cover (If Equipped) — Five
Passenger Models
NOTE: The purpose of this cover is for privacy, not to
secure loads. It will not prevent cargo from shifting or
protect passengers from loose cargo.
The removable retractable cargo area cover mounts in the
cargo area behind the top of the rear seats.
The cover, when extended, covers the cargo area to keep
items out of sight. Notches in the trim panels near the
liftgate opening secure the extended cover in place.
The cover rolls away neatly inside its housing when not in
use. You can also remove the cover from the vehicle to
make more room in the cargo area.
To Install The Cover:
1. Position the cover in the vehicle so that the flat side of
the housing faces upward.
2. Insert either the left or the right spring-loaded post
(located on the ends of the cover housing) into the left
attachment point or the right attachment point (shown).
Installing Retractable Cargo Area Cover
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 221
3. Insert the spring-loaded post on the opposite end of the
cover housing into the attachment point on the opposite
side of the vehicle.
4. Grab the cover handle and pull it toward you. As the
cover nears the liftgate opening, guide the rear attach-
ment posts (on both ends of the cover) into the notches
in the trim panels. Lower the cover to position the posts
into the bottom of the notches and release the handle.
WARNING!
A cargo cover that is unsecured in the vehicle could
cause injury in a collision. It could become airborne
during a sudden stop and strike someone inside the
vehicle. Do not store the cargo cover on the cargo floor
or in the passenger compartment. Remove the cover
from the vehicle when taken from its mounting. Do not
store it in the vehicle.
Positioning Retractable Cargo Area Cover
222 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
REAR WINDOW FEATURES
Rear Window Wiper/Washer
The rear window wiper/washer control is located on the
left side of the steering column.
Rotate the switch upward to the first detent position
for rear wiper operation.
Rotate the switch upward past the first detent
position to activate the rear washer. The washer
pump will continue to operate as long as the switch is held.
Upon release, the wiper will cycle three times before
returning to the set position.
If the rear wiper is operating when the ignition is turned to
the LOCK position, the wiper will automatically return to
the “park” position. When the vehicle is restarted, the
wiper will resume function at whichever position the
switch is set at.
CAUTION!
•
Turn the rear wiper off when driving through an auto-
matic car wash. Damage to the rear wiper may result if
the rear wiper switch is left in the onposition.
(Continued)
Rear Wiper/Washer
Rear Wiper/Washer Control
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 223
CAUTION! (Continued)
• In cold weather, always turn off the rear wiper switch
and allow the rear wiper to return to the “park”
position before turning off the engine. If the rear
wiper switch is left on and the rear wiper freezes to
the window, damage to the rear wiper motor may
occur when the vehicle is restarted.
• Always remove any buildup of snow that prevents
the rear wiper blade from returning to the “park”
position. If the rear wiper control is turned off and
the blade cannot return to the park position, damage
to the rear wiper motor may occur.
Rear Window Defroster
The rear window defroster button is located on the
climate control panel. Push this button to turn on
the rear window defroster and the heated outside mirrors
(if equipped). An indicator in the button will illuminate
when the rear window defroster is on. The rear window
defroster automatically turns off after approximately 10
minutes.
NOTE: To prevent excessive battery drain, use the rear
window defroster only when the engine is operating.
CAUTION!
Failure to follow these cautions can cause damage to
the heating elements:
• Use care when washing the inside of the rear win-
dow. Do not use abrasive window cleaners on the
interior surface of the window. Use a soft cloth and a
mild washing solution, wiping parallel to the heat-
ing elements. Labels can be peeled off after soaking
with warm water.
• Do not use scrapers, sharp instruments, or abrasive
window cleaners on the interior surface of the win-
dow.
• Keep all objects a safe distance from the window.
224 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
ROOF LUGGAGE RACK — IF EQUIPPED
The roof rack cross rails and side rails are designed to carry
cargo weight. The load must not exceed 150 lbs (68 kg), and
it should be distributed uniformly over the cross rails. In
addition, the roof rack does not increase the total load
carrying capacity of the vehicle. Be sure the total load of
cargo inside the vehicle plus that on the roof rack does not
exceed the maximum vehicle load capacity.
NOTE: The roof rack side rails on your vehicle are NOT
designed to carry a load without the addition of crossbars.
Metal crossbars are offered by Mopar accessories to pro-
vide a functional roof rack system. See your authorized
dealer.
To Move The Crossbars
1. Loosen the knobs on top of each crossbar approximately
six turns to disengage the clamp tooth from the side rail.
2. Relocate the crossbars, aligning the crossbar stanchions
(end pieces) with one of the vertical marks on the
outboard surface of the side rail for proper positioning.
There are four frontward marks for the front crossbar
and four rearward marks for the rear crossbar. Make
sure the crossbars remain equally spaced or parallel at
any position for proper function.
3. Tighten the knobs on each crossbar to lock it in position.
As you tighten the knob, make sure the clamp tooth
engages completely into the side rail slot.
Crossbar Knobs
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 225
4. Attempt to move the crossbar to ensure that it is locked
in position.
NOTE:
• To help control wind noise when installing the crossbars,
make sure the arrows marked on the underside of the
crossbars face the front of the vehicle.
• To help reduce the amount of wind noise when the
crossbars are not in use, fasten the front crossbar in the
fourth position from the front and the rear crossbar in
the eighth position. The tie down holes on the crossbar
ends should always be used to tie down the load. Check
the straps frequently to be sure that the load remains
securely attached.
WARNING!
Cargo must be securely tied before driving your ve-
hicle. Improperly secured loads can fly off the vehicle,
particularly at high speeds, resulting in personal injury
or property damage. Follow the roof rack cautions
when carrying cargo on your roof rack.
CAUTION!
• To prevent damage to the roof of your vehicle, DO
NOT carry any loads on the roof rack without the
crossbars installed. The load should be secured and
placed on top of the crossbars, not directly on the
roof. If it is necessary to place the load on the roof,
place a blanket or other protective layer between the
load and the roof surface.
• Crossbars should remain equally spaced or parallel
at any roof rack position for proper function. Non-
compliance could result in damage to the roof rack,
cargo, and vehicle.
• To avoid damage to the roof rack and vehicle, do not
exceed the maximum roof rack load capacity of 150 lb
(68 kg). Always distribute heavy loads as evenly as
possible and secure the load appropriately.
• Long loads, which extend over the windshield, such
as wood panels or surfboards, should be secured to
both the front and rear of the vehicle.
(Continued)
226 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
CAUTION! (Continued)
• Travel at reduced speeds and turn corners carefully
when carrying large or heavy loads on the roof rack.
Wind forces, due to natural causes or nearby truck
traffic, can add sudden upward loads. This is espe-
cially true on large flat loads and may result in
damage to the cargo or your vehicle.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 227
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
CONTENTS
䡵 INSTRUMENT PANEL FEATURES ...........232
䡵 INSTRUMENT CLUSTER ..................233
䡵 WARNING AND INDICATOR LIGHTS ........235
▫ Red Telltale Indicator Lights ...............235
▫ Yellow Telltale Indicator Lights .............243
▫ Green Telltale Indicator Lights..............248
▫ White Telltale Indicator Lights..............250
▫ Blue Telltale Indicator Lights ...............251
䡵 INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DISPLAY ...........251
▫ Instrument Cluster Display Location And
Controls .............................252
▫ Oil Change Due .......................253
▫ Fuel Economy .........................254
▫ Vehicle Speed .........................255
▫ Trip Info .............................255
▫ Tire Pressure ..........................256
▫ Vehicle Info (Customer Information Features) . . .256
▫ Messages.............................257
▫ Turn Menu OFF ........................257
▫ Battery Saver On/Battery Saver Mode Message —
Electrical Load Reduction Actions ...........257
䡵 CYBERSECURITY ........................259
䡵 UCONNECT SETTINGS ...................261
▫ Buttons On The Faceplate .................261
▫ Buttons On The Touchscreen ...............261
▫ Customer Programmable Features —
Radio 4.3 Settings.......................261
▫ Customer Programmable Features —
Radio 8.4 Settings.......................273
4
䡵 UCONNECT MULTIMEDIA —
VIDEO ENTERTAINMENT SYSTEM (VES) —
IF EQUIPPED ..........................286
▫ Getting Started.........................286
▫ Single Video Screen .....................287
▫ Play Video Games ......................288
▫ Listen To An Audio Source On Channel 2 While
A Video Is Playing On Channel 1 ...........288
▫ Important Notes For Single Video Screen
System ..............................289
▫ Play A DVD Using The Touchscreen Radio .....289
▫ VES Remote Control — If Equipped .........290
▫ Remote Control Storage ..................292
▫ Locking The Remote Control...............293
▫ Replacing The Remote Control Batteries .......293
▫ VES Headphones Operation ...............294
▫ Replacing The Headphone Batteries ..........294
▫ Controls .............................295
▫ Accessibility ..........................295
▫ Unwired Stereo Headphone Lifetime Limited
Warranty .............................296
▫ System Information .....................297
䡵 IPOD/USB/MP3 CONTROL ................303
䡵 STEERING WHEEL AUDIO CONTROLS .......303
▫ Right-Hand Switch Functions ..............304
▫ Left-Hand Switch Functions For Radio
Operation ............................304
▫ Left-Hand Switch Functions For Media (i.e., CD)
Operation ............................304
䡵 CD/DVD DISC MAINTENANCE ............305
䡵 RADIO OPERATION AND MOBILE DEVICES . . .305
▫ Regulatory And Safety Information ..........305
䡵 CLIMA
TE CONTROLS ....................307
▫ Manual Three Zone Climate Controls With
Touchscreen — If Equipped................307
▫ Rear Manual Temperature Control (MTC) —
If Equipped ..........................314
230 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
INSTRUMENT PANEL FEATURES
1 — Side Window Demist Outlet 6 — Switch Bank 11 — CD/DVD Slot
2 — Air Outlet 7 — Uconnect Hard Controls 12 — Engine Start/Stop Button
3 — Instrument Cluster 8 — SD Memory Card Slot 13 — Hood Release Lever
4 — Uconnect System 9 — Power Outlet 14 — Dimmer Controls
5 — Glove Compartment 10 — USB/AUX Port 15 — Headlight Switch
232 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER
1. Tachometer
• Indicates the engine speed in revolutions per minute
(RPM x 1000).
2. Instrument Cluster Display
• When the appropriate conditions exist, this display
shows the instrument cluster display messages. Refer
to “Instrument Cluster Display” in “Understanding
Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
Premium Instrument Cluster
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 233
3. Speedometer
• Indicates vehicle speed.
4. Fuel Gauge
• The pointer shows the level of fuel in the fuel tank
when the Keyless Push Button Ignition is in the
ON/RUN position.
•
The fuel pump arrow symbol points to the side
of the vehicle where the fuel door is located.
5. Temperature Gauge
• The temperature gauge shows engine coolant tem-
perature. Any reading within the normal range indi-
cates that the engine cooling system is operating
satisfactorily.
• The gauge pointer will likely indicate a higher tem-
perature when driving in hot weather, up mountain
grades, or when towing a trailer. It should not be
allowed to exceed the upper limits of the normal
operating range.
WARNING!
A hot engine cooling system is dangerous. You or
others could be badly burned by steam or boiling
coolant. You may want to call an authorized dealer for
service if your vehicle overheats. If you decide to look
under the hood yourself, see “Maintaining Your Ve-
hicle.” Follow the warnings under the Cooling System
Pressure Cap paragraph.
CAUTION!
Driving with a hot engine cooling system could dam-
age your vehicle. If the temperature gauge reads “H,”
pull over and stop the vehicle. Idle the vehicle with the
air conditioner turned off until the pointer drops back
into the normal range. If the pointer remains on the
“H,” turn the engine off immediately and call an
authorized dealer for service.
234 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
WARNING AND INDICATOR LIGHTS
The warning/indicator lights switch on in the instrument
panel together with a dedicated message and/or acoustic
signal when applicable. These indications are indicative
and precautionary and as such must not be considered as
exhaustive and/or alternative to the information contained
in the Owner’s Manual, which you are advised to read
carefully in all cases. Always refer to the information in this
chapter in the event of a failure indication.
All active telltales will display first if applicable. The
system check menu may appear different based upon
equipment options and current vehicle status. Some tell-
tales are optional and may not appear.
Red Telltale Indicator Lights
Seat Belt Reminder Warning Light
Red Telltale
Light
What It Means
Seat Belt Reminder Warning Light
When the ignition is first placed in the ON/RUN position, if the driver’s seat belt is unbuckled, a
chime will sound and the light will turn on. When driving, if the driver or front passenger seat
belt remains unbuckled, the Seat Belt Reminder Light will flash or remain on continuously and a
chime will sound. Refer to “Occupant Restraints Systems” in “Things To Know Before Starting
Your Vehicle” for further information.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 235
Air Bag Warning Light
Red Telltale
Light
What It Means
Air Bag Warning Light
This light will turn on for four to eight seconds as a bulb check when the ignition is placed in the
ON/RUN position. If the light is either not on during startup, stays on, or turns on while driv-
ing, have the system inspected at an authorized dealer as soon as possible. This light will illumi-
nate with a single chime when a fault with the Air Bag Warning Light has been detected, it will
stay on until the fault is cleared. If the light comes on intermittently or remains on while driving,
have an authorized dealer service the vehicle immediately.
236 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Brake Warning Light
Red Telltale
Light
What It Means
Brake Warning Light
This light monitors various brake functions, including brake fluid level and parking brake appli-
cation. If the brake light turns on it may indicate that the parking brake is applied, that the brake
fluid level is low, or that there is a problem with the anti-lock brake system reservoir.
If the light remains on when the parking brake has been disengaged, and the fluid level is at the
full mark on the master cylinder reservoir, it indicates a possible brake hydraulic system malfunc-
tion or that a problem with the Brake Booster has been detected by the Anti-Lock Brake System
(ABS) / Electronic Stability Control (ESC) system. In this case, the light will remain on until the
condition has been corrected. If the problem is related to the Brake Booster, the ABS pump will
run when applying the brake, and a brake pedal pulsation may be felt during each stop.
NOTE: Brake Warning Light may illuminate due to excessive wear to brake pads.
The dual brake system provides a reserve braking capacity
in the event of a failure to a portion of the hydraulic
system. A leak in either half of the dual brake system is
indicated by the Brake Warning Light, which will turn on
when the brake fluid level in the master cylinder has
dropped below a specified level.
The light will remain on until the cause is corrected.
NOTE: The light may flash momentarily during sharp
cornering maneuvers, which change fluid level conditions.
The vehicle should have service performed, and the brake
fluid level checked.
If brake failure is indicated, immediate repair is necessary.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 237
WARNING!
Driving a vehicle with the red brake light on is
dangerous. Part of the brake system may have failed. It
will take longer to stop the vehicle. You could have a
collision. Have the vehicle checked immediately.
Vehicles equipped with the Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS)
are also equipped with Electronic Brake Force Distribution
(EBD).
CAUTION!
In the event of an EBD failure, the Brake Warning
Light will turn on along with the ABS Light. Immedi-
ate repair to the ABS system is required.
Operation of the Brake Warning Light can be checked by
placing the ignition in the ON/RUN position. The light
should illuminate for approximately two seconds. The light
should then turn off unless the parking brake is applied or
a brake fault is detected. If the light does not illuminate,
have the light inspected by an authorized dealer.
The light also will turn on when the parking brake is
applied with the ignition placed in the ON/RUN position.
NOTE: This light shows only that the parking brake is
applied. It does not show the degree of brake application.
Vehicle Security Warning Light — If Equipped
Red Telltale
Light
What It Means
Vehicle Security Warning Light — If Equipped
This light will flash at a fast rate for approximately 15 seconds when the vehicle security alarm is
arming, and then will flash slowly until the vehicle is disarmed.
238 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Engine Temperature Warning Light
Red Warning
Light
What It Means
Engine Temperature Warning Light
This light warns of an overheated engine condition. As engine coolant temperatures rise and the
gauge approaches H, this indicator will illuminate and a single chime will sound after reaching a
set threshold. Further overheating will cause a continuous chime sound for 4 minutes, or until
the engine is allowed to cool, whichever comes first.
If the light turns on while driving, safely pull over and stop the vehicle. If the A/C system is on,
turn it off. Also, shift the transmission into NEUTRAL and idle the vehicle. If the temperature
reading does not return to normal, turn the engine off immediately and call for service. Refer to
“If Your Engine Overheats” in “What To Do In Emergencies” for further information.
Transmission Temperature Warning Light
Red Telltale
Light
What It Means
Transmission Temperature Warning Light
This light indicates that the transmission fluid temperature is running hot. This may occur with
severe usage. If this light turns on, safely pull over and stop the vehicle. Then, place the trans-
mission into NEUTRAL and run the engine at idle speed or apply light foot pressure to increase
the engine speed RPM until the Transmission Temperature light turns off.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 239
WARNING!
If you continue operating the vehicle when the Trans-
mission Temperature Warning Light is illuminated you
could cause the fluid to boil over, come in contact with
hot engine or exhaust components and cause a fire.
CAUTION!
Continuous driving with the Transmission Tempera-
ture Warning Light illuminated will eventually cause
severe transmission damage or transmission failure.
Battery Charge Warning Light
Red Telltale
Light
What It Means
Battery Charge Warning Light
This light illuminates when the battery is not charging properly. If it stays on while the engine is run-
ning, there may be a malfunction with the charging system. Contact your authorized dealer as soon as
possible. This indicates a possible problem with the electrical system or a related component.
Oil Pressure Warning Light
Red Telltale
Light
What It Means
Oil Pressure Warning Light
This light indicates low engine oil pressure. If the light turns on while driving, stop the vehicle
and shut off the engine as soon as possible. A chime will sound when this light turns on.
Do not operate the vehicle until the cause is corrected. This light does not indicate how much oil
is in the engine. The engine oil level must be checked under the hood.
240 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) Warning Light
Red Telltale
Light
What It Means
Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) Warning Light
This light informs you of a problem with the Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) system. If a prob-
lem is detected while the engine is running, the light will either stay on or flash depending on
the nature of the problem. Cycle the ignition key when the vehicle is safely and completely
stopped and the transmission is placed in the PARK position. The light should turn off. If the
light remains on with the engine running, your vehicle will usually be drivable; however, see an
authorized dealer for service as soon as possible.
If the light continues to flash when the engine is running, immediate service is required and you
may experience reduced performance, an elevated/rough idle, or engine stall and your vehicle
may require towing. The light will come on when the ignition is first placed in the ON/RUN and
remain on briefly as a bulb check. If the light does not come on during starting, have the system
checked by an authorized dealer.
Electric Power Steering Fail Warning Light — If Equipped
Red Telltale
Light
What It Means
Electric Power Steering Fail Warning — If Equipped
This light is used to manage the electrical warning of the EPS (Electric Power Steering). Refer to
“Electric Power Steering” in “Starting And Operating” for further information.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 241
Door Open Warning Light — If Equipped
Red Telltale
Light
What It Means
Door Open Warning Light
This indicator will illuminate when a door is ajar/open and not fully closed.
NOTE: If the vehicle is moving, there will also be a single chime.
Liftgate Open Warning Light — If Equipped
Red Telltale
Light
What It Means
Liftgate Open Warning Light
This indicator will turn when the liftgate is open.
242 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Yellow Telltale Indicator Lights
Engine Check/Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL)
Yellow Telltale
Light
What It Means
Engine Check/Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL)
The Engine Check/Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) is a part of an Onboard Diagnostic System
called OBD II that monitors engine and automatic transmission control systems. The light will
illuminate when the ignition is in the ON/RUN position before engine start. If the bulb does not
come on when turning the key from OFF to ON/RUN, have the condition checked promptly.
Certain conditions, such as a loose or missing gas cap, poor quality fuel, etc., may illuminate the
light after engine start. The vehicle should be serviced if the light stays on through several typical
driving styles. In most situations, the vehicle will drive normally and will not require towing.
When the engine is running, the MIL may flash to alert serious conditions that could lead to im-
mediate loss of power or severe catalytic converter damage. The vehicle should be serviced as
soon as possible if this occurs.
WARNING!
A malfunctioning catalytic converter, as referenced
above, can reach higher temperatures than in normal
operating conditions. This can cause a fire if you drive
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
slowly or park over flammable substances such as dry
plants, wood, cardboard, etc. This could result in death
or serious injury to the driver, occupants or others.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 243
CAUTION!
Prolonged driving with the Malfunction Indicator
Light (MIL) on could cause damage to the vehicle
control system. It also could affect fuel economy and
driveability. If the MIL is flashing, severe catalytic
converter damage and power loss will soon occur.
Immediate service is required.
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) Indicator Light — If Equipped
Yellow Telltale
Light
What It Means
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) Indicator Light — If Equipped
The “ESC Indicator Light” in the instrument cluster will come on when the ignition is placed in
the ON/RUN position, and when ESC is activated. It should go out with the engine running. If
the “ESC Indicator Light” comes on continuously with the engine running, a malfunction has
been detected in the ESC system. If this light remains on after several ignition cycles, and the ve-
hicle has been driven several miles (kilometers) at speeds greater than 30 mph (48 km/h), see
your authorized dealer as soon as possible to have the problem diagnosed and corrected.
• The “ESC Off Indicator Light” and the “ESC Indicator Light” come on momentarily each
time the ignition is placed in the ON/RUN position.
• Each time the ignition is turned to ON/RUN, the ESC system will be on, even if it was turned
off previously.
244 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Yellow Telltale
Light
What It Means
• The ESC system will make buzzing or clicking sounds when it is active. This is normal; the
sounds will stop when ESC becomes inactive.
• This light will come on when the vehicle is in an ESC event.
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) OFF Indicator Light — If Equipped
Yellow Telltale
Light
What It Means
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) OFF Indicator Light — If Equipped
This light indicates the Electronic Stability Control (ESC) is off.
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Warning Light
Yellow Telltale
Light
What It Means
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Warning Light
The warning light switches on and a message is displayed to indicate that the tire pressure is
lower than the recommended value and/or that slow pressure loss is occurring. In these cases,
optimal tire duration and fuel consumption may not be guaranteed.
Should one or more tires be in the condition mentioned above, the display will show the indica-
tions corresponding to each tire in sequence.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 245
CAUTION!
Do not continue driving with one or more flat tires as
handling may be compromised. Stop the vehicle,
avoiding sharp braking and steering. Repair immedi-
ately using the dedicated tire repair kit and contact
your authorized dealer as soon as possible.
Each tire, including the spare (if provided), should be checked
monthly when cold and inflated to the inflation pressure
recommended by the vehicle manufacturer on the vehicle
placard or tire inflation pressure label. (If your vehicle has tires
of a different size than the size indicated on the vehicle placard
or tire inflation pressure label, you should determine the
proper tire inflation pressure for those tires.)
As an added safety feature, your vehicle has been equipped
with a tire pressure monitoring system (TPMS) that illumi-
nates a low tire pressure telltale when one or more of your
tires is significantly under-inflated. Accordingly, when the low
tire pressure telltale illuminates, you should stop and check
your tires as soon as possible, and inflate them to the proper
pressure. Driving on a significantly under-inflated tire causes
the tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure. Under-inflation
also reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life, and may affect
the vehicle’s handling and stopping ability.
Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire
maintenance, and it is the driver’s responsibility to main-
tain correct tire pressure, even if under-inflation has not
reached the level to trigger illumination of the TPMS low
tire pressure telltale.
Your vehicle has also been equipped with a TPMS malfunc-
tion indicator to indicate when the system is not operating
properly. The TPMS malfunction indicator is combined
with the low tire pressure telltale. When the system detects
a malfunction, the telltale will flash for approximately one
minute and then remain continuously illuminated. This
sequence will continue upon subsequent vehicle start-ups
as long as the malfunction exists. When the malfunction
indicator is illuminated, the system may not be able to
detect or signal low tire pressure as intended. TPMS
malfunctions may occur for a variety of reasons, including
the installation of replacement or alternate tires or wheels
on the vehicle that prevent the TPMS from functioning
properly. Always check the TPMS malfunction telltale after
replacing one or more tires or wheels on your vehicle to
ensure that the replacement or alternate tires and wheels
allow the TPMS to continue to function properly.
246 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
CAUTION!
The TPMS has been optimized for the original equip-
ment tires and wheels. TPMS pressures and warning
have been established for the tire size equipped on
your vehicle. Undesirable system operation or sensor
damage may result when using replacement equip-
ment that is not of the same size, type, and/or style.
(Continued)
CAUTION! (Continued)
Aftermarket wheels can cause sensor damage. Using
aftermarket tire sealants may cause the Tire Pressure
Monitoring System (TPMS) sensor to become inoper-
able. After using an aftermarket tire sealant it is
recommended that you take your vehicle to an autho-
rized dealer to have your sensor function checked.
Anti-Lock Brake (ABS) Indicator Light
Yellow Telltale
Light
What It Means
Anti-Lock Brake (ABS) Indicator Light
This light monitors the Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS). The light will turn on when the ignition is
placed in the ON/RUN position and may stay on for as long as four seconds.
If the ABS light remains on or turns on while driving, then the Anti-Lock portion of the brake
system is not functioning and service is required. However, the conventional brake system will
continue to operate normally if the brake warning light is not on.
If the ABS light is on, the brake system should be serviced as soon as possible to restore the ben-
efits of Anti-Lock Brakes. If the ABS light does not turn on when the ignition is placed in the
ON/RUN position, have the light inspected by an authorized dealer.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 247
Low Fuel Indicator Light
Yellow Telltale
Light
What It Means
Low Fuel Indicator Light
When the fuel level reaches approximately 2 gal (7.5 L) this light will turn on, and remain on un-
til fuel is added.
Low Washer Fluid Indicator Light — If Equipped
Yellow Telltale
Light
What It Means
Low Washer Fluid Indicator Light — If Equipped
This indicator will illuminate when the windshield washer fluid is low.
Green Telltale Indicator Lights
Park/Headlight On Indicator Light
Green Telltale
Light
What It Means
Park/Headlight On Indicator Light
This indicator will illuminate when the park lights or headlights are turned on.
248 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Front Fog Indicator Light — If Equipped
Green Telltale
Light
What It Means
Front Fog Indicator Light — If Equipped
This indicator will illuminate when the front fog lights are on.
Turn Signal Indicator Lights
Green Telltale
Light
What It Means
Turn Signal Indicator Lights
The instrument cluster directional arrow will flash independently for the left or right turn signal
as selected, as well as the exterior turn signal lamp(s) (front and rear) as selected when the multi-
function lever is moved down (left) or up (right).
NOTE:
•
A continuous chime will sound if the vehicle is driven more than 1 mile (1.6 km) with either
turn signal on.
•
Check for an inoperative outside light bulb if either indicator flashes at a rapid rate.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 249
Speed Control SET Indicator Light
Green Telltale
Light
What It Means
Speed Control SET Indicator Light
This light will turn on when the electronic speed control is set to the desired speed. Refer to
“Speed Control” in “Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle” for further information.
White Telltale Indicator Lights
Cruise Control Ready Indicator Light
White Telltale
Light
What It Means
Cruise Control Ready Indicator Light
This light will turn on when the speed control is on, but not set.
250 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Blue Telltale Indicator Lights
High Beam Indicator Light
Blue Telltale
Light
What It Means
High Beam Indicator Light
This indicator shows that the high beam headlights are on. Push the multifunction control lever
away from you to switch the headlights to high beam. Pull the lever toward you to switch the
headlights back to low beam. Pull the lever toward you for a temporary high beam on, ⬙flash to
pass⬙ scenario.
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DISPLAY
Your vehicle may be equipped with an instrument cluster
display, which offers useful information to the driver. With
the ignition in the STOP/OFF position, opening/closing of
a door will activate the display for viewing, and display
the total miles (kilometers) in the odometer. Your instru-
ment cluster display is designed to display important
information about your vehicle’s systems and features.
Using a driver interactive display located on the instru-
ment panel, your instrument cluster display can show you
how systems are working and give you warnings when
they aren’t. The steering wheel mounted controls allow
you to scroll through and enter the main menus and
submenus. You can access the specific information you
want and make selections and adjustments.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 251
Instrument Cluster Display Location And Controls
The instrument cluster display features a driver-interactive
display that is located in the instrument cluster.
This system allows the driver to select a variety of useful
information by pushing the switches mounted on the
steering wheel. The menu items consist of the following:
• Radio Info
• Fuel Economy
• Vehicle Speed
• Trip Info
• Tire Pressure
• Vehicle Information
• Messages
• Turn Menu OFF
The system allows the driver to select information by
pushing the following buttons mounted on the steering
wheel:
Instrument Cluster Display
Instrument Cluster Display Controls
252 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
• Up Arrow Button
• Push and release the up arrow button to scroll
upward through the main menus and
submenus.
• Down Arrow Button
• Push and release the down arrow button to
scroll downward through the main menus and
submenus.
• Right Arrow Button
• Push and release the right arrow button for
access to main menus or submenus. Push and
hold the right arrow button for two seconds to
reset features.
• BACK Button
• Push and release the BACK button to scroll
back to a previous menu.
Oil Change Due
Your vehicle is equipped with an engine oil change indi-
cator system. The “Oil Change Due” message will appear
in the instrument cluster display for five seconds after a
single chime has sounded to indicate the next scheduled oil
change interval. The engine oil change indicator system is
duty cycle based, which means the engine oil change
interval may fluctuate dependent upon your personal
driving style.
Unless reset, this message will continue to display each
time you cycle the ignition to the ON/RUN position. To
turn off the message temporarily, push and release the up
arrow button. To reset the oil change indicator system
(after performing the scheduled maintenance), perform the
following procedure:
1. Without pushing the brake pedal, push and release the
ENGINE START/STOP button and cycle the ignition to
the ON/RUN position (do not start the engine).
2. Fully push the accelerator pedal, slowly, three times
within 10 seconds.
3. Without pushing the brake pedal, push and release the
ENGINE START/STOP button once to return the igni-
tion to the OFF/LOCK position.
NOTE: If the indicator message illuminates when you start
the vehicle, the oil change indicator system did not reset. If
necessary, repeat this procedure.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 253
Fuel Economy
Push and release the up or down arrow button until “Fuel
Economy” displays highlighted in the ddff and push the
right arrow button. The following Fuel Economy functions
will display in the instrument cluster display:
• Average Fuel Economy
• Distance To Empty (DTE)
• Instantaneous Fuel Economy
Average Fuel Economy
Shows the average fuel economy since the last reset. When
the fuel economy is reset, the display will read “RESET” or
show dashes for two seconds. Then, the history informa-
tion will be erased, and the averaging will continue from
the last fuel average reading before the reset.
Distance To Empty (DTE)
Shows the estimated distance that can be traveled with the
fuel remaining in the tank. This estimated distance is
determined by a weighted average of the instantaneous
and average fuel economy, according to the current fuel
tank level. DTE cannot be reset through the right arrow
button.
NOTE: Significant changes in driving style or vehicle
loading will greatly affect the actual drivable distance of
the vehicle, regardless of the DTE displayed value.
Fuel Economy
254 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
When the DTE value is less than 30 miles (48 km) estimated
driving distance, the DTE display will change to a “LOW
FUEL” message. This display will continue until the ve-
hicle runs out of fuel. Adding a significant amount of fuel
to the vehicle will turn off the “LOW FUEL” message and
a new DTE value will display.
Instantaneous Fuel Economy
This display shows the instantaneous fuel economy MPG
or L/ 100 km in bar graph form while driving. This will
monitor the gas mileage in real-time as you drive and can
be used to modify driving habits in order to increase fuel
economy.
Vehicle Speed
Push and release the up or down arrow button until
“Vehicle Speed” displays highlighted in the instrument
cluster display. Push the right arrow button to display the
current speed in MPH or km/h. Pushing the right arrow
button a second time will toggle the unit of measure
between MPH or km/h.
NOTE: Changing the unit of measure in the Vehicle Speed
menu will not change the unit of measure in the instrument
cluster display.
Trip Info
Push and release the up or down arrow button until “Trip
Info” displays highlighted in the instrument cluster display
and push the right arrow button. Pushing the right arrow
button with ⬙Trip Info⬙ highlighted will cause the instru-
ment cluster display to show Trip A, Trip B, and Elapsed
Time all in one display. If you want to reset one of the three
functions you use the up or down arrow button to high-
light (select) the feature that you want to reset. Pushing the
right arrow button will cause the selected feature to reset
individually. The three features can only be reset individu-
ally. The following Trip functions display in the instrument
cluster display:
• Trip A
• Trip B
• Elapsed Time
The Trip Functions mode displays the following information:
Trip A
• Shows the total distance traveled for Trip A since the last
reset.
• Shows the elapsed time traveled for Trip A since the last
reset.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 255
Trip B
• Shows the total distance traveled for Trip B since the last
reset.
• Shows the elapsed time traveled for Trip B since the last
reset.
Elapsed Time
Shows the total elapsed time of travel since the last reset.
Elapsed time will increment when the ignition is in the
ON/RUN position.
To Reset The Display
Reset will only occur while a resettable function is being
displayed. Push and release the right arrow button once to
clear the resettable function.
Tire Pressure
Push and release the up or down arrow button until “Tire
PSI:” displays highlighted in the instrument cluster dis-
play. Push and release the right arrow button to view a
graphic of the vehicle with a tire pressure value at each
corner of the graphic.
Vehicle Info (Customer Information Features)
Push and release the up or down arrow button until
“Vehicle Info” displays in the instrument cluster display
and push the right arrow button. Push the up or down
arrow button to scroll through the available information
displays.
• Coolant Temperature
Displays the actual coolant temperature.
• Oil Temperature
Displays the actual oil temperature.
• Oil Pressure — If Equipped
Displays the actual oil pressure.
• Transmission Temperature
Displays the actual transmission temperature.
• Engine Hours
Displays the number of hours of engine operation.
256 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Messages
Push and release the up or down arrow button until
“Messages: XX” displays highlighted in the instrument
cluster display. If there is more than one message, pushing
the right arrow button will display a stored warning
message. Push and release the up or down arrow button if
there is more than one message to step through the
remaining stored messages. If there are no messages,
pushing the right arrow button will not change the display.
Turn Menu OFF
Select from Main Menu using the up or down arrow
button. Pushing the right arrow button clears the menu
display. Pushing any one of the four Display control
buttons will bring the menu back.
Battery Saver On/Battery Saver Mode Message —
Electrical Load Reduction Actions
This vehicle is equipped with an Intelligent Battery Sensor
(IBS) to perform additional monitoring of the electrical
system and status of the vehicle battery.
In cases when the IBS detects charging system failure, or
the vehicle battery conditions are deteriorating, electrical
load reduction actions will take place to extend the driving
time and distance of the vehicle. This is done by reducing
power to or turning off non-essential electrical loads.
Load reduction is only active when the engine is running.
It will display a message if there is a risk of battery
depletion to the point where the vehicle may stall due to
lack of electrical supply, or will not restart after the current
drive cycle.
When load reduction is activated, the message “Battery
Saver On” or “Battery Saver Mode” will appear in the
instrument cluster display.
These messages indicate the vehicle battery has a low state
of charge and continues to lose electrical charge at a rate
that the charging system cannot sustain.
NOTE:
• The charging system is independent from load reduc-
tion. The charging system performs a diagnostic on the
charging system continuously.
• If the Charging System Light is on it may indicate a
problem with the charging system. Refer to “Battery
Charge Warning Light” in “Understanding Your Instru-
ment Panel” for further information.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 257
The electrical loads that may be switched off (if equipped),
and vehicle functions which can be effected by load
reduction:
• Heated Seat/Vented Seats/Heated Wheel
• Heated/Cooled Cup Holders
• Rear Defroster And Heated Mirrors
• HVAC System
• 115V AC Power Inverter System
• Audio and Telematics System
Loss of the battery charge may indicate one or more of the
following conditions:
• The charging system cannot deliver enough electrical
power to the vehicle system because the electrical loads
are larger than the capability of charging system. The
charging system is still functioning properly.
• Turning on all possible vehicle electrical loads (e.g.
HVAC to max settings, exterior and interior lights,
overloaded power outlets +12V, 115V AC, USB ports)
during certain driving conditions (city driving, towing,
frequent stopping).
• Installing options like additional lights, upfitter electri-
cal accessories, audio systems, alarms and similar de-
vices.
• Unusual driving cycles (short trips separated by long
parking periods).
• The vehicle was parked for an extended period of time
(weeks, months).
• The battery was recently replaced and was not charged
completely.
• The battery was discharged by an electrical load left on
when the vehicle was parked.
• The battery was used for an extended period with the
engine not running to supply radio, lights, chargers,
+12V portable appliances like vacuum cleaner’s, game
consoles and similar devices.
258 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
What to do when an electrical load reduction action
message is present (“Battery Saver On” or “Battery Saver
Mode”)
During a trip:
• Reduce power to unnecessary loads if possible:
– Turn off redundant lights (interior or exterior)
– Check what may be plugged in to power outlets +12V,
115V AC, USB ports
– Check HVAC settings (blower, temperature)
– Check the audio settings (volume)
After a trip:
• Check if any aftermarket equipment was installed (ad-
ditional lights, upfitter electrical accessories, audio sys-
tems, alarms) and review specifications if any (load and
Ignition Off Draw currents).
• Evaluate the latest driving cycles (distance, driving time
and parking time).
• The vehicle should have service performed if the mes-
sage is still present during consecutive trips and the
evaluation of the vehicle and driving pattern did not
help to identify the cause.
CYBERSECURITY
Your vehicle may be a connected vehicle and may be
equipped with both wired and wireless networks. These
networks allow your vehicle to send and receive informa-
tion. This information allows systems and features in your
vehicle to function properly.
Your vehicle may be equipped with certain security fea-
tures to reduce the risk of unauthorized and unlawful
access to vehicle systems and wireless communications.
Vehicle software technology continues to evolve over time
and FCA US LLC, working with its suppliers, evaluates
and takes appropriate steps as needed. Similar to a com-
puter or other devices, your vehicle may require software
updates to improve the usability and performance of your
systems or to reduce the potential risk of unauthorized and
unlawful access to your vehicle systems.
The risk of unauthorized and unlawful access to your
vehicle systems may still exist, even if the most recent
version of vehicle software (such as Uconnect software) is
installed.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 259
WARNING!
• It is not possible to know or to predict all of the
possible outcomes if your vehicle’s systems are
breached. It may be possible that vehicle systems,
including safety related systems, could be impaired
or a loss of vehicle control could occur that may
result in an accident involving serious injury or
death.
• ONLY insert media (e.g., USB, SD card, or CD) into
your vehicle if it came from a trusted source. Media
of unknown origin could possibly contain malicious
software, and if installed in your vehicle, it may
increase the possibility for vehicle systems to be
breached.
• As always, if you experience unusual vehicle behav-
ior, take your vehicle to your nearest authorized
dealer immediately.
NOTE:
• FCA or your dealer may contact you directly regarding
software updates.
• To help further improve vehicle security and minimize
the potential risk of a security breach, vehicle owners
should:
• Routinely check www.driveuconnect.com/software-
update to learn about available Uconnect software
updates.
• Only connect and use trusted media devices (e.g.
personal mobile phones, USBs, CDs).
Privacy of any wireless and wired communications cannot
be assured. Third parties may unlawfully intercept infor-
mation and private communications without your consent.
For further information, refer to “Onboard Diagnostic
System (OBD II) Cybersecurity” in “Maintaining Your
Vehicle”.
260 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
UCONNECT SETTINGS
The Uconnect system uses a combination of buttons on the
touchscreen and buttons on the faceplate located on the
center of the instrument panel that allows you to access
and change the customer programmable features.
Buttons On The Faceplate
Buttons on the faceplate are located on the left and right
side of the Radio 4.3 screen. In addition, there is a Scroll/
Enter control knob located on the right side of the Climate
Controls in the center of the instrument panel. Turn the
control knob to scroll through menus and change settings
(i.e., 30, 60, 90), push the center of the control knob one or
more times to select or change a setting (i.e., ON, OFF).
Buttons On The Touchscreen
Buttons on the touchscreen are accessible on the Radio
Touchscreen.
CAUTION!
Do not attach any object to touchscreen, doing so can
result in damage to the touchscreen.
Customer Programmable Features — Radio 4.3
Settings
In this mode the Uconnect system allows you to access
programmable features that may be equipped such as
Display, Clock, Safety & Driving Assistance, Lights, Doors
& Locks, Heated Seats, Engine Off Operation, Compass
Settings, Audio and Phone/Bluetooth Setup through but-
tons on the faceplate and touchscreen.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 261
NOTE: Only one touchscreen area may be selected at a
time.
Push the SETTINGS button on the faceplate to access the
Settings screen, use the “Page Up”/“Page Down” buttons
on the touchscreen to scroll through the following settings.
Press the desired setting button on the touchscreen to
change the setting using the description shown on the
following pages for each setting.
1 — Radio 4.3 Buttons On The Faceplate Radio 4.3 Buttons On The Touchscreen
262 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Display
After pressing the “Display” button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
Setting Name Selectable Options
Brightness +–
NOTE:
The “Brightness” setting can also be adjusted by selecting any point on the scale between the “+” and “–” buttons on
the touchscreen.
Mode Day Night Auto
Language English Français Español
NOTE:
When in the “Language” feature, you may select one of three languages for all display nomenclature, including the
trip functions and the navigation system (if equipped).
Units US Metric
Voice Response Brief Long
Touchscreen Beep On Off
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 263
Clock
After pressing the “Clock & Date” button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
Setting Name Selectable Options
Set Time and Format 12 hour 24 hour AM PM
NOTE:
Within the “Set Time and Format” setting, press the corresponding arrow buttons on the touchscreen to adjust to the
correct time.
Show Time Status — If
Equipped
On Off
Sync Time — If Equipped On Off
Safety & Driving Assistance
After pressing the “Safety & Driving Assistance” button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
Setting Name Selectable Options
Park Assist — If Equipped Off Sound Only Sounds and Display
NOTE:
The Rear Park Assist system will scan for, and the alert the driver of, objects behind the vehicle when the transmis-
sion gear selector is in REVERSE and the vehicle speed is less than 11 mph (18 km/h).
Hill Start Assist — If
Equipped
On Off
264 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Lights
After pressing the “Lights” button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
Setting Name Selectable Options
Headlight Off Delay —
If Equipped
0 sec 30 sec 60 sec 90 sec
NOTE:
When the “Headlight Off Delay” feature is selected, it allows the adjustment of the amount of time the headlights
remain on after the engine is shut off.
Headlights With Wipers
— If Equipped
Illuminated Approach 0 sec 30 sec 60 sec 90 sec
NOTE:
When this feature is selected, it allows the adjustment of the amount of time the headlights remain on after the doors
are unlocked with the key fob.
Auto High Beams — If
Equipped
On Off
NOTE:
When the “Automatic High Beam Headlamps” is selected, the high beam headlights will activate/deactivate auto-
matically under certain conditions.
Daytime Running Lights Yes No
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 265
Setting Name Selectable Options
Steering Directed Lights
— If Equipped
On Off
NOTE:
When the “Steering Directed Lights” feature is selected, the headlights will turn relative to a change in direction of
the steering wheel.
Flash Lights With Lock On Off
Doors & Locks
After pressing the “Doors & Locks” button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
Setting Name Selectable Options
Auto Door Locks On Off
NOTE:
The “Auto Door Locks” feature locks all doors automatically when the vehicle reaches a speed of 15 mph (24 km/h).
Auto Unlock On Exit On Off
NOTE:
When the “Auto Unlock On Exit” feature is selected, all doors will unlock when the vehicle is stopped and the trans-
mission is in the PARK or NEUTRAL position and the driver’s door is opened.
Flash Lights With Lock On Off
Sound Horn With Lock On Off
Sound Horn With Remote Start On Off
266 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Setting Name Selectable Options
Passive Entry (Keyless Enter-N-Go)
— If Equipped
On Off
Remote Door Unlock Order Driver All
NOTE:
When “Driver” is selected, only the driver’s door will unlock on the first push of the key fob unlock button, you
must push the key fob unlock button twice to unlock the passenger’s doors. When “All” is selected, all of the doors
will unlock on the first press of the key fob unlock button. If “All” is programmed, all doors will unlock no matter
which Passive Entry equipped door handle is grasped. If “Driver” is programmed, only the driver’s door will unlock
when the driver’s door is grasped. Touching the handle more than once will only result in the driver’s door opening
once. If the driver door is opened, the interior door lock/unlock switch can be used to unlock all doors (or use the
key fob).
Auto-On Comfort & Remote Start
After pressing the “Auto-On Comfort & Remote Start” button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
Setting Name Selectable Options
Auto-On Heated Seats —
If Equipped
Off Remote Start All Starts
NOTE:
When this feature is selected the driver’s heated seat will automatically turn on when temperatures are below 40° F
(4.4° C).
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 267
Engine Off Options
After pressing the “Engine Off Options” button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
Setting Name Selectable Options
Engine Off Power
Delay
0 sec 45 sec 5 min 10 min
NOTE:
When the “Engine Off Power Delay” feature is selected, the power window switches, radio, Uconnect phone system
(if equipped), DVD video system (if equipped), power sunroof (if equipped), and power outlets will remain active for
up to 10 minutes after the ignition is cycled to OFF. Opening either front door will cancel this feature.
Headlight Off Delay 0 sec 30 sec 60 sec 90 sec
NOTE:
When the “Headlight Off Delay” feature is selected, it allows the adjustment of the amount of time the headlights
remain on after the engine is shut off.
268 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Compass Settings
After pressing the “Compass Settings” button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
Setting Name Selectable Options
Compass
Variance
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
NOTE:
When the “Compass Variance” feature is selected, it allows the compass variance to be set to any number from 1 to
15 per the compass variance zone map figure.
Compass Variance is the difference between Magnetic North and Geographic North. To compensate for the differ-
ences the variance should be set for the zone where the vehicle is being driven, illustrated in the zone map. Once
properly set, the compass will automatically compensate for the differences when calibrated, and provide the most
accurate compass headings.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 269
Setting Name Selectable Options
Compass
Calibration
Yes
NOTE:
Press “Compass Calibration” on the touchscreen to enter calibration. To start calibration of the compass, press the “Yes” but-
ton on the touchscreen and complete one or more 360-degree turns (in an area free from large metal or metallic objects). A
message will appear on the touchscreen when the compass has been successfully calibrated.
Keep magnetic materials away from the rear view mirror, such as Mobile Phones, Laptops and Radar Detectors. This
is where the compass module is located, and it can cause interference with the compass sensor, and it may give false
readings.
Compass Variance Zone Map
270 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Audio
After pressing the “Audio” button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
Setting Name Adjustable Options
Equalizer Bass Mid Treble
NOTE:
When in this display you may adjust the “Bass”, “Mid” and “Treble” settings. Adjust the settings with the “+” and
“–” setting buttons on the touchscreen or by selecting any point on the scale between the “+” and “–” buttons on the
touchscreen. Bass/Mid/Treble also allow you to simply slide your finger up or down to change the setting as well as
press directly on the desired setting.
Balance/Fade Up Arrow
Button
Down Ar-
row Button
Left Arrow
Button
Right Ar-
row Button
Center “C”
Button
NOTE:
When in this display you may adjust the “Balance/Fade” of the audio by using the “Arrow” button on the touch-
screen to adjust the sound level from the front and rear or right and left side speakers. Press the “Center ‘C’ Button”
on the touchscreen to reset the balance and fade to the factory setting.
Speed Adjusted Volume Off 1 2 3
Music Info Cleanup On Off
NOTE:
The “Music Info Cleanup” feature helps organize music files for optimized music navigation.
Surround Sound — If Equipped On Off
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 271
Phone/Bluetooth
After pressing the “Phone/Bluetooth” button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
Setting Name Selectable Options
Paired Phones List of Paired Phones
NOTE:
This feature shows which phones are paired to the Phone/Bluetooth system. For further information, refer to the
Uconnect Owner’s Manual Supplement.
SIRIUS Setup
After pressing the “SiriusXM Setup” button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
Setting Name Selectable Options
Channel Skip List of Channels
NOTE:
SiriusXM can be programmed to designate a group of channels that are the most desirable to listen to or to exclude
undesirable channels while scanning. This feature allows you to select the channels you would like to skip.
Subscription Info Sirius ID
NOTE:
New vehicle purchasers or lessees will receive a free limited time subscription to SiriusXM Satellite Radio with your
radio. Following the expiration of the free services, it will be necessary to access the information on the Subscription
Information screen to re-subscribe.
1. Press the “Subscription Info” button on the touchscreen to access the Subscription Information screen.
272 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Setting Name Selectable Options
2. Write down the Sirius ID numbers for your receiver. To reactivate your service, either call the number listed on the
screen or visit the provider online.
SiriusXM Travel Link is a separate subscription and is available for U.S. residents only.
Customer Programmable Features — Radio 8.4
Settings
Press the “More” button on the touchscreen, then press the
“Settings” button on the touchscreen to display the menu
setting screen. In this mode the Uconnect system allows
you to access programmable features that may be
equipped such as Display, Clock, Safety/Assistance,
Lights, Doors & Locks, Auto-On Comfort & Remote Start,
Engine Off Operation, Compass Settings, Audio, Phone/
Bluetooth and SIRIUS Setup.
NOTE: Only one touchscreen area may be selected at a
time.
When making a selection, press the button on the touch-
screen to enter the desired mode. Once in the desired
mode, press and release the preferred setting until a
check-mark appears next to the setting, showing that
setting has been selected.
Once the setting is complete press the Back Arrow button
on the touchscreen to return to the previous menu or press
the “X” button on the touchscreen to close out of the
settings screen. Pressing the Up or Down Arrow buttons on
the touchscreen on the right side of the screen will allow
you to toggle up or down through the available settings.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 273
Display
After pressing the Display button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
Setting Name Selectable Options
Display Mode Day Night Auto
Display Brightness With
Headlights ON
+-
NOTE:
To make changes to the ⬙Display Brightness with Headlights ON⬙ setting, the headlights must be on and the interior
dimmer switch must not be in the ⬙party⬙ or ⬙parade⬙ positions.
Display Brightness With
Headlights OFF
+-
NOTE:
To make changes to the ⬙Display Brightness with Headlights OFF⬙ setting, the headlights must be off and the interior
dimmer switch must not be in the ⬙party⬙ or ⬙parade⬙ positions.
Set Language
NOTE:
When the “Set Language” feature is selected, you may select one of multiple languages (English / Français / Espa-
ñol) for all display nomenclature, including the trip functions and the navigation system (if equipped). Press the “Set
Language” button on the touchscreen, then press the desired language button on the touchscreen until a check-mark
appears next to the language, showing that setting has been selected.
274 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Setting Name Selectable Options
Units US Metric
Voice Response Length Brief Detailed
Touchscreen Beep
Navigation Turn-By-Turn In
Cluster — If Equipped
NOTE:
When the “Navigation Turn-By-Turn In Cluster” feature is selected, the turn-by-turn directions will appear in the in-
strument cluster display as the vehicle approaches a designated turn within a programmed route.
Fuel Saver Display In Clus-
ter — If Equipped
NOTE:
The “Fuel Saver Display In Cluster” feature turns the “ECO” message on and off in the instrument cluster display.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 275
Clock
After pressing the Clock button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available.
Setting Name Selectable Options
Sync Time With GPS — If Equipped
Set Time Hours +-
NOTE:
This feature will allow you to adjust the hours. The “Sync time with GPS” button on the touchscreen must be un-
checked.
Set Time Minutes +-
NOTE:
This feature will allow you to adjust the minutes. The “Sync time with GPS” button on the touchscreen must be un-
checked.
Time Format 12hrs 24hrs
Show Time in Status Bar — If Equipped
276 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Safety & Driving Assistance
After pressing the Safety/Assistance button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
Setting Name Selectable Options
Park Assist — If Equipped Off Sound Only Sounds and Display
NOTE:
The Rear Park Assist system will scan for, and the alert the driver of, objects behind the vehicle when the transmis-
sion gear selector is in REVERSE and the vehicle speed is less than 11 mph (18 km/h).
Park Assist Volume Low Med High
ParkView Backup Camera
NOTE:
Your vehicle may be equipped with the ParkView Rear Back Up Camera that allows you to see an on-screen image of
the rear surroundings of your vehicle whenever the gear selector is put into REVERSE. The image will be displayed
on the radio touchscreen display along with a caution note to “check entire surroundings” across the top of the
screen. After five seconds, this note will disappear. The ParkView camera is located on the rear of the vehicle above
the rear license plate.
Hill Start Assist — If
Equipped
On Off
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 277
Lights
After pressing the Lights button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
Setting Name Selectable Options
Headlight Off Delay 0 sec 30 sec 60 sec 90 sec
NOTE:
When the “Headlight Off Delay” feature is selected, it allows the adjustment of the amount of time the headlights
remain on after the engine is shut off.
Headlights With
Wipers — If
Equipped
Headlight Illumi-
nated On Approach
0 sec 30 sec 60 sec 90 sec
NOTE:
When the “Headlight Illumination On Approach” feature is selected, it allows the adjustment of the amount of time
the headlights remain on after the doors are unlocked with the key fob.
Auto Dim High
Beams— If
Equipped
NOTE:
When the “Auto Dim High Beams” feature is selected, the high beam headlights will activate/deactivate automati-
cally under certain conditions.
278 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Setting Name Selectable Options
Daytime Running
Lights — If
Equipped
Steering Directed
Headlights — If
Equipped
NOTE:
The “Steering Directed Headlights” feature causes the headlights to turn relative to a change in direction of the steer-
ing wheel.
Flash Lights With
Lock
Doors & Locks
After pressing the Doors & Locks button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
Setting Name Selectable Options
Auto Door Locks On Off
NOTE:
When the “Auto Door Locks” feature is selected, all doors will lock automatically when the vehicle reaches a speed of
12 mph (20 km/h).
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 279
Setting Name Selectable Options
Auto Unlock On Exit
NOTE:
When this feature is selected, all doors will unlock when the vehicle is stopped, the transmission is in the PARK or
NEUTRAL position and the driver’s door is opened.
Flash Lights With Lock
Sound Horn With Lock Off 1st Press 2nd Press
Sound Horn With Remote Start
1st Press Of Key Fob Unlocks Driver Door All Doors
NOTE:
When ⬙Driver Door⬙ is selected with 1st Press Of Key Fob Unlocks, only the driver’s door will unlock with the first press of
the key fob unlock button. You must press the key fob unlock button twice to unlock the passenger’s doors. When ⬙All
Doors⬙ is selected for 1st Press Of Key Fob Unlocks, all doors will unlock on the first press of the key fob unlock button. If
the vehicle is programmed 1st Press Of Key Fob Unlocks “All Doors,” all doors will unlock no matter which Passive Entry
equipped door handle is grasped. If 1st Press Of Key Fob Unlocks “Driver Door” is programmed, only the driver’s door
will unlock when the driver’s door is grasped. With Passive Entry, if 1st Press Of Key Fob Unlocks “Driver Door” is pro-
grammed, touching the handle more than once will result in only the driver’s door opening. If “Driver Door” is selected,
once the driver door is opened, the interior door lock/unlock switch can be used to unlock all doors (or use key fob).
Passive Entry — If Equipped
NOTE:
The “Passive Entry” feature allows you to lock and unlock the vehicles door(s) without having to push the key fob
lock or unlock buttons.
280 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Auto-On Comfort & Remote Start
After pressing the Auto-On Comfort & Remote Start button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
Setting Name Selectable Options
Auto-On Driver Heated
Seat With Vehicle Start—
If Equipped
Off Remote Start All Starts
NOTE:
When this feature is selected the driver’s heated seat will automatically turn ON when temperatures are below 40° F
(4.4° C).
Sound Horn With Remote
Start
Engine Off Options
After pressing the “Engine Off Options” button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
Setting Name Selectable Options
Engine Off Power
Delay
0 seconds 45 seconds 5 minutes 10 minutes
NOTE:
When the “Engine Off Power Delay” feature is selected, the power window switches, radio, Uconnect phone system
(if equipped), DVD video system (if equipped), power sunroof (if equipped), and power outlets will remain active for
up to ten minutes after the ignition is cycled to OFF. Opening either front door will cancel this feature.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 281
Setting Name Selectable Options
Headlight Off Delay +-
NOTE:
When the “Headlight Off Delay” feature is selected, it allows the adjustment of the amount of time the headlights remain on
after the engine is shut off. Press the “+” or “-” buttons to transition from 0 seconds to 30, 60, or 90 seconds.
Compass Settings — If Equipped
After pressing the “Compass Settings” button on the
touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
NOTE: Before compass calibration is performed, the com-
pass variance zone should be set for best results.
Setting Name Selectable Options
Compass
Variance
123456789101112131415
NOTE:
When the “Compass Variance” feature is selected, it allows the compass variance to be set to any number from 1 to
15 per the compass variance zone map figure.
Compass Variance is the difference between Magnetic North and Geographic North. To compensate for the differ-
ences the variance should be set for the zone where the vehicle is being driven, illustrated in the zone map. Once
properly set, the compass will automatically compensate for the differences when calibrated, and provide the most
accurate compass headings.
282 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Setting Name Selectable Options
Perform
Compass
Calibration
On
NOTE:
Press “Compass Calibration” on the touchscreen to enter calibration. To start calibration of the compass, press the “On” but-
ton on the touchscreen and complete one or more 360-degree turns (in an area free from large metal or metallic objects). A
message will appear on the touchscreen when the compass has been successfully calibrated.
Keep magnetic materials away from the rear view mirror, such as Mobile Phones, Laptops and Radar Detectors. This is
where the compass module is located, and it can cause interference with the compass sensor, and it may give false readings.
Compass Variance Zone Map
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 283
Audio
After pressing the Audio button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available.
Setting Name Adjustable Options
Equalizer Bass Mid Treble
NOTE:
When in this display you may adjust the “Bass”, “Mid” and “Treble” settings. Adjust the settings with the “+” and
“–” setting buttons on the touchscreen or by selecting any point on the scale between the “+” and “–” buttons on the
touchscreen. Bass/Mid/Treble also allow you to simply slide your finger up or down to change the setting as well as
press directly on the desired setting.
Balance/Fade Up Arrow
Button
Down Ar-
row Button
Left Arrow
Button
Right Ar-
row Button
Center “C”
Button
NOTE:
When in this display you may adjust the “Balance/Fade” of the audio by using the “Arrow” button on the touch-
screen to adjust the sound level from the front and rear or right and left side speakers. Press the “Center ‘C’ Button”
on the touchscreen to reset the balance and fade to the factory setting.
Speed Adjusted Volume Off 1 2 3
Music Info Cleanup On Off
NOTE:
The “Music Info Cleanup” feature helps organize music files for optimized music navigation.
284 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Phone/Bluetooth
After pressing the “Phone/Bluetooth” button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
Setting Name Selectable Options
Paired Devices List of Paired Devices
NOTE:
This feature shows which devices are paired to the Phone/Bluetooth system. For further information, refer to the
Uconnect Owner’s Manual Supplement.
SiriusXM Setup
After pressing the “SIRIUS Setup” button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
Setting Name Selectable Options
Channel Skip List of Channels
NOTE:
SiriusXM can be programmed to designate a group of channels that are the most desirable to listen to or to exclude
undesirable channels while scanning. This feature allows you to select the channels you would like to skip.
Subscription Info Sirius ID
NOTE:
New vehicle purchasers or lessees will receive a free limited time subscription to SiriusXM Satellite Radio with your
radio. Following the expiration of the free services, it will be necessary to access the information on the Subscription
Information screen to re-subscribe.
1. Press the “Subscription Info” button on the touchscreen to access the Subscription Information screen.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 285
Setting Name Selectable Options
2. Write down the Sirius ID numbers for your receiver. To reactivate your service, either call the number listed on the
screen or visit the provider online.
SiriusXM Travel Link is a separate subscription and is available for U.S. residents only.
Accessibility — If Equipped
After pressing the “Accessibility” button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
Setting Name Selectable Options
Accessibility On Off
NOTE:
The “Accessibility” feature announces a function prior to performing the action selected when using DVD functions,
when it is activated. For example, when activated, and the “Play” button is selected, the system will announce “Play
button selected”, and then once pressed again the “Play” button will perform its action.
UCONNECT MULTIMEDIA — VIDEO
ENTERTAINMENT SYSTEM (VES) — IF EQUIPPED
Your rear seat Video Entertainment System (VES) is de-
signed to give your family years of enjoyment. You can
play your favorite CDs or DVDs, listen to audio over the
wireless headphones, or plug and play a variety of stan-
dard video games or audio devices. Please review this
Owner’s Manual to become familiar with its features and
operation.
NOTE: The screen is located in the 2nd row overhead
console.
Getting Started
• Screen located in the overhead console: Unfold the
overhead LCD screen by pushing the button on the
overhead console behind the screen.
286 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
• With the ignition switch in the ON or ACC position, turn
the radio on by pushing the ON/OFF Volume Control
knob.
• When the Video Screen is open and a DVD is inserted
into the radio, the screen turns on automatically, the
headphone transmitters turn on and playback begins.
Single Video Screen
NOTE: Typically there are two different ways to operate
the features of the Video Entertainment System (VES).
• The Remote Control
• The Touchscreen Radio (If Equipped)
Play A DVD
1. Press the EJECT button on the radio faceplate (Touch-
screen).
2. Insert the DVD with the label facing up. The radio
automatically selects the appropriate mode after the disc
is recognized and displays the menu screen or starts
playing the first track.
3. Ensure the VES Remote Control and the Headphone
switch is on Channel 1.
Using The Remote Control
1. Push the MODE button on the Remote Control.
2. While looking at the video screen, highlight DISC by
either pushing Up/Down/Left/Right buttons or by
repeatedly pushing the MODE button, then push EN-
TER on the Remote Control.
NOTE: The VES system will retain the last setting when
turned off.
Overhead Video Screen
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 287
Play Video Games
Connect the video game console to the Auxiliary RCA
input jacks located on the back of the center console.
Audio/Video RCA Jacks (AUX Jacks) on
the rear of the center console enable the
monitor to display video directly from a
video camera, connect video games for
display on the screen, or play music
directly from an MP3 player.
1. Video in (yellow).
2. Left audio in (white).
3. Right audio in (red).
When connecting an external source to the AUX input, be
sure to follow the standard color coding for the VES jacks:
NOTE: Certain high-end video games consoles will ex-
ceed the power limit of the vehicle’s Power Inverter. Refer
to the Power Inverter section in your vehicle’s Owner’s
Manual for more information.
Ensure the remote control channel selector switch and
Headphone switch (IR channel) are the same number.
Using The Remote Control
1. Push the MODE button on the Remote Control.
2. While looking at the video screen, highlight VES AUX 2,
by either pushing Up/Down/Left/Right buttons or by
repeatedly pushing the MODE button, then push EN-
TER on the Remote Control.
Using The Touchscreen Radio Controls
1. Press the “MORE” button on the touchscreen.
2. Press the “Rear Entertainment” button on the touch-
screen to display the Rear Entertainment Controls.
3. If the Rear Entertainment is turned off, press the
“Power” button on the touchscreen.
4. Press the “1” or “2” button on the touchscreen for the
channel desired and press the “Source” button on the
touchscreen to select the desired mode.
Listen To An Audio Source On Channel 2 While A
Video Is Playing On Channel 1
Ensure the Remote Control and Headphone switch is on
Channel 2.
288 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Using The Remote Control
1. Push the MODE button on the Remote Control and the
Mode Select Screen will display, unless a video is
playing then only a small banner will appear on the
bottom of the screen.
2. While looking at the video screen, either press Up/
Down/Left/Right on the Remote Control to highlight
the desired audio source or repeatedly push the MODE
button on the remote until the desired audio source
appears on the screen.
Using The Touchscreen Radio Controls
1. Press the “MORE” button on the touchscreen.
2. Press the “Rear Entertainment” button on the touch-
screen to display the Rear Entertainment Controls.
3. If the Rear Entertainment is turned off, press the
“Power” button on the touchscreen.
4. Press the “1” or “2” button on the touchscreen for the
channel desired and press the “Source” button on the
touchscreen to select the desired mode.
Important Notes For Single Video Screen System
• VES is able to transmit two channels of stereo audio
simultaneously.
• In split screen mode the left side equates to Channel 1
and right side equates to Channel 2.
• If a video source is selected on Channel 1, then Channel
2 is for audio only.
• When selecting a video source on Channel 1, the video
will display on the screen and the audio will be heard on
Channel 1 in the headphones.
• Audio can be heard through the headphones even when
the Video Screen is closed.
Play A DVD Using The Touchscreen Radio
Insert the DVD with the label facing up. The radio auto-
matically selects the appropriate mode after the disc is
recognized and displays the menu screen or starts playing
the first track.
Using The Remote Control
1. Push the MODE button on the Remote Control.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 289
2. While looking at the Video Screen, highlight DISC by
either pushing Up/Down/Left/Right buttons or by
repeatedly pushing the MODE button, then push EN-
TER.
NOTE:
• The VES system will retain the last setting when turned
off.
• Viewing a DVD on the Touchscreen radio screen is not
available in some regions or locations, the vehicle must
be stopped, and the gear selector must be in the PARK
position. Refer to local and state laws.
Using The Touchscreen Radio Controls
1. Press the “MORE” button on the touchscreen.
2. Press the “Rear Entertainment” button on the touch-
screen to display the Rear Entertainment Controls.
3. If the Rear Entertainment is turned off, press the
“Power” button on the touchscreen.
4. Press the “1” or “2” button on the touchscreen for the
channel desired and press the “Source” button on the
touchscreen to select the desired mode.
VES Remote Control — If Equipped
Controls And Indicators
1. Power – Turns the screen and wireless headphone
transmitter for the selected Channel on or off. To hear
audio while the screen is closed, push the Power button
to turn the headphone transmitter on.
2. Channel Selector Indicators – When a button is pushed,
the currently affected channel or channel button is
illuminated momentarily.
VES Remote Control
290 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
3. Light – Turns the remote control backlighting on or off.
The remote backlighting turns off automatically after
five seconds.
4. Channel/Screen Selector Switch – Indicates which chan-
nel is being controlled by the remote control. When the
selector switch is in the Channel 1 position, the remote
controls the functionality of headphone Channel 1 (right
side of the screen). When the selector switch is in the
Channel 2, position the remote controls the functionality
of headphone Channel 2 (left side of the screen).
5. 䉴䉴 – In radio modes, push to seek the next tunable
station. In disc modes, push and hold to fast forward
through the current audio track or video chapter. In
menu modes use to navigate in the menu.
6. 䉲 / Prev – In radio modes, push to select to the previous
station. In disc modes, push to advance to the start of the
current or previous audio track or video chapter. In
menu modes, use to navigate in the menu.
7. MENU – Push to return to the main menu of a DVD
disc, to select a satellite audio or video channel from the
Station list, or select playback modes (SCAN/
RANDOM for a CD).
8. 䉴 / 㥋 (Play/Pause) – Begin/resume or pause disc play.
9. ▪ (Stop) – Stops disc play.
10. PROG Up/Down – When listening to a radio mode,
pushing PROG Up selects the next preset and pushing
PROG Down selects the previous preset stored in the
radio.
11. MUTE – Push to mute the headphone audio output for
the selected channel.
12. SLOW – Push to slow playback of a DVD disc. Push
play (䉴) to resume normal play.
13. STATUS – Push to display the current status.
14. MODE – Push to change the mode of the selected
channel. See the Mode Selection section of this manual
for details on changing modes.
15. SETUP – When in a video mode, push the SETUP
button to access the display settings (see the display
settings section) to access the DVD setup menu, select
the menu button on the radio. When a disc is loaded in
the DVD player (if equipped) and the VES mode is
selected and the disc is stopped, push the SETUP
button to access the DVD Setup menu. (see the DVD
Setup Menu of this manual.)
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 291
16. BACK – When navigating in menu mode, push to
return to the previous screen. When navigating a DVDs
disc menu, the operation depends on the disc’s con-
tents.
17. 䉳䉳 – In radio modes, push to seek to the previous
tunable station. In disc modes, push and hold to fast
rewind through the current audio track or video chap-
ter. In menu modes use to navigate in the menu.
18. ENTER – Push to select the highlighted option in a
menu.
19. 䉱 / NEXT – In radio modes, push to select to the next
station. In disc modes, push to advance to the next
audio track or video chapter. In menu modes, use to
navigate in the menu.
Remote Control Storage
The video screen comes with a built in storage compart-
ment for the remote control which is accessible when the
screen is opened. To remove the remote, use your index
finger to pull and rotate the remote towards you. Do not try
to pull the remote straight down as it will be very difficult
to remove. To return the remote back into its storage area,
insert one long edge of the remote into the two retaining
clips first, and then rotate the remote back up into the other
two retaining clips until it snaps back into position.
VES Remote Control Storage
292 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Locking The Remote Control
All remote control functionality can be disabled as a
parental control feature.
1. Press the “MORE” button on the touchscreen.
2. Press the “Rear Entertainment” button on the touch-
screen to display the Rear Entertainment Controls.
3. Press the “Lock-out” button on the touchscreen to lock
the remote control. Pressing the “Lock-out” button on
the touchscreen a second time will unlock the remote
control.
NOTE: Remote control lock-out will only apply to the
current ignition cycle. The VES will automatically remove
the lock-out if the ignition is cycled to “OFF”.
Replacing The Remote Control Batteries
The remote control requires two AAA batteries for opera-
tion. To replace the batteries:
1. Locate the battery compartment on the back of the
remote, then slide the battery cover downward.
2. Replace the batteries, making sure to orient them ac-
cording to the polarity diagram shown.
3. Replace the battery compartment cover.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 293
VES Headphones Operation
The headphones receive two separate channels of audio
using an infrared transmitter from the video screen.
If no audio is heard after increasing the volume control,
verify that the screen is turned on and in the down position
and that the channel is not muted and the headphone
channel selector switch is on the desired channel. If audio
is still not heard, check that fully charged batteries are
installed in the headphones.
Replacing The Headphone Batteries
Each set of headphones requires two AAA batteries for
operation. To replace the batteries:
1. Locate the battery compartment on the left ear cup of
the headphones, and then slide the battery cover down-
ward.
VES Headphones
1 — Volume Control
2 — Power Button
3 — Channel Selection Switch
4 — Power Indicator
294 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
2. Replace the batteries, making sure to orient them ac-
cording to the polarity diagram shown.
3. Replace the battery compartment cover.
Controls
The headphone power indicator and controls are located
on the right ear cup.
NOTE: The rear video system must be turned on before
sound can be heard from the headphones. To conserve
battery life, the headphones will automatically turn off
approximately three minutes after the rear video system is
turned off.
Changing The Audio Mode For Headphones
1.
Ensure the Remote Control channel/screen selector switch
is in the same position as the headphone selector switch.
NOTE:
• When both switches are on Channel 1, the Remote is
controlling Channel 1 and the headphones are tuned to
the audio of the VES Channel 1.
• When both switches are on Channel 2, the Remote is
controlling Channel 2 and the headphones are tuned to
the audio of the VES Channel 2.
2. Push the MODE button on the remote control.
3. If the video screen is displaying a video source (such as
a DVD Video), pushing STATUS shows the status on a
popup banner at the bottom of the screen. Pushing the
MODE button will advance to the next mode. When the
mode is in an audio only source (such as FM), the Mode
Selection menu appears on screen.
4. When the Mode Selection menu appears on screen, use
the cursor buttons on the remote control to navigate to
the available modes and push the ENTER button to
select the new mode.
5. To cancel out of the Mode Selection menu, push the
BACK button on the remote control.
Accessibility
Accessibility is a feature of the DVD system that announces
a function prior to performing the action. For further
information refer to “Uconnect Settings” in “Multimedia.”
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 295
Unwired Stereo Headphone Lifetime Limited
Warranty
Who Does This Warranty Cover? This warranty covers the
initial user or purchaser (⬙you⬙ or ⬙your⬙) of this particular
Unwired Technology LLC (⬙Unwired⬙) wireless headphone
(⬙Product⬙). The warranty is not transferable.
How Long Does The Coverage Last? This warranty lasts
as long as you own the Product.
What Does This Warranty Cover? Except as specified
below, this warranty covers any Product that in normal use
is defective in workmanship or materials.
What Does This Warranty Not Cover? This warranty does
not cover any damage or defect that results from misuse,
abuse or modification of the Product other than by Un-
wired. Foam earpieces, which will wear over time through
normal use, are specifically not covered (replacement foam
is available for a nominal charge). UNWIRED TECHNOL-
OGY IS NOT LIABLE FOR ANY INJURIES OR DAMAGES
TO PERSONS OR PROPERTY RESULTING FROM THE
USE OF, OR ANY FAILURE OR DEFECT IN, THE PROD-
UCT, NOR IS UNWIRED LIABLE FOR ANY GENERAL,
SPECIAL, DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, CONSE-
QUENTIAL, EXEMPLARY, PUNITIVE OR OTHER DAM-
AGES OF ANY KIND OR NATURE WHATSOEVER.
Some states and jurisdictions may not allow the exclusion
or limitation of incidental or consequential damages, so the
above limitation may not apply to you. This warranty gives
you specific legal rights. You may also have other rights,
which vary from jurisdiction to jurisdiction.
What Will Unwired Do? Unwired, at its option, will repair
or replace any defective Product. Unwired reserves the
right to replace any discontinued Product with a compa-
rable model. THIS WARRANTY IS THE SOLE WAR-
RANTY FOR THIS PRODUCT, SETS FORTH YOUR EX-
CLUSIVE REMEDY REGARDING DEFECTIVE
PRODUCTS, AND IS IN LIEU OF ALL OTHER WARRAN-
TIES (EXPRESS OR IMPLIED), INCLUDING ANY WAR-
RANTY OR MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A
PARTICULAR PURPOSE.
If you have any questions or comments regarding your
Unwired wireless headphones, please phone 1-888-293-
3332 or email customersupport@unwiredtechnology.com.
You may register your Unwired wireless headphones by
phone at 1-888-293-3332.
296 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
System Information
Information Mode Display
When information mode is active, the current mode setting
for both audio channels is displayed. In addition to the
items called out by number, the remaining information
displays the current status of the source (such as station
frequency, name, preset or track number, song title, artist
name, album name, etc.).
1. Channel 1 Mode — Displays the current source for
Channel 1.
2. Channel 1 Audio Only/Mute — Audio: The audio only
icon is not used on Channel 1, in a single screen system.
Mute: when the Mute icon is displayed, the audio for
Channel 1 has been muted using the remote control’s
MUTE button.
3. Channel 2 Audio Only/Mute — Audio: Only in a single
screen system: The audio only icon is displayed on
Channel 2 when Channel 1 is in a video mode. Mute:
when the Mute icon is displayed, the audio for Channel
2 has been muted using the remote control’s MUTE
button.
4. Channel 2 Mode — Displays the current source for
Channel 2.
5. Remote Locked Out — When the icon is displayed, the
remote control functions are disabled.
6. Clock — Displays the time.
7. Channel 1 Shared Status — When the icon is displayed,
the audio for Channel 1 is also shared with the radio and
playing through the cabin speakers.
Information Mode Display
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 297
Numeric Keypad Menu
When the display for either Channel 1 or Channel 2 shows
DIRECT TUNE, pushing the remote control’s ENTER but-
ton activates a numeric keypad menu. This screen makes it
easy to enter a specific tuner frequency or track number. To
enter the desired digit:
1. Push the remote control’s navigation buttons (䉱, 䉲, 䉴,
䉳) to navigate to the desired digit.
2. When the digit is highlighted, push the remote control’s
ENTER button to select the digit. Repeat these steps
until all digits are entered.
3. To delete the last digit, navigate to the Del button and
push the remote control’s ENTER button.
4. After all of the digits are entered, navigate to the Go
button and push the remote control’s ENTER button.
Station List Menu
When listening to Satellite audio, pushing the remote
control’s MENU button displays a list of all available
channels. Navigate this list using the remote control’s
navigation buttons to find the desired station, push the
remote control’s ENTER button to tune to that station. To
jump through the list more quickly, navigate to the Page
Up and Page Down icons on the screen.
Disc Menu
When listening to a CD Audio or CD Data disc, pushing
the remote control’s MENU button displays a list of all
commands which control playback of the disc. Using the
options you can activate or cancel Random play.
Numeric Keypad Menu
298 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Options Menu
When watching a video source (DVD Video with the disc
in Play mode, Aux Video, etc.), pressing the “Options”
button on the touchscreen activates the Options Settings
menu. From this menu you can adjust Audio, Subtitles,
Angle and Title.
Display Settings
When watching a video source (DVD Video with the disc
in Play mode, Aux Video, etc.), pushing the remote con-
trol’s SETUP button activates the Display Settings menu.
These settings control the appearance of the video on the
screen. The factory default settings are already set for
optimum viewing, so there is no need to change these
settings under normal circumstances.
To change the settings, push the remote control’s naviga-
tion buttons to select an item, then push the remote
control’s navigation buttons to change the value for the
currently selected item. To reset all values back to the
original settings, select the Default Settings menu option
and push the remote control’s ENTER button.
Listening To Audio With The Screen Closed
To listen to only audio portion of the channel with the
screen closed:
1. Set the audio to the desired source and channel.
2. Close the video screen.
3. To change the current audio mode, push the remote
control’s MODE button. This will automatically select
the next available audio mode without using the
MODE/SOURCE Select menu.
Display Settings Menu
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 299
If the screen is closed and there is no audio heard, verify
that the headphones are turned on (the ON indicator is
illuminated) and the headphone selector switch is on the
desired channel. If the headphones are turned on, push the
remote control’s power button to turn audio on. If audio is
still not heard, check that fully charged batteries are
installed in the headphones.
Disc Formats
The DVD player is capable of playing the following types
of discs (8 cm or 12 cm diameter):
• DVD-Video discs (MPEG-2 video compression) (see
notes about DVD Region Codes)
• Audio Compact Discs (CDs)
• CD Data discs with MP3 and WMA compressed audio
format files
• Video CDs (MPEG-1 video compression)
DVD Region Codes
The DVD player and many DVD discs are coded by
geographic region. These region codes must match in order
for the disc to play. If the region code for the DVD disc does
not match the region code for the player, the disc will stop
playing and a warning will be displayed.
DVD Audio Support
When a DVD-Audio disc is inserted in the DVD player, the
DVD-Audio title on the disc is played by default (most
DVD-Audio discs also have a Video title, but the Video title
is ignored). All multi-channel program material is auto-
matically mixed down to two channels, which may result
in a lowered apparent volume level. If you increase the
volume level to account for this change in level, remember
to lower the volume before changing the disc or to another
mode.
Recorded Discs
The DVD player will play CD-R and CD-RW discs re-
corded in CD-Audio or Video-CD format, or as a CD-ROM
containing MP3 or WMA files. The player will also play
DVD-Video content recorded to a DVD-R, DVD-RW and
DVD-ROM discs.
If you record a disc using a personal computer, there may
be cases where the DVD player may not be able to play
some or the entire disc, even if it is recorded in a compat-
ible format and is playable on other players. To help avoid
playback problems, use the following guidelines when
recording discs.
300 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
• Open sessions are ignored. Only sessions that are closed
are playable.
• For multi-session CDs that contain only multiple CD-
Audio sessions, the player will renumber the tracks so
each track number is unique.
• For CD Data (or CD-ROM) discs, always use the ISO-
9660 (Level 1 or Level 2), Joliet, or UDF format. CD-DA
may also be used for PCM Audio contained on CD-
Based Data.
• The player recognizes a maximum of 512 files and 99
folders per CD-R and CD-RW disc.
• Mixed media recordable DVD formats will only play the
Video_TS portion of the disc.
If you are still having trouble writing a disc that is playable
in the DVD player, check with the disc recording software
publisher for more information about burning playable
discs.
The recommended method for labeling recordable discs
(CD-R, CD-RW, DVD-R and DVD-RW) is with a permanent
marker. Do not use adhesive labels as they may separate
from the disc, become stuck, and cause permanent damage
to the DVD player.
Compressed Audio Files (MP3, WMA AND ACC)
The DVD player is capable of playing MP3 (MPEG-1 Audio
Layer 3 with data bitrates from 32 to 320 kbit/s, including
variable bit rates), WMA (All Standard 8.x, 9.x Windows
Media Audio) and ACC (MPEG-4 audio; sampling fre-
quencies 8 to 48 kHz; mono and stereo) audio files with the
from a CD Data disc (usually a CD-R or CD-RW).
• The DVD player always uses the file extension to
determine the audio format, so MP3 files must always
end with the extension ⬙.mp3⬙ or ⬙.MP3⬙, WMA files
must always end with the extension ⬙.wma⬙ or ⬙WMA⬙,
and ACC files must end with the extensions “.acc” or
“.m4a”. To prevent incorrect playback, do not use these
extensions for any other types of files.
• For MP3 files, ID3 tag data v1, v1.1, v2 and v2.4 (such as
artist name, track title, album, etc.) are supported.
• Any file that is copy protected (such as those down-
loaded from many online music stores) will not play. The
DVD player will automatically skip the file and begin
playing the next available file.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 301
• Other compression formats such as AAC, MP3 Pro, Ogg
Vorbis, and ATRAC3 will not play. The DVD player will
automatically skip the file and begin playing the next
available file.
• If you are creating your own files, the recommended
fixed bit rate for MP3 files is between 96 and 192Kbps
and the recommended fixed bit rate for WMA files is
between 64 and 192Kbps. Variable bit rates are also
supported. For both formats, the recommended sample
rate is either 44.1kHz or 48kHz.
• To change the current file, use the remote control’s or
DVD player’s 䉱 button to advance to the next file, or the
䉲 button to return to the start of the current or previous
file.
• To change the current directory, use the remote control’s
PROG UP and Down buttons or Rewind/skip back and
fast fwd/skip forward.
Disc Errors
If the DVD player is unable to read the disc, a ⬙Disc Error⬙
message is displayed on the Radio display and the disc is
automatically ejected. A dirty, damaged, or incompatible
disc format are all potential causes for a ⬙Disc Error⬙
message.
If a disc has a damaged track which results in audible or
visible errors that persists for 2.0 seconds, the DVD player
will attempt to continue playing the disc by skipping
forward 1.0 to 3.0 seconds at a time. If the end of the disc
is reached, the DVD player will return to the beginning of
the disc and attempt to play the start of the first track.
The DVD player may shut down during extremely hot
conditions, such as when the vehicle’s interior temperature
is above 120°F (49°C). When this occurs, the DVD player
will display ⬙High Temp⬙ and will shut off the display until
a safe temperature is reached. This shutdown is necessary
to protect the optics of the DVD player.
Product Agreement
This product incorporates copyright protection technology
that is protected by U.S. patents and other intellectual
property rights. Use of this copyright protection technol-
ogy must be authorized by Macrovision, and is intended
for home or other limited viewing uses otherwise autho-
rized by Macrovision. Reverse engineering or disassembly
is prohibited.
302 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Dolby Digital and MLP Lossless Manufactured un-
der license from Dolby Laboratories. ⬙Dolby,⬙⬙MLP
Lossless,⬙ and the double-D symbol are trademarks of
Dolby Laboratories. Confidential unpublished works.
Copyright 1992-1997 Dolby Laboratories. All rights
reserved.
IPOD/USB/MP3 CONTROL
This feature allows an iPod or external USB device to be
plugged into the USB port.
iPod control supports Mini, 4G, Photo, Nano, 5G iPod and
iPhone devices. Some iPod software versions may not fully
support the iPod control features. Please visit Apple’s
website for software updates.
For further information, refer to the Uconnect Owner’s
Manual Supplement.
STEERING WHEEL AUDIO CONTROLS
The remote sound system controls are located on the rear
surface of the steering wheel. The left and right-hand
controls are rocker-type switches with a pushbutton in the
center of each switch. Reach behind the steering wheel to
access the switches.
Remote Sound Controls (Back View Of Steering Wheel)
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 303
Right-Hand Switch Functions
• Push the top of the switch to increase the volume.
• Push the bottom of the switch to decrease the volume.
• Push the button in the center of the switch to change
modes (i.e., AM, FM, etc.).
Left-Hand Switch Functions For Radio Operation
• Push the top of the switch to SEEK the next listenable
station up from the current setting.
• Push the bottom of the switch to SEEK the next listen-
able station down from the current setting.
• Push the button in the center of the switch to tune to the
next preset that you have programmed.
Left-Hand Switch Functions For Media (i.e., CD)
Operation
• Push the top of the switch once to listen to the next track.
• Push the bottom of the switch once either to listen to the
beginning of the current track or to listen to the begin-
ning of the previous track if it is within eight seconds
after the current track begins to play.
• Push the switch up or down twice to listen to the second
track, three times to listen to the third track, and so forth.
• Push the button located in the center of the switch to
change to the next preset that you have programmed.
304 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
CD/DVD DISC MAINTENANCE
To keep a CD/DVD in good condition, take the following
precautions:
1. Handle the disc by its edge; avoid touching the surface.
2. If the disc is stained, clean the surface with a soft cloth,
wiping from center to edge.
3. Do not apply paper or tape to the disc; avoid scratching
the disc.
4. Do not use solvents such as benzene, thinner, cleaners,
or anti-static sprays.
5. Store the disc in its case after playing.
6. Do not expose the disc to direct sunlight.
7. Do not store the disc where temperatures may become
too high.
NOTE: If you experience difficulty in playing a particular
disc, it may be damaged (e.g., scratched, reflective coating
removed, a hair, moisture or dew on the disc), oversized, or
have protection encoding. Try a known good disc before
considering disc player service.
RADIO OPERATION AND MOBILE DEVICES
Under certain conditions, an “on” mobile device in your
vehicle can cause erratic or noisy performance from your
radio. This condition may be lessened or eliminated by
relocating the mobile device antenna. This condition is not
harmful to the radio. If your radio performance does not
satisfactorily “clear” by the repositioning of the antenna, it
is recommended that the radio volume be turned down or
off during mobile device operation when not using
Uconnect (if equipped).
Regulatory And Safety Information
USA/CANADA
Exposure to Radio Frequency Radiation
The radiated output power of the internal wireless radio is
far below the FCC radio frequency exposure limits. Nev-
ertheless, the wireless radio will be used in such a manner
that the radio is 8 inches (20 centimeters) or further from
the human body.
The internal wireless radio operates within guidelines
found in radio frequency safety standards and recommen-
dations, which reflect the consensus of the scientific com-
munity.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 305
The radio manufacturer believes the internal wireless radio
is safe for use by consumers. The level of energy emitted is
far less than the electromagnetic energy emitted by wire-
less devices such as mobile phones. However, the use of
wireless radios may be restricted in some situations or
environments, such as aboard airplanes. If you are unsure
of restrictions, you are encouraged to ask for authorization
before turning on the wireless radio.
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules and
with Industry Canada license-exempt RSS standard(s).
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful interference.
2. This device must accept any interference received, in-
cluding interference that may cause undesired opera-
tion.
NOTE:
• This equipment has been tested and found to comply
with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to
Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to
provide reasonable protection against harmful interfer-
ence in a residential installation. This equipment gener-
ates, uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if
not installed and used in accordance with the instruc-
tions, may cause harmful interference to radio commu-
nications. However, there is no guarantee that interfer-
ence will not occur in a particular installation.
• If this equipment does cause harmful interference to
radio or television reception, which can be determined
by turning the equipment off and on, the user is encour-
aged to try to correct the interference by one or more of
the following measures:
• Increase the separation between the equipment and
receiver.
• Consult the dealer or an experienced radio technician for
help.
306 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
CLIMATE CONTROLS
The air conditioning and heating system is designed to
make you comfortable in all types of weather. This system
can be operated through either the instrument panel or
through the Uconnect system display.
When the Uconnect system is in different modes (Radio,
Player, Settings, More, etc.) the driver and passenger
temperature settings will be indicated at the top of the
display.
Manual Three Zone Climate Controls With
Touchscreen — If Equipped
Buttons On The Faceplate
Buttons on the faceplate are located on the left and right
side of the Radio 4.3 screen in the center of the instrument
panel. There are also buttons on the faceplate located below
the Uconnect touchscreen.
Radio 4.3 Manual with Touchscreen Climate Button On
The Faceplate
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 307
Buttons On The Touchscreen
Buttons on the touchscreen are accessible on the Uconnect
system screen.
Manual Temperature Controls — Buttons On The
Faceplate
Radio 4.3 Manual 3 — Zone Temperature Controls —
Buttons On The Touchscreen
308 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Button Descriptions (Applies To Both Buttons On The
Faceplate And Buttons On The Touchscreen)
1. MAX A/C Button
Press and release to change the current setting, the indica-
tor illuminates when A/C is ON. Performing this function
again will cause the MAX A/C operation to switch into
manual mode and the MAX A/C indicator will turn off.
2. A/C Button
Press and release to change the current setting, the indica-
tor illuminates when A/C is ON. Performing this function
again will cause the A/C operation to switch into manual
mode and the A/C indicator will turn off.
3. Recirculation Button
Push this button to choose between outside air intake or
recirculation of the air inside the vehicle. An indicator light
will illuminate when you are in Recirculation mode.
4. Front Defrost Button
Press and release to change the current airflow setting to
Defrost mode. The indicator illuminates when this feature
is ON. Air comes from the windshield and side window
demist outlets. When the defrost button is selected, the
blower level will increase. Use Defrost mode with maxi-
mum temperature settings for best windshield and side
window defrosting and defogging. Performing this func-
tion will cause the ATC to switch into manual mode. If the
front defrost mode is turned off the climate system will
return the previous setting.
Radio 8.4 Manual 3 — Zone Temperature Controls —
Buttons On The Touchscreen
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 309
5. Rear Defrost Button
Press and release this button to turn on the rear window
defroster and the heated outside mirrors (if equipped). An
indicator will illuminate when the rear window defroster is
on. The rear window defroster automatically turns off after
ten minutes.
CAUTION!
Failure to follow these cautions can cause damage to
the heating elements:
• Use care when washing the inside of the rear win-
dow. Do not use abrasive window cleaners on the
interior surface of the window. Use a soft cloth and a
mild washing solution, wiping parallel to the heat-
ing elements. Labels can be peeled off after soaking
with warm water.
• Do not use scrapers, sharp instruments, or abrasive
window cleaners on the interior surface of the win-
dow.
• Keep all objects a safe distance from the window.
6. Rear Climate Button — If Equipped
Press and release this button to turn on the rear climate
controls. The indicator will illuminate when the rear cli-
mate controls are ON. Performing this function again will
turn OFF the rear climate controls.
7. Passenger Temperature Control Up Button (Radio 8.4
Only)
Provides the passenger with independent temperature
control. Push the button for warmer temperature settings.
NOTE: Pressing this button while in Sync mode will
automatically exit Sync.
8. Passenger Temperature Control Down Button (Radio
8.4 Only)
Provides the passenger with independent temperature
control. Push the button for cooler temperature settings.
NOTE: Pressing this button while in Sync mode will
automatically exit Sync.
310 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
9. SYNC
Press the Sync button on the touchscreen to toggle the Sync
feature On/Off. The Sync indicator is illuminated when
this feature is enabled. Sync is used to synchronize the
passenger temperature setting with the driver temperature
setting. Changing the passenger temperature setting while
in Sync will automatically exit this feature.
10. Blower Control
Blower control is used to regulate the amount of air forced
through the climate system. There are seven blower speeds
available. Adjusting the blower will cause automatic mode
to switch to manual operation. The speeds can be selected
using either the blower control knob or the buttons on the
touchscreen as follows:
Blower Control Knob On The Faceplate
The blower speed increases as you turn the blower control
knob clockwise from the lowest blower setting. The blower
speed decreases as you turn the blower control knob
counterclockwise.
Button On The Touchscreen
Use the small blower icon to reduce the blower setting and
the large blower icon to increase the blower setting. Blower
can also be selected by pressing the blower bar area
between the icons.
11. Modes
The airflow distribution mode can be adjusted so air comes
from the instrument panel outlets, floor outlets, and demist
outlets. The Mode settings are as follows:
• Panel Mode
Air comes from the outlets in the instrument
panel. Each of these outlets can be individually
adjusted to direct the flow of air. The air vanes
of the center outlets and outboard outlets can be moved
up and down or side to side to regulate airflow
direction. There is a shut off wheel located below the
air vanes to shut off or adjust the amount of airflow
from these outlets.
• Bi-Level Mode
Air comes from the instrument panel outlets
and floor outlets. A slight amount of air is
directed through the defrost and side window
demister outlets.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 311
NOTE: BI-LEVEL mode is designed under comfort condi-
tions to provide cooler air out of the panel outlets and
warmer air from the floor outlets.
• Floor Mode
Air comes from the floor outlets. A slight
amount of air is directed through the defrost
and side window demister outlets.
• Mix Mode
Air comes from the floor, defrost and side
window demist outlets. This mode works best
in cold or snowy conditions.
12. Climate Control OFF Button
Press and release this button to turn the Climate Control
ON/OFF.
13. Driver Temperature Control Down Button (Radio 8.4
Only)
Provides the driver with independent temperature control.
Push the button for cooler temperature settings.
NOTE: In Sync mode, this button will also automatically
adjust the passenger temperature setting at the same time.
14. Driver Temperature Control Up Button (Radio 8.4
Only)
Provides the driver with independent temperature control.
Push the button for warmer temperature settings.
NOTE: In Sync mode, this button will also automatically
adjust the passenger temperature setting at the same time.
15. Temperature Control (Radio 4.3 Only)
Press the driver or passenger temperature button on the
touchscreen to regulate the temperature of the air inside
the passenger compartment. Moving the temperature bar
into the red area, indicates warmer temperatures. Moving
the temperature bar into the blue area indicates cooler
temperatures. Driver and passenger have independent
temperature control if Sync mode is not illuminated.
Climate Control Functions
A/C (Air Conditioning)
The Air Conditioning (A/C) button allows the operator to
manually activate or deactivate the air conditioning sys-
tem. When the air conditioning system is turned on, cool
dehumidified air will flow through the outlets into the
cabin. For improved fuel economy, press the A/C button to
312 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
turn off the air conditioning and manually adjust the
blower and airflow mode settings. Also, make sure to select
only Panel, Bi-Level or Floor modes.
NOTE:
• For Manual Climate Controls, if the system is in Mix,
Floor or Defrost Mode, the A/C can be turned off, but
the A/C system shall remain active to prevent fogging of
the windows.
• If fog or mist appears on the windshield or side glass,
select Defrost mode and adjust blower speed if needed.
• If your air conditioning performance seems lower than
expected, check the front of the A/C condenser (located
in front of the radiator), for an accumulation of dirt or
insects. Clean with a gentle water spray from the front of
the radiator and through the condenser.
MAX A/C
MAX A/C sets the control for maximum cooling perfor-
mance.
Press and release to toggle between MAX A/C and the
prior settings. The button illuminates when MAX A/C is
on.
In MAX A/C, the blower level and mode position can be
adjusted to desired user settings. Pressing other settings
will cause the MAX A/C operation to switch to the selected
setting and MAX A/C to exit.
MAX A/C
MAX A/C sets the control for maximum cooling perfor-
mance.
Press and release to toggle between MAX A/C and the
prior settings. The button on the touchscreen illuminates
when MAX A/C is ON.
In MAX A/C, the blower level and mode position can be
adjusted to desired user settings. Pressing other settings
will cause the MAX A/C operation to switch to the selected
setting and MAX A/C to exit.
Recirculation Control
When outside air contains smoke, odors, or high
humidity, or if rapid cooling is desired, you may
wish to recirculate interior air by pressing the
Recirculation control button. The recirculation
indicator will illuminate when this button is selected. Push
the button a second time to turn off the Recirculation mode
and allow outside air into the vehicle.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 313
NOTE: In cold weather, use of Recirculation mode may
lead to excessive window fogging. The Recirculation mode
is not allowed in Defrost mode to improve window clear-
ing operation. Recirculation will be disabled automatically
if this mode is selected. Attempting to use Recirculation
while in this mode will cause the LED in the control button
to blink and then turn off.
Rear Manual Temperature Control (MTC) — If
Equipped
The rear MTC system has floor air outlets at the rear right
side of the 3rd Row seats and overhead outlets at each
outboard rear seating position. The system provides heated
air through the floor outlets or cool, dehumidified air
through the headliner outlets.
The rear system temperature control buttons on the touch-
screen are located in the Uconnect touch system, located on
the instrument panel.
Radio 4.3 Manual Rear Climate Buttons On The
Touchscreen Controls Screen
1 — Blower Up Button 5 — Done Button
2 — Mode Button 6 — Rear Lock Button
3 — Temperature Button 7 — Rear Off Button
4 — Blower Down Button
314 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Controlling The Rear Climate Controls From The
Front Uconnect Touchscreen
The Three-Zone climate control system allows for adjust-
ment of the rear climate controls from the front ATC panel.
To change the rear system settings:
• Press the ⬙REAR⬙ button to change control to rear control
mode, Rear display (below) will appear. Control func-
tions now operate rear system.
• To return to Front screen, press the ⬙REAR⬙ button again,
or it will revert to the Front screen after six seconds.
Rear Lock
• Pressing the Rear Temperature Lock button on the
touchscreen on the Uconnect touchscreen, illuminates a
lock symbol in the rear display. The rear temperature
and air source are controlled from the front Uconnect
system.
• Rear occupants can only adjust the rear control when the
Rear Temperature Lock button is turned off.
Radio 8.4 Manual Rear Climate Button On The
Touchscreen Controls Screen
1 — Rear Lock Button 5 — Blower Up Button
2 — Front Climate Control
Button
6 — Mode Button
3 — Temperature Up Button 7 — Blower Down Button
4 — Temperature Down Button 8 — Rear Off Button
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 315
• The rear Manual Temperature Control (MTC) is located
in the headliner, near the center of the vehicle.
Rear Blower Control
The rear blower control knob can be manually set to off, or
any fixed blower speed, by rotating the knob from low to
high. This allows the rear seat occupants to control the
volume of air circulated in the rear of the vehicle.
CAUTION!
Interior air enters the Rear Automatic Temperature
Control System through an intake grille, located in the
right side trim panel. The rear outlets are located in the
right side trim panel. Do not block or place objects
directly in front of the inlet grille or heater outlets. The
electrical system could overload causing damage to the
blower motor.
Rear Temperature Control
To change the temperature in the rear of the vehicle, rotate
the temperature knob counterclockwise to lower the tem-
perature, and clockwise to increase the temperature. The
rear temperature settings are displayed in the Uconnect
system.
When rear controls are locked by the Uconnect system, the
Rear Temperature Lock symbol on the temperature knob is
illuminated and any rear overhead adjustments are ig-
nored.
Rear MTC Control Knobs
1 — Blower Speed 3 — Rear MODE
2 — Rear Temperature 4 — Rear Temperature Lock
316 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Rear Mode Control
Headliner Mode
Air comes from the outlets in the headliner. Each of
these outlets can be individually adjusted to direct
the flow of air. Moving the air vanes of the outlets to one
side will shut off the airflow.
Bi-Level Mode
Air comes from both the headliner outlets and the
floor outlets.
NOTE: In many temperature positions, the Bi-Level mode
is designed to provide cooler air out of the headliner
outlets and warmer air from the floor outlets.
Floor Mode
Air comes from the floor outlets.
Automatic Three Zone Temperature Control (ATC)
With Touchscreen — If Equipped
Buttons On The Faceplate
Buttons on the faceplate are located on the left and right
side of the Radio 4.3 screen in the center of the instrument
panel. There are also buttons on the faceplate located below
the Uconnect touchscreen.
Radio 4.3 Automatic Climate Button On The Faceplate
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 317
Buttons On The Touchscreen
Buttons On The Touchscreen are accessible on the
Uconnect system screen.
Automatic Temperature Controls — Buttons On The
Faceplate
Radio 4.3 Automatic 3 — Zone Temperature Controls —
Buttons On The Touchscreen
318 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Button Descriptions (Applies To Both Buttons On The
Faceplate And Buttons On The Touchscreen)
1. MAX A/C Button
Press and release to change the current setting, the indica-
tor illuminates when MAX A/C is ON. Performing this
function again will cause the MAX A/C operation to
switch into manual mode and the MAX A/C indicator will
turn off.
2. A/C Button
Press and release to change the current setting, the indica-
tor illuminates when A/C is ON. Performing this function
again will cause the A/C operation to switch into manual
mode and the A/C indicator will turn off.
3. Recirculation Button
Press and release to change the current setting, the indica-
tor illuminates when ON.
4. AUTO Operation Button
Automatically controls the interior cabin temperature by
adjusting airflow distribution and amount. Performing this
function will cause the ATC to switch between manual
mode and automatic modes. Refer to “Automatic Opera-
tion” for more information.
5. Front Defrost Button
Press and release to change the current airflow setting to
Defrost mode. The indicator illuminates when this feature
is ON. Air comes from the windshield and side window
demist outlets. When the defrost button is selected, the
blower level will increase. Use Defrost mode with maxi-
mum temperature settings for best windshield and side
Radio 8.4 Automatic 3 — Zone Temperature Controls —
Buttons On The Touchscreen
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 319
window defrosting and defogging. Performing this func-
tion will cause the ATC to switch into manual mode. If the
front defrost mode is turned off the climate system will
return the previous setting.
6. Rear Defrost Button
Press and release this button to turn on the rear window
defroster and the heated outside mirrors (if equipped). An
indicator will illuminate when the rear window defroster is
on. The rear window defroster automatically turns off after
ten minutes.
CAUTION!
Failure to follow these cautions can cause damage to
the heating elements:
• Use care when washing the inside of the rear win-
dow. Do not use abrasive window cleaners on the
interior surface of the window. Use a soft cloth and a
mild washing solution, wiping parallel to the heat-
ing elements. Labels can be peeled off after soaking
with warm water.
•
Do not use scrapers, sharp instruments, or abrasive
window cleaners on the interior surface of the window.
• Keep all objects a safe distance from the window.
7. Rear Climate Button — If Equipped
Press and release this button to turn on the rear climate
controls. The indicator will illuminate when the rear cli-
mate controls are ON. Performing this function again will
turn OFF the rear climate controls.
8. Passenger Temperature Control Up Button (Radio 8.4)
Provides the passenger with independent temperature
control. Push the button for warmer temperature settings.
NOTE: Pressing this button while in Sync mode will
automatically exit Sync.
9. Passenger Temperature Control Down Button
(Radio 8.4)
Provides the passenger with independent temperature
control. Push the button for cooler temperature settings.
NOTE: Pressing this button while in Sync mode will
automatically exit Sync.
10. SYNC
Press the Sync button on the touchscreen to toggle the Sync
feature On/Off. The Sync indicator is illuminated when
this feature is enabled. Sync is used to synchronize the
passenger temperature setting with the driver temperature
320 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
setting. Changing the passenger temperature setting while
in Sync will automatically exit this feature. Sync will also
function with the rear climate controls. Changing the rear
climate control temperature setting will automatically exit
this feature.
11. Blower Control
Blower control is used to regulate the amount of air forced
through the climate system. There are seven blower speeds
available. Adjusting the blower will cause automatic mode
to switch to manual operation. The speeds can be selected
using either the blower control knob on the faceplate or the
buttons on the touchscreen as follows:
Blower Control Knob On The Faceplate
The blower speed increases as you turn the blower control
knob clockwise from the lowest blower setting. The blower
speed decreases as you turn the blower control knob
counterclockwise.
Buttons On The Touchscreen
Use the small blower icon to reduce the blower setting and
the large blower icon to increase the blower setting. Blower
can also be selected by pressing the blower bar area
between the icons.
12. Modes
The airflow distribution mode can be adjusted so air comes
from the instrument panel outlets, floor outlets and demist
outlets. The Mode settings are as follows:
• Panel Mode
Air comes from the outlets in the instrument
panel. Each of these outlets can be individually
adjusted to direct the flow of air. The air vanes
of the center outlets and outboard outlets can be moved
up and down or side to side to regulate airflow
direction. There is a shut off wheel located below the
air vanes to shut off or adjust the amount of airflow
from these outlets.
• Bi-Level Mode
Air comes from the instrument panel outlets
and floor outlets. A slight amount of air is
directed through the defrost and side window
demister outlets.
NOTE: BI-LEVEL mode is designed under comfort condi-
tions to provide cooler air out of the panel outlets and
warmer air from the floor outlets.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 321
• Floor Mode
Air comes from the floor outlets. A slight
amount of air is directed through the defrost
and side window demister outlets.
• Mix Mode
Air comes from the floor, defrost and side
window demist outlets. This mode works best
in cold or snowy conditions.
13. Climate Control OFF Button
Press and release this button to turn the Climate Control
ON/OFF.
14. Driver Temperature Control Down Button (Radio 8.4)
Provides the driver with independent temperature control.
Push the button for cooler temperature settings.
NOTE: In Sync mode, this button will also automatically
adjust the passenger temperature setting at the same time.
15. Driver Temperature Control Up Button (Radio 8.4)
Provides the driver with independent temperature control.
Push the button for warmer temperature settings.
NOTE: In Sync mode, this button will also automatically
adjust the passenger temperature setting at the same time.
16. Temperature Control (Radio 4.3)
Press the driver or passenger temperature button on the
touchscreen to regulate the temperature of the air inside
the passenger compartment. Moving the temperature bar
into the red area, indicates warmer temperatures. Moving
the temperature bar into the blue area indicates cooler
temperatures. Driver and passenger have independent
temperature control if Sync mode is not illuminated.
Climate Control Functions
A/C (Air Conditioning)
The Air Conditioning (A/C) button allows the operator to
manually activate or deactivate the air conditioning sys-
tem. When the air conditioning system is turned on, cool
dehumidified air will flow through the outlets into the
cabin. For improved fuel economy, press the A/C button to
turn off the air conditioning and manually adjust the
blower and airflow mode settings. Also, make sure to select
only Panel, Bi-Level or Floor modes.
NOTE: If fog or mist appears on the windshield or side
glass, select Defrost mode and adjust blower speed if
needed.
322 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
MAX A/C
MAX A/C sets the control for maximum cooling perfor-
mance.
Press and release to toggle between MAX A/C and the
prior settings. The button on the touchscreen illuminates
when MAX A/C is ON.
In MAX A/C, the blower level and mode position can be
adjusted to desired user settings. Pressing other settings
will cause the MAX A/C operation to switch to the selected
setting and MAX A/C to exit.
Recirculation Control
When outside air contains smoke, odors, or high
humidity, or if rapid cooling is desired, you may
wish to recirculate interior air by pressing the
Recirculation control button. The recirculation
indicator will illuminate when this button is selected. Push
the button a second time to turn off the Recirculation mode
and allow outside air into the vehicle.
NOTE: In cold weather, use of Recirculation mode may
lead to excessive window fogging. The Recirculation mode
is not allowed in Defrost mode to improve window clear-
ing operation. Recirculation will be disabled automatically
if this mode is selected. Attempting to use Recirculation
while in this mode will cause the LED in the control button
to blink and then turn off.
Automatic Temperature Control (ATC)
Automatic Operation
1. Push the AUTO button on the faceplate, or press the
button on the touchscreen (4), on the Automatic Tem-
perature Control (ATC) Panel.
2. Next, adjust the temperature you would like the system
to maintain by adjusting the driver and passenger
temperature buttons on the touchscreen or buttons on
the faceplate. Once the desired temperature is dis-
played, the system will achieve and automatically main-
tain that comfort level.
3. When the system is set up for your comfort level, it is
not necessary to change the settings. You will experience
the greatest efficiency by simply allowing the system to
function automatically.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 323
NOTE:
• It is not necessary to move the temperature settings. The
system automatically adjusts the temperature, mode,
and blower speed to provide comfort as quickly as
possible.
• The temperature can be displayed in U.S. or Metric units
by selecting the US/M customer-programmable feature.
Refer to the “Uconnect Settings” in this section of the
manual.
To provide you with maximum comfort in the Automatic
mode, during cold start-ups the blower fan will remain on
low until the engine warms up. The blower will increase in
speed and transition into Auto mode.
Manual Operation Override
The system allows for manual selection of blower speed,
air distribution mode, A/C status and recirculation control.
The blower fan speed can be set to any fixed speed by
adjusting the blower control. The fan will now operate at a
fixed speed until additional speeds are selected. This
allows the front occupants to control the volume of air
circulated in the vehicle and cancel the Auto mode.
The operator can also select the direction of the airflow by
selecting one of the available mode settings. A/C operation
and Recirculation control can also be manually selected in
Manual operation.
NOTE: Each of these features operates independently from
each other. If any feature is controlled manually, tempera-
ture control will continue to operate automatically.
Rear Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) — If
Equipped
The rear ATC system has floor air outlets at the rear right
side of the 3rd Row seats and overhead outlets at each
outboard rear seating position. The system provides heated
air through the floor outlets or cool, dehumidified air
through the headliner outlets.
The rear system temperature control buttons are located in
the Uconnect system, located on the instrument panel.
324 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Uconnect 4.3 Automatic Rear Climate Buttons On The
Touchscreen
1 — Blower Up Button 5 — Done Button
2 — Mode Button 6 — Rear Lock Button
3 — Temperature Button 7 — Rear Auto Button
4 — Blower Down Button 8 — Rear Off Button
Uconnect 8.4 Automatic Rear Climate Buttons On The
Touchscreen
1 — Rear Auto Button 6 — Blower Up Button
2 — Rear Lock Button 7 — Mode Button
3 — Front Climate Button 8 — Blower Down Button
4 — Temperature Up Button 9 — Rear Off Button
5 — Temperature Down Button
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 325
Controlling The Rear Climate Controls From The
Front ATC Panel
The Three-Zone ATC system allows for adjustment of the
rear climate controls from the front ATC panel.
To change the rear system settings:
• Press the ⬙REAR⬙ button to change control to rear control
mode, Rear display (below) will appear. Control func-
tions now operate rear system.
• To return to Front screen, press the ⬙REAR⬙ button again,
or it will revert to the Front screen after six seconds.
Rear Lock
Pressing the Rear Temperature Lock button on the
Uconnect touchscreen, illuminates a lock symbol in the rear
display. The rear temperature and air source are controlled
from the front Uconnect system.
Rear second row occupants can only adjust the rear ATC
control when the Rear Temperature Lock button is turned
off.
The rear ATC is located in the headliner, near the center of
the vehicle.
• Press the Rear Temperature Lock button on the Uconnect
touchscreen. This turns off the Rear Temperature Lock
icon in the rear temperature knob.
• Rotate the Rear Blower, Rear Temperature and the Rear
Mode Control knobs to suit your comfort needs.
• ATC is selected by adjusting the rear blower knob
counterclockwise to AUTO.
Once the desired temperature is displayed, the ATC System
will automatically achieve and maintain that comfort level.
When the system is set up for your comfort level, it is not
necessary to change the settings. You will experience the
greatest efficiency by simply allowing the system to func-
tion automatically.
NOTE: It is not necessary to move the temperature settings
for cold or hot vehicles. The system automatically adjusts
the temperature, mode and fan speed to provide comfort as
quickly as possible.
326 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Rear Blower Control
The rear blower control knob can be manually set to off, or
any fixed blower speed, by rotating the knob from low to
high. This allows the rear seat occupants to control the
volume of air circulated in the rear of the vehicle.
CAUTION!
Interior air enters the Rear Automatic Temperature
Control System through an intake grille, located in the
right side trim panel behind the third row seats. The
rear outlets are located in the right side trim panel of
the 3rd Row seat. Do not block or place objects directly
in front of the inlet grille or heater outlets. The
electrical system could overload causing damage to the
blower motor.
Rear Temperature Control
To change the temperature in the rear of the vehicle, rotate
the temperature knob counterclockwise to lower the tem-
perature, and clockwise to increase the temperature. The
rear temperature settings are displayed in the Uconnect
system.
When rear controls are locked by the Uconnect system, the
Rear Temperature Lock symbol on the temperature knob is
illuminated and any rear overhead adjustments are ig-
nored.
Rear ATC Control Features
1 — Blower Speed 3 — Rear Mode 5 — AUTO Mode
2 — Rear
Temperature
4 — Rear
Temperature Lock
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 327
Rear Mode Control
Auto Mode
• The rear system automatically maintains the correct
mode and comfort level desired by the rear seat occu-
pants.
Headliner Mode
Air comes from the outlets in the headliner. Each of
these outlets can be individually adjusted to direct
the flow of air. Moving the air vanes of the outlets to one
side will shut off the airflow.
Bi-Level Mode
Air comes from both the headliner outlets and the
floor outlets.
NOTE: In many temperature positions, the BI-LEVEL
mode is designed to provide cooler air out of the headliner
outlets and warmer air from the floor outlets.
Floor Mode
Air comes from the floor outlets.
Operating Tips
NOTE: Refer to the chart at the end of this section for
suggested control settings for various weather conditions.
Summer Operation
The engine cooling system must be protected with a
high-quality antifreeze coolant to provide proper corrosion
protection and to protect against engine overheating. A
solution of 50% OAT (Organic Additive Technology) cool-
ant that meets the requirements of FCA Material Standard
MS.90032 and 50% water is recommended. Refer to “Main-
tenance Procedures” in “Maintaining Your Vehicle” for
proper coolant selection.
Winter Operation
Use of the air Recirculation mode during winter months is
not recommended because it may cause window fogging.
Vacation Storage
Any time you store your vehicle or keep it out of service
(i.e., vacation) for two weeks or more, run the air condi-
tioning system at idle for about five minutes in the fresh air
and high blower setting. This will ensure adequate system
lubrication to minimize the possibility of compressor dam-
age when the system is started again.
328 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Window Fogging
Interior fogging on the windshield can be quickly removed
by turning the mode selector to Defrost. The Defrost/Floor
mode can be used to maintain a clear windshield and
provide sufficient heating. If side window fogging be-
comes a problem, increase the blower speed. Vehicle win-
dows tend to fog on the inside in mild but rainy or humid
weather.
NOTE:
• Recirculation mode without A/C should not be used for
long periods, as fogging may occur.
• Automatic Temperature Controls (ATC) will automati-
cally adjust the climate control settings to reduce or
eliminate window fogging on the front windshield.
When this occurs, recirculation will be unavailable.
Outside Air Intake
Make sure the air intake, located directly in front of the
windshield, is free of obstructions such as leaves. Leaves
collected in the air intake may reduce airflow, and if they
enter the plenum, they could plug the water drains. In
winter months, make sure the air intake is clear of ice,
slush, and snow.
A/C Air Filter
The climate control system filters outside air containing
dust, pollen and some odors. Strong odors cannot be totally
filtered out. Refer to “Maintenance Procedures” in “Main-
taining Your Vehicle” for filter replacement instructions.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 329
Manual Control Setting Suggestions For Various Weather Conditions
330 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
STARTING AND OPERATING
CONTENTS
䡵 STARTING PROCEDURES .................335
▫ Automatic Transmission ..................335
▫ Keyless Enter-N-Go — Ignition .............336
▫ Normal Starting ........................336
▫ Extreme Cold Weather
(Below –22°F Or −30°C) ..................337
▫ If Engine Fails To Start ..................337
▫ After Starting..........................338
䡵 ENGINE BLOCK HEATER — IF EQUIPPED . . . .338
䡵 AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION ..............339
▫ Ignition Park Interlock ...................340
▫ Brake/Transmission Shift Interlock System . . . .340
▫ Four-Speed Or Six-Speed Automatic
Transmission ..........................340
▫ Gear Ranges ..........................341
䡵 AUTOSTICK ...........................346
▫ Operation ............................346
䡵 ALL WHEEL DRIVE (AWD) — IF EQUIPPED . . .347
䡵 DRIVING ON SLIPPERY SURFACES ..........348
▫ Acceleration...........................348
▫ Traction .............................348
䡵 DRIVING THROUGH WATER ..............349
▫ Flowing/Rising Water ...................349
▫ Shallow Standing Water ..................349
䡵 POWER STEERING ......................350
▫ Power Steering Fluid Check ...............351
䡵 PARKING BRAKE .......................351
䡵 BRAKE SYSTEM ........................353
5
䡵 ELECTRONIC BRAKE CONTROL SYSTEM .....354
▫ Electronic Brake Force Distribution (EBD)......354
▫ Brake System Warning Light ...............354
▫ Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) .............354
▫ Brake Assist System (BAS) ................356
▫ Hill Start Assist (HSA) ...................356
▫ Traction Control System (TCS) .............359
▫ Electronic Stability Control (ESC) ...........359
▫ Electronic Roll Mitigation (ERM) ............362
▫ Trailer Sway Control (TSC) ................363
䡵 TIRE SAFETY INFORMATION ..............363
▫ Tire Markings .........................363
▫ Tire Identification Number (TIN) ............366
▫ Tire Terminology And Definitions ...........368
▫ Tire Loading And Tire Pressure ............369
䡵 TIRES — GENERAL INFORMATION .........374
▫ Tire Pressure ..........................374
▫ Tire Inflation Pressures ..................375
▫ Tire Pressures For High Speed Operation .....375
▫ Radial Ply Tires ........................376
▫ Tire Types ............................376
▫ Run Flat Tires — If Equipped ..............378
▫ Spare Tires — If Equipped ................378
▫ Tire Spinning .........................380
▫ Tread Wear Indicators ...................381
▫ Life Of Tire ...........................382
▫ Replacement
Tires ......................382
䡵 TIRE CHAINS (TRACTION DEVICES) .........383
䡵 TIRE ROTATION RECOMMENDATIONS ......384
䡵 DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION
UNIFORM TIRE QUALITY GRADES ..........385
▫ Treadwear ............................385
▫ Traction Grades ........................386
▫ Temperature Grades .....................386
332 STARTING AND OPERATING
䡵 TIRE PRESSURE MONITOR SYSTEM (TPMS) . . .386
▫ Premium System .......................389
▫ General Information .....................392
䡵 FUEL REQUIREMENTS ...................393
▫ Reformulated Gasoline ..................393
▫ Gasoline/Oxygenate Blends ...............393
▫ E-85 Usage In Non-Flex Fuel Vehicles.........394
▫ CNG And LP Fuel System Modifications ......394
▫ MMT In Gasoline.......................394
▫ Materials Added To Fuel .................395
▫ Fuel System Cautions ....................395
▫ Carbon Monoxide Warnings ...............396
䡵 FLEXIBLE FUEL (3.6L ENGINE ONLY) —
IF EQUIPPED ..........................396
▫ E-85 General Information .................396
▫ Ethanol Fuel (E-85)......................396
▫ Fuel Requirements .....................397
▫ Selection Of Engine Oil For Flexible Fuel
Vehicles (E-85) And Gasoline Vehicles ........397
▫ Starting .............................398
▫ Cruising Range ........................398
▫ Replacement Parts ......................398
▫ Maintenance ..........................398
䡵 ADDING FUEL .........................399
▫ Fuel Filler Cap (Gas Cap) .................399
▫ Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message .............400
䡵 VEHICLE LOADING .....................400
▫ Vehicle Certification Label ................400
▫ Gr
oss Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR) ........401
▫ Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) ..........401
▫ Overloading ..........................401
▫ Loading .............................401
䡵 TRAILER TOWING ......................402
▫ Common Towing Definitions...............402
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 333
▫ Trailer Hitch Classification ................404
▫ Trailer Towing Weights (Maximum Trailer
Weight Ratings) .......................405
▫ Trailer And Tongue Weight ...............406
▫ Towing Requirements ...................407
▫ Towing Tips ..........................411
䡵 RECREATIONAL TOWING
(BEHIND MOTORHOME, ETC.) .............412
▫ Towing This Vehicle Behind Another Vehicle. . . .412
334 STARTING AND OPERATING
STARTING PROCEDURES
Before starting your vehicle, adjust your seat, adjust the inside
and outside mirrors, fasten your seat belt, and if present,
instruct all other occupants to buckle their seat belts.
WARNING!
• Before exiting a vehicle, always shift the automatic
transmission into PARK and apply the parking
brake. Always make sure the keyless ignition node is
in the “OFF” mode, remove the key fob from the
vehicle and lock the vehicle.
•
Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with access to
an unlocked vehicle. Leaving children in a vehicle
unattended is dangerous for a number of reasons. A
child or others could be seriously or fatally injured.
Children should be warned not to touch the parking
brake, brake pedal or the gear selector.
• Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle, or in
a location accessible to children, and do not leave the
ignition of a vehicle equipped with Keyless Enter-
N-Go in the ACC or ON/RUN mode. A child could
operate power windows, other controls, or move the
vehicle.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
• Do not leave children or animals inside parked
vehicles in hot weather. Interior heat build-up may
cause serious injury or death.
Automatic Transmission
The gear selector must be in the NEUTRAL or PARK
position before you can start the engine. Apply the brakes
before shifting into any driving gear.
CAUTION!
Damage to the transmission may occur if the following
precautions are not observed:
• Do not shift from REVERSE, PARK, or NEUTRAL
into any forward gear when the engine is above idle
speed.
• Shift into PARK only after the vehicle has come to a
complete stop.
• Shift into or out of REVERSE only after the vehicle
has come to a complete stop and the engine is at idle
speed.
• Before shifting into any gear, make sure your foot is
firmly on the brake pedal.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 335
Keyless Enter-N-Go — Ignition
This feature allows the driver to operate
the ignition switch with the push of a
button, as long as the Remote Start/
Keyless Enter-N-Go key fob is in the
passenger compartment.
Normal Starting
To Turn On The Engine Using The ENGINE
START/STOP Button
1. The transmission must be in PARK.
2. Press and hold the brake pedal while pushing the
ENGINE START/STOP button once.
3. The system takes over and attempts to start the vehicle.
If the vehicle fails to start, the starter will disengage
automatically after 10 seconds.
4. If you wish to stop the cranking of the engine prior to
the engine starting, push the button again.
NOTE: Normal starting of either a cold or a warm engine
is obtained without pumping or pressing the accelerator
pedal.
To Turn Off The Engine Using ENGINE
START/STOP Button
1. Place the gear selector in PARK, then push and release
the ENGINE START/STOP button.
2. The ignition will return to the OFF position.
3. If the gear selector is not in PARK, the ENGINE START/
STOP button must be held for two seconds or three short
pushes in a row with the vehicle speed above 5 mph
(8 km/h) before the engine will shut off. The ignition
switch position will remain in the ACC position until the
gear selector is in PARK and the button is pushed twice
to the OFF position. If the gear selector is not in PARK
and the ENGINE START/STOP button is pushed once,
the instrument cluster display will display a “Vehicle
Not In Park” message and the engine will remain
running. Never leave a vehicle out of the PARK position,
or it could roll.
4. If the gear selector is in NEUTRAL, push and release the
ENGINE START/STOP button with the vehicle speed
below 5 mph (8 km/h) before the engine will shut off.
The ignition will remain in the ACC position.
336 STARTING AND OPERATING
NOTE: If the ignition is left in the ACC or ON/RUN
(engine not running) position and the transmission is in
PARK, the system will automatically time out after 30
minutes of inactivity and the ignition will switch to the
OFF position.
ENGINE START/STOP Button Functions — With
Driver’s Foot OFF The Brake Pedal (In PARK Or
NEUTRAL Position)
The ENGINE START/STOP button operates similar to an
ignition switch. It has four positions, OFF, ACC, RUN and
START. To change the ignition positions without starting
the vehicle and use the accessories, follow these steps:
• Starting with the ignition in the OFF position.
• Push the ENGINE START/STOP button once to place
the ignition to the ACC position (instrument cluster
display will display “ACC”).
• Push the ENGINE START/STOP button a second time to
place the ignition to the RUN position (instrument
cluster display will display “ON/RUN”).
• Push the ENGINE START/STOP button a third time to
return the ignition to the OFF position (instrument
cluster display will display “OFF”).
Extreme Cold Weather (Below –22°F Or −30°C)
To ensure reliable starting at these temperatures, use of an
externally powered electric engine block heater (available
from your authorized dealer) is recommended.
If Engine Fails To Start
WARNING!
• Never pour fuel or other flammable liquid into the
throttle body air inlet opening in an attempt to start
the vehicle. This could result in flash fire causing
serious personal injury.
• Do not attempt to push or tow your vehicle to get it
started. Vehicles equipped with an automatic trans-
mission cannot be started this way. Unburned fuel
could enter the catalytic converter and once the
engine has started, ignite and damage the converter
and vehicle.
• If the vehicle has a discharged battery, booster cables
may be used to obtain a start from a booster battery
or the battery in another vehicle. This type of start
can be dangerous if done improperly. Refer to
“Jump-Starting Procedures” in “What To Do In
Emergencies” for further information.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 337
Clearing A Flooded Engine (Using ENGINE
START/STOP Button)
If the engine fails to start after you have followed the
“Normal Starting” or “Extreme Cold Weather⬙ procedures,
it may be flooded. To clear any excess fuel:
1. Press and hold the brake pedal.
2. Press the accelerator pedal all the way to the floor and
hold it.
3. Push and release the ENGINE START/STOP button
once.
The starter motor will engage automatically, run for 10
seconds, and then disengage. Once this occurs, release the
accelerator pedal and the brake pedal, wait 10 to 15
seconds, then repeat the “Normal Starting” procedure.
After Starting
The idle speed is controlled automatically, and it will
decrease as the engine warms up.
ENGINE BLOCK HEATER — IF EQUIPPED
The engine block heater warms the engine, and permits
quicker starts in cold weather. Connect the cord to a
standard 110-115 Volt AC electrical outlet with a grounded,
three-wire extension cord.
The engine block heater must be plugged in at least one
hour to have an adequate effect on the engine.
The engine block heater cord is bundled under the hood
between the headlight assembly and the Totally Integrated
Power Module (Fuse Box) on the driver’s side of the
vehicle.
WARNING!
Remember to disconnect the engine block heater cord
before driving. Damage to the 110-115 Volt electrical
cord could cause electrocution.
338 STARTING AND OPERATING
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION
WARNING!
• It is dangerous to shift out of PARK or NEUTRAL if
the engine speed is higher than idle speed. If your
foot is not firmly pressing the brake pedal, the
vehicle could accelerate quickly forward or in re-
verse. You could lose control of the vehicle and hit
someone or something. Only shift into gear when the
engine is idling normally and your foot is firmly
pressing the brake pedal.
• Unintended movement of a vehicle could injure
those in or near the vehicle. As with all vehicles, you
should never exit a vehicle while the engine is
running. Before exiting a vehicle, always apply the
parking brake, shift the transmission into PARK, and
turn the ignition OFF. When the ignition is in the
OFF mode, the transmission is locked in PARK,
securing the vehicle against unwanted movement.
• When leaving the vehicle, always make sure the
ignition is in the OFF mode, remove the key fob from
the vehicle, and lock the vehicle.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
• Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing children to
be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a number
of reasons. A child or others could be seriously or
fatally injured. Children should be warned not to
touch the parking brake, brake pedal or the trans-
mission gear selector.
• Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle (or in
a location accessible to children), and do not leave
the ignition in the ACC or ON/RUN mode. A child
could operate power windows, other controls, or
move the vehicle.
CAUTION!
Damage to the transmission may occur if the following
precautions are not observed:
• Shift into or out of PARK or REVERSE only after the
vehicle has come to a complete stop.
• Do not shift between PARK, REVERSE, NEUTRAL,
or DRIVE when the engine is above idle speed.
• Before shifting into any gear, make sure your foot is
firmly pressing the brake pedal.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 339
NOTE: You must press and hold the brake pedal while
shifting out of PARK.
Ignition Park Interlock
This vehicle is equipped with an Ignition Park Interlock
which requires the transmission to be in PARK before the
engine can be turned OFF. This helps the driver avoid
inadvertently leaving the vehicle without placing the trans-
mission in PARK.
This system also locks the transmission in PARK whenever
the ignition is in the OFF mode.
Brake/Transmission Shift Interlock System
This vehicle is equipped with a Brake Transmission Shift
Interlock System (BTSI) that holds the transmission gear
selector in PARK unless the brakes are applied. To shift the
transmission out of PARK, the ignition must be turned to
the ON/RUN mode (engine running or not) and the brake
pedal must be pressed.
Four-Speed Or Six-Speed Automatic Transmission
The transmission gear position display (located in the
instrument cluster) indicates the transmission gear range.
You must press the brake pedal to move the gear selector
out of PARK (refer to “Brake/Transmission Shift Interlock
System” in this section). To drive, move the gear selector
from PARK or NEUTRAL to the DRIVE position.
The electronically-controlled transmission provides a pre-
cise shift schedule. The transmission electronics are self-
calibrating; therefore, the first few shifts on a new vehicle
may be somewhat abrupt. This is a normal condition, and
precision shifts will develop within a few hundred miles
(kilometers).
Only shift from DRIVE to PARK or REVERSE when the
accelerator pedal is released and the vehicle is stopped. Be
sure to keep your foot on the brake pedal when shifting
between these gears.
The transmission gear selector has PARK, REVERSE, NEU-
TRAL, DRIVE, and AutoStick (-/+) shift positions. Manual
shifts can be made using the AutoStick shift control (refer
to “AutoStick” in this section for further information).
Moving the gear selector into the AutoStick (-/+) position
(below the Drive position) activates Autostick mode, pro-
viding manual shift control and displaying the current gear
in the instrument cluster. In AutoStick mode, tapping the
gear selector left (-) or right (+) will manually select the
transmission gear.
340 STARTING AND OPERATING
Gear Ranges
DO NOT race the engine when shifting from PARK or
NEUTRAL into another gear range.
NOTE: After selecting any gear range, wait a moment to
allow the selected gear to engage before accelerating. This
is especially important when the engine is cold.
PARK (P)
This range supplements the parking brake by locking the
transmission. The engine can be started in this range.
Never attempt to use PARK while the vehicle is in motion.
Apply the parking brake when leaving the vehicle in this
range.
When parking on a level surface, you may shift the
transmission into PARK first, and then apply the parking
brake.
When parking on a hill, apply the parking brake before
shifting the transmission to PARK, otherwise the load on
the transmission locking mechanism may make it difficult
to move the gear selector out of PARK. As an added
precaution, turn the front wheels toward the curb on a
downhill grade and away from the curb on an uphill grade.
When exiting the vehicle, always:
• Apply the parking brake.
• Shift the transmission into PARK.
• Turn the ignition OFF.
• Remove the key fob from the vehicle.
Gear Selector
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 341
WARNING!
• Never use the PARK position as a substitute for the
parking brake. Always apply the parking brake fully
when exiting the vehicle to guard against vehicle
movement and possible injury or damage.
• Your vehicle could move and injure you and others if
it is not in PARK. Check by trying to move the
transmission gear selector out of PARK with the
brake pedal released. Make sure the transmission is
in PARK before leaving the vehicle.
• It is dangerous to shift out of PARK or NEUTRAL if
the engine speed is higher than idle speed. If your
foot is not firmly pressing the brake pedal, the
vehicle could accelerate quickly forward or in re-
verse. You could lose control of the vehicle and hit
someone or something. Only shift into gear when the
engine is idling normally and your foot is firmly
pressing the brake pedal.
• Unintended movement of a vehicle could injure
those in or near the vehicle. As with all vehicles, you
should never exit a vehicle while the engine is
running. Before exiting a vehicle, always apply the
parking brake, shift the transmission into PARK, and
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
turn the ignition OFF. When the ignition is in the
OFF mode, the transmission is locked in PARK,
securing the vehicle against unwanted movement.
• When leaving the vehicle, always make sure the
ignition is in the OFF mode, remove the key fob from
the vehicle, and lock the vehicle.
• Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing children to
be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a number
of reasons. A child or others could be seriously or
fatally injured. Children should be warned not to
touch the parking brake, brake pedal or the trans-
mission gear selector.
• Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle (or in
a location accessible to children), and do not leave
the ignition in the ACC or ON/RUN mode. A child
could operate power windows, other controls, or
move the vehicle.
342 STARTING AND OPERATING
CAUTION!
• Before moving the transmission gear selector out of
PARK, you must turn the ignition to the ON/RUN
mode, and also press the brake pedal. Otherwise,
damage to the gear selector could result.
• DO NOT race the engine when shifting from PARK
or NEUTRAL into another gear range, as this can
damage the drivetrain.
The following indicators should be used to ensure that you
have engaged the transmission into the PARK position:
• When shifting into PARK, firmly move the gear selector
all the way forward and to the left until it stops and is
fully seated.
• Look at the transmission gear position display and
verify that it indicates the PARK position (P).
• With brake pedal released, verify that the gear selector
will not move out of PARK.
REVERSE (R)
This range is for moving the vehicle backward. Shift into
REVERSE only after the vehicle has come to a complete
stop.
NEUTRAL (N)
Use this range when the vehicle is standing for prolonged
periods with the engine running. The engine may be
started in this range. Apply the parking brake and shift the
transmission into PARK if you must leave the vehicle.
WARNING!
Do not coast in NEUTRAL and never turn off the
ignition to coast down a hill. These are unsafe practices
that limit your response to changing traffic or road
conditions. You might lose control of the vehicle and
have a collision.
CAUTION!
Towing the vehicle, coasting, or driving for any other
reason with the transmission in NEUTRAL can cause
severe transmission damage. Refer to “Recreational
Towing” in “Starting And Operating” and “Towing A
Disabled Vehicle” in “What To Do In Emergencies” for
further information.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 343
DRIVE (D)
This range should be used for most city and highway
driving. It provides the smoothest upshifts and downshifts,
and the best fuel economy. The transmission automatically
upshifts through all forward gears. The DRIVE position
provides optimum driving characteristics under all normal
operating conditions.
When frequent transmission shifting occurs (such as when
operating the vehicle under heavy loading conditions, in
hilly terrain, traveling into strong head winds, or while
towing a heavy trailer), use the AutoStick shift control
(refer to “AutoStick” in this section for further information)
to select a lower gear. Under these conditions, using a
lower gear will improve performance and extend transmis-
sion life by reducing excessive shifting and heat buildup.
If the transmission temperature exceeds normal operating
limits, the powertrain controller will modify the transmis-
sion shift schedule and expand the range of torque con-
verter clutch engagement. This is done to prevent trans-
mission damage due to overheating.
During cold temperatures, transmission operation may be
modified depending on engine and transmission tempera-
ture as well as vehicle speed. This feature improves warm
up time of the engine and transmission to achieve maxi-
mum efficiency. Engagement of the torque converter clutch
is inhibited until the transmission fluid is warm (refer to
the “Note” under “Torque Converter Clutch” in this sec-
tion). During extremely cold temperatures (-16°F [-27°C] or
below), operation may briefly be limited to only second
gear (for four-speed transmission) or third gear (for six-
speed transmission). Normal operation will resume once
the transmission temperature has risen to a suitable level.
Transmission Limp Home Mode
Transmission function is monitored electronically for ab-
normal conditions. If a condition is detected that could
result in transmission damage, Transmission Limp Home
Mode is activated. In this mode, the transmission remains
in second gear (for four-speed transmission) or third gear
(for six-speed transmission) regardless of which forward
gear is selected. PARK, REVERSE, and NEUTRAL will
continue to operate. The Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL)
may be illuminated. Limp Home Mode allows the vehicle
to be driven to an authorized dealer for service without
damaging the transmission.
344 STARTING AND OPERATING
In the event of a momentary problem, the transmission can
be reset to regain all forward gears by performing the
following steps:
1. Stop the vehicle.
2. Shift the transmission into PARK.
3. Turn the ignition to the OFF position.
4. Wait approximately 10 seconds.
5. Restart the engine.
6. Shift into the desired gear range. If the problem is no
longer detected, the transmission will return to normal
operation.
NOTE: Even if the transmission can be reset, we recom-
mend that you visit your authorized dealer at your earliest
possible convenience. Your authorized dealer has diagnos-
tic equipment to determine if the problem could recur.
If the transmission cannot be reset, authorized dealer
service is required.
Overdrive Operation
The automatic transmission includes an electronically con-
trolled Overdrive (top gear). The transmission will auto-
matically shift into Overdrive if the following conditions
are present:
• The gear selector is in the DRIVE position.
• The transmission fluid has reached an adequate tem-
perature.
• The engine coolant has reached an adequate tempera-
ture.
• The vehicle speed is sufficiently high.
• The driver is not heavily pressing the accelerator.
Torque Converter Clutch
A feature designed to improve fuel economy has been
included in the automatic transmission on your vehicle. A
clutch within the torque converter engages automatically
at calibrated speeds. This may result in a slightly different
feeling or response during normal operation in the upper
gears. When the vehicle speed drops or during some
accelerations, the clutch automatically disengages.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 345
NOTE: The torque converter clutch will not engage until
the transmission fluid and engine coolant are warm (usu-
ally after 1 to 3 miles [2 to 5 km] of driving). Because the
engine speed is higher when the torque converter clutch is
not engaged, it may seem as if the transmission is not
shifting into Overdrive when cold. This is normal. Using
the AutoStick shift control, when the transmission is suffi-
ciently warm, will demonstrate that the transmission is
able to shift into and out of Overdrive.
AUTOSTICK
AutoStick is a driver-interactive transmission feature pro-
viding manual shift control, giving you more control of the
vehicle. AutoStick allows you to maximize engine braking,
eliminate undesirable upshifts and downshifts, and im-
prove overall vehicle performance. This system can also
provide you with more control during passing, city driv-
ing, cold slippery conditions, mountain driving, trailer
towing, and many other situations.
Operation
When the gear selector is in the AutoStick position (below
the DRIVE position), it can be moved from side to side.
This allows the driver to manually select the transmission
gear being used. Moving the gear selector to the left (-)
triggers a downshift and to the right (+) an upshift. The
current gear will be displayed in the instrument cluster.
In AutoStick mode, the transmission will shift up or down
when the driver moves the gear selector to the right (+) or
left (-), unless an engine lugging or overspeed condition
would result. It will remain in the selected gear until
another upshift or downshift is chosen, except as described
below.
• The transmission will automatically upshift when nec-
essary to prevent engine over-speed.
• The transmission will automatically downshift as the
vehicle slows (to prevent engine lugging) and will
display the current gear.
• The transmission will automatically downshift to first
gear when coming to a stop. After a stop, the driver
should manually upshift (+) the transmission as the
vehicle is accelerated.
346 STARTING AND OPERATING
• You can start out, from a stop, in any gear except top
gear. Tapping (+) (at a stop) will allow starting in second
gear. Starting out in second gear can be helpful in snowy
or icy conditions.
• If a requested downshift would cause the engine to
over-speed, that shift will not occur.
• Avoid using speed control when AutoStick is engaged.
• Transmission shifting will be more noticeable when
AutoStick is enabled.
• The system may revert to automatic shift mode if a fault
or overheat condition is detected.
To disengage AutoStick mode, return the gear selector to
the DRIVE position. You can shift in or out of the AutoStick
position at any time without taking your foot off the
accelerator pedal.
WARNING!
Do not downshift for additional engine braking on a
slippery surface. The drive wheels could lose their grip
and the vehicle could skid, causing a collision or
personal injury.
ALL WHEEL DRIVE (AWD) — IF EQUIPPED
This feature provides on-demand All-Wheel Drive (AWD).
The system is automatic with no driver inputs or addi-
tional driving skills required. Under normal driving con-
ditions, the front wheels provide most of the traction. If the
front wheels begin to lose traction, power is shifted auto-
matically to the rear wheels. The greater the front wheel
traction loss, the greater the power transfer to the rear
wheels.
Additionally, on dry pavement under heavy throttle input
(where one may have no wheel spin), torque will be sent to
the rear in a pre-emptive effort to improve vehicle launch
and performance characteristics.
CAUTION!
All wheels must have the same size and type tires.
Unequal tire sizes must not be used. Unequal tire size
may cause failure of the power transfer unit.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 347
DRIVING ON SLIPPERY SURFACES
Acceleration
Rapid acceleration on snow covered, wet, or other slippery
surfaces may cause the driving wheels to pull erratically to
the right or left. This phenomenon occurs when there is a
difference in the surface traction under the front (driving)
wheels.
WARNING!
Rapid acceleration on slippery surfaces is dangerous.
Unequal traction can cause sudden pulling of the front
wheels. You could lose control of the vehicle and
possibly have a collision. Accelerate slowly and care-
fully whenever there is likely to be poor traction (ice,
snow, wet, mud, loose sand, etc.).
Traction
When driving on wet or slushy roads, it is possible for a
wedge of water to build up between the tire and road
surface. This is known as hydroplaning, and may cause
partial or complete loss of vehicle control and stopping
ability. To reduce this possibility, the following precautions
should be observed:
• Slow down during rainstorms or when the roads are
slushy.
• Slow down if the road has standing water or puddles.
• Replace the tires when tread wear indicators first be-
come visible.
• Keep tires properly inflated.
• Maintain sufficient distance between your vehicle and
the vehicle in front of you to avoid a collision in a
sudden stop.
348 STARTING AND OPERATING
DRIVING THROUGH WATER
Driving through water more than a few inches/centimeters
deep will require extra caution to ensure safety and pre-
vent damage to your vehicle.
Flowing/Rising Water
WARNING!
Do not drive on or across a road or path where water is
flowing and/or rising (as in storm run-off). Flowing
water can wear away the road or path’s surface and
cause your vehicle to sink into deeper water. Further-
more, flowing and/or rising water can carry your ve-
hicle away swiftly. Failure to follow this warning may
result in injuries that are serious or fatal to you, your
passengers, and others around you.
Shallow Standing Water
Although your vehicle is capable of driving through shal-
low standing water, consider the following Cautions and
Warnings before doing so.
WARNING!
• Driving through standing water limits your vehicle’s
traction capabilities. Do not exceed 5 mph (8 km/h)
when driving through standing water.
• Driving through standing water limits your vehicle’s
braking capabilities, which increases stopping dis-
tances. Therefore, after driving through standing
water, drive slowly and lightly press on the brake
pedal several times to dry the brakes.
• Failure to follow these warnings may result in inju-
ries that are serious or fatal to you, your passengers,
and others around you.
CAUTION!
• Always check the depth of the standing water before
driving through it. Never drive through standing
water that is deeper than the bottom of the tire rims
mounted on the vehicle.
• Determine the condition of the road or the path that
is under water and if there are any obstacles in the
way before driving through the standing water.
(Continued)
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 349
CAUTION! (Continued)
• Do not exceed 5 mph (8 km/h) when driving through
standing water. This will minimize wave effects.
• Driving through standing water may cause damage
to your vehicle’s drivetrain components. Always in-
spect your vehicle’s fluids (i.e., engine oil, transmis-
sion, axle, etc.) for signs of contamination (i.e., fluid
that is milky or foamy in appearance) after driving
through standing water. Do not continue to operate
the vehicle if any fluid appears contaminated, as this
may result in further damage. Such damage is not
covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
• Getting water inside your vehicle’s engine can cause
it to lock up and stall out, and cause serious internal
damage to the engine. Such damage is not covered by
the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
POWER STEERING
The standard power steering system will give you good
vehicle response and increased ease of maneuverability in
tight spaces. The system will provide mechanical steering
capability if power assist is lost.
If for some reason the power assist is interrupted, it will
still be possible to steer your vehicle. Under these condi-
tions, you will observe a substantial increase in steering
effort, especially at very low vehicle speeds and during
parking maneuvers.
NOTE:
• Increased noise levels at the end of the steering wheel
travel are considered normal and do not indicate that
there is a problem with the power steering system.
• Upon initial start-up in cold weather, the power steering
pump may make noise for a short amount of time. This
is due to the cold, thick fluid in the steering system. This
noise should be considered normal, and it does not in
any way damage the steering system.
CAUTION!
Prolonged operation of the steering system at the end
of the steering wheel travel will increase the steering
fluid temperature and it should be avoided when
possible. Damage to the power steering pump may
occur.
350 STARTING AND OPERATING
Power Steering Fluid Check
Checking the power steering fluid level at a defined service
interval is not required. The fluid should only be checked
if a leak is suspected, abnormal noises are apparent,
and/or the system is not functioning as anticipated. Coor-
dinate inspection efforts through an authorized dealer.
WARNING!
Fluid level should be checked on a level surface and
with the engine off to prevent injury from moving
parts and to ensure accurate fluid level reading. Do not
overfill. Use only manufacturer’s recommended power
steering fluid.
CAUTION!
Do not use chemical flushes in your power steering
system as the chemicals can damage your power steer-
ing components. Such damage is not covered by the
New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
If necessary, add fluid to restore to the proper indicated
level. With a clean cloth, wipe any spilled fluid from all
surfaces. Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, And Genuine Parts”
in “Maintaining Your Vehicle” for the correct fluid type.
PARKING BRAKE
Before leaving the vehicle, make sure that the parking
brake is fully applied. Also, be certain to leave the trans-
mission in PARK.
The foot operated parking brake is located below the lower
left corner of the instrument panel. To apply the park
brake, firmly push the park brake pedal fully. To release the
parking brake, press the park brake pedal a second time
and let your foot up as you feel the brake disengage.
Parking Brake
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 351
When the parking brake is applied with the ignition switch
ON, the “Brake Warning Light” in the instrument cluster
will illuminate.
NOTE:
• When the parking brake is applied and the transmission
is placed in gear, the “Brake Warning Light” will flash. If
vehicle speed is detected, a chime will sound to alert the
driver. Fully release the parking brake before attempting
to move the vehicle.
• This light only shows that the parking brake is applied.
It does not show the degree of brake application.
When parking on a hill, it is important to turn the front
wheels toward the curb on a downhill grade and away
from the curb on an uphill grade. For vehicles equipped
with an automatic transmission, apply the parking brake
before placing the gear selector in PARK, otherwise the
load on the transmission locking mechanism may make it
difficult to move the gear selector out of PARK. The
parking brake should always be applied whenever the
driver is not in the vehicle.
WARNING!
• Never use the PARK position as a substitute for the
parking brake. Always apply the parking brake fully
when parked to guard against vehicle movement and
possible injury or damage.
• Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle. Leaving unattended
children in a vehicle is dangerous for a number of
reasons. A child or others could be seriously or
fatally injured. Children should be warned not to
touch the parking brake, brake pedal or the gear
selector. Do not leave the key fob in or near the
vehicle, or in a location accessible to children, and do
not leave the ignition of a vehicle equipped with
Keyless Enter-N-Go in the ACC or ON/RUN mode. A
child could operate power windows, other controls,
or move the vehicle.
• Be sure the parking brake is fully disengaged before
driving; failure to do so can lead to brake failure and
a collision.
• Always fully apply the parking brake when leaving
your vehicle or it may roll and cause damage or
injury. Also, be certain to leave the transmission in
(Continued)
352 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING! (Continued)
PARK. Failure to do so may cause the vehicle to roll
and cause damage or injury.
CAUTION!
If the “Brake Warning Light” remains on with the
parking brake released, a brake system malfunction is
indicated. Have the brake system serviced by an au-
thorized dealer immediately.
BRAKE SYSTEM
Your vehicle is equipped with dual hydraulic
brake systems. If either of the two hydraulic
systems loses normal capability, the remaining
system will still function. However, there will be
some loss of overall braking effectiveness. This will be
evident by increased pedal travel during application and
greater pedal force required to slow or stop the vehicle. In
addition, if the malfunction is caused by a leak in the
hydraulic system, the “Brake Warning Light” will turn on
as the brake fluid level drops in the master cylinder.
In the event power assist is lost for any reason (i.e.,
repeated brake applications with the engine OFF) the
brakes will still function. However, the effort required to
brake the vehicle will be much greater than that required
with the power system operating.
WARNING!
• Riding the brakes can lead to brake failure and
possibly a collision. Driving with your foot resting or
riding on the brake pedal can result in abnormally
high brake temperatures, excessive lining wear, and
possible brake damage. You would not have your
full braking capacity in an emergency.
• Driving a vehicle with the “Brake Warning Light” on
is dangerous. A significant decrease in braking per-
formance or vehicle stability during braking may
occur. It will take you longer to stop the vehicle or
will make your vehicle harder to control. You could
have a collision. Have the vehicle checked immedi-
ately.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 353
ELECTRONIC BRAKE CONTROL SYSTEM
Your vehicle is equipped with an advanced Electronic
Brake Control system (EBC). This system includes Elec-
tronic Brake Force Distribution (EBD), Anti-Lock Brake
System (ABS), Brake Assist System (BAS), Hill Start Assist
(HSA), Traction Control System (TCS), Electronic Stability
Control (ESC), and Electronic Roll Mitigation (ERM). These
systems work together to enhance both vehicle stability
and control in various driving conditions.
Your vehicle may also be equipped with Trailer Sway
Control (TSC).
Electronic Brake Force Distribution (EBD)
This function manages the distribution of the braking
torque between the front and rear axles by limiting braking
pressure to the rear axle. This is done to prevent overslip of
the rear wheels to avoid vehicle instability, and to prevent
the rear axle from entering ABS before the front axle.
Brake System Warning Light
The red “Brake System Warning Light” will turn on when
the ignition switch is turned to the ON position and may
stay on for as long as four seconds.
If the “Brake System Warning Light” remains on or comes
on while driving, it indicates that the brake system is not
functioning properly and that immediate service is re-
quired. If the “Brake System Warning Light” does not come
on when the ignition switch is turned to the ON position,
have the light repaired as soon as possible.
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS)
The Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) provides increased
vehicle stability and brake performance under most brak-
ing conditions. The system automatically prevents wheel
lock, and enhances vehicle control during braking.
The ABS performs a self-check cycle to ensure that the ABS
is working properly each time the vehicle is started and
driven. During this self-check, you may hear a slight
clicking sound as well as some related motor noises.
ABS is activated during braking when the system detects
one or more wheels begins to lock. Road conditions such as
ice, snow, gravel, bumps, railroad tracks, loose debris, or
panic stops may increase the likelihood of ABS activa-
tion(s).
354 STARTING AND OPERATING
You also may experience the following when ABS activates:
• The ABS motor noise (it may continue to run for a short
time after the stop).
• The clicking sound of solenoid valves.
• Brake pedal pulsations.
• A slight drop of the brake pedal at the end of the stop.
These are all normal characteristics of ABS.
WARNING!
• The ABS contains sophisticated electronic equip-
ment that may be susceptible to interference caused
by improperly installed or high output radio trans-
mitting equipment. This interference can cause pos-
sible loss of anti-lock braking capability. Installation
of such equipment should be performed by qualified
professionals.
• Pumping of the Anti-Lock Brakes will diminish their
effectiveness and may lead to a collision. Pumping
makes the stopping distance longer. Just press firmly
on your brake pedal when you need to slow down or
stop.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
• The ABS cannot prevent the natural laws of physics
from acting on the vehicle, nor can it increase brak-
ing or steering efficiency beyond that afforded by the
condition of the vehicle brakes and tires or the
traction afforded.
• The ABS cannot prevent collisions, including those
resulting from excessive speed in turns, following
another vehicle too closely, or hydroplaning.
• The capabilities of an ABS equipped vehicle must
never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner
that could jeopardize the user’s safety or the safety of
others.
ABS is designed to function with the OEM tires. Modifica-
tion may result in degraded ABS performance.
Anti-Lock Brake Warning Light
The yellow “Anti-Lock Brake Warning Light” will turn on
when the ignition switch is turned to the ON position and
may stay on for as long as four seconds.
If the “Anti-Lock Brake Warning Light” remains on or
comes on while driving, it indicates that the anti-lock
portion of the brake system is not functioning and that
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 355
service is required. However, the conventional brake sys-
tem will continue to operate normally if the “Brake System
Warning Light” is not on.
If the “Anti-Lock Brake Warning Light” is on, the brake
system should be serviced as soon as possible to restore the
benefits of anti-lock brakes. If the “Anti-Lock Brake Warn-
ing Light” does not come on when the ignition switch is
turned to the ON position, have the light repaired as soon
as possible.
Brake Assist System (BAS)
The BAS is designed to optimize the vehicle’s braking
capability during emergency braking maneuvers. The sys-
tem detects an emergency braking situation by sensing the
rate and amount of brake application and then applies
optimum pressure to the brakes. This can help reduce
braking distances. The BAS complements the anti-lock
brake system (ABS). Applying the brakes very quickly
results in the best BAS assistance. To receive the benefit of
the system, you must apply continuous braking pressure
during the stopping sequence, (do not “pump” the brakes).
Do not reduce brake pedal pressure unless braking is no
longer desired. Once the brake pedal is released, the BAS is
deactivated.
WARNING!
The Brake Assist System (BAS) cannot prevent the
natural laws of physics from acting on the vehicle, nor
can it increase the traction afforded by prevailing road
conditions. BAS cannot prevent collisions, including
those resulting from excessive speed in turns, driving
on very slippery surfaces, or hydroplaning. The capa-
bilities of a BAS-equipped vehicle must never be
exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner, which
could jeopardize the user’s safety or the safety of
others.
Hill Start Assist (HSA)
The HSA system is designed to mitigate roll back from a
complete stop while on an incline. If the driver releases the
brake while stopped on an incline, HSA will continue to
hold the brake pressure for a short period. If the driver
does not apply the throttle before this time expires, the
system will release brake pressure and the vehicle will roll
down the hill as normal.
356 STARTING AND OPERATING
The following conditions must be met in order for HSA to
activate:
• The feature must be enabled.
• The vehicle must be stopped.
• Park brake must be off.
• Driver door must be closed.
• The vehicle must be on a sufficient grade.
• The gear selection must match vehicle uphill direction
(i.e., vehicle facing uphill is in forward gear; vehicle
backing uphill is in REVERSE gear).
• HSA will work in REVERSE gear and all forward gears.
The system will not activate if the transmission is in
PARK or NEUTRAL. For vehicles equipped with a
manual transmission, if the clutch is pressed, HSA will
remain active.
WARNING!
There may be situations where the Hill Start Assist
(HSA) will not activate and slight rolling may occur,
such as on minor hills or with a loaded vehicle, or
while pulling a trailer. HSA is not a substitute for
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
active driving involvement. It is always the driver’s
responsibility to be attentive to distance to other ve-
hicles, people, and objects, and most importantly brake
operation to ensure safe operation of the vehicle under
all road conditions. Your complete attention is always
required while driving to maintain safe control of your
vehicle. Failure to follow these warnings can result in
a collision or serious personal injury.
Towing With HSA
HSA will also provide assistance to mitigate roll back while
towing a trailer.
WARNING!
• If you use a trailer brake controller with your trailer,
the trailer brakes may be activated and deactivated
with the brake switch. If so, there may not be enough
brake pressure to hold both the vehicle and the
trailer on a hill when the brake pedal is released. In
order to avoid rolling down an incline while resum-
ing acceleration, manually activate the trailer brake
(Continued)
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 357
WARNING! (Continued)
or apply more vehicle brake pressure prior to releas-
ing the brake pedal.
• HSA is not a parking brake. Always apply the
parking brake fully when leaving your vehicle. Also,
be certain to leave the transmission in PARK.
• Failure to follow these warnings may cause the
vehicle to roll down the incline and could collide
with another vehicle, object or person, and cause
serious or fatal injury. Always remember to use the
parking brake while parking on a hill and that the
driver is responsible for braking the vehicle.
Disabling And Enabling HSA
This feature can be turned on or turned off. To change the
current setting, proceed as follows:
• For vehicles equipped with the instrument cluster dis-
play, refer to “Instrument Cluster Display” in “Under-
standing Your Instrument Panel” for further informa-
tion.
• If disabling HSA using Uconnect Settings, refer to
“Uconnect Settings” in “Understanding Your Instrument
Panel” for further information.
For vehicles not equipped with the instrument cluster
display, perform the following steps:
1. Center the steering wheel (front wheels pointing
straight forward).
2. Shift the transmission into PARK.
3. Apply the parking brake.
4. Start the engine.
5. Rotate the steering wheel slightly more than one-half
turn to the left.
6. Push the “ESC Off” button located in the lower switch
bank below the climate control four times within twenty
seconds. The “ESC Off Indicator Light” should turn on
and turn off two times.
7. Rotate the steering wheel back to center and then an
additional slightly more than one-half turn to the right.
8. Turn the ignition switch to the OFF position and then
back to the ON position. If the sequence was completed
properly, the “ESC Off Indicator Light” will blink sev-
eral times to confirm HSA is disabled.
9. Repeat these steps if you want to return this feature to
its previous setting.
358 STARTING AND OPERATING
Traction Control System (TCS)
This system monitors the amount of wheel spin of each of
the driven wheels. If wheel spin is detected, the TCS may
apply brake pressure to the spinning wheel(s) and/or
reduce engine power to provide enhanced acceleration and
stability. A feature of the TCS, Brake Limited Differential
(BLD), functions similar to a limited slip differential and
controls the wheel spin across a driven axle. If one wheel
on a driven axle is spinning faster than the other, the
system will apply the brake of the spinning wheel. This
will allow more engine torque to be applied to the wheel
that is not spinning. BLD may remain enabled even if TCS
and ESC are in a reduced mode.
Electronic Stability Control (ESC)
This system enhances directional control and stability of
the vehicle under various driving conditions. ESC corrects
for oversteering or understeering of the vehicle by apply-
ing the brake of the appropriate wheel(s) to assist in
counteracting the oversteer or understeer condition. En-
gine power may also be reduced to help the vehicle
maintain the desired path.
ESC uses sensors in the vehicle to determine the vehicle
path intended by the driver and compares it to the actual
path of the vehicle. When the actual path does not match
the intended path, ESC applies the brake of the appropriate
wheel to assist in counteracting the oversteer or understeer
condition.
• Oversteer - when the vehicle is turning more than
appropriate for the steering wheel position.
• Understeer - when the vehicle is turning less than
appropriate for the steering wheel position.
The “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light” located
in the instrument cluster will start to flash as soon as the
ESC system becomes active. The “ESC Activation/
Malfunction Indicator Light” also flashes when the TCS is
active. If the “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator
Light” begins to flash during acceleration, ease up on the
accelerator and apply as little throttle as possible. Be sure to
adapt your speed and driving to the prevailing road
conditions.
WARNING!
• Electronic Stability Control (ESC) cannot prevent the
natural laws of physics from acting on the vehicle,
nor can it increase the traction afforded by prevailing
(Continued)
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 359
WARNING! (Continued)
road conditions. ESC cannot prevent accidents, in-
cluding those resulting from excessive speed in
turns, driving on very slippery surfaces, or hydro-
planing. ESC also cannot prevent accidents resulting
from loss of vehicle control due to inappropriate
driver input for the conditions. Only a safe, attentive,
and skillful driver can prevent accidents. The capa-
bilities of an ESC equipped vehicle must never be
exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner which
could jeopardize the user’s safety or the safety of
others.
• Vehicle modifications, or failure to properly main-
tain your vehicle, may change the handling charac-
teristics of your vehicle, and may negatively affect
the performance of the ESC system. Changes to the
steering system, suspension, braking system, tire
type and size or wheel size may adversely affect ESC
performance. Improperly inflated and unevenly
worn tires may also degrade ESC performance. Any
vehicle modification or poor vehicle maintenance
that reduces the effectiveness of the ESC system can
increase the risk of loss of vehicle control, vehicle
rollover, personal injury and death.
ESC Operating Modes
NOTE: Depending upon model and mode of operation, the
ESC system may have multiple operating modes.
ESC On
This is the normal operating mode for the ESC. Whenever
the vehicle is started, the ESC system will be in this mode.
This mode should be used for most driving conditions.
Alternate ESC modes should only be used for specific
reasons as noted in the following paragraphs.
Partial Off
The “Partial Off” mode is intended for times when a more
spirited driving experience is desired. This mode may
modify TCS and ESC thresholds for activation, which
allows for more wheel spin than normally allowed. This
mode may be useful if the vehicle becomes stuck.
To enter the “Partial Off” mode, momentarily push the
“ESC Off” switch and the “ESC Off Indicator Light” will
illuminate. To turn the ESC on again, momentarily push
the “ESC Off” switch and the “ESC Off Indicator Light”
will turn off.
360 STARTING AND OPERATING
NOTE:
• When in “Partial Off” mode, the TCS functionality of
ESC, (except for the limited slip feature described in the
TCS section), has been disabled and the “ESC Off
Indicator Light” will be illuminated. When in “Partial
Off” mode, the engine power reduction feature of TCS is
disabled, and the enhanced vehicle stability offered by
the ESC system is reduced.
• Trailer Sway control (TSC) is disabled when the ESC
system is in the “Partial Off” mode.
WARNING!
The Electronic Stability Control (ESC) cannot prevent
the natural laws of physics from acting on the vehicle,
nor can it increase the traction afforded by prevailing
road conditions. ESC cannot prevent all accidents,
including those resulting from excessive speed in
turns, driving on very slippery surfaces, or hydroplan-
ing. ESC also cannot prevent collisions.
ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light and ESC
OFF Indicator Light
The “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator
Light” in the instrument cluster will come on
when the ignition switch is turned to the ON
position. It should go out with the engine run-
ning. If the “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light”
comes on continuously with the engine running, a mal-
function has been detected in the ESC system. If this light
remains on after several ignition cycles, and the vehicle has
been driven several miles (kilometers) at speeds greater
than 30 mph (48 km/h), see your authorized dealer as soon
as possible to have the problem diagnosed and corrected.
The “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light” (lo-
cated in the instrument cluster) starts to flash as soon as the
tires lose traction and the ESC system becomes active. The
“ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light” also flashes
when TCS is active. If the “ESC Activation/Malfunction
Indicator Light” begins to flash during acceleration, ease
up on the accelerator and apply as little throttle as possible.
Be sure to adapt your speed and driving to the prevailing
road conditions.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 361
NOTE:
• The “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light” and
the “ESC OFF Indicator Light” come on momentarily
each time the ignition switch is turned ON.
• Each time the ignition is turned ON, the ESC system will
be ON even if it was turned off previously.
• The ESC system will make buzzing or clicking sounds
when it is active. This is normal; the sounds will stop
when ESC becomes inactive following the maneuver
that caused the ESC activation.
The “ESC OFF Indicator Light” indicates the
customer has elected to have the Electronic Sta-
bility Control (ESC) in a reduced mode.
Electronic Roll Mitigation (ERM)
This system anticipates the potential for wheel lift by
monitoring the driver’s steering wheel input and the speed
of the vehicle. When ERM determines that the rate of
change of the steering wheel angle and vehicle’s speed are
sufficient to potentially cause wheel lift, it then applies the
appropriate brake and may also reduce engine power to
lessen the chance that wheel lift will occur. ERM can only
reduce the chance of wheel lift occurring during severe or
evasive driving maneuvers; it cannot prevent wheel lift
due to other factors, such as road conditions, leaving the
roadway, or striking objects or other vehicles.
WARNING!
Many factors, such as vehicle loading, road conditions
and driving conditions, influence the chance that
wheel lift or rollover may occur. ERM cannot prevent
all wheel lift or roll overs, especially those that involve
leaving the roadway or striking objects or other ve-
hicles. The capabilities of an ERM-equipped vehicle
must never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous
manner which could jeopardize the user’s safety or the
safety of others.
362 STARTING AND OPERATING
Trailer Sway Control (TSC)
TSC uses sensors in the vehicle to recognize an excessively
swaying trailer and will take the appropriate actions to
attempt to stop the sway. TSC will become active automati-
cally once an excessively swaying trailer is recognized.
Note that TSC cannot stop all trailers from swaying.
Always use caution when towing a trailer and follow the
trailer tongue weight recommendations. Refer to “Trailer
Towing” in this section for further information.
When TSC is functioning, the “ESC Activation/ Malfunc-
tion Indicator Light” will flash, the engine power may be
reduced and you may feel the brakes being applied to
individual wheels to attempt to stop the trailer from
swaying. TSC is disabled when the ESC system is in the
“Partial Off” mode.
WARNING!
If TSC activates while driving, slow the vehicle down,
stop at the nearest safe location, and adjust the trailer
load to eliminate trailer sway.
TIRE SAFETY INFORMATION
Tire Markings
1 — U.S. DOT Safety
Standards Code (TIN)
4 — Maximum Load
2 — Size Designation 5 — Maximum Pressure
3 — Service Description 6 — Treadwear, Traction
and Temperature Grades
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 363
NOTE:
• P (Passenger) — Metric tire sizing is based on U.S.
design standards. P-Metric tires have the letter “P”
molded into the sidewall preceding the size designation.
Example: P215/65R15 95H.
• European — Metric tire sizing is based on European
design standards. Tires designed to this standard have
the tire size molded into the sidewall beginning with the
section width. The letter ⬙P⬙ is absent from this tire size
designation. Example: 215/65R15 96H.
• LT (Light Truck) — Metric tire sizing is based on U.S.
design standards. The size designation for LT-Metric
tires is the same as for P-Metric tires except for the letters
“LT” that are molded into the sidewall preceding the
size designation. Example: LT235/85R16.
• Temporary spare tires are designed for temporary emer-
gency use only. Temporary high pressure compact spare
tires have the letter “T” or “S” molded into the sidewall
preceding the size designation. Example: T145/80D18
103M.
• High flotation tire sizing is based on U.S. design stan-
dards and it begins with the tire diameter molded into
the sidewall. Example: 31x10.5 R15 LT.
364 STARTING AND OPERATING
Tire Sizing Chart
EXAMPLE:
Example Size Designation: P215/65R15XL 95H, 215/65R15 96H, LT235/85R16C, T145/80D18 103M, 31x10.5 R15 LT
P = Passenger car tire size based on U.S. design standards, or
ⴖ....blank....ⴖ = Passenger car tire based on European design standards, or
LT = Light truck tire based on U.S. design standards, or
TorS= Temporary spare tire or
31 = Overall diameter in inches (in)
215, 235, 145 = Section width in millimeters (mm)
65, 85, 80 = Aspect ratio in percent (%)
–
Ratio of section height to section width of tire, or
10.5 = Section width in inches (in)
R = Construction code
–
⬙R⬙ means radial construction, or
–
⬙D⬙ means diagonal or bias construction
15, 16, 18 = Rim diameter in inches (in)
Service Description:
95 = Load Index
–
A numerical code associated with the maximum load a tire can carry
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 365
EXAMPLE:
H = Speed Symbol
–
A symbol indicating the range of speeds at which a tire can carry a load corresponding to its load index under cer-
tain operating conditions
–
The maximum speed corresponding to the speed symbol should only be achieved under specified operating condi-
tions (i.e., tire pressure, vehicle loading, road conditions, and posted speed limits)
Load Identification:
Absence of the following load identification symbols on the sidewall of the tire indicates a Standard Load (SL) tire:
• XL = Extra load (or reinforced) tire, or
• LL = Light load tire or
• C, D, E, F, G = Load range associated with the maximum load a tire can carry at a specified pressure
Maximum Load – Maximum load indicates the maximum load this tire is designed to carry
Maximum Pressure – Maximum pressure indicates the maximum permissible cold tire inflation pressure for this tire
Tire Identification Number (TIN)
The TIN may be found on one or both sides of the tire;
however, the date code may only be on one side. Tires with
white sidewalls will have the full TIN, including the date
code, located on the white sidewall side of the tire. Look for
the TIN on the outboard side of black sidewall tires as
mounted on the vehicle. If the TIN is not found on the
outboard side, then you will find it on the inboard side of
the tire.
366 STARTING AND OPERATING
EXAMPLE:
DOT MA L9 ABCD 0301
DOT = Department of Transportation
•
This symbol certifies that the tire is in compliance with the U.S. Department of Transportation tire safety standards
and is approved for highway use
MA = Code representing the tire manufacturing location (two digits)
L9 = Code representing the tire size (two digits)
ABCD = Code used by the tire manufacturer (one to four digits)
03 = Number representing the week in which the tire was manufactured (two digits)
•
03 means the 3rd week
01 = Number representing the year in which the tire was manufactured (two digits)
•
01 means the year 2001
•
Prior to July 2000, tire manufacturers were only required to have one number to represent the year in which the
tire was manufactured. Example: 031 could represent the 3rd week of 1981 or 1991
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 367
Tire Terminology And Definitions
Term Definition
B-Pillar The vehicle B-Pillar is the structural member of the body located be-
hind the front door.
Cold Tire Inflation Pressure Cold tire inflation pressure is defined as the tire pressure after the
vehicle has not been driven for at least three hours, or driven less
than 1 mile (1.6 km) after sitting for a minimum of three hours. In-
flation pressure is measured in units of PSI (pounds per square inch)
or kPa (kilopascals).
Maximum Inflation Pressure The maximum inflation pressure is the maximum permissible cold
tire inflation pressure for this tire. The maximum inflation pressure is
molded into the sidewall.
Recommended Cold Tire Inflation Pressure Vehicle manufacturer’s recommended cold tire inflation pressure as
shown on the tire placard.
Tire Placard A label permanently attached to the vehicle describing the vehicle’s
loading capacity, the original equipment tire sizes and the recom-
mended cold tire inflation pressures.
368 STARTING AND OPERATING
Tire Loading And Tire Pressure
Tire And Loading Information Placard Location
NOTE: The proper cold tire inflation pressure is listed on
the driver’s side B-Pillar or the rear edge of the driver’s
side door.
Check the inflation pressure of each tire, including the
spare tire (if equipped), at least monthly and inflate to the
recommended pressure for your vehicle.
WARNING!
• Overloading of your tires is dangerous. Overloading
can cause tire failure, affect vehicle handling, and
increase your stopping distance. Use tires of the
recommended load capacity for your vehicle. Never
overload them.
• Improperly inflated tires are dangerous and can
cause collisions. Under-inflation increases tire flex-
ing and can result in over-heating and tire failure.
(Continued)
Example Tire Placard Location (Door)
Example Tire Placard Location (B-Pillar)
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 369
WARNING! (Continued)
Over-inflation reduces a tire’s ability to cushion
shock. Objects on the road and chuck holes can cause
damage that results in tire failure. Unequal tire
pressures can cause steering problems. You could
lose control of your vehicle. Over-inflated or under-
inflated tires can affect vehicle handling and can fail
suddenly, resulting in loss of vehicle control. Always
drive with each tire inflated to the recommended
cold tire inflation pressure.
Tire And Loading Information Placard
This placard tells you important information about the:
1. Number of people that can be carried in the vehicle.
2. Total weight your vehicle can carry.
3. Tire size designed for your vehicle.
4. Cold tire inflation pressures for the front, rear, and spare
tires.
Tire And Loading Information Placard
370 STARTING AND OPERATING
Loading
The vehicle maximum load on the tire must not exceed the
load carrying capacity of the tire on your vehicle. You will
not exceed the tire’s load carrying capacity if you adhere to
the loading conditions, tire size, and cold tire inflation
pressures specified on the Tire and Loading Information
placard in “Vehicle Loading” in “Starting And Operating”,
or the Tire Information Supplement, located in your Own-
er’s Information kit.
NOTE: Under a maximum loaded vehicle condition, gross
axle weight ratings (GAWRs) for the front and rear axles
must not be exceeded. Refer to “Vehicle Loading” in
“Starting And Operating”, or the Tire Information Supple-
ment located in your Owner’s Information kit, for further
information on GAWRs, vehicle loading, and trailer tow-
ing.
To determine the maximum loading conditions of your
vehicle, locate the statement “The combined weight of
occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX kg or
XXX lbs” on the Tire and Loading Information placard. The
combined weight of occupants, cargo/luggage and trailer
tongue weight (if applicable) should never exceed the
weight referenced here.
Steps For Determining Correct Load Limit—
(1) Locate the statement “The combined weight of
occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX kg or
XXX lbs.” on your vehicle’s placard.
(2) Determine the combined weight of the driver and
passengers that will be riding in your vehicle.
(3) Subtract the combined weight of the driver and
passengers from XXX kg or XXX lbs.
(4) The resulting figure equals the available amount of
cargo and luggage load capacity. For example, if “XXX”
amount equals 1400 lbs. and there will be five 150 lb
passengers in your vehicle, the amount of available
cargo and luggage load capacity is 650 lbs. (1400-750
(5x150) = 650 lbs.)
(5) Determine the combined weight of luggage and
cargo being loaded on the vehicle. That weight may not
safely exceed the available cargo and luggage load
capacity calculated in Step 4.
(6) If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, load from
your trailer will be transferred to your vehicle. Consult
this manual to determine how this reduces the available
cargo and luggage load capacity of your vehicle.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 371
Metric Example For Load Limit
For example, if “XXX” amount equals 635 kg, and there
will be five 68 kg passengers in your vehicle, the amount of
available cargo and luggage load capacity is 295 kg (635-
340 (5x68) = 295 kg) as shown in step 4.
NOTE:
• If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, load from your
trailer will be transferred to your vehicle. The following
table shows examples on how to calculate total load,
cargo/luggage, and towing capacities of your vehicle
with varying seating configurations and number and
size of occupants. This table is for illustration purposes
only and may not be accurate for the seating and load
carry capacity of your vehicle.
• For the following example, the combined weight of
occupants and cargo should never exceed 865 lbs
(392 kg).
372 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING!
Overloading of your tires is dangerous. Overloading
can cause tire failure, affect vehicle handling, and
increase your stopping distance. Use tires of the rec-
ommended load capacity for your vehicle. Never over-
load them.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 373
TIRES — GENERAL INFORMATION
Tire Pressure
Proper tire inflation pressure is essential to the safe and
satisfactory operation of your vehicle. Four primary areas
are affected by improper tire pressure:
• Safety and Vehicle Stability
• Economy
• Tread Wear
• Ride Comfort
Safety
WARNING!
• Improperly inflated tires are dangerous and can
cause collisions.
• Underinflation increases tire flexing and can result
in overheating and tire failure.
• Overinflation reduces a tire’s ability to cushion
shock. Objects on the road and chuckholes can cause
damage that result in tire failure.
• Overinflated or underinflated tires can affect vehicle
handling and can fail suddenly, resulting in loss of
vehicle control.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
• Unequal tire pressures can cause steering problems.
You could lose control of your vehicle.
• Unequal tire pressures from one side of the vehicle
to the other can cause the vehicle to drift to the right
or left.
• Always drive with each tire inflated to the recom-
mended cold tire inflation pressure.
Both under-inflation and over-inflation affect the stability
of the vehicle and can produce a feeling of sluggish
response or over responsiveness in the steering.
NOTE:
• Unequal tire pressures from side to side may cause
erratic and unpredictable steering response.
• Unequal tire pressure from side to side may cause the
vehicle to drift left or right.
Fuel Economy
Underinflated tires will increase tire rolling resistance
resulting in higher fuel consumption.
Tread Wear
Improper cold tire inflation pressures can cause abnormal
wear patterns and reduced tread life, resulting in the need
for earlier tire replacement.
374 STARTING AND OPERATING
Ride Comfort And Vehicle Stability
Proper tire inflation contributes to a comfortable ride.
Over-inflation produces a jarring and uncomfortable ride.
Tire Inflation Pressures
The proper cold tire inflation pressure is listed on the
driver’s side B-Pillar or rear edge of the driver’s side door.
At least once a month:
• Check and adjust tire pressure with a good quality
pocket-type pressure gauge. Do not make a visual
judgement when determining proper inflation. Tires
may look properly inflated even when they are under-
inflated.
• Inspect tires for signs of tire wear or visible damage.
CAUTION!
After inspecting or adjusting the tire pressure, always
reinstall the valve stem cap. This will prevent moisture
and dirt from entering the valve stem, which could
damage the valve stem.
Inflation pressures specified on the placard are always
“cold tire inflation pressure”. Cold tire inflation pressure is
defined as the tire pressure after the vehicle has not been
driven for at least three hours, or driven less than 1 mile
(1.6 km) after sitting for a minimum of three hours. The
cold tire inflation pressure must not exceed the maximum
inflation pressure molded into the tire sidewall.
Check tire pressures more often if subject to a wide range
of outdoor temperatures, as tire pressures vary with tem-
perature changes.
Tire pressures change by approximately 1 psi (7 kPa) per
12°F (7°C) of air temperature change. Keep this in mind
when checking tire pressure inside a garage, especially in
the Winter.
Example: If garage temperature = 68°F (20°C) and the
outside temperature = 32°F (0°C) then the cold tire inflation
pressure should be increased by 3 psi (21 kPa), which
equals 1 psi (7 kPa) for every 12°F (7°C) for this outside
temperature condition.
Tire pressure may increase from 2 to 6 psi (13 to 40 kPa)
during operation. DO NOT reduce this normal pressure
build up or your tire pressure will be too low.
Tire Pressures For High Speed Operation
The manufacturer advocates driving at safe speeds and
within posted speed limits. Where speed limits or condi-
tions are such that the vehicle can be driven at high speeds,
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 375
maintaining correct tire inflation pressure is very impor-
tant. Increased tire pressure and reduced vehicle loading
may be required for high-speed vehicle operation. Refer to
your authorized tire dealer or original equipment vehicle
dealer for recommended safe operating speeds, loading
and cold tire inflation pressures.
WARNING!
High speed driving with your vehicle under maximum
load is dangerous. The added strain on your tires could
cause them to fail. You could have a serious collision.
Do not drive a vehicle loaded to the maximum capacity
at continuous speeds above 75 mph (120 km/h).
Radial Ply Tires
WARNING!
Combining radial ply tires with other types of tires on
your vehicle will cause your vehicle to handle poorly.
The instability could cause a collision. Always use
radial ply tires in sets of four. Never combine them
with other types of tires.
Tire Repair
If your tire becomes damaged, it may be repaired if it meets
the following criteria:
• The tire has not been driven on when flat.
• The damage is only on the tread section of your tire
(sidewall damage is not repairable).
• The puncture is no greater thana¼ofaninch (6 mm).
Consult an authorized tire dealer for tire repairs and
additional information.
Damaged Run Flat tires, or Run Flat tires that have
experienced a loss of pressure should be replaced immedi-
ately with another Run Flat tire of identical size and service
description (Load Index and Speed Symbol).
Tire Types
All Season Tires — If Equipped
All season tires provide traction for all seasons (Spring,
Summer, Fall and Winter). Traction levels may vary be-
tween different all season tires. All season tires can be
identified by the M+S, M&S, M/S or MS designation on the
tire sidewall. Use all season tires only in sets of four; failure
to do so may adversely affect the safety and handling of
your vehicle.
376 STARTING AND OPERATING
Summer Or Three Season Tires — If Equipped
Summer tires provide traction in both wet and dry condi-
tions, and are not intended to be driven in snow or on ice.
If your vehicle is equipped with Summer tires, be aware
these tires are not designed for Winter or cold driving
conditions. Install Winter tires on your vehicle when am-
bient temperatures are less than 40°F (5°C) or if roads are
covered with ice or snow. For more information, contact an
authorized dealer.
Summer tires do not contain the all season designation or
mountain/snowflake symbol on the tire sidewall. Use
Summer tires only in sets of four; failure to do so may
adversely affect the safety and handling of your vehicle.
WARNING!
Do not use Summer tires in snow/ice conditions. You
could lose vehicle control, resulting in severe injury or
death. Driving too fast for conditions also creates the
possibility of loss of vehicle control.
Snow Tires
Some areas of the country require the use of snow tires
during the Winter. Snow tires can be identified by a
“mountain/snowflake” symbol on the tire sidewall.
If you need snow tires, select tires
equivalent in size and type to the origi-
nal equipment tires. Use snow tires only
in sets of four; failure to do so may
adversely affect the safety and handling
of your vehicle.
Snow tires generally have lower speed ratings than what
was originally equipped with your vehicle and should not
be operated at sustained speeds over 75 mph (120 km/h).
For speeds above 75 mph (120 km/h), refer to original
equipment or an authorized tire dealer for recommended
safe operating speeds, loading and cold tire inflation
pressures.
While studded tires improve performance on ice, skid and
traction capability on wet or dry surfaces may be poorer
than that of non-studded tires. Some states prohibit stud-
ded tires; therefore, local laws should be checked before
using these tire types.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 377
Run Flat Tires — If Equipped
Run Flat tires allow you the capability to drive 50 miles
(80 km) at 50 mph (80 km/h) after a rapid loss of inflation
pressure. This rapid loss of inflation is referred to as the
Run Flat mode. A Run Flat mode occurs when the tire
inflation pressure is of/or below 14 psi (96 kPa). Once a
Run Flat tire reaches the Run Flat mode, it has limited
driving capabilities and needs to be replaced immediately.
A Run Flat tire is not repairable.
It is not recommended to drive a vehicle loaded at full
capacity, or to tow a trailer while a tire is in the Run Flat
mode.
See the tire pressure monitoring section for more informa-
tion.
Spare Tires — If Equipped
NOTE: For vehicles equipped with Tire Service Kit instead
of a spare tire, please refer to the “Tire Service Kit” section
located in your Owner’s Information kit for further infor-
mation.
CAUTION!
Because of the reduced ground clearance, do not take
your vehicle through an automatic car wash with a
compact or limited use temporary spare installed.
Damage to the vehicle may result.
Spare Tire Matching Original Equipped Tire And
Wheel — If Equipped
Your vehicle may be equipped with a spare tire and wheel
equivalent in look and function to the original equipment tire
and wheel found on the front or rear axle of your vehicle.
This spare tire may be used in the tire rotation for your
vehicle. If your vehicle has this option, refer to an authorized
tire dealer for the recommended tire rotation pattern.
Compact Spare Tire — If Equipped
The compact spare is for temporary emergency use only. You
can identify if your vehicle is equipped with a compact spare
by looking at the spare tire description on the Tire and
Loading Information Placard located on the driver’s side
door opening or on the sidewall of the tire. Compact spare
tire descriptions begin with the letter “T” or “S” preceding
the size designation. Example: T145/80D18 103M.
T, S = Temporary Spare Tire
378 STARTING AND OPERATING
Since this tire has limited tread life, the original equipment
tire should be repaired (or replaced) and reinstalled on
your vehicle at the first opportunity.
Do not install a wheel cover or attempt to mount a
conventional tire on the compact spare wheel, since the
wheel is designed specifically for the compact spare tire.
Do not install more than one compact spare tire and wheel
on the vehicle at any given time.
WARNING!
Compact and Collapsible spares are for temporary
emergency use only. With these spares, do not drive
more than 50 mph (80 km/h). Temporary use spares
have limited tread life. When the tread is worn to the
tread wear indicators, the temporary use spare tire
needs to be replaced. Be sure to follow the warnings,
which apply to your spare. Failure to do so could result
in spare tire failure and loss of vehicle control.
Collapsible Spare Tire — If Equipped
The collapsible spare is for temporary emergency use only.
You can identify if your vehicle is equipped with a collaps-
ible spare by looking at the spare tire description on the
Tire and Loading Information Placard located on the
driver’s side door opening or on the sidewall of the tire.
Collapsible spare tire description example: 165/80-17 101P.
Since this tire has limited tread life, the original equipment
tire should be repaired (or replaced) and reinstalled on
your vehicle at the first opportunity.
Inflate collapsible tire only after the wheel is properly
installed to the vehicle. Inflate the collapsible tire using the
electric air pump before lowering the vehicle.
Do not install a wheel cover or attempt to mount a
conventional tire on the collapsible spare wheel, since the
wheel is designed specifically for the collapsible spare tire.
WARNING!
Compact and Collapsible spares are for temporary
emergency use only. With these spares, do not drive
more than 50 mph (80 km/h). Temporary use spares
have limited tread life. When the tread is worn to the
tread wear indicators, the temporary use spare tire
needs to be replaced. Be sure to follow the warnings,
which apply to your spare. Failure to do so could result
in spare tire failure and loss of vehicle control.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 379
Full Size Spare — If Equipped
The full size spare is for temporary emergency use only.
This tire may look like the originally equipped tire on the
front or rear axle of your vehicle, but it is not. This spare
tire may have limited tread life. When the tread is worn to
the tread wear indicators, the temporary use full size spare
tire needs to be replaced. Since it is not the same as your
original equipment tire, replace (or repair) the original
equipment tire and reinstall on the vehicle at the first
opportunity.
Limited Use Spare — If Equipped
The limited use spare tire is for temporary emergency use
only. This tire is identified by a label located on the limited
use spare wheel. This label contains the driving limitations
for this spare. This tire may look like the original equipped
tire on the front or rear axle of your vehicle, but it is not.
Installation of this limited use spare tire affects vehicle
handling. Since it is not the same as your original equip-
ment tire, replace (or repair) the original equipment tire
and reinstall on the vehicle at the first opportunity.
WARNING!
Limited use spares are for emergency use only. Instal-
lation of this limited use spare tire affects vehicle
handling. With this tire, do not drive more than the
speed listed on the limit use spare wheel. Keep in-
flated to the cold tire inflation pressures listed on your
Tire and Loading Information Placard located on the
driver’s side B-Pillar or the rear edge of the driver’s
side door. Replace (or repair) the original equipment
tire at the first opportunity and reinstall it on your
vehicle. Failure to do so could result in loss of vehicle
control.
Tire Spinning
When stuck in mud, sand, snow, or ice conditions, do not
spin your vehicle’s wheels above 30 mph (48 km/h) or for
longer than 30 seconds continuously without stopping.
Refer to “Freeing A Stuck Vehicle” in “What To Do In
Emergencies” for further information.
380 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING!
Fast spinning tires can be dangerous. Forces generated
by excessive wheel speeds may cause tire damage or
failure. A tire could explode and injure someone. Do
not spin your vehicle’s wheels faster than 30 mph
(48 km/h) for more than 30 seconds continuously when
you are stuck, and do not let anyone near a spinning
wheel, no matter what the speed.
Tread Wear Indicators
Tread wear indicators are in the original equipment tires to
help you in determining when your tires should be re-
placed.
These indicators are molded into the bottom of the tread
grooves. They will appear as bands when the tread depth
becomes a 1/16 of an inch (1.6 mm). When the tread is
worn to the tread wear indicators, the tire should be
replaced. Refer to “Replacement Tires” in this section for
further information.
Tire Tread
1—WornTire
2—NewTire
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 381
Life Of Tire
The service life of a tire is dependent upon varying factors
including, but not limited to:
• Driving style.
• Tire pressure – Improper cold tire inflation pressures can
cause uneven wear patterns to develop across the tire
tread. These abnormal wear patterns will reduce tread
life, resulting in the need for earlier tire replacement.
• Distance driven.
• Performance tires, tires with a speed rating of V or
higher, and Summer tires typically have a reduced tread
life. Rotation of these tires per the vehicle maintenance
schedule is highly recommended.
WARNING!
Tires and the spare tire should be replaced after six
years, regardless of the remaining tread. Failure to
follow this warning can result in sudden tire failure.
You could lose control and have a collision resulting in
serious injury or death.
Keep dismounted tires in a cool, dry place with as little
exposure to light as possible. Protect tires from contact with
oil, grease, and gasoline.
Replacement Tires
The tires on your new vehicle provide a balance of many
characteristics. They should be inspected regularly for
wear and correct cold tire inflation pressures. The manu-
facturer strongly recommends that you use tires equivalent
to the originals in size, quality and performance when
replacement is needed. Refer to the paragraph on “Tread
Wear Indicator” in this section. Refer to the Tire and
Loading Information placard or the Vehicle Certification
Label for the size designation of your tire. The Load Index
and Speed Symbol for your tire will be found on the
original equipment tire sidewall.
See the Tire Sizing Chart example found in the “Tire Safety
Information” section of this manual for more information
relating to the Load Index and Speed Symbol of a tire.
It is recommended to replace the two front tires or two rear
tires as a pair. Replacing just one tire can seriously affect
your vehicle’s handling. If you ever replace a wheel, make
sure that the wheel’s specifications match those of the
original wheels.
382 STARTING AND OPERATING
It is recommended you contact your authorized tire dealer
or original equipment dealer with any questions you may
have on tire specifications or capability. Failure to use
equivalent replacement tires may adversely affect the
safety, handling, and ride of your vehicle.
WARNING!
• Do not use a tire, wheel size or rating other than that
specified for your vehicle. Some combinations of
unapproved tires and wheels may change suspen-
sion dimensions and performance characteristics,
resulting in changes to steering, handling, and brak-
ing of your vehicle. This can cause unpredictable
handling and stress to steering and suspension com-
ponents. You could lose control and have a collision
resulting in serious injury or death. Use only the tire
and wheel sizes with load ratings approved for your
vehicle.
• Never use a tire with a smaller load index or capacity,
other than what was originally equipped on your
vehicle. Using a tire with a smaller load index could
result in tire overloading and failure. You could lose
control and have a collision.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
• Failure to equip your vehicle with tires having ad-
equate speed capability can result in sudden tire
failure and loss of vehicle control.
CAUTION!
Replacing original tires with tires of a different size
may result in false speedometer and odometer read-
ings.
TIRE CHAINS (TRACTION DEVICES)
Use of traction devices require sufficient tire-to-body clear-
ance. Follow these recommendations to guard against
damage.
• Traction device must be of proper size for the tire, as
recommended by the traction device manufacturer.
• Install on Front Tires Only.
• Due to limited clearance, P225/65R17 tire with a Secu-
rity Chain Company (SCC) Super Z6 low profile traction
device or equivalent is recommended.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 383
WARNING!
Using tires of different size and type (M+S, Snow)
between front and rear axles can cause unpredictable
handling. You could lose control and have a collision.
CAUTION!
To avoid damage to your vehicle or tires, observe the
following precautions:
• Because of restricted traction device clearance be-
tween tires and other suspension components, it is
important that only traction devices in good condi-
tion are used. Broken devices can cause serious
damage. Stop the vehicle immediately if noise occurs
that could indicate device breakage. Remove the
damaged parts of the device before further use.
• Install device as tightly as possible and then re-
tighten after driving about ½ mile (0.8 km).
• Do not exceed 30 mph (48 km/h).
• Drive cautiously and avoid severe turns and large
bumps, especially with a loaded vehicle.
• Do not drive for a prolonged period on dry pave-
ment.
(Continued)
CAUTION! (Continued)
• Observe the traction device manufacturer’s instruc-
tions on the method of installation, operating speed,
and conditions for use. Always use the suggested
operating speed of the device manufacturer’s if it is
less than 30 mph (48 km/h).
• Do not use traction devices on a compact spare tire.
TIRE ROTATION RECOMMENDATIONS
The tires on the front and rear of your vehicle operate at
different loads and perform different steering, driving, and
braking functions. For these reasons, they wear at unequal
rates.
These effects can be reduced by timely rotation of tires. The
benefits of rotation are especially worthwhile with aggres-
sive tread designs such as those on all season type tires.
Rotation will increase tread life, help to maintain mud,
snow and wet traction levels, and contribute to a smooth,
quiet ride.
Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for the proper main-
tenance intervals. The reasons for any rapid or unusual
wear should be corrected prior to rotation being per-
formed.
384 STARTING AND OPERATING
The suggested rotation method is the “forward cross”
shown in the following diagram. This rotation pattern does
not apply to some directional tires that must not be
reversed.
DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION UNIFORM
TIRE QUALITY GRADES
The following tire grading categories were established
by the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration.
The specific grade rating assigned by the tire’s manu-
facturer in each category is shown on the sidewall of the
tires on your vehicle.
All passenger vehicle tires must conform to Federal
safety requirements in addition to these grades.
Treadwear
The Treadwear grade is a comparative rating, based on
the wear rate of the tire when tested under controlled
conditions on a specified government test course. For
example, a tire graded 150 would wear one and one-half
times as well on the government course as a tire graded
100. The relative performance of tires depends upon the
actual conditions of their use, however, and may depart
significantly from the norm due to variations in driving
habits, service practices, and differences in road charac-
teristics and climate.
Tire Rotation
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 385
Traction Grades
The Traction grades, from highest to lowest, are AA, A,
B, and C. These grades represent the tire’s ability to stop
on wet pavement, as measured under controlled condi-
tions on specified government test surfaces of asphalt
and concrete. A tire marked C may have poor traction
performance.
WARNING!
The traction grade assigned to this tire is based on
straight-ahead braking traction tests, and does not
include acceleration, cornering, hydroplaning, or
peak traction characteristics.
Temperature Grades
The temperature grades are A (the highest), B, and C,
representing the tire’s resistance to the generation of
heat and its ability to dissipate heat, when tested under
controlled conditions on a specified indoor laboratory
test wheel. Sustained high temperature can cause the
material of the tire to degenerate and reduce tire life,
and excessive temperature can lead to sudden tire
failure. The grade C corresponds to a level of perfor-
mance, which all passenger vehicle tires must meet
under the Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard No.
109. Grades B and A represent higher levels of perfor-
mance on the laboratory test wheel, than the minimum
required by law.
WARNING!
The temperature grade for this tire is established for
a tire that is properly inflated and not overloaded.
Excessive speed, under-inflation, or excessive load-
ing, either separately or in combination, can cause
heat buildup and possible tire failure.
TIRE PRESSURE MONITOR SYSTEM (TPMS)
The Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) will warn the
driver of a low tire pressure based on the vehicle recom-
mended cold placard pressure.
The tire pressure will vary with temperature by about 1 psi
(7 kPa) for every 12°F (6.5°C). This means that when the
outside temperature decreases, the tire pressure will de-
crease. Tire pressure should always be set based on cold
inflation tire pressure. This is defined as the tire pressure
after the vehicle has not been driven for at least three
hours, or driven less than 1 mile (1.6 km) after a three hour
period. The cold tire inflation pressure must not exceed the
386 STARTING AND OPERATING
maximum inflation pressure molded into the tire sidewall.
Refer to “Tires – General Information” in “Starting And
Operating” for information on how to properly inflate the
vehicle’s tires. The tire pressure will also increase as the
vehicle is driven. This is normal and there should be no
adjustment for this increased pressure.
The TPMS will warn the driver of a low tire pressure if the
tire pressure falls below the low-pressure warning limit for
any reason, including low temperature effects and natural
pressure loss through the tire.
The TPMS will continue to warn the driver of low tire
pressure as long as the condition exists, and will not turn
off until the tire pressure is at or above the recommended
cold placard pressure. Once the low tire pressure warning
(Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light) illuminates, you
must increase the tire pressure to the recommended cold
placard pressure in order for the “Tire Pressure Monitoring
Telltale Light” to turn off.
NOTE: When filling warm tires, the tire pressure may need
to be increased up to an additional 4 psi (30 kPa) above the
recommended cold placard pressure in order to turn the
Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light off.
The system will automatically update and the “Tire Pres-
sure Monitoring Telltale Light” will turn off once the
system receives the updated tire pressures. The vehicle
may need to be driven for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph
(24 km/h) in order for the TPMS to receive this informa-
tion.
For example, your vehicle may have a recommended cold
(parked for more than three hours) placard pressure of
33 psi (227 kPa). If the ambient temperature is 68°F (20°C)
and the measured tire pressure is 28 psi (193 kPa), a
temperature drop to 20°F (-7°C) will decrease the tire
pressure to approximately 24 psi (165 kPa). This tire
pressure is low enough to turn ON the “Tire Pressure
Monitoring Telltale Light”. Driving the vehicle may cause
the tire pressure to rise to approximately 28 psi (193 kPa),
but the “Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light” will still
be on. In this situation, the “Tire Pressure Monitoring
Telltale Light” will turn off only after the tires are inflated
to the vehicle’s recommended cold placard pressure value.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 387
CAUTION!
• The TPMS has been optimized for the original
equipment tires and wheels. TPMS pressures and
warnings have been established for the tire size
equipped on your vehicle. Undesirable system op-
eration or sensor damage may result when using
replacement equipment that is not of the same size,
type, and/or style. The TPM sensor is not designed
for use on aftermarket wheels and may contribute to
a poor overall system performance or sensor damage.
Customers are encouraged to use OEM wheels to
assure proper TPM feature operation.
• Using aftermarket tire sealants may cause the Tire
Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) sensor to be-
come inoperable. After using an aftermarket tire
sealant it is recommended that you take your vehicle
to an authorized dealership to have your sensor
function checked.
• After inspecting or adjusting the tire pressure, al-
ways reinstall the valve stem cap. This will prevent
moisture and dirt from entering the valve stem,
which could damage the Tire Pressure Monitoring
Sensor.
NOTE:
• The TPMS is not intended to replace normal tire care and
maintenance, or to provide warning of a tire failure or
condition.
• The TPMS should not be used as a tire pressure gauge
while adjusting your tire pressure.
• Driving on a significantly under-inflated tire causes the
tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure. Under-
inflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life,
and may affect the vehicle’s handling and stopping
ability.
• The TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire mainte-
nance, and it is the driver’s responsibility to maintain
correct tire pressure using an accurate tire pressure
gauge, even if under-inflation has not reached the level
to trigger illumination of the “Tire Pressure Monitoring
Telltale Light”.
• Seasonal temperature changes will affect tire pressure,
and the TPMS will monitor the actual tire pressure in the
tire.
388 STARTING AND OPERATING
Premium System
The Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) uses wireless
technology with wheel rim mounted electronic sensors to
monitor tire pressure levels. Sensors, mounted to each
wheel as part of the valve stem, transmit tire pressure
readings to the receiver module.
NOTE: It is particularly important for you to check the tire
pressure in all of the tires on your vehicle monthly and to
maintain the proper pressure.
The TPMS consists of the following components:
• Receiver module
• Four Tire Pressure Monitoring Sensors
• Various Tire Pressure Monitoring System messages,
which display in the instrument cluster display
• Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light
Tire Pressure Monitoring Low Pressure Warnings
The “Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light” will
illuminate in the instrument cluster and a chime
will sound when tire pressure is low in one or more of the
four active road tires. In addition, the instrument cluster
will display a graphic of each tire with the low tire pressure
values in a different color.
Tire Pressure Monitor Display
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 389
Should this occur, you should stop as soon as possible and
inflate the tires with low pressure (those in a different color
in the instrument cluster display graphic) to the vehicle’s
recommended cold placard pressure value. Once the sys-
tem receives the updated tire pressures, the system will
automatically update and the graphic display in the instru-
ment cluster will change color back to the original color,
and the “Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light” will turn
off.
NOTE: When filling warm tires, the tire pressure may need
to be increased up to an additional 4 psi (30 kPa) above the
recommended cold placard pressure in order to turn the
Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light off.
The vehicle may need to be driven for up to 10 minutes
above 15 mph (24 km/h) in order for the TPMS to receive
this information.
Service TPMS Warning
When a system fault is detected, the “Tire Pressure Moni-
toring Telltale Light” will flash on and off for 75 seconds
and then remain on solid. The system fault will also sound
a chime. In addition, the instrument cluster will display a
⬙SERVICE TPM SYSTEM⬙ message for a minimum of five
seconds and then display dashes (- -) in place of the
pressure value to indicate which sensor is not being
received.
If the ignition switch is cycled, this sequence will repeat,
providing the system fault still exists. If the system fault no
longer exists, the “Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light”
will no longer flash, and the ⬙SERVICE TPM SYSTEM⬙
message will no longer display, and a pressure value will
display in place of the dashes. A system fault can occur due
to any of the following:
Tire Pressure Monitor Display
390 STARTING AND OPERATING
1. Jamming due to electronic devices or driving next to
facilities emitting the same radio frequencies as the
TPMS sensors.
2. Installing some form of aftermarket window tinting that
affects radio wave signals.
3. Lots of snow or ice around the wheels or wheel hous-
ings.
4. Using tire chains on the vehicle.
5. Using wheels/tires not equipped with TPMS sensors.
NOTE:
• The compact spare tire does not have a tire pressure
monitoring sensor. Therefore, the TPMS will not monitor
the pressure in the compact spare tire.
• If you install the compact spare tire in place of a road tire
that has a pressure below the low-pressure warning
limit, upon the next ignition switch cycle, the “Tire
Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light” will remain on and a
chime will sound. In addition, the graphic in the instru-
ment cluster will still display a pressure value in a
different color.
• After driving the vehicle for up to 10 minutes above
15 mph (24 km/h), the “Tire Pressure Monitoring Tell-
tale Light” will flash on and off for 75 seconds and then
remain on solid. In addition, the instrument cluster will
display a ⬙SERVICE TPM SYSTEM⬙ message for a mini-
mum of five seconds and then display dashes (- -) in
place of the pressure value.
• For each subsequent ignition switch cycle, a chime will
sound, the “Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light” will
flash on and off for 75 seconds and then remain on solid,
and the instrument cluster will display a ⬙SERVICE TPM
SYSTEM⬙ message for a minimum of five seconds and
then display dashes (- -) in place of the pressure value.
• Once you repair or replace the original road tire and
reinstall it on the vehicle in place of the compact spare,
the TPMS will update automatically. In addition, the
“Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light” will turn off
and the graphic in the instrument cluster will display a
new pressure value instead of dashes (- -), as long as no
tire pressure is below the low-pressure warning limit in
any of the four active road tires. The vehicle may need to
be driven for up to 10 minutes above 15 mph (24 km/h)
in order for the TPMS to receive this information.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 391
TPMS Deactivation — If Equipped
The TPMS can be deactivated if replacing all four wheel
and tire assemblies (road tires) with wheel and tire assem-
blies that do not have TPMS Sensors, such as when
installing Winter wheel and tire assemblies on your ve-
hicle. To deactivate the TPMS, first, replace all four wheel
and tire assemblies (road tires) with tires not equipped
with Tire Pressure Monitoring (TPM) Sensors. Then, drive
the vehicle for 20 minutes above 15 mph (24 km/h). The
TPMS will chime, the “TPM Telltale Light” will flash on
and off for 75 seconds and then remain on and the
instrument cluster will display the “SERVICE TPM SYS-
TEM” message and then display dashes (--) in place of the
pressure values. Beginning with the next ignition switch
cycle, the TPMS will no longer chime or flash the TPM
telltale and display the “SERVICE TPM SYSTEM” message
in the instrument cluster display but dashes (--) will remain
in place of the pressure values.
To reactivate the TPMS, replace all four wheel and tire
assemblies (road tires) with tires equipped with TPM
sensors. Then, drive the vehicle for up to 20 minutes above
15 mph (24 km/h). The TPMS will chime, the “TPM Telltale
Light” will flash on and off for 75 seconds and then turn
off, and the instrument cluster will display the “SERVICE
TPM SYSTEM” message. The instrument cluster will also
display pressure values in place of the dashes. On the next
ignition switch cycle the “SERVICE TPM SYSTEM” mes-
sage will no longer be displayed as long as no system fault
exists.
General Information
The following regulatory statement applies to all radio
frequency (RF) devices equipped in this vehicle:
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules and
with Industry Canada license-exempt RSS standard(s).
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
(1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and
(2) This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired operation.
NOTE: Changes or modifications not expressly approved
by the party responsible for compliance could void the
user’s authority to operate the equipment.
392 STARTING AND OPERATING
FUEL REQUIREMENTS
This engine is designed to meet all emis-
sions regulations and provide optimum
fuel economy and performance when
using high quality unleaded “Regular”
gasoline having a posted octane number
of 87 as specified by the (R+M)/2
method. The use of higher octane “Pre-
mium” gasoline is not required, as it will not provide any
benefit over “Regular” gasoline in these engines.
While operating on gasoline with an octane number of 87,
hearing a light knocking sound from the engine is not a
cause for concern. However, if the engine is heard making
a heavy knocking sound, see your dealer immediately. Use
of gasoline with an octane number lower than 87 can cause
engine failure and may void or not be covered by the New
Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Poor quality gasoline can cause problems such as hard
starting, stalling, and hesitations. If you experience these
symptoms, try another brand of gasoline before consider-
ing service for the vehicle.
Reformulated Gasoline
Many areas of the country require the use of cleaner burning
gasoline referred to as “Reformulated Gasoline”. Reformu-
lated gasoline contains oxygenates and are specifically
blended to reduce vehicle emissions and improve air quality.
The use of reformulated gasoline is recommended. Properly
blended reformulated gasoline will provide improved perfor-
mance and durability of engine and fuel system components.
Gasoline/Oxygenate Blends
Some fuel suppliers blend unleaded gasoline with oxygen-
ates such as ethanol.
CAUTION!
DO NOT use gasoline containing methanol or gasoline
containing more than 15% ethanol (E-15). Use of these
blends may result in starting and drivability problems,
damage critical fuel system components, cause emis-
sions to exceed the applicable standard, and/or cause the
“Malfunction Indicator Light” to illuminate. Please ob-
serve pump labels as they should clearly communicate
if a fuel contains greater than 15% ethanol (E-15).
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 393
Problems that result from using gasoline containing more
than 15% ethanol (E-15) or gasoline containing methanol
are not the responsibility of the manufacturer and may
void or not be covered under New Vehicle Limited War-
ranty.
E-85 Usage In Non-Flex Fuel Vehicles
Non-Flex Fuel Vehicles (FFV) are compatible with gasoline
containing up to 15% ethanol (E-15). Gasoline with higher
ethanol content may void the New Vehicle Limited War-
ranty.
If a Non-FFV vehicle is inadvertently fueled with E-85 fuel,
the engine will have some or all of these symptoms:
• Operate in a lean mode.
• OBD II “Malfunction Indicator Light” on.
• Poor engine performance.
• Poor cold start and cold drivability.
• Increased risk for fuel system component corrosion.
CNG And LP Fuel System Modifications
Modifications that allow the engine to run on compressed
natural gas (CNG) or liquid propane (LP) may result in
damage to the engine, emissions, and fuel system compo-
nents. Problems that result from running CNG or LP are
not the responsibility of the manufacturer and may void or
not be covered under the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
MMT In Gasoline
Methylcyclopentadienyl Manganese Tricarbonyl (MMT) is
a manganese-containing metallic additive that is blended
into some gasoline to increase octane. Gasoline blended
with MMT provides no performance advantage beyond
gasoline of the same octane number without MMT. Gaso-
line blended with MMT reduces spark plug life and
reduces emissions system performance in some vehicles.
The manufacturer recommends that gasoline without
MMT be used in your vehicle. The MMT content of
gasoline may not be indicated on the gasoline pump,
therefore, you should ask your gasoline retailer whether
the gasoline contains MMT. MMT is prohibited in Federal
and California reformulated gasoline.
394 STARTING AND OPERATING
Materials Added To Fuel
Besides using unleaded gasoline with the proper octane
rating, gasolines that contain detergents, corrosion, and
stability additives are recommended. Using gasolines that
have these additives will help improve fuel economy,
reduce emissions, and maintain vehicle performance.
Designated TOP TIER Detergent Gaso-
line contains a higher level of detergents
to further aide in minimizing engine
and fuel system deposits. When avail-
able, the usage of Top Tier Detergent
gasoline is recommended. Visit
www.toptiergas.com for a list of TOP
TIER Detergent Gasoline Retailers.
Indiscriminate use of fuel system cleaning agents should be
avoided. Many of these materials intended for gum and
varnish removal may contain active solvents or similar
ingredients. These can harm fuel system gasket and dia-
phragm materials.
Fuel System Cautions
CAUTION!
Follow these guidelines to maintain your vehicle’s
performance:
• The use of leaded gasoline is prohibited by Federal
law. Using leaded gasoline can impair engine perfor-
mance and damage the emissions control system.
• An out-of-tune engine or certain fuel or ignition
malfunctions can cause the catalytic converter to
overheat. If you notice a pungent burning odor or
some light smoke, your engine may be out of tune or
malfunctioning and may require immediate service.
Contact your authorized dealer for service assistance.
• The use of fuel additives, which are now being sold
as octane enhancers, is not recommended. Most of
these products contain high concentrations of metha-
nol. Fuel system damage or vehicle performance
problems resulting from the use of such fuels or
additives is not the responsibility of the manufac-
turer and may void or not be covered under the New
Vehicle Limited Warranty.
NOTE:
Intentional tampering with the emissions control
system can result in civil penalties being assessed against you.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 395
Carbon Monoxide Warnings
WARNING!
Carbon monoxide (CO) in exhaust gases is deadly.
Follow the precautions below to prevent carbon mon-
oxide poisoning:
• Do not inhale exhaust gases. They contain carbon
monoxide, a colorless and odorless gas, which can
kill. Never run the engine in a closed area, such as a
garage, and never sit in a parked vehicle with the
engine running for an extended period. If the vehicle
is stopped in an open area with the engine running
for more than a short period, adjust the ventilation
system to force fresh, outside air into the vehicle.
• Guard against carbon monoxide with proper main-
tenance. Have the exhaust system inspected every
time the vehicle is raised. Have any abnormal condi-
tions repaired promptly. Until repaired, drive with
all side windows fully open.
FLEXIBLE FUEL (3.6L ENGINE ONLY) —
IF EQUIPPED
E-85 General Information
The information in this section is unique for Flexible Fuel
vehicles only. These vehicles can be identified by a unique
fuel filler door label that states Ethanol (E-85) or Unleaded
Gasoline Only and a yellow fuel cap. Please refer to the
other sections of this manual for information on features
that are common between Flexible Fuel and non-Flexible
Fuel powered vehicles.
CAUTION!
Only vehicles with the E-85 fuel filler door label or a
yellow gas cap can operate on E-85.
Ethanol Fuel (E-85)
E-85 is a mixture of approximately 85% ethanol and 15%
unleaded gasoline.
396 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING!
Ethanol vapors are extremely flammable and could
cause serious personal injury. Never have any smoking
materials lit or products that can cause spark in or near
the vehicle when removing the fuel filler tube cap (gas
cap) or filling the tank. Do not use E-85 as a cleaning
agent and never use it near an open flame.
Fuel Requirements
If your vehicle is E-85 compatible, it will operate on
unleaded gasoline with any octane rating, or solely E-85
fuel, or any mixture of these fuels.
For best results, avoid fueling patterns alternating be-
tween E-85 and unleaded gasoline.
When switching fuel types:
• Add 5 gallons (19 liters) or more when refueling.
• Drive the vehicle immediately after refueling for at least
5 miles (8 km).
Observing these precautions will avoid possible hard start-
ing and/or driveability problems during warm up.
NOTE:
• Use seasonally adjusted E-85 fuel (ASTM D5798). With
non-seasonally adjusted E-85 fuel, hard starting and
rough idle following start up may be experienced even if
the above recommendations are followed, especially
when the ambient temperature is below 32°F (0°C).
• Some additives used in regular gasoline are not fully
compatible with E-85 and may form deposits in your
engine. To eliminate driveability issues that may be
caused by these deposits, a supplemental gasoline addi-
tive, such as Mopar Injector Cleanup or Techron may be
used.
Selection Of Engine Oil For Flexible Fuel Vehicles
(E-85) And Gasoline Vehicles
FFV vehicles operated on E-85 require specially formulated
engine oils. These special requirements are included in
Mopar engine oils, and in equivalent oils meeting FCA
Material Standard MS-6395. It is recommended that engine
oils that are API Certified and meet the requirements of
Material Standard MS-6395 be used. MS-6395 contains
additional requirements, developed during extensive fleet
testing, to provide additional protection to FCA US LLC
engines.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 397
Starting
The characteristics of E-85 fuel make it unsuitable for use
when ambient temperatures fall below 0°F (-18°C). In the
range of 0°F (-18°C) to 32°F (0°C), an increase in the time it
takes for your engine to start may be experienced, and a
deterioration in driveability (sags and/or hesitations) until
the engine is fully warmed up. These issues may be
improved with the use of seasonally adjusted E-85 fuel.
NOTE: Use of the engine block heater (if equipped) may
improve engine start time when using E-85 fuel when the
ambient temperature is less than 32°F (0°C).
Cruising Range
Because E-85 fuel contains less energy per gallon/liter than
gasoline, an increase in fuel consumption will be experi-
enced. The miles per gallon (mpg)/kilometers per liter and
the driving range will decrease by approximately 30%,
compared to gasoline operation.
Replacement Parts
All fuel and engine components in your Flexible Fuel
Vehicle (FFV) are designed to be compatible with ethanol.
Ethanol compatible service components are required.
CAUTION!
Replacing fuel system components with non-ethanol
compatible components can damage your vehicle.
Maintenance
CAUTION!
Do not use ethanol mixtures greater than 85% in your
vehicle. It will make it more difficult for your engine to
start under cold conditions, may affect drivability, and
could cause engine damage.
398 STARTING AND OPERATING
ADDING FUEL
Fuel Filler Cap (Gas Cap)
The gas cap is located behind the fuel filler door on the left
side of the vehicle. If the gas cap is lost or damaged, be sure
the replacement cap has been designed for use with this
vehicle.
NOTE: When removing the fuel filler cap, lay the cap
tether in the hook, located on the fuel filler door reinforce-
ment.
WARNING!
• Never have any smoking materials lit in or near the
vehicle when the gas cap is removed or the tank is
being filled.
• Never add fuel to the vehicle when the engine is
running.
• A fire may result if gasoline is pumped into a
portable container that is inside of a vehicle. You
could be burned. Always place gas containers on the
ground while filling.
• Failure to follow this warning may result in serious
injury or death.
CAUTION!
• Damage to the fuel system or emissions control
system could result from using an improper fuel
tank filler tube cap.
• A poorly fitting fuel filler cap could let impurities
into the fuel system.
• A poorly fitting fuel filler cap may cause the “Mal-
function Indicator Light (MIL)” to turn on.
(Continued)
Fuel Filler Cap (Gas Cap)
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 399
CAUTION! (Continued)
• To avoid fuel spillage and overfilling, do not “top
off” the fuel tank after filling. When the fuel nozzle
“clicks” or shuts off, the fuel tank is full.
NOTE:
• When the fuel nozzle “clicks” or shuts off, the fuel tank
is full.
• Tighten the gas cap until you hear a “clicking” sound.
This is an indication that the gas cap is tightened
properly. The MIL in the instrument cluster may turn on
if the gas cap is not secured properly. Make sure that the
gas cap is tightened each time the vehicle is refueled.
Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message
If the vehicle diagnostic system determines that the fuel
filler cap is loose, improperly installed, or damaged, the
word “gASCAP” will display in the odometer. If this
occurs, tighten the fuel filler cap until a “clicking” sound is
heard and push the TRIP ODOMETER button to turn off
the message. If the problem persists, the message will
appear the next time the vehicle is started.
A loose, improperly installed, or damaged fuel filler cap may
also turn on the MIL. Refer to “Onboard Diagnostic System” in
“Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further information.
VEHICLE LOADING
The load carrying capacity of your vehicle is shown on the
“Vehicle Certification Label”. This information should be
used for passenger and luggage loading as indicated.
Do not exceed the specified Gross Vehicle Weight Rating
(GVWR) or the Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR).
Vehicle Certification Label
Your vehicle has a Vehicle Certification Label affixed to the
drivers side B-Pillar or the rear of the driver’s door.
The label contains the following information:
• Name of manufacturer
• Month and year of manufacture
• Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR)
• Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) front
• Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) rear
• Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
• Type of vehicle
• Month, Day, and Hour of manufacture (MDH)
The bar code allows a computer scanner to read the VIN.
400 STARTING AND OPERATING
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR)
The GVWR is the total allowable weight of your vehicle.
This includes driver, passengers, and cargo. The total load
must be limited so that you do not exceed the GVWR.
Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR)
The GAWR is the maximum capacity of the front and rear
axles. Distribute the load over the front and rear axles
evenly. Make sure that you do not exceed either front or
rear GAWR.
WARNING!
Because the front wheels steer the vehicle, it is impor-
tant that you do not exceed the maximum front or rear
GAWR. A dangerous driving condition can result if
either rating is exceeded. You could lose control of the
vehicle and have a collision.
Overloading
The load carrying components (axle, springs, tires, wheels,
etc.) of your vehicle will provide satisfactory service as
long as you do not exceed the GVWR and the front and
rear GAWR.
The best way to figure out the total weight of your vehicle
is to weigh it when it is fully loaded and ready for
operation. Weigh it on a commercial scale to ensure that it
is not over the GVWR.
Figure out the weight on the front and rear of the vehicle
separately. It is important that you distribute the load
evenly over the front and rear axles.
Overloading can cause potential safety hazards and
shorten useful service life. Heavier axles or suspension
components do not necessarily increase the vehicle’s
GVWR.
Loading
To load your vehicle properly, first figure out its empty
weight, axle-by-axle and side-by-side. Store heavier items
down low and be sure you distribute their weight as
evenly as possible. Stow all loose items securely before
driving. If weighing the loaded vehicle shows that you
have exceeded either GAWR, but the total load is within
the specified GVWR, you must redistribute the weight.
Improper weight distribution can have an adverse effect on
the way your vehicle steers and handles and the way the
brakes operate.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 401
TRAILER TOWING
In this section you will find safety tips and information on
limits to the type of towing you can reasonably do with
your vehicle. Before towing a trailer, carefully review this
information to tow your load as efficiently and safely as
possible.
To maintain the New Vehicle Limited Warranty coverage,
follow the requirements and recommendations in this
manual concerning vehicles used for trailer towing.
Common Towing Definitions
The following trailer towing related definitions will assist
you in understanding the following information:
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR)
The GVWR is the total allowable weight of your vehicle. This
includes driver, passengers, cargo and tongue weight. The
total load must be limited so that you do not exceed the
GVWR. Refer to “Vehicle Loading/Vehicle Certification La-
bel” in “Starting And Operating” for further information.
Gross Trailer Weight (GTW)
The GTW is the weight of the trailer plus the weight of all
cargo, consumables and equipment (permanent or tempo-
rary) loaded in or on the trailer in its ⬙loaded and ready for
operation⬙ condition.
The recommended way to measure GTW is to put your
fully loaded trailer on a vehicle scale. The entire weight of
the trailer must be supported by the scale.
Gross Combination Weight Rating (GCWR)
The GCWR is the total allowable weight of your vehicle
and trailer when weighed in combination.
Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR)
The GAWR is the maximum capacity of the front and rear
axles. Distribute the load over the front and rear axles evenly.
Make sure that you do not exceed either front or rear GAWR.
Refer to “Vehicle Loading/Vehicle Certification Label” in
“Starting And Operating” for further information.
WARNING!
It is important that you do not exceed the maximum
front or rear GAWR. A dangerous driving condition
can result if either rating is exceeded.
Tongue Weight (TW)
The tongue weight is the downward force exerted on the
hitch ball by the trailer. You must consider this as part of
the load on your vehicle.
402 STARTING AND OPERATING
Frontal Area
The frontal area is the maximum height multiplied by the
maximum width of the front of a trailer.
Trailer Sway Control — Electronic
Refer to “Electronic Brake Control System/Trailer Sway
Control (TSC)” in “Starting And Operating” for further
information.
Trailer Sway Control — Mechanical
The trailer sway control is a telescoping link that can be
installed between the hitch receiver and the trailer tongue
that typically provides adjustable friction associated with
the telescoping motion to dampen any unwanted trailer
swaying motions while traveling.
Weight-Carrying Hitch
A weight-carrying hitch supports the trailer tongue weight,
just as if it were luggage located at a hitch ball or some
other connecting point of the vehicle. These kinds of
hitches are the most popular on the market today and they
are commonly used to tow small and medium sized
trailers.
Weight-Distributing Hitch
A weight-distributing system works by applying leverage
through spring (load) bars. They are typically used for
heavier loads to distribute trailer tongue weight to the tow
vehicle’s front axle and the trailer axle(s). When used in
accordance with the manufacturer’s directions, it provides
for a more level ride, offering more consistent steering and
brake control thereby enhancing towing safety. The addi-
tion of a friction/hydraulic sway control also dampens
sway caused by traffic and crosswinds and contributes
positively to tow vehicle and trailer stability. Trailer sway
control and a weight distributing (load equalizing) hitch
are recommended for heavier Tongue Weights (TW) and
may be required depending on vehicle and trailer
configuration/loading to comply with Gross Axle Weight
Rating (GAWR) requirements.
WARNING!
• An improperly adjusted Weight Distributing Hitch
system may reduce handling, stability, braking per-
formance, and could result in a collision.
(Continued)
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 403
WARNING! (Continued)
• Weight Distributing Systems may not be compatible
with Surge Brake Couplers. Consult with your hitch
and trailer manufacturer or a reputable Recreational
Vehicle dealer for additional information.
Trailer Hitch Classification
The following chart provides the industry standard for the
maximum trailer weight a given trailer hitch class can tow
and should be used to assist you in selecting the correct
trailer hitch for your intended towing condition.
Trailer Hitch Classification Definitions
Class Max. Trailer Hitch Industry Standards
Class I - Light Duty 2,000 lbs (907 kg)
Class II - Medium Duty 3,500 lbs (1,587 kg)
Class III - Heavy Duty 5,000 lbs (2,267 kg)
Class IV - Extra Heavy Duty 10,000 lbs (4,535 kg)
Refer to the “Trailer Towing Weights (Maximum Trailer Weight Ratings)” chart for the Maximum Gross Trailer Weight
(GTW) towable for your given drivetrain.
All trailer hitches should be professionally installed on your vehicle.
404 STARTING AND OPERATING
Trailer Towing Weights (Maximum Trailer Weight Ratings)
The following chart provides the maximum trailer weight ratings towable for your given drivetrain:
Engine/
Transmission
GCWR (Gross
Combined Wt. Rating)
Frontal Area
Max. GTW
(Gross Trailer Wt.)
Max. Tongue Wt.
2.4L/Automatic 6,000 lbs (2 721 kg) 22 sq ft (2.0 sq m) 1,000 lbs (453 kg) which
includes up to 5 persons
& Luggage
100 lbs (45 kg)
3.6L/Automatic 7,300 lbs (3 311 kg) 32 sq ft (3.0 sq m) 2,500 lbs (1 133 kg) which
includes 1 to 2 persons
& Luggage
200 lbs (90 kg)
7,300 lbs (3 311 kg) 32 sq ft (3.0 sq m) 2,000 lbs (907 kg) which
includes 3 to 4 persons
& Luggage
150 lbs (68 kg)
7,300 lbs (3 311 kg) 32 sq ft (3.0 sq m) 1,500 lbs (680 kg) which
includes 5 to 7 persons
& Luggage
100 lbs (45 kg)
* Except for
AWD models
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 405
NOTE:
•
The trailer tongue weight must be considered as part of the
combined weight of occupants and cargo, and should never
exceed the weight referenced on the Tire and Loading
Information placard. Refer to “Tire Safety Information” in
“Starting And Operating” for further information.
• *
For All Wheel Drive (AWD) models carrying 5 to 7
persons and luggage will exceed the rear Gross Axle
WeightRating (GAWR) and therefore should not be at-
tempted.
Trailer And Tongue Weight
Never exceed the maximum tongue weight stamped on
your bumper or trailer hitch.
Consider the following items when computing the weight
on the rear axle of the vehicle:
• The tongue weight of the trailer.
• The weight of any other type of cargo or equipment put
in or on your vehicle.
• The weight of the driver and all passengers.
406 STARTING AND OPERATING
NOTE: Remember that everything put into or on the
trailer adds to the load on your vehicle. Also, additional
factory-installed options or authorized dealer-installed op-
tions must be considered as part of the total load on your
vehicle. Refer to the “Tire And Loading Information”
placard for the maximum combined weight of occupants
and cargo for your vehicle.
Towing Requirements
To promote proper break-in of your new vehicle drivetrain
components the following guidelines are recommended:
CAUTION!
• Do not tow a trailer at all during the first 500 miles
(805 km) the new vehicle is driven. The engine, axle
or other parts could be damaged.
• Then, during the first 500 miles (805 km) that a trailer
is towed, do not drive over 50 mph (80 km/h) and do
not make starts at full throttle. This helps the engine
and other parts of the vehicle wear in at the heavier
loads.
Perform the maintenance listed in the “Maintenance
Schedule”. Refer to “Maintenance Schedule” for further
information. When towing a trailer, never exceed the
GAWR, or GCWR, ratings.
WARNING!
Improper towing can lead to a collision. Follow these
guidelines to make your trailer towing as safe as
possible:
• Make certain that the load is secured in the trailer
and that it will not shift during travel. When traile-
ring cargo that is not fully secured, dynamic load
shifts can occur that may be difficult for the driver to
control. You could lose control of your vehicle and
have a collision.
• When hauling cargo or towing a trailer, do not
overload your vehicle or trailer. Overloading can
cause a loss of control, poor performance, or damage
to brakes, axle, engine, transmission, steering, sus-
pension, chassis structure, or tires.
• Safety chains must always be used between your
vehicle and trailer. Always connect the chains to the
frame or hook retainers of the vehicle hitch. Cross
the chains under the trailer tongue and allow enough
slack for turning corners.
(Continued)
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 407
WARNING! (Continued)
• Vehicles with trailers should not be parked on a
grade. When parking, apply the parking brake on the
tow vehicle. Put the tow vehicle automatic transmis-
sion in PARK. Always block or ⴖchockⴖ the trailer
wheels.
• GCWR must not be exceeded.
• Total weight must be distributed between the tow
vehicle and the trailer such that the following four
ratings are not exceeded:
1. GVWR
2. GTW
3. GAWR
4. Tongue weight rating for the trailer hitch utilized.
Towing Requirements — Tires
• Do not attempt to tow a trailer while using a compact
spare tire.
• Proper tire inflation pressures are essential to the safe
and satisfactory operation of your vehicle. Refer to
“Tires – General Information” in “Starting And Operat-
ing” for proper tire inflation procedures.
• Check the trailer tires for proper tire inflation pressures
before trailer usage.
• Check for signs of tire wear or visible tire damage before
towing a trailer. Refer to “Tires – General Information”
in “Starting And Operating” for the proper inspection
procedure.
• When replacing tires, refer to “Tires – General Informa-
tion” in “Starting And Operating” for information on
replacement tires and for the proper tire replacement
procedures. Replacing tires with a higher load carrying
capacity will not increase the vehicle’s GVWR and
GAWR limits.
Towing Requirements — Trailer Brakes
• Do not interconnect the hydraulic brake system or
vacuum system of your vehicle with that of the trailer.
This could cause inadequate braking and possible per-
sonal injury.
• An electronically actuated trailer brake controller is
required when towing a trailer with electronically actu-
ated brakes. When towing a trailer equipped with a
hydraulic surge actuated brake system, an electronic
brake controller is not required.
408 STARTING AND OPERATING
• Trailer brakes are recommended for trailers over
1,000 lbs (453 kg) and required for trailers in excess of
2,000 lbs (907 kg).
WARNING!
• Do not connect trailer brakes to your vehicle’s hy-
draulic brake lines. It can overload your brake sys-
tem and cause it to fail. You might not have brakes
when you need them and could have a collision.
• Towing any trailer will increase your stopping dis-
tance. When towing you should allow for additional
space between your vehicle and the vehicle in front
of you. Failure to do so could result in a collision.
CAUTION!
If the trailer weighs more than 1,000 lbs (453 kg)
loaded, it should have its own brakes and they should
be of adequate capacity. Failure to do this could lead to
accelerated brake lining wear, higher brake pedal
effort, and longer stopping distances.
Towing Requirements — Trailer Lights And Wiring
(If Equipped)
Whenever you pull a trailer, regardless of the trailer size,
stoplights and turn signals on the trailer are required for
motoring safety.
The Trailer Tow Package may include a four- and seven-pin
wiring harness. Use a factory approved trailer harness and
connector.
NOTE: Do not cut or splice wiring into the vehicles wiring
harness.
The electrical connections are all complete to the vehicle
but you must mate the harness to a trailer connector. Refer
to the following illustrations.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 409
NOTE:
• Disconnect trailer wiring connector from the vehicle
before launching a boat (or any other device plugged
into vehicle’s electrical connect) into water.
• Be sure to reconnect after clear from water area.
Four-Pin Connector
1 — Female Pins
2—MalePin
3 — Ground
4 — Park
5 — Left Stop/Turn
6 — Right Stop/Turn
Seven-Pin Connector
1 — Battery
2 — Backup Lamps
3 — Right Stop/Turn
4 — Electric Brakes
5 — Ground
6 — Left Stop/Turn
7 — Running Lamps
410 STARTING AND OPERATING
Towing Tips
Before setting out on a trip, practice turning, stopping, and
backing up the trailer in an area located away from heavy
traffic.
Automatic Transmission
The DRIVE range can be selected when towing. However,
if frequent shifting occurs while in DRIVE, use the
AutoStick shift control to manually select a lower gear.
NOTE: Using a lower gear while operating the vehicle
under heavy loading conditions will improve performance
and extend transmission life by reducing excessive shifting
and heat build up. This action will also provide better
engine braking.
If you REGULARLY tow a trailer for more than 45 minutes
of continuous operation, then change the transmission
fluid and filter as specified for “police, taxi, fleet, or
frequent trailer towing”. Refer to the “Maintenance Sched-
ule” for the proper maintenance intervals.
NOTE: Check the four-speed automatic transmission fluid
level before towing. The six-speed transmission does not
require a fluid level check before towing. If, however, you
notice fluid leakage or transmission malfunction, see your
authorized dealer immediately for assistance.
Speed Control — If Equipped
• Do not use in hilly terrain or with heavy loads.
• When using the speed control, if you experience speed
drops greater than 10 mph (16 km/h), disengage until
you can get back to cruising speed.
• Use speed control in flat terrain and with light loads to
maximize fuel efficiency.
AutoStick
• When using the AutoStick shift control, select the high-
est gear that allows for adequate performance and
avoids frequent downshifts. For example, choose “4” if
the desired speed can be maintained. Choose “3” or “2”
if needed to maintain the desired speed.
• To prevent excess heat generation, avoid continuous
driving at high RPM. Reduce vehicle speed as necessary
to avoid extended driving at high RPM. Return to a
higher gear or vehicle speed when grade and road
conditions allow.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 411
Cooling System
To reduce potential for engine and transmission overheat-
ing, take the following actions:
City Driving
When stopped for short periods, shift the transmission into
NEUTRAL and increase engine idle speed.
Highway Driving
Reduce speed.
Air Conditioning
Turn off temporarily.
RECREATIONAL TOWING (BEHIND MOTORHOME, ETC.)
Towing This Vehicle Behind Another Vehicle
Towing Condition Wheel OFF the Ground FWD Models AWD Models
Flat Tow NONE NOT ALLOWED NOT ALLOWED
Dolly Tow Front OK NOT ALLOWED
Rear NOT ALLOWED NOT ALLOWED
On Trailer ALL OK OK
NOTE: When towing your vehicle, always follow applicable state and provincial laws. Contact state and provincial
Highway Safety offices for additional details.
412 STARTING AND OPERATING
Recreational Towing
Front-Wheel Drive (FWD) Models
Recreational towing is allowed ONLY if the front wheels
are OFF the ground. This may be accomplished using a tow
dolly or vehicle trailer. If using a tow dolly, follow this
procedure:
1. Properly secure the dolly to the tow vehicle, following
the dolly manufacturer’s instructions.
2. Drive the front wheels onto the tow dolly.
3. Firmly apply the parking brake. Place the transmission
in PARK.
4. Properly secure the front wheels to the dolly, following
the dolly manufacturer’s instructions.
5. Release the parking brake.
CAUTION!
• DO NOT flat tow this vehicle. Damage to the drive-
train will result. If this vehicle requires towing,
make sure the drive wheels are OFF the ground.
• Towing this vehicle in violation of the above require-
ments can cause severe transmission damage. Dam-
age from improper towing is not covered under the
New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
All-Wheel Drive (AWD) Models
Recreational towing (with all four wheels on the ground, or
using a towing dolly) is NOT ALLOWED. The only
acceptable method for towing this vehicle (behind another
vehicle) is on a vehicle trailer with all four wheels OFF the
ground.
CAUTION!
Towing this vehicle with ANY of its wheels on the
ground can cause severe transmission and/or power
transfer unit damage. Damage from improper towing is
not covered under the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 413
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
CONTENTS
䡵 HAZARD WARNING FLASHERS ............416
䡵 IF YOUR ENGINE OVERHEATS .............416
▫ 2.4L Engine — If Equipped ................417
䡵 WHEEL AND TIRE TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS . .417
▫ Torque Specifications ....................417
䡵 JACKING AND TIRE CHANGING ...........419
▫ Jack Location — If Equipped ..............419
▫ Spare Tire Location .....................419
▫ Preparations For Jacking .................420
▫ Spare Tire Removal .....................420
▫ Spare Tire Stowage......................421
▫ Jacking Instructions .....................422
▫ Road Tire Installation ....................427
䡵 JUMP-STARTING ........................429
▫ Preparations For Jump-Start ...............430
▫ Jump-Starting Procedure ..................431
䡵 FREEING A STUCK VEHICLE ..............432
䡵 GEAR SELECTOR OVERRIDE ..............434
䡵 TOWING A DISABLED VEHICLE ............435
▫ All-Wheel Drive (AWD) Models ............436
▫ Front-Wheel Drive (FWD) Models ...........436
䡵 ENHANCED ACCIDENT RESPONSE SYSTEM
(EARS) ...............................437
䡵 EVENT DATA RECORDER (EDR) ............437
6
HAZARD WARNING FLASHERS
The Hazard Warning flasher switch is located in the
instrument panel switch bank, above the climate controls.
Push the switch to turn on the Hazard Warning
flasher. When the switch is activated, all directional
turn signals will flash on and off to warn oncoming traffic
of an emergency. Push the switch a second time to turn off
the Hazard Warning flashers.
This is an emergency warning system and it should not be
used when the vehicle is in motion. Use it when your
vehicle is disabled and it is creating a safety hazard for
other motorists.
When you must leave the vehicle to seek assistance, the
Hazard Warning flashers will continue to operate even
though the ignition is placed in the OFF position.
NOTE: With extended use, the Hazard Warning flashers
may wear down your battery.
IF YOUR ENGINE OVERHEATS
In any of the following situations, you can reduce the
potential for overheating by taking the appropriate action.
• On the highways — slow down.
• In city traffic — while stopped, place the transmission in
NEUTRAL, but do not increase engine idle speed.
NOTE: There are steps that you can take to slow down an
impending overheat condition:
• If your air conditioner (A/C) is on, turn it off. The A/C
system adds heat to the engine cooling system and
turning the A/C off can help remove this heat.
• You can also turn the temperature control to maximum
heat, the mode control to floor and the blower control to
High. This allows the heater core to act as a supplement
to the radiator and aids in removing heat from the
engine cooling system.
WARNING!
You or others can be badly burned by hot engine
coolant (antifreeze) or steam from your radiator. If you
see or hear steam coming from under the hood, do not
open the hood until the radiator has had time to cool.
Never try to open a cooling system pressure cap when
the radiator or coolant bottle is hot.
416 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
CAUTION!
Driving with a hot cooling system could damage your
vehicle. If the temperature gauge reads “H,” safely pull
over and stop the vehicle. Idle the vehicle with the A/C
turned off until the pointer drops back into the normal
range. If the pointer remains on the “H,” and you hear
continuous chimes, turn the engine OFF immediately,
and call for service.
2.4L Engine — If Equipped
On hot days, the engine oil temperature may become too
hot during sustained high-speed driving or if towing a
trailer up long grades. If this happens, a HOTOIL message
will flash in the odometer and the vehicle speed will be
reduced to 48 mph (77 km/h) maximum until the engine
oil temperature is reduced.
NOTE: The maximum vehicle speed is reduced to 48 mph
(77 km/h), you may reduce vehicle speed further as
needed. Once the engine oil temperature is reduced, you
may continue to drive normally
WHEEL AND TIRE TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS
Proper lug nut/bolt torque is very important to ensure that
the wheel is properly mounted to the vehicle. Any time a
wheel has been removed and reinstalled on the vehicle, the
lug nuts/bolts should be torqued using a properly cali-
brated torque wrench.
Torque Specifications
Lug Nut/Bolt Torque **Lug Nut/
Bolt Size
Lug Nut/
Bolt
Socket
Size
100 Ft-Lbs (135 N·m) M12 x 1.5 19 mm
**Use only your authorized dealer recommended lug nuts/
bolts and clean or remove any dirt or oil before tightening.
6
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 417
Inspect the wheel mounting surface prior to mounting the
tire and remove any corrosion or loose particles.
Tighten the lug nuts/bolts in a star pattern until each
nut/bolt has been tightened twice.
After 25 miles (40 km), check the lug nut/bolt torque to be
sure that all the lug nuts/bolts are properly seated against
the wheel.
WARNING!
To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off the jack, do
not tighten the lug nuts fully until the vehicle has been
lowered. Failure to follow this warning may result in
personal injury.
Wheel Mounting Surface
Torque Patterns
418 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
JACKING AND TIRE CHANGING
WARNING!
• Do not attempt to change a tire on the side of the
vehicle close to moving traffic. Pull far enough off
the road to avoid the danger of being hit when
operating the jack or changing the wheel.
• Being under a jacked-up vehicle is dangerous. The
vehicle could slip off the jack and fall on you. You
could be crushed. Never put any part of your body
under a vehicle that is on a jack. If you need to get
under a raised vehicle, take it to a service center
where it can be raised on a lift.
• Never start or run the engine while the vehicle is on
a jack.
• The jack is designed to be used as a tool for changing
tires only. The jack should not be used to lift the
vehicle for service purposes. The vehicle should be
jacked on a firm level surface only. Avoid ice or
slippery areas.
Jack Location — If Equipped
The jack and jack-handle are stowed underneath a cover in
the rear storage bin in the cargo area.
Spare Tire Location
The spare tire is stowed underneath the rear of the vehicle
and is held in place by means of a cable winch mechanism.
Jack Storage Location
6
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 419
Preparations For Jacking
1. Park the vehicle on a firm, level surface as far from the
edge of the roadway as possible. Avoid icy or slippery
areas.
WARNING!
Do not attempt to change a tire on the side of the
vehicle close to moving traffic. Pull far enough off the
road to avoid the danger of being hit when operating
the jack or changing the wheel.
2. Turn on the Hazard Warning flashers.
3. Set the parking brake.
4. Place the gear selector in PARK.
5. Turn OFF the ignition.
6. Block both the front and rear of the wheel diagonally
opposite of the jacking position. For ex-
ample, if changing the right front tire, block
the left rear wheel.
NOTE: Passengers should not remain in the
vehicle when the vehicle is being jacked.
Spare Tire Removal
NOTE: On seven-passenger models, fold the third-row
passenger seats flat. This will provide more space when
accessing the jacking tools and when operating the winch
mechanism.
1. Remove the jack-handle components 1, 2 and 3 from
storage and assemble them.
Lowering/Raising Spare Tire
1 — Spare Tire Jack Handle
2 — Extension 1
3 — Extension 2
420 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
NOTE: Assemble components 2 and 3 by seating the small
ball at the end of component 2 in the small hole at the end
of component 3. This will lock these components together.
Assemble components 1 and 2 so that the wheel nut socket
at the end of component 1 faces upward when seated on
component 2. This will make it easier to rotate the assem-
bly when operating the winch mechanism.
2. Fit the assembled jack-handle over the winch drive nut
located in the jack storage area. Rotate the jack-handle
assembly counterclockwise until the spare tire is on the
ground with enough cable slack to allow you to pull the
spare tire out from underneath the vehicle.
CAUTION!
The winch mechanism is designed for use with the
jack-handle only. Use of an air wrench or other power
tools is not recommended and it can damage the winch.
3. Pull the spare tire out from underneath the vehicle and
raise it upright so the tire’s tread is on the ground.
4. Tilt the retainer at the end of the winch cable and
remove it from the center of the wheel.
Spare Tire Stowage
NOTE: Refer to “Spare Tire Removal” for information on
assembling the winch tools.
1. Place the spare tire near to the winch cable. Hold the
spare upright so that the tire’s tread is on the ground
and the valve stem is at the top of the wheel facing away
from the rear of the vehicle.
2. Tilt the retainer at the end of the winch cable and drop
it through the center of the wheel. Then place the spare
tire with the cable and retainer underneath the vehicle.
Spare Tire Retainer
6
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 421
3. Fit the assembled jack-handle over the winch drive nut.
Rotate the jack-handle assembly clockwise to raise the
spare tire into the storage area. Continue to rotate the
jack-handle assembly until you hear the winch mecha-
nism click three times. It cannot be over tightened. Push
against the tire several times to be sure it is held securely
in place.
Jacking Instructions
WARNING!
Carefully follow these tire changing warnings to help
prevent personal injury or damage to your vehicle:
• Always park on a firm, level surface as far from the
edge of the roadway as possible before raising the
vehicle.
• Turn on the Hazard Warning flasher.
• Block the wheel diagonally opposite the wheel to be
raised.
• Apply the parking brake firmly and set an automatic
transmission in PARK.
• Never start or run the engine with the vehicle on a
jack.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
• Do not let anyone sit in the vehicle when it is on a
jack.
• Do not get under the vehicle when it is on a jack. If
you need to get under a raised vehicle, take it to a
service center where it can be raised on a lift.
• Only use the jack in the positions indicated and for
lifting this vehicle during a tire change.
• If working on or near a roadway, be extremely
careful of motor traffic.
• To assure that spare tires, flat or inflated, are securely
stowed, spares must be stowed with the valve stem
facing the ground.
422 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
CAUTION!
Do not attempt to raise the vehicle by jacking on
locations other than those indicated in the Jacking
Instructions for this vehicle.
1. Remove the spare tire, jack, and jack-handle from stow-
age.
2. Loosen, but do not remove, the wheel nuts on the wheel
with the flat tire. Turn the wheel nuts counterclockwise
one turn while the wheel is still on the ground.
Jack Warning Label
Jacking Locations
6
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 423
3. Place the jack in the notches underneath the lift area that
is closest to the flat tire. Center the jack saddle between
the drain flute formations on the sill flange. Turn the
jack screw clockwise to firmly engage the jack saddle
with the lift area of the sill flange.
Front Jacking Location
Front Jack Engaged With Jack Handle
424 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
4. Raise the vehicle by turning the jack screw clockwise
with the jack handle. Raise the vehicle until the tire just
clears the road surface and enough clearance is obtained
to install the spare tire. Minimum tire lift provides
maximum stability.
WARNING!
Raising the vehicle higher than necessary can make the
vehicle less stable. It could slip off the jack and hurt
someone near it. Raise the vehicle only enough to
remove the tire.
Rear Jacking Location Rear Jack Engaged With Jack Handle
6
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 425
5. Remove the wheel nuts. For vehicles so equipped,
remove the wheel cover from the wheel by hand. Do not
pry the wheel cover off. Then, pull the wheel off the hub.
WARNING!
To avoid possible personal injury, handle the wheel
covers with care to avoid contact with any sharp edges.
6. Install the spare tire.
CAUTION!
Be sure to mount the spare tire with the valve stem
facing outward. The vehicle could be damaged if the
spare tire is mounted incorrectly.
NOTE:
• For vehicles so equipped, do not attempt to install a
center cap or wheel cover on the compact spare.
• Refer to “Compact Spare Tire” and to “Limited-Use
Spare” under “Tires — General Information” in “Start-
ing and Operating” for additional warnings, cautions,
and information about the spare tire, its use, and
operation.
Mounting Spare Tire
426 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
7. Install the wheel nuts with the cone-shaped end of the
nut toward the wheel. Lightly tighten the wheel nuts.
WARNING!
To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off the jack, do
not tighten the lug nuts fully until the vehicle has been
lowered. Failure to follow this warning may result in
serious injury.
8. Lower the vehicle by turning the jack screw counter-
clockwise with the jack handle.
9. Finish tightening the lug nuts. Push down on the
wrench while at the end of the handle for increased
leverage. Tighten the lug nuts in a star pattern until each
nut has been tightened twice. For the correct lug nut
torque, refer to “Torque Specifications” in this section. If
in doubt about the correct tightness, have them checked
with a torque wrench by your authorized dealer or
service station.
10. Lower the jack to its fully closed position.
11. Place the deflated (flat) tire in the cargo area. Do not
stow the deflated tire in the spare tire stowage
location. Have the deflated (flat) tire repaired or re-
placed as soon as possible.
12. To stow the winch cable and retainer, fit the assembled
jack-handle over the winch drive nut. Rotate the jack-
handle assembly clockwise until you hear the winch
mechanism click three times. It cannot be over tight-
ened.
13. Stow the jack-handle and jack. Remove the wheel
blocks from the vehicle and release the park brake.
14. Check the tire pressure as soon as possible. Adjust the
tire pressure as required.
Road Tire Installation
Vehicles Equipped With Wheel Covers
1. Mount the road tire on the axle.
2. To ease the installation process for steel wheels with
wheel covers, install two lug nuts on the mounting
studs which are on each side of the valve stem. Install
the lug nuts with the cone shaped end of the nut toward
the wheel. Lightly tighten the lug nuts.
6
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 427
WARNING!
To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off the jack, do
not tighten the lug nuts fully until the vehicle has been
lowered. Failure to follow this warning may result in
serious injury.
3. Align the valve notch in the wheel cover with the valve
stem on the wheel. Install the cover by hand, snapping
the cover over the two lug nuts. Do not use a hammer or
excessive force to install the cover.
4. Install the remaining lug nuts with the cone shaped end
of the nut toward the wheel. Lightly tighten the lug
nuts.
WARNING!
To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off the jack, do
not tighten the lug nuts fully until the vehicle has been
lowered. Failure to follow this warning may result in
serious injury.
5. Lower the vehicle to the ground by turning the jack
handle counterclockwise.
6. Finish tightening the lug nuts. Push down on the
wrench while at the end of the handle for increased
leverage. Tighten the lug nuts in a star pattern until each
nut has been tightened twice. For the correct lug nut
torque, refer to “Torque Specifications” in this section. If
in doubt about the correct tightness, have them checked
with a torque wrench by your authorized dealer or
service station.
Tire And Wheel Cover Or Center Cap
1 — Valve Stem 4 — Wheel Cover
2 — Valve Notch 5 — Road Wheel
3 — Wheel Lug Nut
428 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
7. After 25 miles (40 km), check the lug nut torque with a
torque wrench to ensure that all lug nuts are properly
seated against the wheel.
Vehicles Without Wheel Covers
1. Mount the road tire on the axle.
2.
Install the remaining lug nuts with the cone shaped end of
the nut toward the wheel. Lightly tighten the lug nuts.
WARNING!
To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off the jack, do
not tighten the lug nuts fully until the vehicle has been
lowered. Failure to follow this warning may result in
serious injury.
3. Lower the vehicle to the ground by turning the jack
handle counterclockwise.
4. Finish tightening the lug nuts. Push down on the
wrench while at the end of the handle for increased
leverage. Tighten the lug nuts in a star pattern until each
nut has been tightened twice. For proper lug nut torque,
refer to “Torque Specifications” in this section. If in
doubt about the correct tightness, have them checked
with a torque wrench by your authorized dealer or
service station.
5. After 25 miles (40 km), check the lug nut torque with a
torque wrench to ensure that all lug nuts are properly
seated against the wheel.
JUMP-STARTING
If your vehicle has a discharged battery, it can be jump-
started using a set of jumper cables and a battery in another
vehicle or by using a portable battery booster pack. Jump-
starting can be dangerous if done improperly, so please
follow the procedures in this section carefully.
WARNING!
Do not attempt jump-starting if the battery is frozen. It
could rupture or explode and cause personal injury.
CAUTION!
Do not use a portable battery booster pack or any other
booster source with a system voltage greater than 12
Volts or damage to the battery, starter motor, alternator
or electrical system may occur.
NOTE: When using a portable battery booster pack, follow
the manufacturer’s operating instructions and precautions.
6
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 429
Preparations For Jump-Start
The battery in your vehicle is located between the left front
headlight assembly and the left front wheel splash shield.
To allow jump-starting, there are remote battery posts
located on the left side of the engine compartment.
WARNING!
• Take care to avoid the radiator cooling fan whenever
the hood is raised. It can start anytime the ignition
switch is ON. You can be injured by moving fan
blades.
• Remove any metal jewelry such as rings, watch
bands and bracelets that could make an inadvertent
electrical contact. You could be seriously injured.
• Batteries contain sulfuric acid that can burn your
skin or eyes and generate hydrogen gas which is
flammable and explosive. Keep open flames or
sparks away from the battery.
1. Set the parking brake, shift the automatic transmission
into PARK and turn the ignition to LOCK.
2. Turn off the heater, radio, and all unnecessary electrical
accessories.
3. Remove the protective cover over the remote positive
(+) battery post. To remove the cover, push the locking
tab and pull upward on the cover.
Remote Battery Posts
1 — Remote Positive (+) Post (Covered With Protective Cap)
2 — Remote Negative (-) Post
430 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
4. If using another vehicle to jump-start the battery, park
the vehicle within the jumper cables reach, set the
parking brake and make sure the ignition is OFF.
WARNING!
Do not allow vehicles to touch each other as this could
establish a ground connection and personal injury
could result.
Jump-Starting Procedure
WARNING!
Failure to follow this jump-starting procedure could
result in personal injury or property damage due to
battery explosion.
CAUTION!
Failure to follow these procedures could result in
damage to the charging system of the booster vehicle
or the discharged vehicle.
Connecting The Jumper Cables
1. Connect the positive (+) end of the jumper cable to the
remote positive (+) post of the discharged vehicle.
2. Connect the opposite end of the positive (+) jumper
cable to the positive (+) post of the booster battery.
3. Connect the negative end (-) of the jumper cable to the
negative (-) post of the booster battery.
4. Connect the opposite end of the negative (-) jumper
cable to the remote negative (-) post of the vehicle with
the discharged battery.
WARNING!
Do not connect the jumper cable to the negative (-) post
of the discharged battery. The resulting electrical spark
could cause the battery to explode and could result in
personal injury. Only use the specific ground point, do
not use any other exposed metal parts.
5. Start the engine in the vehicle that has the booster
battery, let the engine idle a few minutes, and then start
the engine in the vehicle with the discharged battery.
6
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 431
6. Once the engine is started, remove the jumper cables in
the reverse sequence:
Disconnecting The Jumper Cables
1. Disconnect the negative (-) jumper cable from the re-
mote negative (-) post of the vehicle with the discharged
battery.
2. Disconnect the negative end (-) of the jumper cable from
the negative (-) post of the booster battery.
3. Disconnect the opposite end of the positive (+) jumper
cable from the positive (+) post of the booster battery.
4. Disconnect the positive (+) end of the jumper cable from
the remote positive (+) post of the discharged vehicle.
5. Reinstall the protective cover over the remote positive
(+) battery post of the discharged vehicle.
If frequent jump-starting is required to start your vehicle,
you should have the battery and charging system in-
spected at your authorized dealer.
CAUTION!
Accessories plugged into the vehicle power outlets
draw power from the vehicle’s battery, even when not
in use (i.e., cellular devices, etc.). Eventually, if plugged
in long enough without engine operation, the vehicle’s
battery will discharge sufficiently to degrade battery
life and/or prevent the engine from starting.
FREEING A STUCK VEHICLE
If your vehicle becomes stuck in mud, sand, or snow, it can
often be moved using a rocking motion. Turn the steering
wheel right and left to clear the area around the front
wheels. Then, shift back and forth between DRIVE and
REVERSE while gently pressing the accelerator. Use the
least amount of accelerator pedal pressure that will main-
tain the rocking motion, without spinning the wheels or
racing the engine.
432 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
CAUTION!
Racing the engine or spinning the wheels may lead to
transmission overheating and failure. Allow the en-
gine to idle with the transmission in NEUTRAL for at
least one minute after every five rocking-motion
cycles. This will minimize overheating and reduce the
risk of transmission failure during prolonged efforts to
free a stuck vehicle.
Push the ⬙ESC Off⬙ switch, to place the Electronic
Stability Control (ESC) system in ⬙ESC Partial
Off⬙ mode, before rocking the vehicle. Refer to
“Electronic Brake Control” in “Starting And Op-
erating” for further information. Once the vehicle has been
freed, push the ⬙ESC Off⬙ switch again to restore ⬙ESC On⬙
mode.
WARNING!
Fast spinning tires can be dangerous. Forces generated
by excessive wheel speeds may cause damage, or even
failure, of the axle and tires. A tire could explode and
injure someone. Do not spin your vehicle’s wheels
faster than 30 mph (48 km/h) or for longer than 30
seconds continuously without stopping when you are
stuck and do not let anyone near a spinning wheel, no
matter what the speed.
CAUTION!
• When “rocking” a stuck vehicle by shifting between
DRIVE and REVERSE, do not spin the wheels faster
than 15 mph (24 km/h), or drivetrain damage may
result.
• Revving the engine or spinning the wheels too fast
may lead to transmission overheating and failure. It
can also damage the tires. Do not spin the wheels
above 30 mph (48 km/h) while in gear (no transmis-
sion shifting occurring).
6
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 433
GEAR SELECTOR OVERRIDE
If a malfunction occurs and the gear selector cannot be
moved out of the PARK position, you can use the following
procedure to temporarily move the gear selector:
1. Turn the engine OFF.
2. Firmly apply the parking brake.
3. Open the center console and remove the gear selector
override access cover (located in the front lower right
corner of the console storage bin).
4. Press and maintain firm pressure on the brake pedal.
5. Insert a screwdriver or similar small tool into the access
port, and push and hold the override release lever
forward.
6. Move the gear selector to the NEUTRAL position.
7. The vehicle may then be started in NEUTRAL.
8. Reinstall the gear selector override access cover.
Gear Selector Override Access Cover
434 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
TOWING A DISABLED VEHICLE
This section describes procedures for towing a disabled vehicle using a commercial towing service.
Towing Condition Wheel OFF The Ground FWD MODELS AWD MODELS
Flat Tow NONE IF transmission is
operable:
• Transmission in
NEUTRAL
• 25 mph (40 km/h)
max speed
• 15 miles (24 km)
max distance
NOT ALLOWED
Wheel Lift Or Dolly Tow Rear NOT ALLOWED
Front OK NOT ALLOWED
Flatbed ALL BEST METHOD OK
Proper towing or lifting equipment is required to prevent
damage to your vehicle. Use only tow bars and other
equipment designed for this purpose, following equipment
manufacturer’s instructions. Use of safety chains is man-
datory. Attach a tow bar or other towing device to main
structural members of the vehicle, not to bumpers or
associated brackets. State and local laws regarding vehicles
under tow must be observed.
If you must use the accessories (wipers, defrosters, etc.)
while being towed, the ignition must be in the ON/RUN
mode, not the ACC mode.
If the key fob is unavailable, or the vehicle’s battery is
discharged, refer to “Gear Selector Override” in this section
for instructions on shifting the transmission out of PARK
for towing.
6
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 435
CAUTION!
• Do not use sling type equipment when towing.
Vehicle damage may occur.
• When securing the vehicle to a flatbed truck, do not
attach to front or rear suspension components. Dam-
age to your vehicle may result from improper towing.
• Do not push or tow this vehicle with another vehicle
as damage to the bumper fascia and transmission
may result.
All-Wheel Drive (AWD) Models
The manufacturer requires towing with all four wheels
OFF the ground. Acceptable methods are to tow the vehicle
on a flatbed, or with one end of the vehicle raised and the
opposite end on a towing dolly.
CAUTION!
Towing this vehicle in violation of the above require-
ments can cause severe transmission and/or power
transfer unit damage. Damage from improper towing
is not covered under the New Vehicle Limited War-
ranty.
Front-Wheel Drive (FWD) Models
The manufacturer recommends towing your vehicle with
all four wheels OFF the ground using a flatbed.
If flatbed equipment is not available, and the transmission
is operable, the vehicle may be flat towed (with all four
wheels on the ground) under the following conditions:
• The transmission must be in NEUTRAL.
• The towing distance must not exceed 15 miles (24 km).
• The towing speed must not exceed 25 mph (40 km/h).
If the transmission is not operable, or the vehicle must be
towed faster than 25 mph (40 km/h) or farther than
15 miles (24 km), it must be towed with the front wheels
OFF the ground (using a flatbed truck, towing dolly, or
wheel lift equipment with the front wheels raised).
CAUTION!
Towing faster than 25 mph (40 km/h) or farther than
15 mi (24 km) with front wheels on the ground can
cause severe transmission damage. Damage from im-
proper towing is not covered by the New Vehicle
Limited Warranty.
436 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
ENHANCED ACCIDENT RESPONSE SYSTEM
(EARS)
This vehicle is equipped with an Enhanced Accident
Response System.
Please refer to “Occupant Restraint Systems” in “Things To
Know Before Starting Your Vehicle” for further information
on the Enhanced Accident Response System (EARS) func-
tion.
EVENT DATA RECORDER (EDR)
This vehicle is equipped with an Event Data Recorder
(EDR). The main purpose of an EDR is to record, in certain
crash or near crash-like situations, such as an air bag
deployment or hitting a road obstacle, data that will assist
in understanding how a vehicle’s systems performed.
Please refer to “Occupant Restraint Systems” in “Things To
Know Before Starting Your Vehicle” for further information
on the Event Data Recorder (EDR).
6
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 437
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
CONTENTS
䡵 ENGINE COMPARTMENT — 2.4L ...........441
䡵 ENGINE COMPARTMENT — 3.6L ...........442
䡵 ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM — OBD II . . .443
▫ Onboard Diagnostic System (OBD II)
Cybersecurity .........................443
▫ Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message .............444
䡵 EMISSIONS INSPECTION AND
MAINTENANCE PROGRAMS ..............444
䡵 REPLACEMENT PARTS ...................445
䡵 DEALER SERVICE .......................445
䡵 MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES .............446
▫ Engine Oil ...........................446
▫ Engine Oil Filter .......................449
▫ Engine Air Cleaner Filter .................449
▫ Maintenance-Free Battery .................449
▫ Air Conditioner Maintenance ..............450
▫ A/C Air Filter — If Equipped .............451
▫ Body Lubrication ......................453
▫ Windshield Wiper Blades .................453
▫ Adding Washer Fluid ...................455
▫ Exhaust System ........................455
▫ Cooling System ........................457
▫ Brake System .........................462
▫ Automatic Transmission ..................463
▫ Rear Drive Assembly (RDA) –
AWD Models Only .....................466
▫ Power Transfer Unit (PTU) –
AWD Models Only .....................466
▫ Appearance Care And Protection From
Corrosion ............................466
7
▫ Cleaning The Cupholders ................472
䡵 FUSES ................................472
▫ Interior Fuses .........................473
▫ Underhood Fuses
(Power Distribution Center) ...............475
䡵 REPLACEMENT BULBS ...................479
䡵 BULB REPLACEMENT ....................480
▫ Front Low/High Beam Headlamp, Turn
Signal/Park Lamp, And Side Marker Lamp . . . .480
▫ Front Fog Lamp .......................482
▫ Rear Turn Signal And Backup Lamp .........482
▫ License Plate Lamp .....................484
䡵 FLUID CAPACITIES ......................486
䡵 FLUIDS, LUBRICANTS, AND GENUINE
PARTS ...............................487
▫ Engine ..............................487
▫ Chassis .............................489
440 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
ENGINE COMPARTMENT — 2.4L
1 — Engine Coolant Reservoir 7 — Power Distribution Center (Fuses)
2 — Power Steering Fluid Reservoir 8 — Air Cleaner Filter
3 — Engine Oil Fill 9 — Automatic Transmission Dipstick (4–Speed Only – If Equipped)
4 — Brake Fluid Reservoir 10 — Washer Fluid Reservoir
5 — Remote Jump Start (Positive Battery Post) 11 — Coolant Pressure Cap
6 — Remote Jump Start (Negative Battery Post) 12 — Engine Oil Dipstick
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 441
ENGINE COMPARTMENT — 3.6L
1 — Engine Coolant Reservoir 5 — Air Cleaner Filter
2 — Power Steering Fluid Reservoir 6 — Washer Fluid Reservoir
3 — Brake Fluid Reservoir 7 — Engine Oil Dipstick
4 — Power Distribution Center (Fuses) 8 — Engine Oil Fill
442 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM — OBD II
Your vehicle is equipped with a sophisticated onboard
diagnostic system called OBD II. This system monitors the
performance of the emissions, engine, and automatic trans-
mission control systems. When these systems are operating
properly, your vehicle will provide excellent performance
and fuel economy, as well as engine emissions well within
current government regulations.
If any of these systems require service, the OBD II system
will turn on the “Malfunction Indicator Light” (MIL). It
will also store diagnostic codes and other information to
assist your service technician in making repairs. Although
your vehicle will usually be drivable and not need towing,
see your authorized dealer for service as soon as possible.
CAUTION!
• Prolonged driving with the MIL on could cause
further damage to the emission control system. It
could also affect fuel economy and driveability. The
vehicle must be serviced before any emissions tests
can be performed.
• If the MIL is flashing while the engine is running,
severe catalytic converter damage and power loss
will soon occur. Immediate service is required.
Onboard Diagnostic System (OBD II) Cybersecurity
Your vehicle is required to have an Onboard Diagnostic
system (OBD II) and a connection port to allow access to
information related to the performance of your emissions
controls. Authorized service technicians may need to ac-
cess this information to assist with the diagnosis and
service of your vehicle and emissions system.
WARNING!
• ONLY an authorized service technician should con-
nect equipment to the OBD II connection port in
order to diagnose or service your vehicle.
•
If unauthorized equipment is connected to the OBD II
connection port, such as a driver-behavior tracking
device, it may:
• Be possible that vehicle systems, including safety
related systems, could be impaired or a loss of
vehicle control could occur that may result in an
accident involving serious injury or death.
• Access, or allow others to access, information
stored in your vehicle systems, including personal
information.
For further information, refer to “Cybersecurity” in the
“Understanding Your Instrument Panel” section.
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 443
Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message
If the vehicle diagnostic system determines that the fuel
filler cap is loose, improperly installed, or damaged, the
word “gASCAP” will display in the odometer. If this
occurs, tighten the fuel filler cap until a “clicking” sound is
heard and push the TRIP ODOMETER button to turn off
the message. If the problem persists, the message will
appear the next time the vehicle is started.
A loose, improperly installed, or damaged fuel filler cap
may also turn on the MIL.
EMISSIONS INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE
PROGRAMS
In some localities, it may be a legal requirement to pass an
inspection of your vehicle’s emissions control system.
Failure to pass could prevent vehicle registration.
For states that require an Inspection and Mainte-
nance (I/M), this check verifies the “Malfunction
Indicator Light (MIL)” is functioning and is not on
when the engine is running, and that the OBD II system is
ready for testing.
Normally, the OBD II system will be ready. The OBD II
system may not be ready if your vehicle was recently
serviced, or recently had a dead battery or a battery
replacement. If the OBD II system should be determined
not ready for the I/M test, your vehicle may fail the test.
Your vehicle has a simple ignition actuated test, which you
can use prior to going to the test station. To check if your
vehicle’s OBD II system is ready, you must do the following:
1. Cycle the ignition to the ON mode, but do not crank or
start the engine.
NOTE: If you crank or start the engine, you will have to
start this test over.
2. As soon as you cycle the ignition to the ON mode, you
will see the “Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL)” symbol
come on as part of a normal bulb check.
3. Approximately 15 seconds later, one of two things will
happen:
• The MIL will flash for about 10 seconds and then return
to being fully illuminated until you cycle the ignition
OFF or start the engine. This means that your vehicle’s
OBD II system is not ready and you should not proceed
to the I/M station.
444 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
• The MIL will not flash at all and will remain fully
illuminated until you place the ignition in the off posi-
tion or start the engine. This means that your vehicle’s
OBD II system is ready and you can proceed to the I/M
station.
If your OBD II system is not ready, you should see your
authorized dealer or repair facility. If your vehicle was
recently serviced or had a battery failure or replacement,
you may need to do nothing more than drive your vehicle
as you normally would in order for your OBD II system to
update. A recheck with the above test routine may then
indicate that the system is now ready.
Regardless of whether your vehicle’s OBD II system is ready
or not, if the MIL is illuminated during normal vehicle
operation you should have your vehicle serviced before
going to the I/M station. The I/M station can fail your
vehicle because the MIL is on with the engine running.
REPLACEMENT PARTS
Use of genuine Mopar parts for normal/scheduled main-
tenance and repairs is highly recommended to ensure the
designed performance. Damage or failures caused by the
use of non-Mopar parts for maintenance and repairs will
not be covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
DEALER SERVICE
Your authorized dealer has the qualified service personnel,
special tools, and equipment to perform all service opera-
tions in an expert manner. Service Manuals are available
which include detailed service information for your ve-
hicle. Refer to these Service Manuals before attempting any
procedure yourself.
NOTE: Intentional tampering with emissions control sys-
tems may void your warranty and could result in civil
penalties being assessed against you.
WARNING!
You can be badly injured working on or around a
motor vehicle. Only do service work for which you
have the knowledge and the proper equipment. If you
have any doubt about your ability to perform a service
job, take your vehicle to a competent mechanic.
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 445
MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES
The pages that follow contain the required maintenance ser-
vices determined by the engineers who designed your vehicle.
Besides those maintenance items specified in the fixed
“Maintenance Schedule”, there are other components
which may require servicing or replacement in the future.
CAUTION!
• Failure to properly maintain your vehicle or perform
repairs and service when necessary could result in
more costly repairs, damage to other components or
negatively impact vehicle performance. Immediately
have potential malfunctions examined by an autho-
rized dealer or qualified repair center.
•
Your vehicle has been built with improved fluids that
protect the performance and durability of your vehicle
and also allow extended maintenance intervals. Do not
use chemical flushes in these components as the
chemicals can damage your engine, transmission, or
air conditioning. Such damage is not covered by the
New Vehicle Limited Warranty. If a flush is needed
because of component malfunction, use only the speci-
fied fluid for the flushing procedure.
Engine Oil
Checking Oil Level
To assure proper engine lubrication, the engine oil must be
maintained at the correct level. Check the oil level at
regular intervals, such as every fuel stop. The best time to
check the engine oil level is about five minutes after a fully
warmed engine is shut off. Checking engine oil level when
the engine is cold will give you an incorrect reading.
Checking the oil while the vehicle is on level ground and
only when the engine is hot, will improve the accuracy of
the oil level readings. Maintain the oil level between the
range markings on the dipstick. Either the range markings
consist of a crosshatch zone marked SAFE or a crosshatch
zone marked with MIN at the low end of the range and
MAX at the high end of the range. Adding 1.0 quart (1.0
liter) of oil when the reading is at the low end of the range
marking will raise the oil level to the high end of the range
marking.
446 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
CAUTION!
Do not overfill the engine. Overfilling the engine will
cause oil aeration, which can lead to loss of oil pressure
and an increase in oil temperature. This could damage
your engine. Also, be sure the oil fill cap is replaced
and tightened after adding oil.
Change Engine Oil
The oil change indicator system will remind you that it is
time to take your vehicle in for scheduled maintenance.
Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for further informa-
tion.
NOTE: Under no circumstances should oil change inter-
vals exceed 10,000 miles (16,000 km), twelve months or 350
hours of engine run time, whichever comes first. The 350
hours of engine run or idle time is generally only a concern
for fleet customers.
Engine Oil Selection
For best performance and maximum protection under all
types of operating conditions, the manufacturer only rec-
ommends engine oils that are API Certified and meet the
requirements of FCA Material Standard MS-6395.
American Petroleum Institute (API) Engine Oil
Identification Symbol
This symbol means that the oil has been
certified by the American Petroleum
Institute (API). The manufacturer only
recommends API Certified engine oils.
This symbol certifies 0W-20, 5W-20,
0W-30, 5W-30 and 10W-30 engine oils.
CAUTION!
Do not use chemical flushes in your engine oil as the
chemicals can damage your engine. Such damage is not
covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Engine Oil Viscosity — 2.4L Engine
Mopar SAE 5W-20 engine oil or equivalent Pennzoil or
Shell Helix is recommended for all operating temperatures.
This engine oil improves low temperature starting and
vehicle fuel economy.
The engine oil filler cap also shows the recommended engine
oil viscosity for your engine. For information on the engine
oil filler cap location, refer to “Engine Compartment” in
“Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further information.
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 447
Lubricants that do not have both, the engine oil certifica-
tion mark and the correct SAE viscosity grade number
should not be used.
Engine Oil Viscosity (SAE Grade) — 3.6L Engine
Mopar SAE 5W-20 engine oil approved to FCA Material
Standard MS-6395 such as Pennzoil, Shell Helix or equiva-
lent is recommended for all operating temperatures. This
engine oil improves low temperature starting and vehicle
fuel economy.
The engine oil filler cap also shows the recommended
engine oil viscosity for your engine. For information on
engine oil filler cap location, refer to the “Engine Compart-
ment” illustration in this section.
NOTE: Mopar SAE 5W-30 engine oil approved to FCA
Material Standard MS-6395 such as Pennzoil, Shell Helix or
equivalent may be used when SAE 5W-20 engine oil
meeting MS-6395 is not available.
Lubricants which do not have both the engine oil certifi-
cation mark and the correct SAE viscosity grade number
should not be used.
Synthetic Engine Oils
You may use synthetic engine oils provided the recom-
mended oil quality requirements are met, and the recom-
mended maintenance intervals for oil and filter changes are
followed.
Synthetic engine oils which do not have both the engine oil
certification mark and the correct SAE viscosity grade
number should not be used.
Materials Added To Engine Oil
The manufacturer strongly recommends against the addi-
tion of any additives (other than leak detection dyes) to the
engine oil. Engine oil is an engineered product and its
performance may be impaired by supplemental additives.
Disposing Of Used Engine Oil And Oil Filters
Care should be taken in disposing of used engine oil and
oil filters from your vehicle. Used oil and oil filters,
indiscriminately discarded, can present a problem to the
environment. Contact your authorized dealer, service sta-
tion or governmental agency for advice on how and where
used oil and oil filters can be safely discarded in your area.
448 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Engine Oil Filter
The engine oil filter should be replaced with a new filter at
every engine oil change.
Engine Oil Filter Selection
This manufacturer’s engines have a full-flow type oil filter.
Use a filter of this type for replacement. The quality of
replacement filters varies considerably. Only high quality
filters should be used to assure most efficient service.
Mopar engine oil filters are high quality oil filters and are
recommended.
Engine Air Cleaner Filter
Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for the proper main-
tenance intervals.
WARNING!
The air induction system (air cleaner, hoses, etc.) can
provide a measure of protection in the case of engine
backfire. Do not remove the air induction system (air
cleaner, hoses, etc.) unless such removal is necessary
for repair or maintenance. Make sure that no one is
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
near the engine compartment before starting the ve-
hicle with the air induction system (air cleaner, hoses,
etc.) removed. Failure to do so can result in serious
personal injury.
Engine Air Cleaner Filter Selection
The quality of replacement engine air cleaner filters varies
considerably. Only high quality filters should be used to
assure most efficient service. Mopar engine air cleaner
filters are a high quality filter and are recommended.
Maintenance-Free Battery
Your vehicle is equipped with a maintenance-free battery.
You will never have to add water, nor is periodic mainte-
nance required.
NOTE: The battery is stored in a compartment that is
located behind the left front fender and is accessible
through the wheel well. The wheel and tire assembly do
not need to be removed to access the compartment. Remote
battery terminals are located in the engine compartment
for jump-starting. Refer to “Jump-Starting Procedures” in
“What To Do In Emergencies” for further information.
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 449
To access the battery, turn the steering wheel fully to the
right and remove the access panel from the inner fender
shield.
WARNING!
• Battery fluid is a corrosive acid solution and can
burn or even blind you. Do not allow battery fluid to
contact your eyes, skin, or clothing. Do not lean over
a battery when attaching clamps. If acid splashes in
eyes or on skin, flush the area immediately with
large amounts of water.
• Battery gas is flammable and explosive. Keep flame
or sparks away from the battery. Do not use a booster
battery or any other booster source with an output
greater than 12 Volts. Do not allow cable clamps to
touch each other.
• Battery posts, terminals, and related accessories con-
tain lead and lead compounds. Wash hands after
handling.
CAUTION!
• It is essential when replacing the cables on the
battery that the positive cable is attached to the
positive post and the negative cable is attached to the
negative post. Battery posts are marked positive (+)
and negative (-) and are identified on the battery
case. Cable clamps should be tight on the terminal
posts and free of corrosion.
• If a “fast charger” is used while the battery is in the
vehicle, disconnect both vehicle battery cables before
connecting the charger to the battery. Do not use a
“fast charger” to provide starting voltage.
Air Conditioner Maintenance
For best possible performance, your air conditioner should
be checked and serviced by an authorized dealer at the
start of each warm season. This service should include
cleaning of the condenser fins and a performance test.
Drive belt tension should also be checked at this time.
450 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
• Use only refrigerants and compressor lubricants ap-
proved by the manufacturer for your air conditioning
system. Some unapproved refrigerants are flam-
mable and can explode, injuring you. Other unap-
proved refrigerants or lubricants can cause the sys-
tem to fail, requiring costly repairs. Refer to
Warranty Information Book for further warranty
information.
• The air conditioning system contains refrigerant un-
der high pressure. To avoid risk of personal injury or
damage to the system, adding refrigerant or any
repair requiring lines to be disconnected should be
done by an experienced technician.
CAUTION!
Do not use chemical flushes in your air conditioning
system as the chemicals can damage your air condition-
ing components. Such damage is not covered by the
New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Refrigerant Recovery And Recycling HFO 1234yf
HFO 1234yf Air Conditioning Refrigerant is a hydro-
fluoolefine HFO that is an ozone-saving product. The
manufacturer recommends that air conditioning service be
performed by authorized dealer using recovery and recy-
cling equipment.
NOTE: Use only manufacturer approved A/C system
PAG compressor oil, and refrigerants.
A/C Air Filter — If Equipped
Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for the proper main-
tenance intervals.
WARNING!
Do not remove the cabin air filter while the vehicle is
running, or while the ignition is in the ACC or ON/
RUN mode. With the cabin air filter removed and the
blower operating, the blower can contact hands and
may propel dirt and debris into your eyes, resulting in
personal injury.
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 451
The A/C air filter is located in the fresh air inlet behind the
glove compartment. Perform the following steps to replace
the filter:
1. Open the glove compartment and remove all contents.
2. Push the retaining tab on each side of the glove com-
partment inward while gently pulling the glove com-
partment door outward until both tabs clear the door
opening in the instrument panel.
3. Pivot the glove compartment downward.
4. Disengage the two retaining tabs that secure the filter
cover to the HVAC housing and remove the cover.
5. Remove the A/C air filter by pulling it straight out of
the housing.
6. Install the A/C air filter with the arrow on the filter
pointing toward the floor. When installing the filter
cover, make sure the retaining tabs fully engage the
cover.
Glove Compartment Removal
A/C Air Filter Replacement
452 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
CAUTION!
The cabin air filter is identified with an arrow to
indicate airflow direction through the filter. Failure to
install the filter properly will result in the need to
replace it more often.
7. Reinstall the glove compartment door. Make sure that
the hinges are seated fully as you raise the door.
Otherwise, the door latch will not align properly.
Body Lubrication
Locks and all body pivot points, including such items as
seat tracks, door hinge pivot points and rollers, liftgate,
tailgate, decklid, sliding doors and hood hinges, should be
lubricated periodically with a lithium based grease, such as
Mopar Spray White Lube to assure quiet, easy operation
and to protect against rust and wear. Prior to the applica-
tion of any lubricant, the parts concerned should be wiped
clean to remove dust and grit; after lubricating excess oil
and grease should be removed. Particular attention should
also be given to hood latching components to ensure
proper function. When performing other underhood ser-
vices, the hood latch, release mechanism and safety catch
should be cleaned and lubricated.
The external lock cylinders should be lubricated twice a
year, preferably in the Fall and Spring. Apply a small
amount of a high quality lubricant, such as Mopar Lock
Cylinder Lubricant directly into the lock cylinder.
Windshield Wiper Blades
Clean the rubber edges of the wiper blades and the
windshield periodically with a sponge or soft cloth and a
mild nonabrasive cleaner. This will remove accumulations
of salt or road film.
Operation of the wipers on dry glass for long periods may
cause deterioration of the wiper blades. Always use washer
fluid when using the wipers to remove salt or dirt from a
dry windshield.
Avoid using the wiper blades to remove frost or ice from
the windshield. Keep the blade rubber out of contact with
petroleum products such as engine oil, gasoline, etc.
NOTE: Life expectancy of wiper blades varies depending
on geographical area and frequency of use. Poor perfor-
mance of blades may be present with chattering, marks,
water lines or wet spots. If any of these conditions are
present, clean the wiper blades or replace as necessary.
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 453
Rear Wiper Blade Removal/Installation
1. Lift the pivot cap on the rear wiper arm upward, this
will allow the rear wiper blade to be raised off of the
liftgate glass.
NOTE: The rear wiper arm cannot be raised fully upward
unless the pivot cap is raised first.
2. Lift the rear wiper arm upward to raise the wiper blade
off of the liftgate glass.
3. Grab the bottom of the wiper blade and rotate it forward
to unsnap the blade pivot pin from the wiper blade
holder.
Lifting The Pivot Cap
1—WiperArm
2 — Pivot Cap
Removing The Wiper Blade
1 — Wiper Blade
2 — Blade Pivot Pin
3—WiperArm
4 — Wiper Blade Holder
454 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
4. Install the wiper blade pivot pin into the wiper blade
holder at the end of the wiper arm, and firmly press the
wiper blade until it snaps into place.
5.
Lower the wiper blade and snap the pivot cap into place.
Adding Washer Fluid
The windshield washer and the rear window washer share
the same fluid reservoir. The fluid reservoir is located in the
engine compartment. Be sure to check the fluid level in the
reservoir at regular intervals. Fill the reservoir with wind-
shield washer solvent (not radiator antifreeze) and operate
the system for a few seconds to flush out the residual
water.
When refilling the washer fluid reservoir, apply some
washer fluid to a cloth or towel and wipe the wiper blades
clean. This will help blade performance.
To prevent freeze-up of your windshield washer system in
cold weather, select a solution or mixture that meets or
exceeds the temperature range of your climate. This rating
information can be found on most washer fluid containers.
The fluid reservoir will hold nearly 1 gal (4 l) of washer
fluid when the message “LoWASH” appears in the instru-
ment cluster.
WARNING!
Commercially available windshield washer solvents
are flammable. They could ignite and burn you. Care
must be exercised when filling or working around the
washer solution.
Exhaust System
The best protection against carbon monoxide entry into the
vehicle body is a properly maintained engine exhaust
system.
If you notice a change in the sound of the exhaust system;
or if the exhaust fumes can be detected inside the vehicle;
or when the underside or rear of the vehicle is damaged;
have an authorized technician inspect the complete ex-
haust system and adjacent body areas for broken, dam-
aged, deteriorated, or mispositioned parts. Open seams or
loose connections could permit exhaust fumes to seep into
the passenger compartment. In addition, have the exhaust
system inspected each time the vehicle is raised for lubri-
cation or oil change. Replace as required.
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 455
WARNING!
• Exhaust gases can injure or kill. They contain carbon
monoxide (CO), which is colorless and odorless.
Breathing it can make you unconscious and can
eventually poison you. To avoid breathing CO, refer
to “Safety Tips/Exhaust Gas” in “Things To Know
Before Starting Your Vehicle” for further informa-
tion.
• A hot exhaust system can start a fire if you park over
materials that can burn. Such materials might be
grass or leaves coming into contact with your exhaust
system. Do not park or operate your vehicle in areas
where your exhaust system can contact anything that
can burn.
CAUTION!
• The catalytic converter requires the use of unleaded
fuel only. Leaded gasoline will destroy the effective-
ness of the catalyst as an emissions control device
and may seriously reduce engine performance and
cause serious damage to the engine.
(Continued)
CAUTION! (Continued)
• Damage to the catalytic converter can result if your
vehicle is not kept in proper operating condition. In
the event of engine malfunction, particularly involv-
ing engine misfire or other apparent loss of perfor-
mance, have your vehicle serviced promptly. Contin-
ued operation of your vehicle with a severe
malfunction could cause the converter to overheat,
resulting in possible damage to the converter and
vehicle.
Under normal operating conditions, the catalytic converter
will not require maintenance. However, it is important to
keep the engine properly tuned to assure proper catalyst
operation and prevent possible catalyst damage.
NOTE: Intentional tampering with emissions control sys-
tems can result in civil penalties being assessed against
you.
In unusual situations involving grossly malfunctioning
engine operation, a scorching odor may suggest severe and
abnormal catalyst overheating. If this occurs, stop the
vehicle, turn off the engine and allow it to cool. Service,
including a tune-up to manufacturer’s specifications,
should be obtained immediately.
456 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
To minimize the possibility of catalytic converter damage:
• Do not shut off the engine or interrupt the ignition,
when the transmission is in gear and the vehicle is in
motion.
• Do not try to start the engine by pushing or towing the
vehicle.
• Do not idle the engine with any spark plug wires
disconnected or removed, such as when diagnostic
testing, or for prolonged periods during very rough idle
or malfunctioning operating conditions.
Cooling System
WARNING!
• When working near the radiator cooling fan, discon-
nect the fan motor lead or turn the ignition switch to
the LOCK position. The fan is temperature con-
trolled and can start at any time the ignition switch is
in the ON position.
• You or others can be badly burned by hot engine
coolant (antifreeze) or steam from your radiator. If
you see or hear steam coming from under the hood,
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
do not open the hood until the radiator has had time
to cool. Never try to open a cooling system pressure
cap when the radiator is hot.
Coolant Checks
Check the engine coolant (antifreeze) protection every 12
months (before the onset of freezing weather, where appli-
cable). If the engine coolant (antifreeze) is dirty or rusty in
appearance, the system should be drained, flushed, and
refilled with fresh engine coolant (antifreeze). Check the
front of the A/C condenser for any accumulation of bugs,
leaves, etc. If dirty, clean by gently spraying water from a
garden hose vertically down the face of the condenser.
Check the coolant recovery bottle tubing for brittle rubber,
cracking, tears, cuts, and tightness of the connection at the
bottle and radiator. Inspect the entire system for leaks.
Cooling System — Drain, Flush And Refill
NOTE: Some vehicles require special tools to add coolant
properly. Failure to fill these systems properly could lead to
severe internal engine damage. If any coolant is needed to
be added to the system, please contact your local autho-
rized dealer.
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 457
If the engine coolant (antifreeze) is dirty or contains visible
sediment, have an authorized dealer clean and flush with
OAT coolant (antifreeze) (conforming to MS.90032).
Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for the proper main-
tenance intervals.
Selection Of Coolant
Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, And Genuine Parts” in “Main-
taining Your Vehicle” for further information.
CAUTION!
• Mixing of engine coolant (antifreeze) other than
specified Organic Additive Technology (OAT) en-
gine coolant (antifreeze), may result in engine dam-
age and may decrease corrosion protection. Organic
Additive Technology (OAT) engine coolant is differ-
ent and should not be mixed with Hybrid Organic
Additive Technology (HOAT) engine coolant (anti-
freeze) or any “globally compatible” coolant (anti-
freeze). If a non-OAT engine coolant (antifreeze) is
introduced into the cooling system in an emergency,
the cooling system will need to be drained, flushed,
(Continued)
CAUTION! (Continued)
and refilled with fresh OAT coolant (conforming to
MS.90032), by an authorized dealer as soon as pos-
sible.
• Do not use water alone or alcohol-based engine
coolant (antifreeze) products. Do not use additional
rust inhibitors or antirust products, as they may not
be compatible with the engine coolant and may plug
the radiator.
• This vehicle has not been designed for use with
propylene glycol-based engine coolant (antifreeze).
Use of propylene glycol-based engine coolant (anti-
freeze) is not recommended.
Adding Coolant
Your vehicle has been built with an improved engine
coolant (OAT coolant conforming to MS.90032) that allows
extended maintenance intervals. This engine coolant (anti-
freeze) can be used up to ten years or 150,000 miles
(240,000 km) before replacement. To prevent reducing this
extended maintenance period, it is important that you use
the same engine coolant (OAT coolant conforming to
MS.90032) throughout the life of your vehicle.
458 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Please review these recommendations for using Organic
Additive Technology (OAT) engine coolant (antifreeze)
that meets the requirements of FCA Material Standard
MS.90032. When adding engine coolant (antifreeze):
• We recommend using Mopar Antifreeze/Coolant 10
Year/150,000 Mile Formula OAT (Organic Additive
Technology) that meets the requirements of FCA Mate-
rial Standard MS.90032.
• Mix a minimum solution of 50% OAT engine coolant
that meets the requirements of FCA Material Standard
MS.90032 and distilled water. Use higher concentrations
(not to exceed 70%) if temperatures below −34°F (−37°C)
are anticipated. Please contact your authorized dealer
for assistance.
• Use only high purity water such as distilled or deionized
water when mixing the water/engine coolant (anti-
freeze) solution. The use of lower quality water will
reduce the amount of corrosion protection in the engine
cooling system.
NOTE:
• It is the owner’s responsibility to maintain the proper
level of protection against freezing according to the
temperatures occurring in the area where the vehicle is
operated.
• Some vehicles require special tools to add coolant prop-
erly. Failure to fill these systems properly could lead to
severe internal engine damage. If any coolant is needed
to be added to the system, please contact your local
authorized dealer.
• Mixing engine coolant (antifreeze) types is not recom-
mended and can result in cooling system damage. If
HOAT and OAT coolant are mixed in an emergency,
have a authorized dealer drain, flush, and refill with
OAT coolant (conforming to MS.90032) as soon as pos-
sible.
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 459
Cooling System Pressure Cap
The cap must be fully tightened to prevent loss of engine
coolant (antifreeze), and to ensure that engine coolant
(antifreeze) will return to the radiator from the coolant
recovery bottle.
The cap should be inspected and cleaned if there is any
accumulation of foreign material on the sealing surfaces.
WARNING!
• The warning words “DO NOT OPEN HOT” on the
cooling system pressure cap are a safety precaution.
Never add engine coolant (antifreeze) when the
engine is overheated. Do not loosen or remove the
cap to cool an overheated engine. Heat causes pres-
sure to build up in the cooling system. To prevent
scalding or injury, do not remove the pressure cap
while the system is hot or under pressure.
• Do not use a pressure cap other than the one speci-
fied for your vehicle. Personal injury or engine
damage may result.
Disposal Of Used Engine Coolant
Used ethylene glycol-based engine coolant (antifreeze) is a
regulated substance requiring proper disposal. Check with
your local authorities to determine the disposal rules for
your community. To prevent ingestion by animals or
children, do not store ethylene glycol-based engine coolant
in open containers or allow it to remain in puddles on the
ground. If ingested by a child or pet, seek emergency
assistance immediately. Clean up any ground spills imme-
diately.
Coolant Level
2.4L Engine — The coolant bottle provides a quick visual
method for determining that the coolant level is adequate.
With the engine idling and warm to normal operating
temperature, the level of the coolant in the bottle should be
between the “ADD” and “FULL” lines, shown on the
bottle.
3.6L Engine — The level of the coolant in the pressurized
coolant bottle should be between the “COLD” and “FULL”
range on the bottle when the engine is cold.
460 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
The radiator normally remains completely full, so there is
no need to remove the radiator cap unless checking for
coolant freeze point or replacing engine coolant (anti-
freeze). Advise your service attendant of this. As long as
the engine operating temperature is satisfactory, the cool-
ant bottle need only be checked once a month. When
additional engine coolant (antifreeze) is needed to main-
tain the proper level, it should be added to the coolant
bottle. Do not overfill.
Points To Remember
NOTE: When the vehicle is stopped after a few miles/
kilometers of operation, you may observe vapor coming
from the front of the engine compartment. This is normally
a result of moisture from rain, snow, or high humidity
accumulating on the radiator and being vaporized when
the thermostat opens, allowing hot engine coolant (anti-
freeze) to enter the radiator.
If an examination of your engine compartment shows no
evidence of radiator or hose leaks, the vehicle may be
safely driven. The vapor will soon dissipate.
• Do not overfill the coolant expansion bottle.
• Check the coolant freeze point in the radiator and in the
coolant expansion bottle. If engine coolant (antifreeze)
needs to be added, the contents of the coolant expansion
bottle must also be protected against freezing.
• If frequent engine coolant (antifreeze) additions are
required, the cooling system should be pressure tested
for leaks.
• Maintain engine coolant (antifreeze) concentration at a
minimum of 50% OAT coolant (conforming to
MS.90032) and distilled water for proper corrosion pro-
tection of your engine which contains aluminum com-
ponents.
• Make sure that the coolant expansion bottle overflow
hoses are not kinked or obstructed.
• Keep the front of the radiator clean. If your vehicle is
equipped with air conditioning, keep the front of the
condenser clean.
• Do not change the thermostat for Summer or Winter
operation. If replacement is ever necessary, install ONLY
the correct type thermostat. Other designs may result in
unsatisfactory engine coolant (antifreeze) performance,
poor gas mileage, and increased emissions.
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 461
Brake System
In order to assure brake system performance, all brake
system components should be inspected periodically. Refer
to the “Maintenance Schedule” for the proper maintenance
intervals.
WARNING!
Riding the brakes can lead to brake failure and possi-
bly a collision. Driving with your foot resting or riding
on the brake pedal can result in abnormally high brake
temperatures, excessive lining wear, and possible
brake damage. You would not have your full braking
capacity in an emergency.
Master Cylinder — Brake Fluid Level Check
Check the fluid level in the master cylinder immediately if
the “Brake Warning Light” indicates system failure.
Check the fluid level in the master cylinder when perform-
ing underhood services.
Clean the top of the master cylinder area before removing
the cap. If necessary, add fluid to bring the fluid level up to
the requirements described on the brake fluid reservoir.
Overfilling of fluid is not recommended because it may
cause leaking in the system.
Fluid level can be expected to fall as the brake pads wear.
Brake fluid level should be checked when pads are re-
placed. However, low fluid level may be caused by a leak
and a checkup may be needed.
Use only manufacturer’s recommended brake fluid. Refer
to “Fluids, Lubricants, And Genuine Parts” in “Maintain-
ing Your Vehicle” for further information.
WARNING!
• Use only manufacturer’s recommended brake fluid.
Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, And Genuine Parts” in
“Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further information.
Using the wrong type of brake fluid can severely
damage your brake system and/or impair its perfor-
mance. The proper type of brake fluid for your
vehicle is also identified on the original factory
installed hydraulic master cylinder reservoir.
• To avoid contamination from foreign matter or mois-
ture, use only new brake fluid or fluid that has been
in a tightly closed container. Keep the master cylin-
der reservoir cap secured at all times. Brake fluid in
a open container absorbs moisture from the air
resulting in a lower boiling point. This may cause it
(Continued)
462 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING! (Continued)
to boil unexpectedly during hard or prolonged brak-
ing, resulting in sudden brake failure. This could
result in a collision.
• Overfilling the brake fluid reservoir can result in
spilling brake fluid on hot engine parts, causing the
brake fluid to catch fire. Brake fluid can also damage
painted and vinyl surfaces, care should be taken to
avoid its contact with these surfaces.
• Do not allow petroleum based fluid to contaminate
the brake fluid. Brake seal components could be
damaged, causing partial or complete brake failure.
This could result in a collision.
Automatic Transmission
Selection Of Lubricant
It is important to use the proper transmission fluid to
ensure optimum transmission performance and life. Use
only the manufacturer’s specified transmission fluid. Refer
to “Fluids, Lubricants, And Genuine Parts” in this section
for fluid specifications. It is important to maintain the
transmission fluid at the correct level using the recom-
mended fluid. No chemical flushes should be used in any
transmission; only the approved lubricant should be used.
CAUTION!
Using a transmission fluid other than the manufactur-
er’s recommended fluid may cause deterioration in
transmission shift quality and/or torque converter
shudder, and will require more frequent fluid and
filter changes. Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, And Genu-
ine Parts” in this section for fluid specifications.
Special Additives
The manufacturer strongly recommends against using any
special additives in the transmission.
Automatic Transmission Fluid (ATF) is an engineered
product and its performance may be impaired by supple-
mental additives. Therefore, do not add any fluid additives
to the transmission. The only exception to this policy is the
use of special dyes for diagnosing fluid leaks. Avoid using
transmission sealers as they may adversely affect seals.
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 463
CAUTION!
Do not use chemical flushes in your transmission as
the chemicals can damage your transmission compo-
nents. Such damage is not covered by the New Vehicle
Limited Warranty.
Fluid Level Check — Four-Speed Automatic
Transmission
Use the following procedure to check the transmission
fluid level properly:
1. Park the vehicle on level ground.
2. Run the engine at normal idle speed for at least 60
seconds, and leave the engine running for the rest of this
procedure.
3. Fully apply the parking brake, and press the brake
pedal.
4. Place the gear selector momentarily into each gear
position (allowing time for the transmission to fully
engage in each position), ending with the transmission
in PARK.
5. Wipe the area around the dipstick clean to prevent dirt
from entering the transmission.
6. Remove the dipstick and determine if the fluid is hot or
cold. You can also read the transmission fluid tempera-
ture using the instrument cluster. Refer to ⬙Instrument
Cluster Display⬙ in ⬙Understanding Your Instrument
Panel⬙ for further information. Hot fluid is approxi-
mately 180°F (82°C), which is the normal operating
temperature after the vehicle is driven at least 15 miles
(24 km). Hot fluid cannot be held comfortably between
the fingertips. Cold fluid is at a temperature of approxi-
mately 80°F (27°C).
7. Wipe the dipstick clean and reinsert it until seated.
Then, remove the dipstick and note the fluid level on
both sides. The fluid level reading is only valid if there
is a solid coating of oil on both sides of the dipstick.
Note that the holes in the dipstick will be full of fluid if
the actual level is at or above the hole.
• If the fluid is hot, the fluid level should be in the
crosshatched area marked “HOT” (between the upper
two holes in the dipstick).
• If the fluid is cold, the fluid level should be between
the lower two holes in the area marked “COLD”.
464 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
If the fluid level is low, add fluid through the dipstick tube
to bring it to the proper level. Do not overfill. After adding
any quantity of oil through the dipstick tube, wait at least
two minutes for the oil to fully drain into the transmission
before rechecking the fluid level.
NOTE: If it is necessary to check the transmission below
the operating temperature, the fluid level should be be-
tween the two COLD (lower) holes on the dipstick with the
fluid at approximately 80°F (27°C). If the fluid level is
correctly established at 80°F (27°C), it should be between
the HOT (upper) reference holes when the transmission
reaches 180°F (82°C). Remember it is best to check the level
at the normal operating temperature.
8. Check for leaks. Release the parking brake.
CAUTION!
•
Using a transmission fluid other than the manufactur-
er’s recommended fluid may cause deterioration in
transmission shift quality and/or torque converter
shudder, and will require more frequent fluid and
filter changes. Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, And Genu-
ine Parts” in this section for fluid specifications.
(Continued)
CAUTION! (Continued)
• Dirt and water in the transmission can cause serious
damage. To prevent dirt and water from entering the
transmission after checking or replenishing fluid,
make sure that the dipstick cap is re-seated properly.
Fluid Level Check — Six-Speed Automatic Transmission
The fluid level is preset at the factory and does not require
adjustment under normal operating conditions. Routine
fluid level checks are not required, therefore the transmis-
sion filler tube is capped and no dipstick is provided. Your
authorized dealer can check your transmission fluid level
using a special service dipstick. If you notice fluid leakage
or transmission malfunction, visit your authorized dealer
immediately to have the transmission fluid level checked.
Operating the vehicle with an improper fluid level can
cause severe transmission damage.
CAUTION!
If a transmission fluid leak occurs, visit your autho-
rized dealer immediately. Severe transmission damage
may occur. Your authorized dealer has the proper tools
to adjust the fluid level accurately.
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 465
Fluid And Filter Changes
Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for the proper main-
tenance intervals.
In addition, change the fluid and filter if the fluid becomes
contaminated (with water, etc.), or if the transmission is
disassembled for any reason.
Rear Drive Assembly (RDA) – AWD Models Only
Lubricant Selection
Use only the manufacturer’s recommended fluid. Refer to
“Fluids, Lubricants, And Genuine Parts” in “Maintaining
Your Vehicle” for further information.
Fluid Level Check
Visually inspect the unit at each oil change for leakage. If
leakage is detected, check the fluid level by removing the
fill plug. The fluid level should be maintained between the
bottom of the fill hole to 1/8 inch (4 mm) below the fill
hole.
Add fluid, if necessary, to maintain the proper level.
Frequency Of Fluid Change
Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for the proper main-
tenance intervals.
Power Transfer Unit (PTU) – AWD Models Only
Lubricant Selection
Use only the manufacturer’s recommended fluid. Refer to
“Fluids, Lubricants, And Genuine Parts” in “Maintaining
Your Vehicle” for further information.
Fluid Level Check
Visually inspect the unit at each oil change for leakage. If
leakage is detected, Check the fluid level by removing the
fill plug. The fluid level should be maintained between the
bottom of the fill hole to 1/8 inch (4 mm) below the fill
hole.
Add fluid, if necessary, to maintain the proper level.
Frequency Of Fluid Change
Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for the proper main-
tenance intervals.
Appearance Care And Protection From Corrosion
Protection Of Body And Paint From Corrosion
Vehicle body care requirements vary according to geo-
graphic locations and usage. Chemicals that make roads
passable in snow and ice and those that are sprayed on
trees and road surfaces during other seasons are highly
466 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
corrosive to the metal in your vehicle. Outside parking,
which exposes your vehicle to airborne contaminants, road
surfaces on which the vehicle is operated, extreme hot or
cold weather and other extreme conditions will have an
adverse effect on paint, metal trim, and underbody protec-
tion.
The following maintenance recommendations will enable
you to obtain maximum benefit from the corrosion resis-
tance built into your vehicle.
What Causes Corrosion?
Corrosion is the result of deterioration or removal of paint
and protective coatings from your vehicle.
The most common causes are:
• Road salt, dirt and moisture accumulation.
• Stone and gravel impact.
• Insects, tree sap and tar.
• Salt in the air near seacoast localities.
• Atmospheric fallout/industrial pollutants.
Washing
• Wash your vehicle regularly. Always wash your vehicle
in the shade using Mopar Car Wash, or a mild car wash
soap, and rinse the panels completely with clear water.
• If insects, tar, or other similar deposits have accumulated
on your vehicle, use Mopar Super Kleen Bug and Tar
Remover to remove.
• Use a high quality cleaner wax, such as Mopar Cleaner
Wax to remove road film, stains and to protect your
paint finish. Take care never to scratch the paint.
•
Avoid using abrasive compounds and power buffing that
may diminish the gloss or thin out the paint finish.
CAUTION!
• Do not use abrasive or strong cleaning materials such
as steel wool or scouring powder that will scratch
metal and painted surfaces.
•
Use of power washers exceeding 1,200 psi (8 274 kPa)
can result in damage or removal of paint and decals.
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 467
Special Care
• If you drive on salted or dusty roads, or if you drive near
the ocean, hose off the undercarriage at least once a
month.
• It is important that the drain holes in the lower edges of
the doors, rocker panels, and trunk be kept clear and
open.
• If you detect any stone chips or scratches in the paint,
touch them up immediately. The cost of such repairs is
considered the responsibility of the owner.
• If your vehicle is damaged due to a collision or similar
cause that destroys the paint and protective coating,
have your vehicle repaired as soon as possible. The cost
of such repairs is considered the responsibility of the
owner.
• If you carry special cargo such as chemicals, fertilizers,
de-icer salt, etc., be sure that such materials are well
packaged and sealed.
• If a lot of driving is done on gravel roads, consider mud
or stone shields behind each wheel.
• Use Mopar Touch Up Paint on scratches as soon as
possible. Your authorized dealer has touch up paint to
match the color of your vehicle.
Wheel And Wheel Trim Care
All wheels and wheel trim, especially aluminum and
chrome plated wheels, should be cleaned regularly using
mild (neutral Ph) soap and water to maintain their luster
and to prevent corrosion. Wash wheels with the same soap
solution recommended for the body of the vehicle.
Your wheels are susceptible to deterioration caused by salt,
sodium chloride, magnesium chloride, calcium chloride,
etc., and other road chemicals used to melt ice or control
dust on dirt roads. Use a soft cloth or sponge and mild soap
to wipe away promptly. Do not use harsh chemicals or a
stiff brush. They can damage the wheel’s protective coating
that helps keep them from corroding and tarnishing.
NOTE: Many aftermarket wheel cleaners contain strong
acids or strong alkaline additives that can harm the wheel
surface.
468 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
CAUTION!
Avoid products or automatic car washes that use acidic
solutions or strong alkaline additives or harsh brushes.
These products and automatic car washes may damage
the wheel’s protective finish. Such damage is not
covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty. Only
car wash soap, Mopar Wheel Cleaner or equivalent is
recommended.
When cleaning extremely dirty wheels including excessive
brake dust, care must be taken in the selection of tire and
wheel cleaning chemicals and equipment to prevent dam-
age to the wheels. Mopar Wheel Treatment, Mopar Chrome
Cleaner, or their equivalent is recommended or select a
non-abrasive, non-acidic cleaner for aluminum or chrome
wheels. Do not use any products on Dark Vapor or Black
Satin Chrome Wheels. They will permanently damage this
finish and such damage is not covered by the New Vehicle
Limited Warranty.
CAUTION!
Do not use scouring pads, steel wool, a bristle brush,
metal polishes or oven cleaner. These products may
damage the wheel’s protective finish. Such damage is
not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Only car wash soap, Mopar Wheel Cleaner or equiva-
lent is recommended.
NOTE: If you intend parking or storing your vehicle for an
extended period after cleaning the wheels with wheel
cleaner, drive your vehicle for a few minutes before doing
so. Driving the vehicle and applying the brakes when
stopping will reduce the risk of brake rotor corrosion.
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 469
Dark Vapor Or Black Satin Chrome Wheels
CAUTION!
If your vehicle is equipped with Dark Vapor or Black
Satin Chrome wheels DO NOT USE wheel cleaners,
abrasives or polishing compounds. They will perma-
nently damage this finish and such damage is not
covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty. USE
ONLY MILD SOAP AND WATER WITH A SOFT
CLOTH. Used on a regular basis; this is all that is
required to maintain this finish.
Stain Repel Fabric Cleaning Procedure — If
Equipped
Stain Repel seats may be cleaned in the following manner:
• Remove as much of the stain as possible by blotting with
a clean, dry towel.
• Blot any remaining stain with a clean, damp towel.
• For tough stains, apply Mopar Total Clean, or a mild
soap solution to a clean, damp cloth and remove stain.
Use a fresh, damp towel to remove soap residue.
• For grease stains, apply Mopar Multi-Purpose Cleaner
to a clean, damp cloth and remove stain. Use a fresh,
damp towel to remove soap residue.
• Do not use any harsh solvents or any other form of
protectants on Stain Repel products.
Interior Care
Use Mopar Total Clean to clean fabric upholstery and
carpeting.
Use Mopar Total Clean to clean vinyl upholstery.
Mopar Total Clean is specifically recommended for leather
upholstery.
Your leather upholstery can be best preserved by regular
cleaning with a damp soft cloth. Small particles of dirt can
act as an abrasive and damage the leather upholstery and
should be removed promptly with a damp cloth. Stubborn
soils can be removed easily with a soft cloth and Mopar
Total Clean. Care should be taken to avoid soaking your
leather upholstery with any liquid. Please do not use
polishes, oils, cleaning fluids, solvents, detergents, or
ammonia-based cleaners to clean your leather upholstery.
Application of a leather conditioner is not required to
maintain the original condition.
470 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
Do not use volatile solvents for cleaning purposes.
Many are potentially flammable, and if used in closed
areas they may cause respiratory harm.
CAUTION!
• Direct contact of air fresheners, insect repellents,
suntan lotions, or hand sanitizers to the plastic,
painted, or decorated surfaces of the interior may
cause permanent damage. Wipe away immediately.
• Damage caused by these type of products may not be
covered by your New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
• Do not use Alcohol and Alcohol-based and/or Keton
based cleaning products to clean leather seats, as
damage to the seat may result.
Cleaning Headlights
Your vehicle is equipped with plastic headlights and fog
lights that are lighter and less susceptible to stone breakage
than glass headlights.
Plastic is not as scratch resistant as glass and therefore
different lens cleaning procedures must be followed.
To minimize the possibility of scratching the lenses and
reducing light output, avoid wiping with a dry cloth. To
remove road dirt, wash with a mild soap solution followed
by rinsing.
Do not use abrasive cleaning components, solvents, steel
wool or other aggressive material to clean the lenses.
Glass Surfaces
All glass surfaces should be cleaned on a regular basis with
Mopar Glass Cleaner, or any commercial household-type
glass cleaner. Never use an abrasive type cleaner. Use
caution when cleaning the inside rear window equipped
with electric defrosters or windows equipped with radio
antennas. Do not use scrapers or other sharp instrument
that may scratch the elements.
When cleaning the rear view mirror, spray cleaner on the
towel or cloth that you are using. Do not spray cleaner
directly on the mirror.
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 471
Cleaning Plastic Instrument Cluster Lenses
The lenses in front of the instruments in this vehicle are
molded in clear plastic. When cleaning the lenses, care
must be taken to avoid scratching the plastic.
1. Clean with a wet soft cloth. A mild soap solution may be
used, but do not use high alcohol content or abrasive
cleaners. If soap is used, wipe clean with a clean damp
cloth.
2. Dry with a soft cloth.
Seat Belt Maintenance
Do not bleach, dye, or clean the belts with chemical
solvents or abrasive cleaners. This will weaken the fabric.
Sun damage can also weaken the fabric.
If the belts need cleaning, use Mopar Total Clean, a mild
soap solution, or lukewarm water. Do not remove the belts
from the vehicle to wash them. Dry with a soft cloth.
Replace the belts if they appear frayed or worn or if the
buckles do not work properly.
WARNING!
A frayed or torn belt could rip apart in a collision and
leave you with no protection. Inspect the belt system
periodically, checking for cuts, frays, or loose parts.
Damaged parts must be replaced immediately. Do not
disassemble or modify the system. Seat belt assemblies
must be replaced after a collision if they have been
damaged (i.e., bent retractor, torn webbing, etc.).
Cleaning The Cupholders
Clean with a damp cloth or towel using a mild detergent.
FUSES
WARNING!
• When replacing a blown fuse, always use an appro-
priate replacement fuse with the same amp rating as
the original fuse. Never replace a fuse with another
fuse of higher amp rating. Never replace a blown
fuse with metal wires or any other material. Failure
to use proper fuses may result in serious personal
injury, fire and/or property damage.
(Continued)
472 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING! (Continued)
• Before replacing a fuse, make sure that the ignition is
off and that all the other services are switched off
and/or disengaged.
• If the replaced fuse blows again, contact an autho-
rized dealer.
• If a general protection fuse for safety systems (air
bag system, braking system), power unit systems
(engine system, gearbox system) or steering system
blows, contact an authorized dealer.
Interior Fuses
The interior fuse panel is located on the passenger side under the instrument panel.
Cavity Cartridge Fuse Mini-Fuse Description
F100 30 Amp Pink – 110V AC Inverter – If Equipped
F101 – 10 Amp Red Interior Lights
F102 – 20 Amp Yellow Cigar Lighter in Instrument Panel/Left Rear
Power Outlet
F103 – 20 Amp Yellow Power Outlet in Console Bin/Power Outlet
in Rear of Console
F105 – 20 Amp Yellow Heated Seats – If Equipped
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 473
Cavity Cartridge Fuse Mini-Fuse Description
F106 – 20 Amp Yellow Rear Power Outlet
F107 – 10 Amp Red Rear Camera – If Equipped
F108 – 15 Amp Blue Instrument Panel
F109 – 10 Amp Red Climate Control/HVAC
F110 – 10 Amp Red Occupant Restraint Controller
F112 – 10 Amp Red Spare
F114 – 20 Amp Yellow Rear HVAC Blower/Motor
F115 – 20 Amp Yellow Rear Wiper Motor
F116 30 Amp Pink – Rear Defroster (EBL)
F117 – 10 Amp Red Heated Mirrors
F118 – 10 Amp Red Occupant Restraint Controller
F119 – 10 Amp Red Steering Column Control Module
F120 – 10 Amp Red All Wheel Drive – If Equipped
F121 – 15 Amp Blue Wireless Ignition Node
F122 – 25 Amp Clear Driver Door Module
F123 – 25 Amp Clear Passenger Door Module
F124 – 10 Amp Red Mirrors
F125 – 10 Amp Red Steering Column Control Module
F126 – 25 Amp Clear Audio Amplifier
F127 – 20 Amp Yellow Trailer Tow – If Equipped
474 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Cavity Cartridge Fuse Mini-Fuse Description
F128 – 15 Amp Blue Radio
F129 – 15 Amp Blue Video/DVD – If Equipped
F130 – 15 Amp Blue Climate Control/Instrument Panel
F131 – 10 Amp Red Passenger Assistance/Hands Free System –
If Equipped
F132 – 10 Amp Red Tire Pressure Module
F133 – 10 Amp Red Spare
Underhood Fuses (Power Distribution Center)
The power distribution center is located in the engine
compartment.
Power Distribution Center
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 475
Cavity Cartridge Fuse Mini-Fuse Description
F101 60 Amp Yellow – Interior Power Distribution Center Rail
F102 60 Amp Yellow – Interior Power Distribution Center Rail
F103 60 Amp Yellow – Interior Power Distribution Center Rail
F105 60 Amp Yellow – Interior Power Distribution Center Rail Igni-
tion Run Relay
F106 60 Amp Yellow – Interior Power Distribution Center Rail Run/
Accessory Relays
F139 40 Amp Green – Climate Control System Blower
F140 30 Amp Pink – Power Locks
F141 40 Amp Green – Anti-Lock Brake System
F142 40 Amp Green – Glow Plugs – If Equipped
F143 40 Amp Green – Exterior Lights 1
F144 40 Amp Green – Exterior Lights 2
F145 30 Amp Pink – To Body Computer – Lamp
F146 30 Amp Pink – Spare
F147 30 Amp Pink – Spare
F148 40 Amp Green – Radiator Fan Motor
F149 30 Amp Pink – Starter Solenoid
F150 – 25 Amp Clear Powertrain Control Modules
F151 30 Amp Pink – Headlamp Washer Motor – If Equipped
476 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Cavity Cartridge Fuse Mini-Fuse Description
F152 – 25 Amp Clear Diesel Fuel Heater – If Equipped
F153 – 20 Amp Yellow Fuel Pump
F156 – 10 Amp Red Brake/Electronic Stability Control Module
F157 – 10 Amp Red Power Transfer Unit Module – If Equipped
F158 – 10 Amp Red Active Hood Module – If Equipped
F159 – 10 Amp Red Spare
F160 – 20 Amp Yellow Interior Lights
F161 – 20 Amp Yellow Horn
F162 40 Amp Red/20
Amp Lt. Blue
– Cabin Heater #1/Vacuum Pump – If
Equipped
F163 50 Amp Red – Cabin Heater #2 – If Equipped
F164 – 25 Amp Clear Powertrain Auto Shutdown
F165 – 20 Amp Yellow Powertrain Shutdown
F166 – 20 Amp Yellow Spare
F167 – 30 Amp Green Powertrain Shutdown
F168 – 10 Amp Red Air Conditioner Clutch
F169 40 Amp Green – Emissions – Partial Zero Emissions Vehicle
Motor
F170 – 15 Amp Blue Emissions – Partial Zero Emissions Vehicle
Actuators
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 477
Cavity Cartridge Fuse Mini-Fuse Description
F172 – 20 Amp Yellow Spare
F173 – 25 Amp Clear Anti Lock Brake Valves
F174 – 20 Amp Yellow Siren – If Equipped
F175 – 30 Amp Green Spare
F176 – 10 Amp Red Powertrain Control Modules
F177 – 20 Amp Yellow All Wheel Drive Module – If Equipped
F178 – 25 Amp Clear Sunroof – If Equipped
F179 – 10 Amp Red Battery Sensor
F181 100 Amp Blue – Electrohydraulic Steering (EHPS) – If
Equipped
F182 50 Amp Red – Cabin Heater #3 – If Equipped
F184 30 Amp Pink – Front Wiper Motor
478 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
REPLACEMENT BULBS
Interior Bulbs
Bulb Number
Courtesy/Reading Lamps (Incandescent) 578
Courtesy/Reading Lamps (Optional LED) LED (Serviced at authorized dealer)
Glove Compartment Lamp 194
Cargo Lamp 579
Optional Door Map Pocket/Cupholder LED (Serviced at authorized dealer)
For lighted switches, see your authorized dealer for replacement instructions.
Exterior Bulbs
Bulb Number
Low Beam Headlamp 9006
High Beam Headlamp 9005
Front Park/Turn Signal 3757AK
Side Marker Lamp 168
Front Fog Lamp PSX24W or 2504
Center High Mounted Stop Lamp (CHMSL) LED (Serviced at authorized dealer)
License Lamp 168
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 479
Exterior Bulbs – Rear (LED Version)
Bulb Number
Rear Tail/Stop Lamp LED (Serviced at authorized dealer)
Rear Tail (Liftgate) Lamp LED (Serviced at authorized dealer)
Rear Turn Signal Lamp WY21W or 7440A
Backup Lamp W21W or 7440
Exterior Bulbs – Rear (Bulb Version)
Bulb Number
Rear Tail/Stop/Turn Signal Lamp P27/7W or 3157
Rear Tail (Liftgate) Lamp P27/7W or 3157
Backup Lamp P27/7W or 3157
BULB REPLACEMENT
NOTE: Lens fogging can occur under certain atmospheric
conditions. This will usually clear as atmospheric condi-
tions change to allow the condensation to change back into
a vapor. Turning the lamps on will usually accelerate the
clearing process.
Front Low/High Beam Headlamp, Turn Signal/Park
Lamp, And Side Marker Lamp
1. Open the hood.
NOTE: It may be necessary to remove the air cleaner filter
housing and position the Totally Integrated Power Module
(TIPM) aside to replace certain lamps in the left headlamp
housing.
480 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
2. Rotate the applicable bulb and connector assembly ¼
turn counterclockwise and remove the assembly from
the headlamp housing.
3. Disconnect the bulb from the harness connector and
then connect the replacement bulb.
CAUTION!
Do not touch the new bulb with your fingers. Oil
contamination will severely shorten bulb life. If the
bulb comes in contact with any oily surface, clean the
bulb with rubbing alcohol.
4. Install the bulb and connector assembly into the head-
lamp housing and rotate it ¼ turn clockwise to lock it in
place.
1 — Front Turn Signal/Park Lamp Bulb
2 — Side Marker Lamp Bulb
3 — Low Beam Headlamp Bulb
4 — High Beam Headlamp Bulb
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 481
Front Fog Lamp
NOTE: Turn the steering wheel to the right if replacing the
left front fog lamp or to the left if replacing the right front
fog lamp to allow for easier access to the front of the wheel
well.
1. Remove the fasteners retaining the front lower wheel
well access panel and remove the access panel.
2. Remove the electrical connector from the fog lamp
housing.
3. Squeeze the two tabs on the side of the bulb socket and
pull straight out from the fog lamp.
CAUTION!
Do not touch the new bulb with your fingers. Oil
contamination will severely shorten bulb life. If the
bulb comes in contact with an oily surface, clean the
bulb with rubbing alcohol.
4. Install the replacement bulb and connector assembly
straight into the fog lamp until it locks into place.
5. Reinstall the front lower wheel well access panel and
fasteners.
Rear Turn Signal And Backup Lamp
The tail lamps are a two-piece design. The tail/stop/rear
turn signal lamps are located in the rear corner body
panels. The tail and backup lamps are located in the
liftgate.
Changing The Rear Turn Signal Lamp
1. Open the liftgate.
Front Fog Lamp Electrical Connector
482 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
2. Remove the two fasteners from the inboard side of the
tail lamp housing.
3. Carefully insert a trim stick (plastic flat-blade tool)
between the body panel and the outboard side of the tail
lamp housing with one hand and grasp the flange on the
inboard side of the tail lamp housing with the other
hand. Use the trim stick and hand pressure together to
disengage the tail lamp housing from the vehicle.
4. Rotate the applicable bulb’s electrical connector ¼ turn
counterclockwise and remove it from the tail lamp
housing.
5. Remove the bulb from the connector socket and install
the replacement bulb.
6. Install the bulb and connector assembly into the tail
lamp housing and rotate the connector ¼ turn clockwise
to lock it in place.
7. Reinstall the tail lamp housing and fasteners.
Changing The Backup Lamp
1. Open the liftgate.
2. Remove the two fasteners retaining the tail lamp hous-
ing to the liftgate from the inboard face of the liftgate.
Inboard Tail Lamp Housing Fasteners
Tail Lamp Housing Retainers
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 483
3. Carefully insert a trim stick (plastic flat-blade tool)
between the tail lamp housing and the liftgate. Use the
trim stick and hand pressure together to disengage the
tail lamp housing from the liftgate.
4. Rotate the applicable bulb’s electrical connector ¼ turn
counterclockwise and remove it from the housing.
5. Remove the bulb from the connector socket and install
the replacement bulb.
6. Install the bulb and connector assembly into the housing
and rotate the connector ¼ turn clockwise to lock it in
place.
7. Reinstall the tail lamp housing and fasteners.
License Plate Lamp
1. Push the small locking tab sticking out of the end of the
lens toward the side of the vehicle and hold it in that
position.
Tail Gate Lamp
License Lamp
484 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
2. Insert a small flat-blade tool between the end of the lens
with the locking tab and the surrounding housing and
then pivot the tool to separate the lens from the housing.
3. Hold the lens with one hand and rotate the bulb’s
electrical connector ¼ turn counterclockwise with the
other hand and then separate the bulb and connector
assembly from the lens.
4. Remove the bulb from the connector socket and install
the replacement bulb.
5. Install the bulb and connector assembly into the lens
and rotate the connector ¼ turn clockwise to lock it in
place.
6. Insert the end of the lens without the locking tab into the
housing on the liftgate and then push the opposite end
of the lens into the housing, making sure it locks in the
housing.
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 485
FLUID CAPACITIES
U.S. Metric
Fuel (Approximate)
Front Wheel Drive (FWD) Models 20.5 Gallons 77.6 Liters
All-Wheel Drive Models 21 Gallons 79.8 Liters
Engine Oil With Filter
2.4L Engine (SAE 5W-20, API Certified) 4.5 Quarts 4.26 Liters
3.6L Engine (SAE 5W-20, API Certified) 6 Quarts 5.6 Liters
Cooling System*
2.4L Engine and Single or Dual-Zone Climate Control System (Mopar
Antifreeze/Engine Coolant 10 Year/150,000 Mile Formula)
8 Quarts 7.5 Liters
2.4L Engine and Three-Zone Climate Control System (Mopar
Antifreeze/Engine Coolant 10 Year/150,000 Mile Formula)
10 Quarts 9.5 Liters
3.6L Engine and Single or Dual-Zone Climate Control System (Mopar
Antifreeze/Engine Coolant 10 Year/150,000 Mile Formula)
13.1 Quarts 12.4 Liters
3.6L Engine and Three-Zone Climate Control System (Mopar
Antifreeze/Engine Coolant 10 Year/150,000 Mile Formula)
14.5 Quarts 13.7 Liters
* Includes heater and coolant recovery bottle filled to MAX level.
486 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
FLUIDS, LUBRICANTS, AND GENUINE PARTS
Engine
Component Fluid, Lubricant, or Genuine Part
Engine Coolant We recommend you use Mopar Antifreeze/Coolant 10
Year/150,000 Mile Formula OAT (Organic Additive Tech-
nology).
Engine Oil We recommend you use API Certified SAE 5W-20 Engine
Oil, meeting the requirements of FCA Material Standard
MS-6395 such as Mopar, Pennzoil, and Shell Helix. Refer
to your engine oil filler cap for correct SAE grade.
Engine Oil Filter We recommend you use Mopar Engine Oil Filter.
Spark Plugs We recommend you use Mopar Spark Plugs.
Fuel Selection 87 Octane, 0-15% Ethanol.
Fuel Selection – 3.6L Flex Fuel (E-85) Engine –
If Equipped
87 Octane, Up To 85% Ethanol.
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 487
CAUTION!
• Mixing of engine coolant (antifreeze) other than
specified Organic Additive Technology (OAT) en-
gine coolant (antifreeze), may result in engine dam-
age and may decrease corrosion protection. Organic
Additive Technology (OAT) engine coolant is differ-
ent and should not be mixed with Hybrid Organic
Additive Technology (HOAT) engine coolant (anti-
freeze) or any “globally compatible” coolant (anti-
freeze). If a non-OAT engine coolant (antifreeze) is
introduced into the cooling system in an emergency,
the cooling system will need to be drained, flushed,
(Continued)
CAUTION! (Continued)
and refilled with fresh OAT coolant (conforming to
MS.90032), by an authorized dealer as soon as pos-
sible.
• Do not use water alone or alcohol-based engine
coolant (antifreeze) products. Do not use additional
rust inhibitors or antirust products, as they may not
be compatible with the radiator engine coolant and
may plug the radiator.
• This vehicle has not been designed for use with
propylene glycol-based engine coolant (antifreeze).
Use of propylene glycol-based engine coolant (anti-
freeze) is not recommended.
488 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Chassis
Component Fluid, Lubricant, or Genuine Part
Automatic Transmission Use only ATF+4 Automatic Transmission Fluid.
Failure to use ATF+4 fluid may affect the function or performance of your
transmission.
We recommend Mopar ATF+4 fluid.
Power Transfer Unit (PTU) We recommend you use Mopar Gear Lubricant 75W-90.
Rear Drive Assembly (RDA) We recommend you use Mopar Gear Lubricant 75W-90.
Brake Master Cylinder We recommend you use Mopar DOT 3, SAE J1703. If DOT 3 brake fluid is
not available, then DOT 4 is acceptable.
Power Steering Reservoir We recommend you use Mopar Power Steering Fluid + 4, or Mopar ATF+4
Automatic Transmission Fluid.
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 489
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE
Your vehicle is equipped with an automatic oil change
indicator system. The oil change indicator system will
remind you that it is time to take your vehicle in for
scheduled maintenance.
Based on engine operation conditions, the oil change
indicator message will illuminate. This means that service
is required for your vehicle. Operating conditions such as
frequent short-trips, trailer tow, extremely hot or cold
ambient temperatures, and E-85 fuel usage will influence
when the “Change Oil” or “Oil Change Required” message
is displayed. Severe Operating Conditions can cause the
change oil message to illuminate as early as 3,500 miles
(5,600 km) since last reset. Have your vehicle serviced as
soon as possible, within the next 500 miles (805 km).
Your authorized dealer will reset the oil change indicator
message after completing the scheduled oil change. If a
scheduled oil change is performed by someone other than
your authorized dealer, the message can be reset by
referring to the steps described under “Instrument Cluster
Display” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for
further information.
NOTE: Under no circumstances should oil change inter-
vals exceed 10,000 miles (16,000 km), twelve months or 350
hours of engine run time, whichever comes first. The 350
hours of engine run or idle time is generally only a concern
for fleet customers.
Severe Duty All Models
Change Engine Oil at 4,000 miles (6,500 km) if the vehicle
is operated in a dusty and off road environment or is
operated predominately at idle or only very low engine
RPM’s. This type of vehicle use is considered Severe Duty.
Once A Month Or Before A Long Trip:
• Check engine oil level.
• Check windshield washer fluid level.
• Check tire pressure and look for unusual wear or
damage. Rotate tires at the first sign of irregular wear,
even if it occurs before the oil indicator system turns on.
• Check the fluid levels of the coolant reservoir, brake
master cylinder, power steering, and transmission
(4-speed only) and fill as needed.
• Check function of all interior and exterior lights.
492 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
Maintenance Chart
Required Maintenance Intervals.
Refer to the Maintenance Schedules on the following page
for the required maintenance intervals.
At Every Oil Change Interval As Indicated By Oil
Change Indicator System:
• Change oil and filter.
• Rotate the tires. Rotate at the first sign of irregular
wear, even if it occurs before the oil indicator
system turns on.
• Inspect battery and clean and tighten terminals as
required.
• Inspect automatic transmission fluid if equipped
with dipstick.
• Inspect brake pads, shoes, rotors, drums, hoses and
park brake.
• Inspect engine cooling system protection and hoses.
• Inspect exhaust system.
• Inspect engine air cleaner if using in dusty or
off-road conditions.
8
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 493
Refer to the Maintenance Schedules on the following pages for the required maintenance intervals.
Mileage or time passed
(whichever comes first)
20,000
30,000
40,000
50,000
60,000
70,000
80,000
90,000
100,000
110,000
120,000
130,000
140,000
150,000
Or Years: 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
Or Kilometers:
32,000
48,000
64,000
80,000
96,000
112,000
128,000
144,000
160,000
176,000
192,000
208,000
224,000
240,000
Additional Inspections
Inspect the CV joints. X X X X X
Inspect front suspension, tie rod
ends, and replace if necessary.
XXX X X X X
Inspect the brake linings, parking
brake function.
XXX X X X X
Additional Maintenance
Replace engine air filter. X X X X X
Replace air conditioning filter. X X X X X X X
Replace spark plugs
(2.4L Engine). **
XX X X X
Replace spark plugs
(3.6L Engine). **
X
Flush and replace the engine cool-
ant at 10 years or 150,000 miles
(240,000 km) whichever comes
first.
XX
494 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
Mileage or time passed
(whichever comes first)
20,000
30,000
40,000
50,000
60,000
70,000
80,000
90,000
100,000
110,000
120,000
130,000
140,000
150,000
Or Years: 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
Or Kilometers:
32,000
48,000
64,000
80,000
96,000
112,000
128,000
144,000
160,000
176,000
192,000
208,000
224,000
240,000
Change the automatic transmis-
sion fluid and filter.
X
Change the automatic transmis-
sion fluid and filter if using your
vehicle for any of the following:
police, taxi, fleet, or frequent trailer
towing.
XX
Replace rear drive assembly
(RDA) fluid.
XX
Replace power transfer unit (PTU)
fluid.
XX
Inspect and replace PCV valve if
necessary.
X
** The spark plug change interval is mileage based only,
yearly intervals do not apply.
8
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 495
WARNING!
• You can be badly injured working on or around a
motor vehicle. Do only service work for which you
have the knowledge and the right equipment. If you
have any doubt about your ability to perform a
service job, take your vehicle to a competent me-
chanic.
• Failure to properly inspect and maintain your vehicle
could result in a component malfunction and effect
vehicle handling and performance. This could cause
an accident.
496 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
CONTENTS
䡵 SUGGESTIONS FOR OBTAINING SERVICE
FOR YOUR VEHICLE ....................498
▫ Prepare For The Appointment ..............498
▫ Prepare A List .........................498
▫ Be Reasonable With Requests ..............498
䡵 IF YOU NEED ASSISTANCE ................498
▫ FCA US LLC Customer Center .............499
▫ FCA Canada Inc. Customer Center...........499
▫ In Mexico Contact ......................499
▫ Puerto Rico And U.S. Virgin Islands..........499
▫ Customer Assistance For The Hearing Or
Speech Impaired (TDD/TTY) ..............500
▫ Service Contract .......................500
䡵 WARRANTY INFORMATION ...............501
䡵 MOPARPARTS .........................501
䡵 REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS .............501
▫ In The 50 United States And Washington, D.C. . .501
▫ In Canada ............................502
䡵 PUBLICATION ORDER FORMS .............502
9
SUGGESTIONS FOR OBTAINING SERVICE FOR
YOUR VEHICLE
Prepare For The Appointment
If you are having warranty work done, be sure to bring the
right papers with you, as well as your warranty folder. All
work to be performed may not be covered by the warranty.
Discuss additional charges with the service manager. Keep
a maintenance log of your vehicle’s service history, as this
can often provide a clue to the current problem.
Prepare A List
Make a written list of your vehicle’s problems or the
specific work you want done. If you’ve had an accident or
work done that is not on your maintenance log, let the
service advisor know.
Be Reasonable With Requests
If you list a number of items and you must have your
vehicle by the end of the day, discuss the situation with the
service advisor and list the items in order of priority. At
many authorized dealers, you may obtain a rental vehicle
at a minimal daily charge. If you need a rental, it is
advisable to make these arrangements when you call for an
appointment.
IF YOU NEED ASSISTANCE
The manufacturer and its authorized dealer are vitally
interested in your satisfaction. We want you to be happy
with our products and services.
Warranty service must be done by an authorized dealer. We
strongly recommend that you take the vehicle to an autho-
rized dealer. They know your vehicle the best, and are most
concerned that you get prompt and high quality service.
The manufacturer’s authorized dealer have the facilities,
factory-trained technicians, special tools, and the latest
information to ensure the vehicle is fixed correctly and in a
timely manner.
This is why you should always talk to an authorized dealer
service manager first. Most matters can be resolved with
this process.
• If for some reason you are still not satisfied, talk to the
general manager or owner of the authorized dealer.
They want to know if you need assistance.
• If an authorized dealer is unable to resolve the concern,
you may contact the manufacturer’s customer center.
498 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
Any communication to the manufacturer’s customer center
should include the following information:
• Owner’s name and address
• Owner’s telephone number (home and office)
• Authorized dealer name
• Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
• Vehicle delivery date and mileage
FCA US LLC Customer Center
P.O. Box 21–8004
Auburn Hills, MI 48321–8004
Phone: (800) 423-6343
FCA Canada Inc. Customer Center
P.O. Box 1621
Windsor, Ontario N9A 4H6
Phone: (800) 465-2001 English / (800) 387-9983 French
In Mexico Contact
Av. Prolongacion Paseo de la Reforma, 1240
Sante Fe C.P. 05109
Mexico, D. F.
In Mexico City: 5081-7568
Outside Mexico City: 1-800-505-1300
Puerto Rico And U.S. Virgin Islands
Customer Service Chrysler International Services LLC
P.O. Box 191857
San Juan 00919-1857
Tel.: (787) 782-5757
Fax: (787) 782-3345
9
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 499
Customer Assistance For The Hearing Or Speech
Impaired (TDD/TTY)
To assist customers who have hearing difficulties, the
manufacturer has installed special TDD (Telecommunica-
tion Devices for the Deaf) equipment at its customer center.
Any hearing or speech impaired customer, who has access
to a TDD or a conventional teletypewriter (TTY) in the
United States, can communicate with the manufacturer by
dialing 1-800-380-CHRY.
Canadian residents with hearing difficulties that require
assistance can use the special needs relay service offered by
Bell Canada. For TTY teletypewriter users, dial 711 and for
Voice callers, dial 1-800-855-0511 to connect with a Bell
Relay Service operator.
Service Contract
You may have purchased a service contract for a vehicle to
help protect you from the high cost of unexpected repairs
after the manufacturer’s New Vehicle Limited Warranty
expires. The manufacturer stands behind only the manu-
facturer’s service contracts. If you purchased a manufac-
turer’s service contract, you will receive Plan Provisions
and an Owner Identification Card in the mail within three
weeks of the vehicle delivery date. If you have any
questions about the service contract, call the manufactur-
er’s Service Contract National Customer Hotline at 1-800-
521-9922 (Canadian residents, call (800) 465-2001 English /
(800) 387-9983 French).
The manufacturer will not stand behind any service con-
tract that is not the manufacturer’s service contract. It is not
responsible for any service contract other than the manu-
facturer’s service contract. If you purchased a service
contract that is not a manufacturer’s service contract, and
you require service after the manufacturer’s New Vehicle
Limited Warranty expires, please refer to the contract
documents, and contact the person listed in those docu-
ments.
We appreciate that you have made a major investment
when you purchased the vehicle. An authorized dealer has
also made a major investment in facilities, tools, and
training to assure that you are absolutely delighted with
the ownership experience. You will be pleased with their
sincere efforts to resolve any warranty issues or related
concerns.
500 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
WARNING!
Engine exhaust (internal combustion engines only),
some of its constituents, and certain vehicle compo-
nents contain, or emit, chemicals known to the State of
California to cause cancer and birth defects, or other
reproductive harm. In addition, certain fluids con-
tained in vehicles and certain products of component
wear contain, or emit, chemicals known to the State of
California to cause cancer and birth defects, or other
reproductive harm.
WARRANTY INFORMATION
See the Warranty Information Booklet, for the terms and
provisions of FCA US LLC warranties applicable to this
vehicle and market.
MOPAR PARTS
Mopar fluids, lubricants, parts, and accessories are avail-
able from an authorized dealer. They are recommended for
your vehicle in order to help keep the vehicle operating at
its best.
REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS
In The 50 United States And Washington, D.C.
If you believe that your vehicle has a defect that could
cause a crash or cause injury or death, you should
immediately inform the National Highway Traffic
Safety Administration (NHTSA) in addition to notifying
FCA US LLC.
If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open an
investigation, and if it finds that a safety defect exists in
a group of vehicles, it may order a recall and remedy
campaign. However, NHTSA cannot become involved
in individual problems between you, your authorized
dealer or FCA US LLC.
To contact NHTSA, you may call the Vehicle Safety
Hotline toll free at 1-888-327-4236 (TTY: 1-800-424-9153);
or go to http://www.safercar.gov; or write to: Admin-
istrator, NHTSA, 1200 New Jersey Avenue, SE., West
Building, Washington, D.C. 20590. You can also obtain
other information about motor vehicle safety from
http://www.safercar.gov.
9
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 501
In Canada
If you believe that your vehicle has a safety defect, you
should contact the Customer Service Department imme-
diately. Canadian customers who wish to report a safety
defect to the Canadian government should contact
Transport Canada, Motor Vehicle Defect Investigations
and Recalls at 1-800-333-0510 or go to http://
www.tc.gc.ca/roadsafety/.
PUBLICATION ORDER FORMS
To order the following manuals, you may use either the
website or the phone numbers listed below. Visa, Master-
card, American Express, and Discover orders are accepted.
Service Manuals
These comprehensive Service Manuals provide the infor-
mation that students and professional technicians need in
diagnosing/troubleshooting, problem solving, maintain-
ing, servicing, and repairing FCA US LLC vehicles. A
complete working knowledge of the vehicle, system,
and/or components is written in straightforward language
with illustrations, diagrams, and charts.
Diagnostic Procedure Manuals
Diagnostic Procedure Manuals are filled with diagrams,
charts and detailed illustrations. These practical manuals
make it easy for students and technicians to find and fix
problems on computer-controlled vehicle systems and fea-
tures. They show exactly how to find and correct problems
the first time, using step-by-step troubleshooting and driv-
ability procedures, proven diagnostic tests, and a complete
list of all tools and equipment.
Owner’s Manuals
These Owner’s Manuals have been prepared with the
assistance of service and engineering specialists to acquaint
you with specific FCA US LLC vehicles. Included are
starting, operating, emergency and maintenance proce-
dures as well as specifications, capabilities and safety tips.
Call toll free at:
• 1-800-890-4038 (U.S.)
• 1-800-387-1143 (Canada)
Or
Visit us on the Worldwide Web at:
• www.techauthority.com
502 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
INDEX
10
About Your Brakes ......................351, 353
Adding Engine Coolant (Antifreeze) .............458
Adding Fuel ..............................399
Adding Washer Fluid........................455
Additives, Fuel ............................395
Adjust
Down .................................156
Forward ...............................156
Rearward ..............................156
Up...................................156
AirBag..................................49
Air Bag Operation .........................51
Air Bag Warning Light .....................48
Driver Knee Air Bag .......................52
Enhanced Accident Response ..............58, 437
Event Data Recorder (EDR) .................437
If A Deployment Occurs ....................56
Knee Impact Bolsters .......................52
Maintaining Your Air Bag System ..............58
Side Air Bags ............................52
Transporting Pets .........................82
Air Bag Light ........................48, 84, 236
Air Bag Maintenance .........................58
Air Cleaner, Engine (Engine Air Cleaner Filter)......449
Air Conditioner Maintenance ..................450
Air Conditioning Filter.......................451
Air Conditioning, Operating Tips ............328, 330
Air Conditioning, Rear Zone ...............314, 324
Air Conditioning Refrigerant ...............450, 451
Air Conditioning System .....................450
Air Pressure, Tires ..........................375
Alarm, Panic...............................17
Alarm (Security Alarm)....................13, 238
Alarm System (Security Alarm) .................13
All Wheel Drive (AWD) ......................347
Alterations/Modifications, Vehicle ................6
Antifreeze (Engine Coolant) ................458, 486
Disposal ...............................460
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) .................354
Anti-Lock Warning Light .....................247
Appearance
Care...........................466
Arming System (Security Alarm) ................13
Assist, Hill Start ...........................356
Auto Down Power Windows ...................31
Automatic Dimming Mirror ....................91
Automatic Door Locks........................24
Automatic Headlights .......................175
Automatic Oil Change Indicator ................253
Automatic Transmission ..................339, 463
Adding Fluid .....................464, 465, 489
504 INDEX
Fluid And Filter Changes ...................466
Fluid Level Check .....................464, 465
Fluid Type .............................489
Gear Ranges ............................341
Special Additives .........................463
Autostick ................................346
Auto Unlock, Doors .........................24
Auxiliary Electrical Outlet (Power Outlet) .........208
Auxiliary Power Outlet ......................208
Back-Up Lights ............................482
Battery...............................240, 449
Charging System Light ....................240
Keyless Key Fob Replacement ................18
Location ...............................449
Belts, Seat.................................84
Bluetooth
Connecting To A Particular Mobile Phone
Or Audio Device After Pairing ...............120
Connect Or Disconnect Link Between the
Uconnect Phone And Mobile Phone ........109, 131
Pair (Link) Uconnect Phone To A Mobile
Phone ..............................99, 117
Body Mechanism Lubrication ..................453
B-Pillar Location ...........................369
Brake Assist System.........................356
Brake Control System, Electronic................354
Brake Fluid ...............................489
Brake, Parking.............................351
Brakes ..................................353
Brake System ..........................353, 462
Fluid Check .........................462, 489
Master Cylinder .........................462
Parking ...............................351
Warning Light ...........................237
Brake/Transmission Interlock ..................340
Brightness, Interior Lights ....................179
Bulb Replacement .......................479, 480
Bulbs, Light ............................86, 479
Camera, Rear .............................194
Capacities,
Fluid ...........................486
Caps, Filler
Fuel ..................................399
Oil (Engine) .........................441, 447
Power Steering ..........................351
Radiator (Coolant Pressure) .................460
Carbon Monoxide Warning .................83, 396
Cargo Area Cover ..........................221
Cargo Area Features ........................219
10
INDEX 505
Cargo Compartment ........................219
Luggage Carrier .........................225
Cargo Load Floor ..........................219
Cargo Management System ...................219
Rollaway Tonneau Cover ...................221
Tri-Fold Load Floor .......................219
Cargo Tie-Downs...........................220
Cargo (Vehicle Loading) ..................219, 400
Car Washes...............................467
Certification Label ..........................400
Chains, Tire ..............................383
Changing A Flat Tire ........................419
Chart, Tire Sizing...........................365
Check Engine Light (Malfunction Indicator Light). . . .444
Checking Your Vehicle For Safety ................83
Checks, Safety .............................83
Child Restraint .............................60
Child Restraints
Booster Seats ............................67
Child Restraints ..........................60
Child Seat Installation ......................77
How To Stow An Unused ALR Seat Belt .........74
Infants And Child Restraints .................62
Locating The LATCH Anchorages ..............71
Lower Anchors And Tethers For Children ........69
Older Children And Child Restraints ...........63
Seating Positions ..........................68
Using The Top Tether Anchorage ..............80
Child Safety Locks ..........................24
Clean Air Gasoline .........................393
Cleaning
Wheels ................................468
Coin Holder ..............................215
Cold Weather Operation......................337
Compact Disc (CD) Maintenance................305
Compact Spare Tire .........................378
Computer, Trip/Travel .......................255
Connector
UCI ..................................303
Universal Consumer Interface (UCI) ...........303
Conserving Fuel ...........................254
Console, Floor .............................215
Console,
Overhead .........................196
Contract, Service ...........................500
Coolant Pressure Cap (Radiator Cap).............460
Cooling System ............................457
Adding Coolant (Antifreeze) .................458
Coolant Capacity .........................486
Coolant Level ........................457, 460
Disposal Of Used Coolant ..................460
506 INDEX
Drain, Flush, And Refill ....................457
Inspection ..............................460
Points To Remember ......................461
Pressure Cap ............................460
Radiator Cap ...........................460
Selection Of Coolant (Antifreeze) .......458, 486, 487
Corrosion Protection ........................466
Cruise Light ..............................250
Cupholders ...........................213, 472
Customer Assistance ........................498
Daytime Brightness, Interior Lights ..............179
Daytime Running Lights .....................176
Dealer Service .............................445
Defroster, Rear Window ......................224
Defroster, Windshield ........................85
Delay (Intermittent) Wipers ...................180
Diagnostic System, Onboard...................443
Dimmer Switch, Headlight ....................178
Dipsticks
Automatic Transmission ................464, 465
Oil (Engine) ............................446
Power Steering ..........................351
Disabled Vehicle Towing .....................435
Disposal
Antifreeze (Engine Coolant) .................460
Door Ajar ................................242
Door Ajar Light............................242
Door Locks
Door Locks ..............................22
KeyFob................................22
Remote ................................22
Remote Keyless Entry ......................22
Door Locks, Automatic .......................24
Door Opener, Garage ........................198
Driving
Through Flowing, Rising, Or Shallow
Standing Water ..........................349
Driving To Achieve Maximum Fuel Economy.......254
DVD Player (Video Entertainment System).........286
E-85 Fuel ................................396
Electrical Outlet, Auxiliary (Power Outlet) .........208
Electrical
Power Outlets ......................208
Electric Remote Mirrors .......................93
Electronic Brake Control System ................354
Anti-Lock Brake System ....................354
Traction Control System ....................359
Electronic Speed Control (Cruise Control) .........184
10
INDEX 507
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) ...............359
Electronic Throttle Control Warning Light .........241
Emergency, In Case Of
Freeing Vehicle When Stuck .................432
Hazard Warning Flasher ...................416
Jacking ................................419
Jump Starting ...........................429
Overheating ............................416
Towing ................................435
Emission Control System Maintenance............444
Engine ..................................441
Air Cleaner .............................449
Block Heater ............................338
Break-In Recommendations ..................82
Checking Oil Level .......................446
Compartment ........................441, 442
Compartment Identification .................442
Coolant (Antifreeze) ...................457, 487
Cooling ...............................457
Exhaust Gas Caution ...................83, 396
Fails To Start ............................337
Flooded, Starting .........................337
Fuel Requirements ........................393
Jump Starting ...........................429
Oil ............................446, 486, 487
Oil Change Interval .......................253
Oil Filler Cap ........................441, 447
Oil Filter ...............................449
Oil Selection .........................447, 486
Oil Synthetic ............................448
Overheating ............................416
Starting ...............................335
Engine Oil Viscosity .....................447, 448
Engine Oil Viscosity Chart ....................448
Enhanced Accident Response Feature ..........58, 437
Entry System, Illuminated .....................
15
Ethanol ..............................393, 396
Exhaust Gas Caution .....................83, 396
Exhaust System .........................83, 455
Exterior Folding Mirrors ......................94
Exterior Lighting ...........................174
Exterior Lights .............................86
Filler Location Fuel .........................399
Filters
Air Cleaner .............................449
Air Conditioning .........................451
Engine Oil ..........................449, 487
Engine Oil Disposal .......................448
508 INDEX
Flashers
Hazard Warning .........................416
Turn Signal .......................86, 178, 249
Flash-To-Pass .............................178
Flexible Fuel Vehicles
Cruising Range ..........................398
Engine Oil .............................397
Fuel Requirements ....................396, 397
Maintenance ............................398
Replacement Parts ........................398
Starting ...............................398
Flooded Engine Starting ......................337
Floor Console .............................215
Fluid, Brake ..............................489
Fluid Capacities............................486
Fluid Leaks ...............................86
Fluid Level Checks
Automatic Transmission ................464, 465
Brake ..............................462, 489
Cooling System ..........................457
Engine Oil .............................446
Power Steering .......................351, 489
Fluids, Lubricants And Genuine Parts ............487
Fog Lights ............................177, 482
Fog Light Service...........................482
Folding Rear Seat .......................165, 171
Freeing A Stuck Vehicle ......................432
Fuel ....................................393
Adding ...............................399
Additives ..............................395
Clean Air ..............................393
Conserving .............................254
Ethanol ............................393, 396
Filler Cap (Gas Cap) ......................399
Gasoline ...............................393
Light .................................248
Materials Added .........................395
Methanol ..............................393
Octane
Rating ........................393, 487
Requirements ...........................393
Saver Mode ............................254
Specifications ...........................487
Tank Capacity ...........................486
Fuel, Flexible..............................396
Fueling..................................399
Fuel Optimizer ............................254
Fuel Saver................................254
Fuses ...................................472
Garage Door Opener (HomeLink)............198, 203
10
INDEX 509
Gas Cap (Fuel Filler Cap) .................399, 444
Gasoline, Clean Air .........................393
Gasoline (Fuel)
Conserving .............................254
Gasoline, Reformulated ......................393
Gear Ranges ..............................341
Gear Select Lever Override....................434
General Information.........................113
Glass Cleaning ............................471
Gross Axle Weight Rating .................401, 402
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating ...............401, 402
GVWR ..................................401
Hazard
Driving Through Flowing, Rising, Or
Shallow Standing Water ....................349
Hazard Warning Flasher......................416
Headlights
Automatic .............................175
Bulb Replacement ........................480
Cleaning ...............................471
Delay .................................176
High Beam .............................480
High Beam/Low Beam Select Switch ...........178
Lights On Reminder ......................176
On With Wipers ......................175, 182
Passing ................................178
Switch ................................174
Time Delay .............................176
Head Restraints............................161
Heated Mirrors .............................95
Heater, Engine Block ........................338
High Beam/Low Beam Select (Dimmer) Switch .....178
Hill Start Assist ............................356
Hitches
Trailer Towing ...........................404
Holder, Coin ..............................215
Holder, Cup ..............................213
HomeLink (Garage Door Opener) ...............198
Hood Release .............................173
Ignition
K
ey....................................9
Illuminated Entry ...........................15
Immobilizer (Sentry Key) ......................11
Inside Rearview Mirror .......................91
Instrument Cluster ......................239, 249
Instrument Cluster Display
Instrument Cluster Display ..................251
Instrument Panel And Controls.................232
510 INDEX
Instrument Panel Lens Cleaning ................472
Interior Appearance Care .....................470
Interior Fuses .............................473
Interior Lights .............................178
Intermittent Wipers (Delay Wipers) ..............180
Introduction ................................4
Inverter, Power ............................211
iPod/USB/MP3 Control......................303
Bluetooth Streaming Audio ..................119
Jacking Instructions .........................422
Jack Location .............................419
Jack Operation .........................419, 422
Jump Starting .............................429
Key Fob
Panic Alarm .............................17
Programming Additional Key Fobs ..........13, 17
Unlock The Doors .........................16
Unlock The Liftgate ........................16
Key Fob Battery Service (Remote Keyless Entry) .....18
Key Fob Programming (Remote Keyless Entry) . . . .16, 17
Key Fob, Remote Keyless Entry .................16
Key-In Reminder............................10
Keyless Enter-N-Go ......................27, 336
Keyless Entry System ........................16
Keyless Go.................................9
Key, Replacement ...........................12
Keys .....................................9
Key, Sentry (Immobilizer)......................11
Lane Change And Turn Signals.................178
Lane Change Assist .........................178
Lap/Shoulder Belts ..........................37
Latches ..................................86
Hood .................................173
Lead Free Gasoline .........................393
Leaks, Fluid ...............................86
Life Of Tires ..............................382
Liftgate ..................................33
Liftgate Window Wiper/Washer ................223
Light Bulbs ............................86, 479
Lights ................................86, 174
AirBag ..........................48, 84, 236
Automatic Headlights .....................175
Back-Up ...............................482
Brake
Assist Warning ......................361
Brake Warning ..........................237
Bulb Replacement ........................480
Courtesy/Reading ........................179
10
INDEX 511
Cruise ................................250
Daytime Running ........................176
Dimmer Switch, Headlight ..............177, 178
Engine Temperature Warning ................239
Exterior ................................86
Fog ...............................177, 482
Hazard Warning Flasher ...................416
Headlights ..........................174, 480
Headlights On Reminder ...................176
Headlights On With Wipers ..............175, 182
Headlight Switch .........................174
High Beam ..........................178, 480
High Beam/Low Beam Select ................178
Illuminated Entry .........................15
Instrument Cluster .......................174
Intensity Control .........................179
Interior ................................178
License ................................484
Lights On Reminder ......................176
Low Fuel ..............................248
Malfunction Indicator (Check Engine) ..........243
Map Reading ...........................179
Parade Mode (Daytime Brightness) ............179
Park ..............................248, 480
Passing ................................178
Reading ...............................179
Rear Servicing ...........................482
Rear Tail Lamps .........................482
Seat Belt Reminder .......................235
Security Alarm ..........................238
Service .............................479, 480
Side Marker ............................480
Tire Pressure Monitoring (TPMS) ..........245, 386
Traction Control .........................361
Turn Signal .............86, 177, 178, 249, 480, 482
V
anity Mirror ............................95
Warning (Instrument Cluster Description) . . . .239, 249
Load Floor, Cargo ..........................219
Loading Vehicle ........................400, 401
Capacities ..............................401
Tires..................................369
Load Shed
Battery Saver Mode .......................257
Battery Saver On .........................257
Electrical Load Reduction ...................257
Intelligent Battery Sensor ...................257
Locks....................................22
Automatic Door ..........................24
Auto Unlock .............................24
Child Protection ..........................24
512 INDEX
Door ..................................22
Power Door .............................23
Low Tire Pressure System.....................386
Lubrication, Body ..........................453
Luggage Rack (Roof Rack) ....................225
Lug Nuts ................................417
Maintenance Free Battery .....................449
Maintenance Procedures......................446
Malfunction Indicator Light (Check Engine) . . . .243, 444
Manual, Service............................502
Manual Transaxle
Fluid Level Check ........................466
Map/Reading Lights ........................179
Marker Lights, Side .........................480
Master Cylinder (Brakes) .....................462
Methanol ................................393
Mini-Trip Computer.........................255
Mirrors ...............................91, 197
Automatic Dimming .......................91
Electric Powered ..........................93
Electric Remote ...........................93
Exterior Folding ..........................94
Heated .................................95
Outside ................................92
Rearview ...............................91
Vanity .................................95
Mode
Fuel Saver .............................254
Modifications/Alterations, Vehicle ................6
Monitor, Tire Pressure System..................386
Mopar Parts ...........................445, 501
MTBE/ETBE ..............................393
Multi-Function Control Lever ..................177
New Vehicle Break-In Period ...................82
Occupant Restraints .........................34
Octane Rating, Gasoline (Fuel) ..............393, 487
Oil Change Indicator ........................253
Oil Change Indicator, Reset ...................253
Oil, Engine............................446, 487
Capacity ...............................486
Change
Interval ......................253, 447
Checking ..............................446
Dipstick ...............................446
Disposal ...............................448
Filter ..............................449, 487
Filter Disposal ...........................448
Identification Logo .......................447
10
INDEX 513
Materials Added To .......................448
Pressure Warning Light ....................240
Recommendation .....................447, 486
Synthetic ..............................448
Viscosity ........................447, 448, 486
Oil Filter, Change ..........................449
Oil Filter, Selection..........................449
Oil Pressure Light ..........................240
Onboard Diagnostic System ...................443
Opener, Garage Door (HomeLink)...............198
Operating Precautions .......................443
Operator Manual (Owner’s Manual) ...............4
Outside Rearview Mirrors .....................92
Overhead Console ..........................196
Overheating, Engine ........................416
Owner’s Manual (Operator Manual) ...........4,502
Paint Care................................466
Panic Alarm ...............................17
Parking Brake .............................351
ParkSense System, Rear ......................188
Passenger Seat Back Tilt (Easy Entry System) .......169
Passing Light .............................178
Pets .....................................82
Phone (Pairing) ............................119
Phone (Uconnect) ........................96, 113
Placard, Tire And Loading Information ........369, 370
Power
Brakes ................................353
Distribution Center (Fuses) ..................475
Door Locks ..............................23
Inverter ...............................211
Mirrors ................................93
Outlet (Auxiliary Electrical Outlet) ............208
Seats .................................156
Steering ............................350, 351
Sunroof ...............................205
Transfer Unit ............................466
Windows ...............................30
Power
Seats
Down .................................156
Forward ...............................156
Rearward ..............................156
Up...................................156
Power Steering Fluid ........................489
Power Transfer Unit .....................466, 489
Pregnant Women And Seat Belts.................43
Preparation For Jacking ......................420
Pretensioners
Seat Belts ...............................43
514 INDEX
Programming Key Fobs (Remote Keyless Entry)......16
Radial Ply Tires ............................376
Radiator Cap (Coolant Pressure Cap).............460
Radio Frequency
General Information ................11,19,22,30
Radio Operation ...........................305
Radio Remote Controls ......................303
Rear Air Conditioning ....................314, 324
Rear Axle (Differential) ......................466
Rear Camera ..............................194
Rear Cupholder............................213
Rear Drive Assembly ........................466
Rear Liftgate...............................33
Rear ParkSense System ......................188
Rear Seat, Folding.......................165, 171
Rear Window Defroster ......................224
Rear Window Features .......................223
Rear Wiper/Washer .........................223
Reclining Front Seats ........................159
Reclining Rear Seats .....................168, 171
Recreational Towing.........................412
Reformulated Gasoline.......................393
Refrigerant ...............................451
Release, Hood .............................173
Reminder, Lights On ........................176
Reminder, Seat Belt ..........................36
Remote Control
Starting System ...........................19
Remote Keyless Entry ........................16
Flash Lights With Lock .....................16
Panic Alarm .............................17
Programming Additional Key Fobs ..........13, 17
Remote Sound System (Radio) Controls...........303
Remote Starting
Exit Remote Start Mode .....................21
To Exit Remote Start Mode And
Drive The Vehicle .........................21
Remote Starting System .......................19
Replacement Bulbs .........................479
Replacement Keys ...........................12
Replacement Parts ..........................445
Replacement
Tires ..........................382
Reporting Safety Defects .....................501
Resetting Oil Change Indicator .................253
Restraint, Head ............................161
Restraints, Child ............................60
Retractable Cargo Area Cover ..................221
Reverse Lights.............................482
Rocking Vehicle When Stuck...................432
10
INDEX 515
Roof Rack (Luggage Rack) ....................225
Rotation, Tires.............................384
Safety Checks Inside Vehicle ...................84
Safety Checks Outside Vehicle ..................86
Safety Defects, Reporting .....................501
Safety, Exhaust Gas ..........................83
Safety Information, Tire ......................363
Safety Tips ................................83
Seat Belt
Adjustable Upper Shoulder Belt Anchorage .......41
Lap/Shoulder Belt Operation .................39
Lap/Shoulder Belts ........................37
Lap/Shoulder Belt Untwisting ................41
Pregnant Women .........................43
Seat Belt Extender .........................42
Seat Belt Pretensioner ......................43
Seat Belt Reminder ........................36
Seat Belt Maintenance .......................472
Seat Belt Reminder ..........................36
Seat Belts ..............................35, 84
Adjustable Shoulder Belt ....................41
Adjustable Upper Shoulder Anchorage ..........41
Child Restraint ...........................60
Extender ...............................42
Front Seat .........................35, 37, 39
Inspection ..............................84
Operating Instructions ......................39
Pregnant Women .........................43
Pretensioners ............................43
Rear Seat ...............................37
Reminder ..............................235
Untwisting Procedure ......................41
Seats .............................155, 156, 157
Adjustment .........................155, 156
Easy Entry .............................169
Heated ................................157
Height Adjustment ....................156, 160
Power ................................156
Rear Folding ........................165, 171
Reclining ..............................159
Reclining Rear .......................168, 171
Seatback Release ..................161, 165, 171
Tilting ................................156
Security
Alarm ..........................13, 238
Selection Of Coolant (Antifreeze) ...............487
Sentry Key
Key Programming .........................13
Sentry Key (Immobilizer) ......................11
Sentry Key Replacement ......................12
516 INDEX
Service Assistance ..........................498
Service Contract ...........................500
Service Manuals ...........................502
Shift Lever Override ........................434
Shoulder Belts .............................37
Side View Mirror Adjustment...................92
Signals, Turn.....................86, 178, 249, 482
Snow Chains (Tire Chains) ....................383
Snow Tires ...............................377
Spare Tire .........................378, 380, 419
Spark Plugs ..............................487
Specifications
Fuel (Gasoline) ..........................487
Oil...................................487
Speed Control
Accel/Decel ............................187
Resume ...............................186
Speed Control (Cruise Control) .................184
Starting ...............................19, 335
Automatic Transmission ....................335
Cold Weather ...........................337
Engine Fails To Start ......................337
Remote ................................19
Starting And Operating ......................335
Starting Procedures .........................335
Steering
Column Controls .........................177
Column Lock ...........................183
Power .............................350, 351
Tilt Column ............................183
Wheel, Heated ..........................183
Wheel, Tilt .............................183
Steering Wheel Audio Controls .............303, 304
Steering Wheel Mounted Sound System Controls . . . .303
Storage, Vehicle ............................328
Stuck, Freeing .............................432
Sunglasses Storage..........................197
Sun Roof ................................205
Sun
Visor Extension .........................95
Supplemental Restraint System - Air Bag...........49
Sway Control, Trailer ........................403
Synthetic Engine Oil ........................448
System, Remote Starting ......................19
Taillights.................................482
Telescoping Steering Column ..................183
Tie Down Hooks, Cargo......................220
Tilt Steering Column ........................183
Time Delay, Headlight .......................176
Tire And Loading Information Placard ........369, 370
10
INDEX 517
Tire Markings .............................363
Tires...........................86, 374, 378, 385
Aging (Life Of Tires) ......................382
Air Pressure .........................369, 374
Chains ................................383
Changing ..............................419
Compact Spare ..........................378
General Information ...................374, 378
High Speed .............................375
Inflation Pressures ........................375
Jacking ................................419
Life Of Tires ............................382
Load Capacity .......................369, 371
Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) .............386
Pressure Warning Light ....................245
Quality Grading .........................385
Radial ................................376
Replacement ............................382
Rotation ...............................384
Safety .............................363, 374
Sizes .................................365
Snow Tires .............................377
Spare Tire .......................378, 380, 419
Spinning ...............................380
Trailer Towing ...........................408
Tread Wear Indicators .....................381
Tire Safety Information.......................363
Tongue Weight/Trailer Weight .................406
To Open Hood ............................173
Towing ..................................402
Behind A Motorhome ......................412
Disabled Vehicle .........................435
Guide .................................405
Recreational ............................412
Weight ................................405
T
owing Vehicle Behind A Motorhome ............412
Traction .................................348
Traction Control ...........................359
Trailer Towing.............................402
Cooling System Tips ......................412
Hitches ................................404
Minimum Requirements ....................407
Tips ..................................411
Trailer And Tongue Weight ..................406
Wiring ................................409
Trailer Towing Guide ........................405
Trailer Weight .............................405
Transaxle
Autostick ..............................346
518 INDEX
Transmission
Automatic ..........................339, 463
Filter .................................466
Fluid ..............................463, 466
Transmitter, Garage Door Opener (HomeLink) ......198
Transporting Pets ...........................82
Tread Wear Indicators .......................381
Turn Signals........................178, 249, 482
UCI Connector ............................303
Uconnect
Advanced Phone Connectivity ............109, 131
Operation ...........................98, 116
Phone Call Features ...................103, 124
Phone Features .......................106, 128
Screen Activated Features ................16, 261
Things You Should Know About Your
Uconnect Phone ......................109, 132
Uconnect Settings .......................17, 21
Uconnect Phone..............96, 98, 99, 113, 116, 117
Answer Or Ignore An Incoming Call —
No Call Currently In Progress ................126
Bluetooth Communication Link ..............137
Call By Saying A Phonebook Name ........103, 125
Call Continuation ........................128
Call Controls ........................103, 125
Cancel Command ......................99, 117
Connecting To A Particular Mobile Phone
Or Audio Device After Pairing ...............120
Connect Or Disconnect Link Between The
Uconnect Phone And Mobile Phone ...........131
Far End Audio Performance .................133
Help Command .......................99, 117
Join Calls ...........................105, 127
Making A Second Call While Current Call
IsInProgress ...........................127
Natural Speech ........................98, 116
Place/Retrieve A Call From Hold .............127
Power-Up ..............................137
Redial ................................128
Toggling Between Calls ....................127
Transfer Call To And From Mobile Phone . . . .109, 131
Voice Command .........................132
W
ays To Initiate A Phone Call ................124
Uconnect Settings.........................16, 17
Uconnect Voice Command ....................143
Underhood Fuses ..........................475
Uniform Tire Quality Grades ..................385
Universal Consumer Interface (UCI) Connector .....303
Universal Transmitter........................198
10
INDEX 519
Unleaded Gasoline .........................393
Untwisting Procedure, Seat Belt .................41
Vanity Mirrors .............................95
Vehicle Certification Label ....................400
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)...............6
Vehicle Loading .....................371, 400, 401
Vehicle Modifications/Alterations.................6
Vehicle Security Alarm (Security Alarm) ...........13
Vehicle Storage ............................328
Viscosity, Engine Oil .....................447, 448
Voice Command ...........................143
Warning Flasher, Hazard .....................416
Warnings And Cautions .......................5
Warranty Information .......................501
Washer
Adding Fluid ...........................455
Washers, Windshield .................180, 182, 455
Washing Vehicle ...........................467
Water
Driving Through .........................349
Wheel And Wheel Trim ......................468
Wheel And Wheel Trim Care ..................468
Wind Buffeting..........................33, 207
Window Fogging...........................329
Windows .................................30
Power .................................30
Wind Buffeting ...........................33
Windshield Defroster.........................85
Windshield Washers .....................180, 182
Fluid .................................455
Windshield Wiper Blades .....................453
Windshield Wipers .........................180
Wiper Blade Replacement.....................453
Wiper, Delay ..............................180
Wiper, Rear...............................223
Wipers, Intermittent.........................180
Wrecker Towing ...........................435
520 INDEX
INSTALLATION OF RADIO TRANSMITTING
EQUIPMENT
Special design considerations are incorporated into this
vehicle’s electronic system to provide immunity to radio
frequency signals. Mobile two-way radios and telephone
equipment must be installed properly by trained person-
nel. The following must be observed during installation.
The positive power connection should be made directly
to the battery and fused as close to the battery as possible.
The negative power connection should be made to body
sheet metal adjacent to the negative battery connection.
This connection should not be fused.
Antennas for two-way radios should be mounted on the
roof or the rear area of the vehicle. Care should be used
in mounting antennas with magnet bases. Magnets may
affect the accuracy or operation of the compass on
vehicles so equipped.
The antenna cable should be as short as practical and
routed away from the vehicle wiring when possible. Use
only fully shielded coaxial cable.
Carefully match the antenna and cable to the radio to
ensure a low Standing Wave Ratio (SWR).
Mobile radio equipment with output power greater than
normal may require special precautions.
All installations should be checked for possible interfer-
ence between the communications equipment and the
vehicle’s electronic systems.
Journey
OWNER’S MANUAL
2017 Journey
Fourth Edition
Printed in U.S.A.
17JC49-126-AD
©2016 FCA US LLC. All Rights Reserved.
Dodge is a registered trademark of FCA US LLC.
2017
STICK WITH THE SPECIALISTS
®
